Enquiries touching the diuersity of languages, and religions through the cheife parts of the world. Written by Edw. Brerewood lately professor of astronomy in Gresham Colledge in London
         Brerewood, Edward, 1565?-1613.
      
       
         
           1614
        
      
       Approx. 417 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 112 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2003-05 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A16718
         STC 3618
         ESTC S106411
         99842127
         99842127
         6757
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A16718)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 6757)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 1021:03)
      
       
         
           
             Enquiries touching the diuersity of languages, and religions through the cheife parts of the world. Written by Edw. Brerewood lately professor of astronomy in Gresham Colledge in London
             Brerewood, Edward, 1565?-1613.
             Brerewood, Robert, Sir, 1588-1654.
          
           [24], 198, [2] p.
           
             Printed [at Eliot's Court Press] for Iohn Bill,
             London :
             1614.
          
           
             Editor's dedication signed: Rob. Brerevvood.
             Printer's name from STC.
             Leaf R4 is a cancel.
             The last leaf is blank.
             Reproduction of the original in the Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Language and languages -- Early works to 1800.
           Religion -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2003-01 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2003-02 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2003-03 Olivia Bottum
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2003-03 Olivia Bottum
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2003-04 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           ENQVIRIES
           TOVCHING
           THE
           DIVERSITY
           of
           LANGVAGES
           ,
           and
           RELIGIONS
           through
           the
           cheife
           parts
           of
           the
           world
           .
        
         
           WRITTEN
           By
           
             Edw.
             Brerewood
          
           lately
           professor
           of
           Astronomy
           in
           
             Gresham
             Colledge
          
           in
           LONDON
           .
        
         
           LONDON
           Printed
           for
           IOHN
           BILL
           .
           1614.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           The
           CONTENTES
           of
           the
           CHAPTERS
           in
           this
           booke
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             
          
           
             PAGE
             .
          
           
             1
             Of
             the
             ancient
             largenesse
             of
             the
             Greeke
             tongue
             .
          
           
             1.
             
          
           
             2
             Of
             the
             Decaying
             of
             the
             antient
             Greeke
             tongue
             ,
             &
             of
             the
             present
             vulgar
             Greeke
             .
          
           
             8.
             
          
           
             3
             Of
             the
             ancient
             largenesse
             of
             the
             Roman
             tongue
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
          
           
             13.
             
          
           
             4
             That
             the
             Roman
             tongue
             abolished
             not
             the
             vulgar
             languages
             ,
             in
             the
             foraine
             prouinces
             of
             the
             Romaine
             Empire
             .
          
           
             20.
             
          
           
             5
             Of
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Italian
             ,
             French
             and
             Spanish
             languages
             .
          
           
             30.
             
          
           
             6
             Obiections
             touching
             the
             extent
             of
             the
             Latine
             tongue
             and
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             mentioned
             Languages
             with
             their
             solutions
             ,
          
           
             39.
             
          
           
             7
             Of
             the
             antient
             languages
             of
             
               Italie
               ,
               Spaine
               ,
               Fraunce
            
             and
             Afrique
             .
          
           
             45.
             
          
           
             8
             Of
             the
             largenesse
             of
             the
             
               Slauonish
               ,
               Turkish
            
             ,
             and
             Arabique
             languages
             .
          
           
             58.
             
          
           
             9
             Of
             the
             Syriaque
             and
             Hebrew
             tongues
             .
          
           
             62.
             
          
           
             10
             Of
             the
             sundry
             parts
             of
             the
             World
             inhabited
             by
             Christians
             .
          
           
             66.
             
          
           
             11
             Of
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             World
             possessed
             by
             Mahumetans
             .
          
           
             79.
             
          
           
             12
             Of
             the
             sundry
             regions
             of
             the
             World
             inhabited
             by
             Idolaters
             .
          
           
             86.
             
          
           
             13
             Of
             the
             Iewes
             dispersed
             in
             seuerall
             parts
             of
             the
             World.
             
          
           
             92.
             
          
           
             
             14
             Of
             the
             Quantitie
             and
             proportion
             of
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             possessed
             by
             the
             seuerall
             sorts
             of
             the
             aboue
             mentioned
             religions
             .
          
           
             118.
             
          
           
             15
             Of
             the
             diuerse
             sorts
             or
             sects
             of
             Christians
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             seuerall
             Regions
             .
             And
             first
             of
             the
             Grecians
             .
          
           
             124.
             
          
           
             16
             Of
             the
             Syrians
             ,
             or
             Melchites
             .
          
           
             129.
             
          
           
             17
             Of
             the
             
               Georgians
               ,
               Circassians
            
             and
             Mengrellians
             .
          
           
             134.
             
          
           
             18
             Of
             the
             Muscouites
             and
             Russians
             .
          
           
             136.
             
          
           
             19
             Of
             the
             Nestorians
             .
          
           
             139.
             
          
           
             20
             Of
             the
             Indians
             or
             Christians
             of
             
               S
               
               t.
               Tho.
            
             
          
           
             144.
             
          
           
             21
             Of
             the
             Iacobites
             .
          
           
             151.
             
          
           
             22
             Of
             the
             Copthi
             or
             Christians
             of
             Aegypt
             .
          
           
             155.
             
          
           
             23
             Of
             the
             Habassines
             .
          
           
             163.
             
          
           
             24
             Of
             the
             Armenians
             .
          
           
             170.
             
          
           
             25
             Of
             the
             Maronites
             .
          
           
             175.
             
          
           
             26
             Of
             the
             seuerall
             Languages
             wherin
             the
             Liturgies
             of
             Christians
             in
             seuerall
             parts
             of
             the
             World
             are
             celebrated
             .
          
           
             184.
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           TO
           THE
           MOST
           REVEREND
           FATHER
           in
           God
           ,
           the
           Lord
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           his
           Grace
           ,
           Primate
           of
           all
           England
           ,
           and
           Metropolitane
           ,
           and
           one
           of
           his
           Maiesties
           most
           Honourable
           Priuie
           COVNCELL
           .
        
         
           
             Most
             Reuerend
             ,
          
        
         
           THe
           argument
           of
           this
           discourse
           being
           religion
           ,
           to
           whom
           could
           it
           be
           more
           fitlie
           presented
           then
           to
           your
           Grace
           ,
           hauing
           (
           vnder
           his
           most
           Excellent
           Maiestie
           )
           worthily
           
           the
           chiefe
           care
           hereof
           .
           Besides
           ,
           the
           Author
           of
           this
           worke
           ,
           whilest
           he
           liued
           ,
           so
           much
           honoured
           your
           sincere
           and
           religious
           courses
           in
           managing
           the
           publique
           affaires
           of
           your
           eminent
           place
           ,
           that
           had
           he
           thought
           of
           the
           publishing
           thereof
           ,
           no
           doubt
           but
           he
           would
           haue
           presumed
           to
           gaine
           some
           luster
           vnto
           it
           from
           your
           gracious
           Patronage
           .
           Succeeding
           him
           in
           his
           temporall
           blessings
           ,
           I
           doe
           endeuour
           to
           succeede
           him
           in
           his
           virtues
           ,
           dutifull
           affection
           towards
           your
           grace
           ,
           and
           prayers
           to
           the
           almightie
           ,
           for
           the
           good
           of
           his
           Church
           ,
           to
           increase
           daily
           your
           honours
           ,
           and
           happinesse
           .
        
         
           
             Your
             Graces
             in
             all
             humble
             obseruance
             to
             be
             commanded
             
               ROB.
               BREREVVOOD
            
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           PREFACE
           TO
           THE
           READER
           shewing
           the
           occasions
           the
           Author
           had
           to
           write
           the
           ensuing
           Discourse
           ,
           and
           breifly
           describing
           the
           generall
           state
           of
           Protestantes
           in
           Europe
           for
           a
           supply
           to
           the
           same
           worke
           .
        
         
           SVCH
           as
           are
           delighted
           with
           profound
           speculations
           ,
           and
           the
           diligent
           search●ng
           out
           of
           hidden
           verities
           ,
           they
           haue
           not
           all
           the
           same
           proiectes
           ,
           but
           their
           various
           cogitations
           are
           vsually
           fixed
           vpon
           diuers
           ends
           .
           Some
           (
           saith
           a
           deuout
           Father
           )
           
             know
             that
             they
             may
             be
             knowne
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             vanity
             :
             some
             know
             ,
             onely
             that
             they
             may
             know
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             curiosity
             :
             others
             know
             to
             edifie
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             charity
             .
          
           How
           distastfull
           the
           vanity
           of
           the
           first
           sort
           was
           vnto
           the
           learned
           ,
           and
           iudicious
           Author
           of
           this
           ensuing
           discourse
           ,
           his
           priuate
           and
           retyred
           course
           of
           life
           ,
           his
           setled
           ,
           and
           constant
           vnwillingnesse
           ,
           whilest
           he
           enioyed
           his
           earthly
           tabernacle
           ,
           to
           expose
           any
           of
           his
           accurate
           labours
           to
           the
           publicke
           viewe
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           may
           sufficiently
           testifie
           :
           and
           yet
           to
           auoyde
           the
           fruitelesse
           curiosity
           of
           the
           second
           ranke
           ,
           he
           was
           euer
           most
           ready
           in
           priuate
           either
           by
           conference
           ,
           or
           writing
           to
           instruct
           others
           repayring
           vnto
           him
           ,
           if
           they
           were
           desirous
           of
           his
           resolution
           in
           any
           doubtfull
           pointes
           of
           learning
           within
           the
           ample
           circuit
           of
           his
           deepe
           apprehension
           .
        
         
         
           From
           this
           his
           modest
           ,
           and
           humble
           charity
           (
           vertues
           which
           rarely
           cohabite
           with
           the
           swelling
           windenesse
           of
           much
           knowledge
           )
           issued
           this
           spisse
           and
           dense
           ,
           yet
           polished
           ;
           this
           copious
           ,
           yet
           concise
           ;
           this
           concise
           yet
           cleare
           and
           perspicuous
           Treatise
           of
           the
           variety
           of
           Languages
           and
           Religions
           through
           the
           chiefe
           regions
           of
           the
           world
           .
           a
           
             a
             
               Praefac
               .
               in
               paraph.
               in
               Epist.
               ad
               Rom.
               
            
          
           Erasmus
           giuing
           the
           reason
           why
           
             S.
             Paul
          
           writeth
           to
           the
           Romans
           in
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           saith
           ,
           it
           was
           the
           large
           extent
           then
           of
           this
           language
           ,
           that
           his
           instructions
           might
           more
           generally
           be
           vnderstood
           ;
           to
           make
           the
           truth
           of
           Erasmus
           assertion
           more
           euident
           ,
           he
           was
           intreated
           to
           point
           out
           particularly
           the
           amplenesse
           ,
           and
           multitude
           of
           such
           Regions
           ,
           wherein
           this
           learned
           tounge
           was
           aunciently
           most
           vulgar
           .
           b
           
             b
             
               In
               Mithrid
            
             .
          
           Gesner
           ,
           and
           Viues
           affirming
           that
           the
           Spanish
           ,
           c
           
             c
             
               Commen●
               in●
               .
               19.
               &
               ciuit
               .
               cap.
               7.
               
            
          
           Italian
           ,
           and
           French
           tongues
           are
           but
           the
           latine
           depraued
           ,
           and
           corrupted
           by
           the
           inundation
           of
           the
           Gothes
           ,
           d
           
             d
             
               Euor●a
               in
               psal
               .
               138
               &
               Tractat.
               7.
               in
               Ioan.
               
            
          
           and
           Vandals
           ouer
           the
           Southerne
           partes
           of
           Europe
           ,
           and
           
             Saint
             Augustine
          
           intimating
           that
           the
           latine
           was
           commonly
           spoken
           in
           some
           partes
           of
           the
           skirts
           of
           Affricke
           which
           border
           vpon
           the
           Mediterrane
           sea
           ;
           it
           was
           demanded
           of
           him
           ,
           whether
           in
           the
           forenamed
           Countries
           about
           the
           more
           auncient
           times
           of
           the
           primitiue
           Church
           ,
           the
           latine
           was
           the
           common
           language
           ,
           and
           whether
           the
           decay
           of
           it
           ,
           was
           the
           originall
           of
           the
           vulgar
           tongues
           vsed
           by
           their
           Inhabitants
           in
           after
           ages
           .
        
         
           And
           forasmuch
           as
           
             Guido
             Fabritius
          
           doth
           clearely
           demonstrate
           the
           vulgar
           tongue
           of
           Iury
           in
           the
           daies
           of
           our
           blessed
           Sauiours
           pilgrimage
           here
           vppon
           earth
           to
           be
           the
           Syriacke
           ,
           which
           (
           saith
           e
           
             e
             
               Prae.
               ad
               Sy●iacum
               Test.
            
             
          
           Matius
           )
           grew
           out
           of
           the
           mixture
           of
           the
           auncient
           Chaldee
           ,
           and
           Hebrew
           ,
           and
           was
           so
           different
           from
           the
           later
           ,
           f
           
             f
             
               Prae●●
               ,
               ad
               G●●m
               .
               ●yria
            
          
           that
           the
           one
           could
           not
           be
           vnderstood
           by
           the
           other
           :
           he
           was
           questioned
           in
           which
           of
           
           these
           languages
           the
           Hebrew
           or
           Syriacke
           the
           publicke
           reading
           of
           the
           sacred
           Scriptures
           in
           those
           times
           were
           prformed
           .
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           whereas
           there
           are
           many
           Christians
           in
           
             Greece
             ,
             Asia
             ,
             Muscouia
             ,
             Aegypt
             ,
          
           and
           Aethiopia
           ,
           it
           was
           desired
           of
           him
           that
           he
           would
           more
           distinctly
           set
           downe
           the
           Countries
           wherein
           they
           liued
           ,
           their
           superiours
           to
           whom
           they
           are
           subiect
           ,
           and
           their
           differences
           from
           the
           Romane
           Church
           ,
           that
           it
           might
           more
           manifestly
           appeare
           ,
           how
           idle
           are
           the
           common
           vaunts
           amongst
           the
           ignorant
           of
           her
           amplitude
           ,
           as
           though
           all
           the
           Christian
           world
           saue
           a
           few
           Protestantes
           shut
           vp
           in
           some
           obscure
           corner
           of
           Europe
           ,
           professed
           the
           same
           faith
           she
           embraceth
           and
           were
           within
           the
           territories
           of
           her
           Iurisdiction
           .
           The
           falsehood
           of
           which
           glorious
           boastings
           are
           in
           part
           most
           liuely
           discouered
           in
           this
           learned
           Tractate
           ,
           describing
           the
           diuers
           conditions
           of
           Christians
           in
           the
           East
           ,
           North
           and
           Southerne
           Regions
           of
           the
           earth
           which
           haue
           no
           subordination
           vnto
           the
           Papall
           Hierarchie
           ,
           but
           not
           in
           the
           West
           ,
           where
           Protestantes
           haue
           cheifely
           their
           aboade
           ;
           and
           therefore
           to
           make
           it
           a
           more
           compleate
           worke
           ,
           it
           will
           not
           be
           amisse
           compendiously
           to
           declare
           their
           multitudes
           ,
           amplenesse
           ,
           and
           seuerall
           habitations
           in
           this
           Europaean
           world
           .
        
         
           To
           begin
           with
           the
           remotest
           partes
           hereof
           Eastward
           ;
           in
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Polonia
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           this
           present
           ,
           confining
           on
           the
           West
           at
           the
           riuers
           of
           Warta
           ,
           and
           Odera
           with
           the
           Marchesates
           of
           Silesia
           and
           Brandeburge
           ,
           on
           the
           East
           at
           the
           riuers
           of
           Nieper
           and
           Bresnia
           with
           Moscouia
           ,
           on
           the
           South
           at
           the
           Riuer
           of
           Niester
           with
           Moldauia
           ,
           at
           the
           g
           
             g
             
               Ne
               commemorem
               dit●onis
               amplitudinem
               (
               inquit
               Erasmus
               de
               Regno
               Poloniae
               loquens
               )
               complectentis
               Russos
               etiam
               A●bos
               ,
               &
               L●tuanos
               quibus
               omnibus
               latissimè
               imperat
               a
               vistula
               flumine
               ad
               Tauricam
               Cheron●sum
               ,
               a
               mari
               Balthico
               ad
               Caparthum
               montem
               Sigismundus
               Rex
               .
               Eras
               epist
               ad
               Polo
               .
               Se●r
               tar
               .
               praefix
               expo
               in
               orat
               .
               do
               .
            
          
           Caparthian
           mountaines
           ,
           with
           Hungarie
           ,
           on
           the
           North
           with
           the
           Baltique
           sea
           ,
           hauing
           vnder
           its
           dominion
           
             Polonia
             ,
             Lituania
             ,
             Liuonia
             ,
             Podolia
             ,
             
             Russia
          
           the
           lesse
           ,
           
             Volhimia
             ,
             Masouia
             ,
             Prussia
          
           ,
           which
           vnited
           as
           it
           were
           within
           one
           roundish
           inclosure
           ,
           are
           in
           circuit
           about
           2600.
           miles
           ,
           and
           of
           no
           lesse
           space
           then
           Spaine
           ,
           and
           France
           layd
           together
           ,
           in
           this
           so
           large
           and
           ample
           kingdome
           the
           Protestants
           in
           great
           numbers
           are
           diffused
           through
           all
           quarters
           thereof
           ;
           hauing
           in
           euery
           Prouince
           their
           publicke
           Churches
           ,
           and
           congregations
           orderly
           seuered
           and
           bounded
           with
           Diocesses
           ,
           whence
           are
           sent
           some
           of
           the
           cheefest
           amd
           most
           principall
           men
           of
           worth
           vnto
           their
           Generall
           Synods
           ,
           which
           within
           these
           few
           yeares
           they
           haue
           frequently
           held
           with
           great
           celebritie
           ,
           and
           with
           no
           lesse
           Christian
           prudence
           and
           piety
           .
        
         
           For
           whereas
           there
           are
           diuers
           sorts
           of
           these
           Polonicke
           Protestants
           ,
           some
           embracing
           the
           Waldensian
           ,
           or
           the
           Bohemick
           ,
           others
           the
           Augustane
           ,
           and
           some
           the
           Heluetian
           confession
           ,
           and
           so
           doe
           differ
           in
           some
           outward
           circumstances
           of
           Discipline
           ,
           and
           ceremony
           :
           yet
           knowing
           well
           that
           a
           kingdome
           diuided
           cannot
           stand
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           one
           God
           whom
           all
           of
           them
           worship
           in
           spirit
           is
           the
           God
           of
           peace
           and
           concord
           ,
           they
           iointly
           meet
           at
           one
           Generall
           Synode
           ,
           and
           their
           first
           Act
           alway
           is
           ,
           a
           religious
           and
           solemne
           profession
           of
           their
           vnfained
           consent
           in
           the
           substantiall
           points
           of
           Christian
           Faith
           ,
           necessary
           to
           saluation
           .
           Thus
           in
           Generall
           Synodes
           at
           a
           
             a
             
               Anno.
               1570.
            
             
          
           Sendomire
           ,
           b
           
             b
             1573.
             
          
           Cracouia
           ,
           c
           
             c
             1578.
             
          
           Petricoue
           ,
           d
           
             d
             1●●3
             .
          
           Wlodislaue
           ,
           e
           
             e
             
               1●95
               .
               See
               the
               Acts
               of
               the
               Synods
               themselues
            
          
           Torune
           ,
           (
           vnto
           which
           resorted
           in
           great
           troops
           Christians
           of
           all
           Orders
           ,
           States
           ,
           and
           degrees
           ,
           out
           of
           all
           Prouinces
           of
           this
           most
           potent
           kingdome
           )
           they
           declared
           the
           
             Bohemicke
             ,
             Helueticke
          
           and
           
             Augustane
             confessions
             seuerally
             receiued
             amongst
             them
             to
             agree
             in
             the
             principall
             heads
             of
             Faith
             ,
             touching
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             the
             sacred
             Trinitie
             ,
             the
             Person
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             God
             ,
             God
             and
             man
             ,
             the
             prouidence
             
             of
             God
             ,
             Sinne
             ,
             Freewil
             ,
             the
             Law
             ,
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             Iustification
             by
             Christ
             ,
             Faith
             in
             his
             name
             ,
             Regeneration
             ,
             the
             catholike
             Church
             ,
             and
             Supreame
             head
             thereof
             Christ
             ,
             the
             Sacraments
             ,
             their
             number
             and
             vse
             ,
             the
             state
             of
             soules
             after
             death
             ,
             the
             resurrection
             &
             life
             eternal
             ,
             they
             decreed
             ,
             that
             wheras
             in
             the
             forenamed
             confessions
             there
             is
             some
             difference
             in
             phrases
             ,
             and
             formes
             of
             speech
             concerning
             Christs
             presence
             in
             his
             holy
             supper
             ,
             which
             might
             breed
             dissention
             ,
             all
             disputations
             touching
             the
             manner
             of
             Christs
             presence
             should
             bee
             cut
             off
             ;
             seeing
             all
             of
             them
             doe
             beleeue
             the
             presence
             it selfe
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Eucharisticall
             elements
             are
             not
             naked
             and
             empty
             signes
             ,
             but
             doe
             truely
             performe
             to
             the
             faithfull
             receiuer
             that
             which
             they
             signifie
             ,
             and
             represent
             ,
             and
             to
             preuent
             future
             occasions
             of
             violating
             this
             sacred
             consent
             ,
             they
             ordained
             that
             no
             man
             should
             be
             called
             to
             the
             sacred
             ministery
             without
             subscription
             thereunto
             ,
             and
             when
             any
             person
             shal
             be
             excluded
             by
             excommunication
             from
             the
             congregation
             of
             one
             con●ession
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             not
             be
             receiued
             by
             the
             congregation
             of
             another
             ;
             Lastly
             ,
             forasmuch
             as
             they
             accord
             in
             the
             substantiall
             verity
             of
             Christian
             doctrine
             ,
             they
             professe
             themselues
             content
             to
             tolerate
             diuersitie
             of
             ceremonies
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             diuerse
             practise
             of
             their
             particular
             Churches
             ,
             and
             to
             remoue
             the
             least
             suspition
             of
             rebelling
             ,
             and
             sedition
             ,
             wherewith
             their
             malitious
             ,
             and
             calumniating
             aduersaries
             might
             blemish
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             although
             they
             are
             subiect
             vnto
             many
             greeuous
          
           pressures
           ,
           
             from
             the
             adherents
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             yet
             they
             carnestly
             export
             one
             another
             to
             follow
             that
             worthy
             and
             Christian
             
             admonition
             of
          
           Lactantius
           :
           
             Defendenda
             Religio
             est
             ,
             non
             occidendo
             ,
             sed
             moriendo
             ,
             non
             saeuitia
             sed
             patientia
             ,
             non
             scelere
             ,
             sed
             fide
             ,
             illa
             enim
             bonorum
             sunt
             ,
             haec
             malorum
             .
          
        
         
           This
           is
           the
           state
           of
           the
           professors
           of
           the
           Gospell
           in
           the
           electiue
           Monarchy
           of
           Polonia
           ,
           who
           in
           the
           adioyning
           countries
           on
           the
           South
           Transiluania
           and
           Hungarie
           ,
           are
           also
           exceedingly
           multiplied
           .
           
             In
             the
             former
             by
             the
             fauor
             Gabriel
             Bartorius
          
           now
           Prince
           of
           that
           Region
           ,
           who
           not
           many
           yeares
           ,
           since
           hath
           expulsed
           thence
           all
           such
           as
           are
           of
           the
           Papall
           faction
           ,
           in
           a
           manner
           the
           whole
           body
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           (
           except
           some
           few
           rotten
           and
           putred
           limmes
           of
           
             Arrians
             ,
             Antitrinnitarians
             ,
             Ebionites
             ,
             Socinians
             ,
             Anabaptists
             ,
          
           who
           heere
           as
           also
           in
           
             Polonia
             ,
             Lituania
             Borussia
          
           haue
           some
           publicke
           Assemblies
           )
           are
           professed
           Protestants
           :
           in
           the
           later
           ,
           a
           greater
           part
           ,
           specially
           beeing
           compared
           onely
           with
           such
           as
           are
           there
           addicted
           to
           the
           Romish
           superstition
           .
        
         
           But
           hence
           Eastward
           in
           the
           kingdom
           of
           Bohemia
           consisting
           of
           32.
           thousand
           parishes
           ,
           (
           now
           become
           in
           a
           manner
           hereditary
           to
           the
           house
           of
           Austria
           ,
           as
           likewise
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Hungary
           )
           and
           its
           appurtenances
           ,
           the
           Marchesates
           of
           
             Lusatia
             ,
             Morauia
          
           ,
           the
           Dukedome
           of
           Silesia
           ,
           all
           which
           iointly
           in
           circuit
           containe
           770.
           miles
           ,
           the
           Protestants
           are
           esteemed
           two
           third
           parts
           ;
           &
           in
           Austria
           it selfe
           ,
           and
           the
           countries
           of
           
             Goritia
             ,
             Tirolis
             ,
             Cilia
          
           ,
           the
           principalities
           of
           
             Sueuia
             ,
             Alsatia
             ,
             Brisgoia
             ,
             Constans
             ,
          
           now
           annexed
           thereunto
           ,
           the
           most
           part
           of
           the
           people
           ,
           and
           especially
           of
           the
           a
           
             a
             
               Nobiles
               fere
               omnes
               (
               qui
               in
               subditos
               su●s
               ,
               et
               clientes
               iudicia
               exercēt
               ,
               eorumque
               nonnulli
               vitae
               ,
               et
               necis
               ●●●ent
               pot●sta●e
               ●●●mouarum
               opininum
               veneno
               inflecti
               sunt
               .
               Thesau
               .
               polit
               .
               Apot.
               6.
               
            
          
           Nobility
           are
           the
           same
           way
           affected
           ,
           and
           are
           in
           regard
           of
           their
           number
           so
           potent
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           fearefull
           vnto
           their
           malignant
           opposites
           .
           And
           almost
           they
           are
           of
           the
           same
           number
           ,
           and
           strength
           in
           the
           neighbour
           countries
           
           of
           the
           Arch-Duke
           of
           Gratzden
           (
           a
           branch
           of
           the
           house
           of
           Austria
           ,
           namely
           in
           
             Stiria
             ,
             Carinthia
             ,
             Carniola
          
           ,
           saue
           since
           the
           yeare
           1598.
           they
           haue
           not
           had
           in
           these
           countries
           the
           publicke
           exercise
           of
           their
           Religion
           by
           the
           importunate
           and
           clandestine
           solicitations
           of
           the
           Iesuites
           :
           who
           notwithstanding
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           number
           ,
           and
           ▪
           potencie
           of
           the
           a
           
             a
             
               Illustres
               domini
               Ordinarij
               ,
               necnon
               prouinciahum
               pars
               maxima
               nihil
               non
               agit
               ,
               vt
               manere
               nobis
               (
               ministris
               Euangel●●
               )
               liceret
               sed
               Iesuitam
               instigationes
               quam
               totius
               prouinciae
               supplicationes
               plus
               poterant
               .
               Histo.
               persecut
               Grae.
               car●●s
               .
            
          
           Nobility
           on
           the
           Protestant
           partie
           euen
           in
           Gratts
           the
           prime
           City
           of
           Styria
           ,
           could
           not
           effect
           their
           desires
           ,
           vntill
           in
           the
           yeare
           forementioned
           vnder
           pretence
           of
           conducting
           the
           Arch-Dukes
           sister
           into
           Spaine
           to
           bee
           wife
           vnto
           the
           now
           Philip
           the
           third
           sundry
           Embassadors
           from
           the
           Princes
           of
           Italy
           ,
           the
           Pope
           ,
           &
           the
           King
           of
           Spaine
           attended
           with
           many
           souldiers
           had
           full
           possession
           of
           the
           city
           ,
           and
           presently
           fourteene
           Ministers
           of
           the
           Gospell
           in
           one
           day
           were
           by
           force
           and
           violence
           thence
           eiected
           .
        
         
           But
           the
           condition
           of
           the
           Protestants
           residing
           amongst
           the
           Cantons
           of
           Heluetia
           ,
           and
           their
           confederates
           the
           city
           of
           Geneua
           ,
           the
           towne
           of
           S.
           Gall
           ,
           the
           
             Grisons
             ,
             Valesians
          
           ,
           or
           seuen
           communities
           ,
           vnder
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Sedune
           ,
           is
           a
           great
           deale
           more
           happie
           ,
           and
           setled
           ;
           in
           so
           much
           that
           they
           are
           two
           third
           parts
           ,
           hauing
           the
           publique
           and
           free
           practise
           of
           Religion
           :
           for
           howsoeuer
           of
           the
           13.
           
           Cantons
           ,
           onely
           these
           fiue
           ,
           b
           
             b
             
               Thesaur
               .
               Pol.
               Apot.
               49.
            
             
          
           
             Zuricke
             ,
             Schaf●use
             ,
             Glarona
             ,
             Basile
             ,
             Abatistella
          
           are
           entirely
           Protestant
           ;
           yet
           these
           in
           strength
           ,
           and
           amplenesse
           of
           territory
           much
           exceede
           the
           other
           seuen
           ,
           and
           hence
           Zuricke
           the
           chiefe
           of
           the
           fiue
           ,
           in
           all
           publicke
           meetings
           ,
           and
           Embassages
           hath
           the
           first
           place
           .
        
         
           Already
           then
           we
           find
           the
           state
           of
           Orthodox
           professors
           of
           the
           Gospell
           to
           be
           such
           ,
           that
           we
           neede
           not
           complaine
           of
           their
           paucitie
           ,
           and
           if
           wee
           further
           proceede
           to
           view
           the
           many
           regions
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           we
           shall
           haue
           cause
           to
           magnifie
           the
           goodnesse
           of
           God
           for
           their
           multitudes
           .
        
         
         
           The
           whole
           Empire
           ,
           excluding
           Bohemia
           ,
           and
           Austria
           (
           because
           the
           King
           of
           the
           one
           is
           rather
           an
           Arbiter
           in
           the
           election
           of
           the
           Emperour
           ,
           then
           an
           Elector
           ,
           in
           this
           sole
           case
           giuing
           his
           voice
           when
           the
           other
           six
           Electors
           are
           equally
           diuided
           ,
           and
           the
           Archduke
           of
           the
           other
           hath
           onely
           a
           kind
           of
           extraordinary
           place
           in
           the
           Dyet
           amongst
           the
           Ecclesiasticall
           Princes
           ,
           as
           sometimes
           the
           Duke
           of
           Loraine
           had
           )
           consisteth
           of
           three
           Orders
           ,
           or
           States
           ,
           the
           Princes
           Ecclesiasticall
           ,
           the
           Princes
           Temporall
           ,
           and
           the
           free
           Cities
           .
           The
           last
           of
           these
           before
           some
           of
           them
           come
           to
           be
           possessed
           by
           the
           
             French
             ,
             Polonian
             ,
             Heluetians
          
           ,
           and
           others
           were
           in
           number
           about
           a
           
             a
             
               Liberae
               ciuitates
               quae
               non
               alium
               principē
               praeter
               Imperatorē
               agnoscunt
               ,
               &
               suis
               vtuntur
               quaeque
               legibus
               ,
               olim
               erant
               88.
               lam
               vero
               pauc●o
               res
               sunt
               ,
               alijs
               a
               Galliarū
               ,
               &
               Poloniae
               Regibus
               ,
               &
               alijs
               occupatis
               .
               Thes.
               polit
               .
               apot
               .
               6.
               
            
          
           88.
           and
           although
           in
           regard
           of
           this
           multitude
           ,
           at
           this
           present
           they
           are
           much
           diminished
           ;
           yet
           the
           remainders
           of
           them
           are
           so
           potent
           ,
           that
           a
           few
           of
           them
           ,
           termed
           the
           Hanse-Citties
           seated
           in
           the
           Notherne
           part
           of
           Germany
           inclusiuely
           betweene
           Dantisck
           eastward
           ,
           Hamburg
           westward
           ,
           and
           ioyned
           in
           an
           offensiue
           ,
           and
           defensiue
           league
           ,
           haue
           been
           able
           to
           make
           good
           their
           opposition
           against
           some
           mightie
           neighbour
           Princes
           infringing
           immunities
           .
        
         
           These
           with
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           b
           
             b
             
               Protestantiū
               partes
               sequuntur
               liberae
               Ciuitates
               ,
               seculares
               Principes
               ferē
               omnes
               ;
               Catholico●um
               à
               secularibus
               Principes
               pauci
               ,
               v●
               〈◊〉
               Cl●●●nsis
               .
               Thesaur
               .
               Pol.
               Apot
               6.
               
            
          
           Free
           Citties
           (
           which
           are
           of
           some
           number
           ,
           and
           strength
           )
           doe
           all
           in
           a
           manner
           either
           in
           whole
           ,
           or
           part
           (
           for
           in
           some
           of
           them
           as
           in
           
             Ratisbone
             ,
             Argentine
             ,
             Augusta
             ,
             Spire
             ,
             Wormes
             ,
             Francfort
          
           vpon
           Moen
           both
           Papists
           and
           Protestants
           make
           publique
           profession
           )
           embrace
           the
           sincere
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Gospell
           .
           And
           if
           wee
           passe
           ouer
           the
           Ecclesiasticall
           Princes
           ,
           who
           (
           excepting
           the
           three
           Electour
           Ar●hbishops
           ,
           of
           
             Colen
             Mentz
          
           ,
           and
           Triuers
           ,
           the
           Archbishops
           of
           Wer●zburg
           ,
           and
           Saltsburg
           ,
           and
           some
           elect
           Bishops
           or
           Administrators
           of
           bishopricks
           being
           laymen
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           reformed
           Religion
           )
           are
           of
           small
           power
           ;
           all
           the
           Princes
           Temporall
           of
           
           the
           Empire
           (
           none
           of
           note
           excepted
           besides
           the
           Duke
           of
           Bauaria
           )
           are
           firmely
           Protestantes
           .
           Now
           what
           the
           multitudes
           of
           subiects
           are
           professing
           the
           same
           faith
           with
           these
           Princes
           ,
           we
           may
           guesse
           by
           the
           amplenes
           of
           the
           dominions
           vnder
           the
           gouernmēt
           of
           such
           only
           as
           for
           their
           cōmands
           are
           chiefe
           ,
           and
           most
           eminent
           amongst
           them
           ;
           As
           of
           the
           
             Prince
             Elector
             Palatine
          
           ,
           the
           Duke
           of
           Saxonie
           ,
           the
           Marquesse
           of
           Brandeburge
           ,
           the
           Duke
           of
           
             Wirtenburg
             ,
             Landgraue
          
           of
           
             Hesse
             ,
             Marquesse
          
           of
           
             Baden
             ,
             Prince
          
           of
           
             Anhalt
             ,
             Dukes
          
           of
           
             Brunswicke
             ,
             Holst
             ,
             Luenburg
             ,
             Meckleburge
             ,
             Pomerane
             ,
             Sweyburge
             ,
             Nauburge
          
           ▪
           amongst
           whom
           the
           Marquesse
           of
           Brandeburge
           hath
           for
           his
           Dominion
           ,
           not
           only
           the
           Marchasate
           it selfe
           contayning
           in
           circuit
           about
           520.
           miles
           ,
           &
           furnished
           with
           fiftie
           cities
           ,
           and
           about
           threescore
           other
           walled
           Townes
           ;
           but
           likewise
           part
           of
           Prussia
           ,
           for
           which
           he
           is
           feudatarie
           vnto
           the
           king
           of
           Poland
           ,
           the
           Region
           of
           Prignitz
           ,
           the
           Dukedome
           of
           Crossen
           ,
           the
           Signories
           of
           Sternberg
           ,
           and
           Cotbus
           ,
           the
           Countie
           of
           Rapin
           ,
           and
           lately
           the
           three
           Dukedomes
           of
           
             Cleue
             ,
             Gulick
          
           ,
           and
           Berg
           ,
           of
           which
           the
           two
           former
           haue
           either
           of
           them
           in
           circuit
           130.
           miles
           .
        
         
           Neare
           adioyning
           vnto
           these
           three
           last
           Dukedomes
           ,
           are
           those
           Prouinces
           of
           the
           low
           Countries
           gouerned
           by
           the
           States
           ,
           namely
           
             Zutphen
             ,
             Vtrech
             ,
             Oberyssel
             ,
             Groningham
             ,
             Holland
             ,
             Zeland
             ,
             West-frizland
             ,
          
           in
           which
           onely
           Protestants
           haue
           the
           publicke
           (
           for
           otherwise
           
             Arrians
             ,
             Anabaptists
             ,
             Socinians
          
           are
           here
           priuately
           tolerated
           )
           and
           free
           exercise
           of
           their
           Religion
           ,
           as
           also
           in
           the
           neighbour
           dominion
           of
           the
           Earle
           of
           East
           -
           Freezland
           .
        
         
           But
           to
           passe
           from
           these
           vnited
           Prouinces
           vnder
           the
           States
           vnto
           France
           ;
           in
           this
           mighty
           kingdome
           ,
           those
           (
           as
           
           they
           usually
           stile
           them
           )
           of
           the
           Religion
           ,
           besides
           the
           Castels
           ,
           and
           fortes
           that
           doe
           belong
           in
           propertie
           vnto
           the
           Duke
           of
           Bullen
           ,
           the
           Duke
           of
           Rohan
           ,
           Count
           of
           Laual
           ,
           the
           Duke
           of
           
             Trimouile
             ,
             Mounsieur
             Chastillion
          
           ,
           the
           Mareshall
           of
           Digners
           ,
           the
           Duke
           of
           Sully
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           are
           seased
           of
           above
           70.
           
           Townes
           hauing
           Garrisons
           of
           souldiers
           gouerned
           by
           Nobles
           and
           Gentlemen
           of
           the
           Religion
           ;
           they
           haue
           800.
           
           Ministers
           receiuing
           pensions
           out
           of
           the
           publicke
           Finance
           ,
           and
           are
           so
           dispersed
           through
           the
           chiefe
           prouinces
           of
           the
           kingdome
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           Principalitie
           of
           
             Orange
             ,
             Poincton
          
           almost
           all
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           in
           Gasconynie
           halfe
           ;
           in
           
             Languedoc
             ,
             Normandie
          
           ,
           and
           other
           westerne
           Prouinces
           ,
           a
           strong
           partie
           professe
           the
           Euangelicall
           trueth
           .
           Which
           multitudes
           ,
           although
           they
           are
           but
           small
           ,
           and
           as
           it
           were
           an
           handfull
           in
           comparison
           of
           all
           bearing
           the
           names
           of
           Papists
           throughout
           the
           spacious
           continent
           of
           France
           ;
           yet
           in
           regard
           of
           such
           as
           are
           entirely
           Popish
           ,
           they
           haue
           some
           proportion
           .
        
         
           For
           to
           omitte
           a
           great
           part
           of
           French
           Papists
           ,
           who
           in
           heart
           beleeue
           the
           sincerity
           of
           the
           Gospell
           ,
           but
           dare
           not
           make
           profession
           thereof
           for
           worldly
           respects
           ,
           as
           to
           obtaine
           great
           Offices
           ,
           to
           auoide
           penalties
           ,
           and
           iniustice
           in
           their
           litigious
           suites
           ;
           almost
           all
           the
           lawyers
           ,
           a
           
             a
             
               Vide
               instruct
               &
               Missin's
               des
               Roys
               Tres
               ch●s●●ns
               &
               ●eleurs
               Ambassadeu●s
               ,
               concernant
               le
               Councile
               de
               Trent
               .
               Bor●ellum
               l.
               4
               de
               decret
               Ecclesiae
               Gallicae
               .
               ●
               ti
               .
               21.22
               Dua
               reuam
               li.
               2
               de
               benefi
               cap.
               10
               11.
               ●
               5
               cap.
               11.
               
            
          
           and
           learned
           sort
           who
           no
           doubt
           haue
           many
           adherents
           of
           lesse
           knowledge
           ,
           hold
           ,
           
             That
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             was
             aunciently
             the
             first
             and
             chiefest
             Bishop
             according
             to
             the
             dignity
             of
             precedencie
             ,
             and
             order
             ,
             not
             by
             any
             diuine
             Institution
             ,
             but
             because
             Rome
             was
             the
             chiefe
             Citty
             of
             the
             Empire
             ;
             That
             he
             obtained
             his
             primacy
             ouer
             the
             Westerne
             Church
             by
             the
             guift
             and
             clemency
             of
             Pipine
             ,
             Charles
             the
             great
             ,
             and
             other
             Kings
             of
             
             France
             ,
             and
             hath
             no
             power
             to
             dispose
             of
             Temporall
             things
             ;
             That
             it
             belongeth
             to
             Christian
             Kings
             and
             Princes
             to
             call
             Ecclesiasticall
             Synods
             ,
             and
             to
             establish
             their
             decrees
             ,
             to
             make
             Ecclesiasticall
             lawes
             for
             the
             good
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             reforme
             the
             abuses
             therein
             ,
             and
             to
             haue
             the
             same
             power
             and
             authority
             ouer
             sacred
             persons
             in
             causes
             Ecclesiasticall
             ,
             as
             was
             exercised
             by
             Iosias
             ,
             and
             Constantine
             the
             Great
             ,
             who
             said
             he
             was
             a
             Bishop
             ouer
             the
             outward
             things
             of
             the
             Church
             ;
             That
             the
             lawes
             whereby
             their
             Church
             is
             to
             bee
             gouerned
             are
             onely
             the
             Canons
             of
             the
             more
             ancient
             Councels
             ,
             and
             their
             owne
             Nationall
             Decrees
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             Decretals
             of
             the
             Bishops
             of
             Rome
             ;
             That
             the
             Councell
             of
             Constance
             assembled
             by
             Sigismund
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             &
             with
             a
             concurrent
             consent
             of
             other
             Christian
             Princes
             ,
             decreeing
             a
             Generall
             Synode
             to
             be
             superiours
             vnto
             the
             Pope
             ,
             and
             correcting
             many
             enormious
             abuses
             in
             the
             Roman
             Church
             which
             yet
             remaine
             in
             practise
             ,
             was
             a
             true
             oecumenicall
             Councell
             ,
             and
             so
             likewise
             the
             Councell
             of
             Basill
             ;
             That
             the
             Assembly
             of
             Trent
             was
             no
             lawfull
             Councell
             ,
             and
             the
             Canons
             thereof
             are
             rather
             to
             be
             esteemed
             the
             Decrees
             of
             the
             Popes
             who
             called
             and
             continued
             it
             ,
             then
             the
             Decrees
             of
             the
             Councell
             it selfe
             ,
             because
             in
             this
             Assembly
             Bishops
             onely
             (
             contrary
             to
             the
             practise
             of
             the
             Councell
             of
             Basill
             )
             had
             decisiue
             voyces
             ,
             and
             the
             greatest
             parts
             of
             Bishops
             were
             Italian
             the
             Popes
             vassals
             ;
             and
             besides
             ,
             nothing
             was
             then
             determined
             that
             was
             not
             at
             Rome
             fore-determined
             by
             the
             Pope
             ;
             That
             the
             Sacrament
             
             of
             the
             Lords
             Supper
             ought
             to
             be
             administred
             vnder
             both
             kinds
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             least
             a
             great
             part
             of
             diuine
             seruice
             is
             to
             be
             performed
             in
             their
             vulgar
             tongues
          
           ;
           Thus
           are
           the
           greater
           number
           of
           Lawyers
           and
           learned
           men
           in
           France
           affected
           ,
           and
           those
           who
           are
           throughly
           popish
           are
           for
           the
           most
           part
           men
           of
           the
           basest
           sort
           wholy
           leauened
           with
           the
           bitter
           slanders
           and
           calumniations
           of
           malicious
           Friers
           .
        
         
           Now
           if
           to
           all
           the
           forenamed
           kingdomes
           ,
           Principalities
           ,
           Dukedomes
           ,
           States
           ,
           Citties
           abounding
           with
           professors
           of
           the
           trueth
           ,
           we
           adde
           the
           Monarchies
           of
           Greate
           
             Britannie
             ,
             Denmarke
             ,
             Sweden
          
           ,
           wholy
           in
           a
           manner
           Protestant
           ,
           wee
           shall
           finde
           them
           not
           much
           inferiour
           in
           number
           and
           amplitude
           to
           the
           Romish
           partie
           ;
           especially
           if
           we
           consider
           that
           the
           very
           bulke
           and
           body
           hereof
           ,
           Italy
           ,
           and
           Spaine
           ,
           are
           by
           a
           kinde
           of
           violence
           ,
           and
           necessity
           ,
           rather
           then
           out
           of
           any
           free
           choice
           and
           iudgement
           deteined
           in
           their
           superstition
           ;
           namely
           by
           the
           iealousie
           ,
           crueltie
           ,
           and
           tyrannous
           vigilancy
           of
           the
           inquisition
           ,
           and
           their
           owne
           ignorance
           ,
           being
           a
           
             a
             
               Vide
               indicē
               libro
               .
               prohi
               .
               ed●t
               .
               iussu
               Clem.
               8.
               
               Et
               Azou
               .
               lin
               .
               8.
               
               Morel
               .
               Ins●t
               .
               cap.
               26.
               
            
          
           by
           Clement
           the
           8.
           vtterly
           debarred
           from
           all
           reading
           of
           the
           Sacred
           Scriptures
           ,
           whereby
           they
           might
           come
           to
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           Truth
           .
        
         
           And
           if
           any
           shall
           except
           that
           the
           Protestants
           in
           diuerse
           Countries
           before
           mentioned
           cannot
           bee
           reputed
           as
           one
           body
           ,
           and
           of
           one
           Church
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           many
           differences
           ,
           and
           hot
           contentions
           amongest
           them
           ,
           let
           such
           remember
           ,
           that
           howsoeuer
           some
           priuate
           men
           in
           this
           holy
           society
           rather
           then
           of
           it
           ,
           preferring
           their
           nouell
           and
           passionate
           fancies
           ,
           before
           the
           peace
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           purchased
           with
           Christs
           precious
           bloud
           ,
           and
           the
           publicke
           weale
           of
           Christian
           Monarchies
           ,
           vnnaturall
           toward
           their
           owne
           deere
           Mother
           ,
           
           rending
           that
           wombe
           wherein
           they
           were
           new
           borne
           by
           the
           lauer
           of
           Regeneration
           ,
           forgetfull
           of
           their
           heauenly
           embassage
           ,
           which
           is
           not
           onely
           to
           reconcile
           men
           vnto
           God
           ,
           but
           men
           with
           men
           ,
           so
           farre
           neglecting
           their
           owne
           eternall
           saluation
           ,
           as
           to
           be
           vnmindfull
           of
           that
           most
           vndoubted
           truth
           ,
           
             He
             that
             is
             not
             in
             charity
             ,
             is
             in
             death
             ,
          
           trampling
           vnder
           foote
           that
           glorious
           legacie
           of
           their
           Lord
           and
           Maister
           ,
           
             My
             peace
             I
             giue
             vnto
             you
             ,
             my
             peace
             I
             leaue
             with
             you
             ,
          
           haue
           in
           heat
           of
           contention
           ,
           and
           bitternesse
           of
           their
           soules
           strained
           and
           racked
           their
           weake
           vnderstandings
           ,
           to
           make
           differences
           betweene
           themselues
           ,
           euen
           in
           the
           maine
           Articles
           of
           Faith
           ,
           and
           branded
           one
           another
           with
           blasphemy
           ,
           and
           heresie
           ,
           yet
           these
           vnchristian
           and
           vncharitable
           dissensions
           are
           not
           to
           be
           imputed
           to
           the
           whole
           sacred
           community
           of
           Orthodox
           Churches
           ,
           whose
           harmony
           and
           agreement
           in
           necessary
           points
           of
           Faith
           ,
           are
           onely
           to
           be
           esteemed
           by
           their
           confessions
           which
           by
           publicke
           authority
           they
           haue
           diuulged
           vnto
           the
           world
           .
        
         
           How
           many
           are
           the
           differences
           both
           in
           doctrine
           and
           discipline
           betweene
           the
           Proctors
           for
           the
           Papall
           faction
           ,
           touching
           Discipline
           ?
           some
           teach
           their
           cheefetaine
           the
           Pope
           may
           erre
           ,
           others
           that
           he
           cannot
           :
           some
           that
           he
           is
           subiect
           vnto
           a
           Generall
           Councell
           ,
           others
           that
           hee
           is
           aboue
           it
           :
           some
           that
           all
           Ecclesiasticall
           authority
           is
           immediately
           in
           the
           Prelates
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           others
           that
           it
           is
           onely
           in
           the
           Pope
           ,
           and
           from
           him
           deriued
           vnto
           inferiour
           Bishops
           :
           some
           that
           he
           hath
           temporall
           authorities
           ouer
           Princes
           ,
           others
           not
           ;
           concerning
           doctrine
           ,
           some
           at
           firme
           that
           predestination
           both
           by
           grace
           ,
           and
           glory
           is
           meerely
           from
           Gods
           free
           pleasure
           ,
           others
           from
           foreseene
           desert
           and
           merit
           ,
           some
           that
           all
           the
           bookes
           or
           part
           of
           them
           belonging
           vnto
           the
           old
           Testament
           which
           
           were
           not
           in
           the
           Canon
           of
           the
           Iewish
           Church
           are
           Apocriphall
           ,
           others
           canonicall
           euen
           in
           the
           matters
           of
           Faith
           :
           some
           that
           there
           is
           no
           originall
           sinne
           inherent
           in
           vs
           ,
           but
           only
           imputed
           ,
           others
           that
           it
           is
           both
           inherent
           and
           imputed
           :
           some
           that
           wee
           are
           most
           freely
           iustified
           ,
           by
           the
           meanes
           of
           Faith
           ,
           Hope
           ,
           &c.
           others
           by
           the
           value
           ,
           and
           merit
           of
           these
           vertues
           :
           some
           that
           faith
           is
           onely
           a
           generall
           assent
           vnto
           diuine
           truths
           ,
           others
           that
           it
           is
           a
           speciall
           perswasion
           touching
           the
           remission
           of
           our
           sinnes
           through
           Christ
           ,
           some
           that
           wee
           appeare
           righteous
           in
           Gods
           sight
           ,
           partly
           through
           imputed
           ,
           partly
           through
           inherent
           righteousnesse
           ,
           others
           onely
           by
           inherent
           :
           some
           that
           eternall
           life
           is
           due
           vnto
           our
           works
           onely
           by
           vertue
           of
           Gods
           free
           and
           gratious
           promise
           ,
           others
           through
           the
           merit
           of
           the
           worke
           done
           :
           some
           that
           all
           the
           morall
           good
           works
           of
           Infidels
           ,
           and
           Ethnicks
           are
           sinnes
           ,
           others
           that
           they
           are
           without
           sinne
           ;
           some
           that
           the
           B.
           Virgin
           was
           conceiued
           without
           originall
           sinne
           ,
           others
           the
           contrary
           ,
           and
           that
           with
           such
           eagernesse
           ,
           that
           the
           one
           condemne
           the
           other
           of
           heresie
           :
           yet
           because
           these
           contentions
           are
           betweene
           priuate
           men
           ,
           and
           they
           all
           (
           in
           Spaine
           and
           Italie
           ,
           but
           not
           in
           France
           ,
           as
           hath
           beene
           (
           hewed
           )
           accord
           in
           the
           cheefe
           points
           of
           doctrine
           publiquely
           established
           in
           the
           Councell
           of
           Trent
           ,
           they
           boast
           much
           of
           their
           vnity
           .
        
         
           Although
           then
           some
           priuate
           men
           vnworthy
           to
           take
           the
           word
           of
           peace
           and
           reconciliation
           into
           their
           virulent
           and
           contentious
           mouthes
           ,
           led
           more
           by
           passion
           ,
           and
           their
           owne
           selfe-pleasing
           conceipt
           ,
           then
           by
           the
           sacred
           rules
           of
           truth
           ,
           and
           piety
           ,
           haue
           laboured
           to
           sow
           the
           tares
           of
           dissention
           in
           the
           vineyard
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           heereby
           haue
           made
           crooked
           some
           few
           branches
           cleauing
           vnto
           them
           :
           yet
           the
           generall
           societies
           of
           Orthodox
           Churches
           in
           the
           publicke
           
           confessions
           of
           their
           faith
           ,
           doe
           so
           agree
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           a
           most
           sacred
           harmony
           betweene
           them
           in
           the
           more
           substantiall
           points
           of
           Christian
           Religion
           necessary
           to
           saluation
           .
        
         
           This
           is
           manifest
           out
           of
           the
           confessions
           themselues
           ,
           which
           are
           these
           ,
           the
           Anglicane
           ,
           the
           Scotiane
           ,
           French
           ,
           Heluctian
           former
           ,
           and
           later
           ,
           the
           
             Belgie
             ,
             Polonie
             ,
             Argentine
             ,
             Augustane
             ,
             Saxonicke
             ,
             Wirtenbergicke
             ,
             Palatine
             ,
             Bohemicke
             or
             Weldensian
          
           confession
           :
           for
           there
           is
           none
           of
           the
           Churches
           formerly
           pointed
           out
           in
           diuers
           places
           of
           Europe
           which
           doth
           not
           embrace
           one
           of
           these
           confessions
           ,
           and
           all
           of
           them
           harmoniously
           conspire
           in
           the
           principall
           Articles
           of
           Faith
           ,
           and
           which
           neerest
           concerne
           our
           eternall
           saluation
           ;
           as
           in
           the
           infallible
           verity
           and
           full
           sufficiency
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           diuine
           essence
           and
           vnitie
           of
           the
           euerlasting
           Godhead
           ,
           the
           sacred
           Trinitie
           of
           the
           three
           glorious
           persons
           ,
           the
           blessed
           incarnation
           of
           Christ
           ,
           the
           omnipotent
           prouidence
           of
           God
           ,
           the
           absolute
           supreame
           head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           Christ
           ,
           iustification
           by
           Faith
           through
           Christ
           ,
           and
           the
           nature
           of
           a
           liuely
           faith
           ,
           repentance
           ,
           regeneration
           and
           sanctification
           ,
           the
           difference
           betweene
           the
           Law
           ,
           and
           the
           Gospell
           ,
           touching
           freewill
           ,
           sinne
           ,
           and
           good
           works
           ,
           the
           Sacraments
           their
           number
           and
           vse
           ,
           the
           notes
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           the
           diuine
           authority
           of
           Magistrates
           ,
           the
           resurrection
           ,
           and
           state
           of
           soules
           after
           death
           .
        
         
           And
           for
           the
           cheefe
           point
           of
           difference
           which
           is
           conceiued
           to
           be
           betweene
           the
           professors
           of
           the
           Gospell
           about
           the
           presence
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           sacred
           Eucharist
           ;
           such
           as
           are
           parties
           in
           this
           contention
           ingenuously
           confesse
           ,
           that
           
             de
             reipsa
             ,
             touching
             the
             thing
             it selfe
             there
             is
             no
             oppositiō
             but
             only
             we
             varie
             in
             some
             ordinances
             ,
             and
             circumstances
             of
             the
             thing
             .
             We
             agree
          
           reipsa
           ,
           
             in
             the
             
             matter
             it selfe
             ,
             although
             we
             differ
             according
             to
             the
             diuersity
             of
             Gods
             gifts
             in
             expressing
             aptly
             and
             cleerely
             what
             we
             conceiue
             concerning
             this
             matter
             .
             We
             all
             acknowledge
             that
             the
             holy
             Symboles
             ,
             or
             signes
             ,
             are
             not
          
           inanes
           significationes
           ,
           
             barely
             significatiue
             ,
             but
             what
             by
             diuine
             institution
             they
             represent
             and
             testifie
             vnto
             our
             soules
             ,
             is
             as
             truly
             and
             certainly
             deliuered
             vnto
             vs
             from
             God
             as
             the
             symboles
             themselues
             .
             But
             the
             question
             is
             ,
             whether
             as
             the
             signe
             with
             the
             thing
             signified
             is
             presēt
             in
             respect
             of
             our
             body
             ,
             and
             not
             rather
             in
             regard
             of
             our
             well
             receiuing
             it
             by
             faith
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             whether
             as
             both
             the
             signe
             ,
             and
             thing
             signified
             are
             exhibited
             to
             all
             ,
             so
             all
             receiue
             both
             ,
             some
             to
             life
             ,
             others
             to
             their
             perdition
             .
             So
             that
             wee
             all
             beleeue
             the
             true
             communication
             of
             the
             true
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             onely
             concerning
             the
             manner
             of
             communication
             is
             the
             controuersie
             .
             But
             who
             can
             rightlie
             iudge
             that
             for
             this
             the
             sacred
             vnion
             and
             fellowship
             of
             Churches
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             dissolued
             .
          
        
         
           There
           being
           so
           excellent
           a
           foundation
           and
           firm
           ground-worke
           of
           vnity
           betweene
           the
           Protestants
           ,
           how
           worthy
           a
           worke
           would
           it
           be
           for
           Christian
           Princes
           to
           imitate
           the
           professors
           of
           the
           Gospell
           in
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Polonia
           ,
           and
           by
           a
           generall
           Assembly
           of
           moderate
           ,
           and
           vnpartiall
           Iudges
           and
           sensible
           of
           the
           bleeding
           wounds
           religion
           receiueth
           by
           sects
           ,
           and
           discords
           ,
           make
           vp
           the
           ruines
           and
           breaches
           of
           Churches
           ,
           caused
           hitherto
           through
           priuate
           contention
           ,
           &
           to
           sement
           them
           together
           (
           if
           it
           shall
           please
           God
           out
           of
           the
           riches
           of
           his
           mercy
           to
           prosper
           their
           heroicall
           and
           religious
           endeauours
           )
           with
           an
           euerlasting
           bond
           of
           concord
           .
           There
           
           were
           neuer
           greater
           hopes
           of
           the
           successe
           of
           so
           noble
           and
           ●ncomparable
           a
           worke
           ,
           then
           in
           this
           age
           which
           hath
           affoorided
           vs
           the
           blessing
           of
           our
           most
           gratious
           Soueraigne
           ,
           so
           religiously
           studious
           of
           publicke
           peace
           ,
           and
           so
           exquisitelie
           enabled
           with
           many
           rare
           endowments
           to
           promote
           so
           pious
           and
           renowned
           an
           action
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           meane
           time
           ,
           if
           any
           in
           these
           priuate
           distractions
           concerning
           matters
           of
           Religion
           excited
           by
           the
           malice
           of
           Sathan
           ,
           and
           his
           wretched
           instruments
           ,
           shall
           doubt
           which
           way
           to
           take
           ,
           let
           him
           folow
           the
           graue
           &
           diuine
           instructions
           of
           that
           excellent
           light
           of
           the
           Church
           
             S.
             Augustine
          
           ;
           who
           first
           exhorteth
           vs
           not
           to
           busie
           our selues
           ouermuch
           in
           enquiring
           after
           those
           things
           
             quae
             nihil
             certi
             habent
             in
             Scriptura
             ,
          
           which
           haue
           no
           firme
           footing
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           but
           in
           receiuing
           ,
           or
           reiecting
           them
           to
           follow
           the
           custome
           ,
           &
           practise
           of
           particular
           Churches
           wherein
           we
           liue
           ;
           otherwise
           (
           saith
           a
           
             a
             
               Epist.
               86.
            
             
          
           he
           )
           
             If
             we
             will
             dispute
             of
             these
             things
             ,
             &
             contend
             one
             with
             another
             :
             orietur
             interminata
             luctatio
             ,
          
           there
           will
           hence
           arise
           an
           endlesse
           strife
           .
           And
           his
           second
           admonition
           is
           ,
           that
           for
           the
           establishing
           of
           our
           consciences
           in
           points
           of
           faith
           necessary
           to
           obtaine
           eternall
           life
           ,
           we
           would
           follow
           our
           blessed
           Sauiours
           commandement
           :
           
             Search
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             Why
          
           (
           b
           
             b
             
               In
               Psal.
               21.
            
             
          
           saith
           this
           deuout
           and
           learned
           Father
           speaking
           to
           contentious
           Christians
           )
           
             doe
             we
             striue
             ?
             we
             are
             brethren
             .
             Our
             Father
             hath
             not
             dyed
             intestate
             :
             he
             hath
             made
             his
             last
             wil
             :
             he
             is
             dead
             ,
             &
             risen
             againe
             .
             There
             is
             contention
             still
             about
             an
             inheritance
             as
             long
             as
             the
             Testament
             is
             not
             made
             knowne
             ,
             but
             when
             it
             is
             published
             in
             judgement
             all
             are
             silent
             to
             heare
             it
             .
             The
             Iudge
             attentiuely
             listneth
             vnto
             it
             ,
             the
             Aduocats
             hold
             their
             peace
             :
             the
             cryers
             
             command
             silence
             ,
             &
             the
             whole
             multitude
             present
             ,
             stand
             in
             a
             suspence
             ,
             that
             the
             words
             of
             a
             dead
             man
             lying
             in
             his
             graue
             without
             sense
             and
             life
             may
             be
             rehearsed
             .
             Are
             the
             words
             of
             a
             dead
             man
             &
             interred
             ,
             so
             powerfull
             &
             aualeable
             ,
             and
             shall
             the
             Testament
             of
             Christ
             sitting
             in
             heauen
             be
             impugned
             ?
             Open
             it
             ,
             let
             vs
             read
             ,
             we
             are
             brethren
             ,
             why
             do
             we
             striue
             ?
             Our
             father
             hath
             not
             left
             vs
             destitute
             of
             his
             last
             wil
             :
             he
             that
             made
             it
             liueth
             for
             euer
             ;
             he
             heareth
             our
             voice
             &
             acknowledgeth
             his
             owne
             voice
             .
             Let
             vs
             reade
             ,
             why
             contend
             we
             ?
             Hauing
             found
             the
             inheritance
             let
             vs
             lay
             hold
             of
             it
          
           aperi
           ,
           lege
           :
           
             open
             and
             read
          
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           OF
           THE
           ANCIENT
           LARGENES
           of
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           .
           CHAP.
           1.
           
        
         
           GREECE
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           ancientlie
           knowen
           by
           the
           name
           of
           Hellas
           ,
           was
           inclosed
           betwixt
           the
           Bay
           of
           Ambracia
           ,
           with
           the
           riuer
           Arachthus
           ,
           that
           falleth
           into
           it
           on
           the
           West
           ,
           and
           the
           riuer
           Peneneus
           on
           the
           North
           ,
           
           
             Strabo
             .
             l.
             8.
             nō
             longè
             a
             principio
             .
          
           &
           the
           Sea
           on
           other
           parts
           .
           So
           that
           Acarnania
           and
           Thessalie
           ,
           were
           toward
           the
           Continēt
           ,
           the
           vtmost
           regions
           of
           Greece
           .
           But
           yet
           ,
           not
           the
           Countreys
           onely
           contained
           within
           those
           limits
           ,
           but
           also
           the
           kingdomes
           of
           Macedon
           ,
           and
           Epirus
           ;
           being
           the
           next
           adioyning
           prouinces
           (
           Macedon
           toward
           the
           North
           ,
           Epirus
           toward
           the
           West
           )
           had
           aunciently
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           for
           their
           vulgare
           language
           :
           for
           although
           it
           belonged
           originally
           to
           Hellas
           alone
           ,
           yet
           in
           time
           it
           became
           vulgare
           to
           these
           also
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           it
           was
           the
           language
           of
           all
           the
           Isles
           in
           the
           Aegaean
           sea
           ;
           of
           all
           those
           Ilands
           I
           say
           ,
           that
           are
           
           betwixt
           Greece
           and
           Asia
           ,
           both
           ,
           of
           the
           many
           small
           ones
           ,
           that
           lie
           between
           Candie
           and
           Negropont
           ,
           named
           Cyclades
           (
           there
           are
           of
           them
           53.
           )
           and
           of
           all
           aboue
           Negropont
           also
           ,
           as
           farre
           as
           the
           Strait
           of
           Constantinople
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           of
           the
           Isles
           of
           
             Candie
             ,
             Scarpanto
             ,
             Rhodes
          
           ,
           and
           a
           part
           of
           Cyprus
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           the
           small
           Islands
           along
           the
           coast
           of
           Asia
           ,
           from
           Candie
           to
           Syria
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           not
           only
           of
           al
           the
           West
           part
           of
           Asia
           the
           lesse
           ,
           (
           now
           called
           Anatolia
           ,
           and
           corruptly
           Natolia
           )
           lying
           toward
           the
           Aegaean
           sea
           ,
           as
           being
           verie
           thicke
           planted
           with
           Greeke
           Colonies
           :
           
           
             Sen●e
             .
             Cōsol
             .
             ad
             Helu
             .
             c.
             6.
             
             Pl●n
             .
             l.
             5.
             c.
             29.
             
             Isocrat
             .
             in
             Panegiric
             .
             long
             .
             post
             .
             med
             .
             Lucian
             .
             in
             Dialog
             .
             de
             Amorib
             .
             nō
             longè
             .
             ab
             Init.
             
          
           of
           which
           ,
           some
           one
           ,
           Miletus
           by
           name
           ,
           is
           registred
           by
           Seneca
           ,
           to
           haue
           bene
           the
           mother
           of
           75.
           by
           Plinie
           ,
           of
           80.
           
           Cittyes
           ;
           But
           on
           the
           North
           side
           also
           toward
           the
           Euxine
           sea
           ,
           as
           farre
           (
           saith
           Isocrates
           )
           as
           Sinope
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           South
           side
           respecting
           Afrique
           ,
           as
           farre
           (
           saith
           Lucian
           )
           as
           the
           Chelidonian
           Isles
           ,
           which
           are
           ouer
           against
           the
           cōfines
           of
           Lycia
           with
           Pamphylia
           .
           And
           yet
           although
           within
           these
           limits
           onely
           ,
           Greeke
           was
           generally
           spoken
           ,
           on
           the
           Maritime
           coast
           of
           Asia
           ,
           yet
           beyond
           them
           ,
           on
           both
           the
           shoares
           Eastward
           ,
           were
           many
           Greeke
           Cities
           (
           though
           not
           without
           Barbarous
           Cities
           among
           them
           .
           )
           And
           specially
           I
           find
           the
           North
           coast
           of
           Asia
           ,
           euen
           as
           farre
           as
           Trebizond
           ,
           to
           haue
           bin
           exceedingly
           well
           stored
           with
           them
           .
           But
           ,
           it
           may
           be
           further
           obserued
           likewise
           out
           of
           histories
           ,
           that
           not
           onely
           al
           the
           maritime
           part
           of
           Anatolia
           could
           vnderstand
           and
           speake
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           but
           most
           of
           the
           inland
           people
           also
           ,
           both
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           great
           traffique
           ,
           which
           those
           rich
           Countries
           had
           for
           the
           most
           part
           with
           Grecians
           ,
           and
           for
           that
           on
           all
           sides
           ,
           
           the
           East
           onely
           excepted
           ,
           they
           were
           inuironed
           with
           them
           .
           Yet
           neuerthelesse
           ,
           it
           is
           worthy
           obseruing
           ,
           that
           albeit
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           preuailed
           so
           farre
           in
           the
           Regions
           of
           Anatolia
           ,
           as
           to
           be
           in
           a
           manner
           generall
           ,
           yet
           for
           all
           that
           ,
           it
           neuer
           became
           vulgar
           ,
           nor
           extinguished
           the
           vulgar
           languages
           of
           those
           Coūtries
           .
           For
           it
           is
           not
           onely
           particularly
           obserued
           of
           the
           Galatians
           ,
           by
           Hierome
           ,
           
           
             Hierō
             .
             in
             P●oem
             l.
             ●
             .
             com
             .
             Epist.
             ad
             Galat.
             Strab.
             l.
             14.
             
          
           that
           beside
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           they
           had
           also
           their
           peculiar
           language
           ,
           like
           that
           of
           Trier
           :
           and
           of
           the
           Carians
           by
           Strabo
           ,
           that
           in
           their
           language
           were
           found
           many
           Greeke
           words
           ,
           which
           doth
           manifestly
           import
           it
           to
           haue
           beene
           a
           seuerall
           tongue
           :
           but
           it
           is
           directly
           recorded
           by
           *
           
             *
             Lib.
             citato
             lōg
             .
             post
             .
             med
             .
             et
             Plin.
             l.
             6.
             c.
             1.
             
          
           Strabo
           ,
           (
           out
           of
           Ephorus
           )
           that
           of
           sixteene
           seuerall
           nations
           ,
           inhabiting
           that
           tract
           ,
           onely
           three
           were
           Grecians
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           rest
           ,
           (
           whose
           names
           are
           there
           registred
           )
           barbarous
           ;
           and
           yet
           are
           omitted
           the
           
             Cappadocians
             ,
             Galatians
             ,
             Lydians
             ,
             Maeonians
             ,
             Cataonians
             ,
          
           no
           smal
           prouinces
           of
           that
           Region
           .
           Euen
           as
           it
           is
           also
           obserued
           by
           Plinie
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           that
           the
           22.
           languages
           ,
           wherof
           Mithridates
           king
           of
           Pontus
           ,
           
           
             Plin.
             l.
             7.
             c.
             24.
             
             Val.
             Max.
             l.
             ●
             .
             c
             7
             Gell.
             l.
             17.
             c.
             17.
             
          
           is
           remembred
           to
           haue
           bene
           so
           skilfull
           ,
           as
           to
           speake
           them
           without
           an
           interpreter
           ,
           were
           the
           languages
           of
           so
           many
           nations
           subiect
           to
           himselfe
           ,
           whose
           dominion
           yet
           we
           know
           ,
           to
           haue
           bene
           contained
           ,
           for
           the
           greatest
           part
           ,
           within
           Anatolia
           .
           And
           ,
           although
           all
           these
           bee
           euident
           testimonies
           ,
           that
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           was
           not
           the
           vulgar
           or
           natiue
           language
           of
           those
           parts
           ,
           yet
           ,
           among
           all
           none
           is
           more
           effectuall
           ,
           then
           that
           remembrance
           in
           the
           second
           Chapter
           of
           the
           Acts
           ,
           
           
             Act.
             2.9
             .
             &
             1●
             .
          
           where
           diuers
           of
           those
           Regions
           ,
           as
           
             Cappadocia
             ,
             Pontus
             ,
             Asia
             ,
             Phrygia
             ,
          
           and
           Pamphylia
           ,
           are
           brought
           in
           for
           instances
           of
           differing
           
           languages
           .
        
         
           Fiftly
           ,
           Of
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           the
           maritime
           coast
           of
           Thrace
           ,
           not
           onely
           from
           Hellespont
           to
           Byzantium
           ,
           (
           which
           was
           *
           
             *
             Dousa
             .
             I●in
             .
             Constantinopolit
             .
             pag.
             24.
             
          
           that
           part
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           in
           the
           East
           corner
           of
           the
           Citie
           ,
           where
           the
           Serraile
           of
           the
           Great
           Turke
           now
           standeth
           )
           but
           aboue
           it
           ,
           all
           along
           to
           the
           out-lets
           of
           Danubius
           .
           And
           yet
           beyond
           them
           also
           ;
           I
           finde
           many
           Greeke
           Citties
           to
           haue
           beene
           planted
           along
           that
           coast
           ,
           
           
             Scylax
             Carimand
             .
             in
             Periple
             .
             Iornand
             de
             Reb.
             Getic
             .
             c.
             5
             
          
           (
           Scylax
           of
           Carianda
           is
           my
           Author
           with
           some
           others
           )
           as
           far
           as
           the
           Strait
           of
           Caffa
           ,
           and
           specially
           in
           Taurica
           .
           Yea
           ,
           and
           beyond
           that
           strait
           also
           Eastward
           ,
           along
           all
           the
           sea
           coast
           of
           Circassia
           ,
           and
           Mengrelia
           ,
           to
           the
           riuer
           of
           Phasis
           ,
           &
           thence
           compassing
           to
           Trebizond
           ,
           I
           finde
           mention
           of
           many
           scattered
           Greeke
           Cities
           :
           that
           is
           ,
           (
           to
           speake
           briefly
           )
           in
           all
           the
           circumference
           of
           the
           Euxine
           Sea.
           
        
         
           Sixtly
           ,
           (
           from
           the
           East
           and
           North
           to
           turne
           toward
           the
           West
           )
           it
           was
           the
           language
           of
           al
           the
           West
           ,
           and
           South
           Ilands
           ,
           that
           lie
           along
           the
           coast
           of
           Greece
           ,
           from
           Candie
           to
           Corfu
           ,
           which
           also
           was
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           withall
           ,
           of
           that
           fertile
           Sicilie
           ,
           in
           which
           one
           Iland
           ,
           I
           haue
           obserued
           in
           good
           histories
           ,
           aboue
           30.
           
           Greeke
           Colonies
           ;
           to
           haue
           beene
           planted
           ,
           and
           some
           of
           them
           goodly
           cities
           ,
           
           
             Scrab
             L.
             6.
             in
             medi●
             .
          
           specially
           Agrigentum
           and
           Syracusa
           ,
           which
           later
           Strabo
           hath
           recorded
           to
           haue
           beene
           180.
           furlongs
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           of
           our
           miles
           22.
           and
           ½
           in
           circuit
           .
        
         
           Seuenthly
           ,
           Not
           onely
           of
           all
           the
           maritime
           coast
           of
           Italy
           ,
           that
           lyeth
           on
           the
           Tyrrhene
           Sea
           ,
           from
           the
           riuer
           Garigliano
           ,
           (
           Liris
           it
           was
           formerly
           called
           )
           to
           Leucopetra
           ,
           the
           most
           Southerly
           point
           of
           Italie
           ,
           for
           all
           that
           shoare
           being
           neere
           about
           240.
           miles
           ,
           was
           
           inhabited
           with
           Greeke
           colonies
           :
           And
           thence
           forward
           ,
           of
           all
           that
           end
           of
           Italie
           ,
           that
           lieth
           towards
           the
           Ionian
           sea
           ,
           about
           the
           great
           baies
           of
           Squilacci
           and
           Taranto
           (
           which
           was
           so
           thicke
           set
           with
           great
           and
           goodly
           Citties
           of
           Grecians
           ,
           that
           it
           gained
           the
           name
           of
           
             Magna
             Graecia
          
           )
           but
           ,
           beyond
           that
           also
           ,
           of
           a
           great
           part
           of
           Apulia
           ,
           lying
           towards
           the
           Adriatique
           sea
           .
           Neither
           did
           these
           maritime
           parts
           onely
           ,
           but
           ,
           as
           it
           seemeth
           the
           Inland
           people
           also
           towards
           that
           end
           of
           Italie
           ,
           speake
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           .
           For
           I
           haue
           seene
           a
           few
           olde
           coines
           of
           the
           Brutians
           ,
           and
           more
           may
           be
           seene
           in
           Goltzius
           hauing
           Greeke
           inscriptions
           ,
           wherein
           I
           obserue
           they
           are
           named
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
           
             Goltz
             .
             in
             Num●smat
             .
             Magnae
             Greciae
             Tab.
             24.
             
          
           with
           an
           ae
           ,
           and
           two
           tt
           .
           and
           not
           as
           the
           Romane
           writers
           terme
           them
           ,
           Brutij
           .
           And
           I
           haue
           seene
           one
           peece
           also
           of
           Pandosia
           ,
           an
           inlād
           Citie
           of
           those
           parts
           ,
           with
           the
           like
           .
           Neither
           was
           the
           vulgare
           vse
           of
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           vtterly
           extinct
           in
           some
           of
           those
           parts
           of
           Italie
           ,
           
           
             Galat
             in
             descriptione
             Callipolis
             .
          
           till
           of
           late
           :
           for
           Galateus
           a
           learned
           man
           of
           that
           Country
           ,
           hath
           left
           written
           ,
           that
           when
           he
           was
           a
           boy
           ,
           (
           and
           he
           liued
           about
           .
           120.
           yeares
           agoe
           )
           they
           spake
           Greeke
           in
           Callipollis
           a
           Cittie
           on
           the
           East
           shore
           of
           the
           Bay
           of
           Taranto
           .
           But
           yet
           it
           continued
           in
           Ecclesiasticall
           vse
           in
           some
           other
           parts
           of
           that
           region
           of
           Italie
           much
           later
           :
           
           
             Bar.
             lib.
             5.
             de
             Antiquit.
             Calabriae
             .
          
           for
           
             Gabriel
             Barrius
          
           that
           liued
           but
           about
           40.
           yeares
           since
           ,
           hath
           left
           recorded
           ,
           that
           the
           Church
           of
           Rossano
           (
           an
           Archiepiscopall
           Cittie
           in
           the
           vpper
           Calabria
           )
           retained
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           and
           ceremony
           till
           his
           time
           ,
           and
           then
           became
           Latine
           .
           
           
             Rocca
             Tract
             .
             de
             Dialectis
             in
             Italica
             li●gua
             .
          
           Nay
           ,
           to
           descend
           yet
           a
           little
           neerer
           the
           present
           time
           ,
           
             Angelus
             Rocca
          
           that
           writ
           but
           about
           20.
           yeares
           agoe
           ,
           hath
           obserued
           ,
           that
           he
           found
           in
           
           some
           parts
           of
           Calabria
           ,
           and
           Apulia
           ,
           some
           remainders
           of
           the
           Greeke
           speech
           to
           be
           still
           retained
           .
        
         
           Eightly
           ,
           and
           Lastly
           ,
           that
           shoare
           of
           Fraunce
           ,
           that
           lieth
           towards
           the
           mediterraine
           sea
           ,
           from
           Rodanus
           to
           Italie
           ,
           was
           possessed
           with
           Grecians
           ,
           for
           *
           
             *
             Strab.
             l.
             4.
             non
             long
             .
             a
             princip
             .
             Thuscid
             .
             l
             1.
             
          
           Massilia
           was
           a
           Colonie
           of
           the
           Phoceans
           ,
           and
           from
           it
           many
           other
           Colonies
           were
           deriued
           ,
           and
           *
           
             *
             Strab.
             loco
             citato
             .
             Plin.
             L.
             3.
             
             C.
             5.
             
          
           placed
           along
           that
           shore
           ,
           as
           farre
           as
           Nicaea
           ,
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           Italie
           ,
           which
           also
           was
           one
           of
           them
           .
        
         
           And
           yet
           beside
           all
           these
           forenamed
           ,
           I
           could
           recken
           vp
           verie
           manie
           other
           dispersed
           Colonies
           of
           the
           Greekes
           both
           in
           Europe
           ,
           and
           Asia
           ,
           and
           some
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           for
           although
           I
           remember
           not
           ,
           that
           I
           haue
           read
           in
           any
           history
           ,
           any
           Colonies
           of
           the
           Grecians
           to
           haue
           beene
           planted
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           any
           where
           from
           the
           greater
           Syrtis
           Westward
           ,
           except
           one
           in
           Cirta
           ,
           a
           Cittie
           of
           Numidia
           ,
           placed
           there
           by
           Micipsa
           the
           son
           of
           Masinissa
           ,
           as
           is
           mentioned
           in
           Strabo
           :
           yet
           thence
           Eastward
           it
           is
           certaine
           some
           were
           :
           
           
             Strab.
             L.
             17.
             
          
           for
           the
           great
           Citties
           of
           Cyrene
           ,
           and
           Alexandria
           ,
           were
           both
           Greeke
           .
           And
           it
           is
           euident
           ,
           not
           onely
           in
           *
           
             *
             Loco
             iam
             citato
             .
             Ptolō
             .
             Tab.
             3.
             
             Africae
             .
             Mela.
             l.
             1.
             
             C.
             8.
             
          
           Strabo
           and
           Ptolemie
           ,
           but
           in
           Mela
           ,
           and
           other
           Latine
           writers
           ,
           that
           most
           of
           the
           Citties
           of
           that
           part
           carried
           Greeke
           names
           .
           And
           Lastly
           ,
           Hierome
           hath
           directly
           recorded
           ,
           that
           Libia
           ,
           which
           is
           properly
           that
           part
           of
           Afrique
           adioyning
           to
           Aegypt
           ,
           was
           full
           of
           Greeke
           Citties
           .
        
         
           These
           were
           the
           places
           ,
           where
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           was
           natiuely
           and
           vulgarly
           spoken
           ,
           
           
             Hieroni●
             .
             Loco
             supra
             citato
             .
          
           either
           originally
           ,
           or
           by
           reason
           of
           Colonies
           .
           But
           yet
           for
           other
           causes
           ,
           it
           became
           much
           more
           large
           and
           generall
           .
           One
           was
           the
           loue
           of
           Philosophie
           ,
           and
           the
           liberall
           arts
           ,
           
           written
           in
           a
           manner
           onely
           in
           Greeke
           .
           Another
           ,
           the
           exceeding
           great
           trade
           and
           traffique
           of
           Grecians
           ,
           in
           which
           ,
           aboue
           all
           nations
           ,
           except
           perhaps
           the
           old
           Phenicians
           (
           to
           whom
           yet
           they
           seeme
           not
           to
           haue
           beene
           inferior
           )
           they
           imployed
           themselues
           .
           A
           third
           ,
           beyond
           all
           these
           ,
           because
           those
           great
           Princes
           ,
           among
           whom
           al
           that
           Alexander
           the
           Great
           had
           conquered
           ,
           was
           diuided
           ,
           were
           Grecians
           ,
           which
           for
           manie
           reasons
           ,
           could
           not
           but
           exceedingly
           spreade
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           in
           all
           those
           parts
           where
           they
           were
           Gouernors
           :
           among
           whom
           ,
           euen
           one
           alone
           ,
           Seleucus
           by
           name
           ,
           is
           registred
           by
           Appian
           ,
           to
           haue
           founded
           in
           the
           East
           parts
           vnder
           his
           gouernement
           ,
           
           
             Appian
             .
             L.
             de
             Bel●s
             Syriac
             .
          
           at
           least
           60
           Citties
           ,
           al
           of
           them
           carrying
           Greeke
           names
           ,
           or
           else
           named
           after
           his
           father
           ,
           his
           wiues
           ,
           or
           himselfe
           .
           And
           yet
           was
           there
           a
           fourth
           cause
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           after
           time
           greatly
           furthered
           this
           inlargement
           of
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           namely
           the
           imployment
           of
           Grecians
           in
           the
           gouerment
           of
           the
           prouinces
           ,
           after
           the
           translation
           of
           the
           Imperiall
           seate
           to
           Constantinople
           .
           For
           these
           causes
           I
           say
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           mixture
           of
           Greeke
           Colonies
           ,
           dispersed
           in
           many
           places
           (
           in
           which
           fruitfulnesse
           of
           Colonies
           ,
           the
           Grecians
           far
           passed
           the
           Romanes
           )
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           spred
           very
           farre
           ,
           especially
           towards
           the
           East
           .
           In
           so
           much
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           Orient
           (
           which
           yet
           must
           be
           vnderstoode
           with
           limitation
           ,
           namely
           the
           Orientall
           part
           of
           the
           Romane
           Empire
           ,
           or
           to
           speake
           in
           the
           phrase
           of
           those
           times
           ,
           the
           dioces
           of
           the
           Orient
           ,
           which
           contained
           
             Syria
             ,
             Palestine
             ,
             Cilicia
          
           ,
           and
           part
           of
           Mesopotaneia
           and
           of
           Arabia
           )
           is
           said
           by
           Hierome
           ,
           
           
             Hieror
             .
             bisuper
             .
          
           to
           haue
           spoken
           Greeke
           :
           which
           also
           Isidore
           ,
           
           specially
           obserueth
           ,
           in
           Aegypt
           ,
           and
           Syria
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           the
           Dorique
           dialect
           .
           
           
             I●●dor
             .
             Origin
             .
             L.
             9
             C.
             1.
             
          
           And
           this
           great
           glory
           ,
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           held
           in
           the
           Apostles
           time
           ,
           and
           long
           after
           ,
           in
           the
           Easterne
           parts
           ,
           till
           by
           the
           inundation
           of
           the
           Saracens
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           it
           came
           to
           ruine
           in
           those
           prouinces
           ,
           about
           .
           640
           yeares
           after
           the
           birth
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           namely
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Emperour
           Heraclius
           (
           the
           Arabians
           bringing
           in
           their
           language
           together
           with
           their
           victories
           ,
           into
           all
           the
           regions
           they
           subdued
           )
           euen
           as
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           is
           supposed
           to
           haue
           perished
           by
           the
           inundation
           and
           mixture
           of
           the
           Gothes
           ,
           and
           other
           barbarous
           nations
           in
           the
           West
           .
        
      
       
         
           Of
           the
           Decaying
           of
           the
           ancient
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           present
           vulgar
           Greeke
           .
           CHAP.
           2.
           
        
         
           BVt
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           is
           very
           much
           decayed
           ,
           not
           onely
           as
           touching
           the
           largenesse
           ,
           and
           vulgarnesse
           of
           it
           ,
           but
           also
           in
           the
           purenesse
           and
           elegancy
           of
           the
           language
           .
           For
           as
           touching
           the
           former
           ,
           First
           ,
           in
           
             Italie
             ,
             Fraunce
          
           ,
           and
           other
           places
           to
           the
           West
           ,
           the
           naturall
           languages
           of
           the
           countries
           haue
           vsurped
           vpon
           it
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           in
           the
           skirts
           of
           Greece
           it selfe
           ,
           namely
           in
           Epirus
           ,
           and
           that
           part
           of
           Macedon
           ,
           that
           lieth
           towards
           the
           Adriatique
           
           sea
           ,
           the
           Sclauonique
           tongue
           hath
           extinguished
           it
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           in
           Anatolia
           ,
           the
           Turkish
           tongue
           hath
           for
           a
           great
           part
           suppressed
           it
           .
           And
           Lastly
           ,
           in
           the
           more
           Eastward
           ,
           and
           South
           parts
           ,
           as
           in
           that
           part
           of
           Cilicia
           ,
           that
           is
           beyond
           the
           riuer
           Piramus
           ,
           in
           
             Siria
             ,
             Palestine
             ,
             Aegypt
          
           and
           Libia
           ,
           the
           Arabian
           tongue
           hath
           abolished
           it
           :
           Abolished
           it
           I
           say
           ,
           namely
           ,
           as
           touching
           any
           vulgar
           vse
           ,
           for
           ,
           as
           touching
           Ecclesiasticall
           vse
           ,
           many
           Christians
           of
           those
           parts
           still
           retaine
           it
           in
           their
           Leiturgies
           .
           So
           that
           ,
           the
           parts
           in
           which
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           is
           spoken
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           are
           (
           in
           few
           words
           )
           but
           these
           .
           First
           Greece
           it selfe
           (
           excepting
           Epirus
           ,
           and
           the
           West
           part
           of
           Macedon
           .
           )
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           Isles
           of
           the
           Aegaean
           sea
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           Candie
           ,
           &
           the
           Isles
           Eastward
           of
           Candie
           ,
           along
           the
           coast
           of
           Asia
           to
           Cyprus
           (
           although
           in
           Cyprus
           ,
           diuers
           other
           languages
           are
           spoken
           ,
           beside
           the
           Greeke
           )
           and
           likewise
           the
           Isles
           Westward
           of
           Candia
           ,
           along
           the
           Coastes
           of
           Greece
           ,
           and
           Epirus
           ,
           to
           Corfu
           .
           And
           Lastly
           ,
           a
           good
           part
           of
           Anatolia
           .
        
         
           But
           as
           I
           said
           ,
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           is
           not
           onely
           thus
           restrained
           ,
           in
           comparison
           of
           the
           ancient
           extention
           that
           it
           had
           ,
           but
           it
           is
           also
           much
           degenerated
           and
           impaired
           ,
           as
           touching
           the
           purenesse
           of
           speech
           ,
           being
           ouergrowne
           with
           barbarousnesse
           :
           But
           yet
           not
           without
           some
           rellish
           of
           the
           ancient
           elegancie
           .
           Neither
           is
           it
           altogether
           so
           much
           declined
           from
           the
           antient
           Greeke
           ,
           
           
             Bellon
             .
             Obseruat
             .
             L.
             1.
             c.
             3
             Turcogroec
             .
             L.
             3.
             
             &
             5.
             
          
           as
           the
           Italian
           is
           departed
           from
           the
           Latine
           ,
           as
           Bellonius
           hath
           also
           obserued
           ,
           and
           by
           conferring
           of
           diuers
           Epistles
           of
           the
           present
           language
           ,
           which
           you
           may
           finde
           in
           Crusius
           his
           Turcograecia
           ,
           with
           the
           ancient
           tongue
           ,
           may
           be
           put
           out
           of
           question
           ,
           
           which
           corruption
           yet
           ,
           certainely
           hath
           not
           befallen
           that
           language
           ,
           through
           any
           inundation
           of
           barbarous
           people
           ,
           as
           is
           supposed
           to
           haue
           altered
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           ,
           for
           although
           I
           know
           Greece
           to
           haue
           beene
           ouerrunne
           ,
           &
           wasted
           ,
           by
           the
           Gothes
           ,
           yet
           I
           finde
           not
           in
           histories
           ,
           any
           remembrance
           of
           their
           habitation
           ,
           or
           long
           continuance
           in
           Greece
           ,
           &
           of
           their
           coalition
           into
           one
           people
           with
           the
           Grecians
           ,
           without
           which
           ,
           I
           conceaue
           not
           ,
           how
           the
           tongue
           could
           be
           greatly
           altered
           by
           them
           .
           And
           yet
           certaine
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           long
           before
           the
           Turkes
           came
           among
           them
           ,
           their
           language
           was
           growne
           to
           the
           corruption
           wherein
           now
           it
           is
           ,
           for
           that
           ,
           in
           the
           writings
           of
           
             Cedrenus
             ,
             Nicetas
          
           ,
           and
           some
           other
           late
           Greekes
           ,
           (
           although
           long
           before
           the
           Turkes
           inuasion
           )
           there
           is
           found
           ,
           notwithstanding
           they
           were
           learned
           men
           ,
           a
           strong
           rellish
           of
           this
           barbarousnesse
           :
           Insomuch
           that
           the
           learned
           Grecians
           themselues
           ,
           
           
             Ge●●ach
             .
             in
             epist
             .
             ad
             Crusi●m
             .
             TurcoGrae●
             .
             L.
             7.
             pag.
             489.
             
          
           acknowledge
           it
           to
           bee
           very
           ancient
           ,
           and
           are
           vtterly
           ignorant
           ,
           when
           it
           began
           in
           their
           language
           :
           which
           is
           to
           me
           a
           certaine
           argument
           ,
           that
           it
           had
           no
           violent
           nor
           sodaine
           beginning
           ,
           by
           the
           mixture
           of
           other
           forrain
           nations
           among
           thē
           ,
           but
           hath
           gotten
           into
           their
           language
           ,
           by
           the
           ordinarie
           change
           ,
           which
           time
           and
           many
           common
           occasions
           that
           attend
           on
           time
           ,
           are
           wont
           to
           bring
           to
           all
           languages
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           for
           which
           reason
           ,
           the
           corruption
           of
           speech
           growing
           vpon
           them
           ,
           by
           little
           and
           little
           ,
           the
           change
           hath
           beene
           vnsensible
           .
           Yet
           it
           cannot
           be
           denied
           (
           and
           *
           
             *
             ●
             Zygomalos
             in
             Epist.
             ad
             Cius
             .
             Turcog
             .
             pag.
             
          
           some
           of
           the
           Grecians
           themselues
           confesse
           so
           much
           )
           that
           beside
           many
           Romane
           words
           ,
           which
           from
           the
           translation
           of
           the
           imperiall
           seate
           
           to
           Constantinople
           ,
           began
           to
           creepe
           into
           their
           language
           ,
           as
           we
           may
           obserue
           in
           diuers
           Greeke
           writers
           of
           good
           antiquitie
           ,
           some
           Italian
           words
           also
           ,
           and
           Slauonian
           ,
           and
           Arabique
           ,
           and
           Turkish
           ,
           and
           of
           other
           nations
           ,
           are
           gotten
           into
           their
           language
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           great
           traffique
           and
           commerce
           ,
           which
           those
           people
           exercise
           with
           the
           Grecians
           .
           For
           which
           cause
           ,
           as
           Bellonius
           hath
           obserued
           ,
           
           
             Bello●
             .
             Obseruat
             .
             L.
             1.
             
             C
             3.
             
          
           it
           is
           more
           altered
           in
           the
           maritime
           parts
           ,
           and
           such
           other
           places
           of
           foraigne
           concourse
           ,
           then
           in
           the
           inner
           region
           .
           But
           yet
           ,
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           the
           corruption
           of
           that
           language
           ,
           hath
           beene
           bred
           at
           home
           ,
           and
           proceeded
           from
           no
           other
           cause
           ,
           then
           their
           owne
           negligence
           ,
           or
           affectation
           .
           As
           First
           ,
           (
           for
           example
           )
           by
           mutilation
           of
           some
           words
           ,
           pronouncing
           and
           writing
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           for
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           for
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           &c.
           
           
           
             Vide
             Crus
             .
             Turcograec
             .
             pag.
             44.224.242.391
             398.399
             .
             &c.
             
          
           Secondly
           ,
           by
           compaction
           of
           seuerall
           words
           into
           one
           ,
           as
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           for
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           for
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           &c.
           
           Thirdly
           ,
           by
           confusion
           of
           sounde
           ,
           as
           making
           no
           difference
           in
           the
           pronouncing
           of
           three
           vowels
           ,
           namely
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           and
           two
           dipthongues
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           all
           which
           fiue
           they
           pronounce
           by
           one
           letter
           i
           ,
           a
           s
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           they
           pronounce
           
             icos
             ,
             icon
             ,
             stithi
             ,
             lipi.
          
           Fourthly
           ,
           by
           translation
           of
           accents
           ,
           from
           the
           syllables
           to
           which
           in
           ancient
           pronoūcing
           they
           belonged
           ,
           to
           others
           .
           And
           all
           those
           foure
           kindes
           of
           corruption
           ,
           are
           very
           common
           in
           their
           language
           :
           for
           which
           reasons
           ,
           and
           for
           some
           others
           ,
           which
           may
           bee
           obserued
           in
           
             Crusius
             ,
             Burrana
          
           ,
           
           
             Burran
             .
             in
             Coron
             .
             pretiosa
             .
          
           &c.
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           is
           become
           much
           altered
           (
           euen
           in
           the
           proper
           and
           natiue
           words
           of
           the
           language
           )
           from
           what
           anciently
           it
           was
           .
           Yet
           neuerthelesse
           it
           is
           recorded
           by
           some
           ,
           that
           haue
           
           taken
           diligent
           obseruation
           of
           that
           tongue
           ,
           
           
             Gerlach
             .
             apud
             C●us
             .
             l.
             7.
             
             Turcograec
             .
             pag.
             489.
             
          
           in
           the
           seuerall
           parts
           of
           Greece
           ,
           that
           there
           be
           yet
           in
           
             Morea
             ,
             (
             Peloponnesus
          
           )
           betwixt
           Napoli
           and
           Monembasia
           (
           Nauplia
           and
           Epidaurus
           they
           were
           called
           )
           some
           14
           townes
           ,
           the
           Inhabitants
           where
           are
           called
           Zacones
           (
           for
           Lacones
           )
           that
           speake
           yet
           the
           ancient
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           but
           farre
           out
           of
           Grammer
           rule
           :
           yet
           ,
           they
           vnderstand
           those
           that
           speake
           grammaticallie
           ,
           but
           vnderstand
           not
           the
           vulgar
           Greeke
           .
           
           
             Bellon
             .
             Obseru
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             111.
             
          
           As
           Bellonius
           likewise
           remembreth
           another
           place
           ,
           neere
           Heraclea
           in
           Anatolia
           ,
           that
           yet
           retaineth
           the
           pure
           Greeke
           for
           their
           vulgar
           language
           .
           But
           the
           few
           places
           being
           excepted
           ,
           it
           is
           certaine
           ,
           that
           the
           difference
           is
           become
           so
           great
           ,
           betwixt
           the
           present
           and
           the
           ancient
           Greeke
           that
           their
           liturgie
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Burdouitz
             .
             in
             epist.
             ad
             Chitrae
             .
             apud
             Illū
             in
             Lib
             de
             Statu
             Ecclesia●
             .
             pag.
             47.
             
          
           which
           is
           yet
           read
           in
           the
           ancient
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           namely
           that
           of
           Basil
           ,
           on
           the
           Sabbaths
           and
           solemne
           daies
           ,
           and
           that
           of
           Chrysostome
           on
           common
           daies
           ,
           is
           not
           vnderstood
           (
           or
           but
           little
           of
           it
           )
           by
           the
           vulgar
           people
           ,
           as
           learned
           men
           that
           haue
           beene
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           haue
           related
           to
           *
           
             *
             Vid.
             Chitrae
             .
             loc
             .
             citato
             ,
             &
             Turcograec
             .
             Crusij
             .
             pag.
             327.
             
             &
             415.
             &c.
             
          
           others
           ,
           and
           to
           my selfe
           :
           which
           may
           be
           also
           more
           euidently
           prooued
           to
           bee
           true
           by
           this
           ,
           because
           the
           skilfull
           in
           the
           learned
           Greeke
           ,
           cannot
           vnderstand
           the
           vulgar
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           ancient
           largenesse
           of
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Roman
           Empire
           .
           CHAP.
           III.
           
        
         
           THe
           ordinary
           bounds
           of
           the
           Romane
           Empire
           were
           ,
           on
           the
           East
           part
           Euphrates
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           Tigris
           :
           On
           the
           North
           the
           Riuers
           of
           Rhene
           &
           of
           Danubius
           ,
           and
           the
           Euxine
           sea
           :
           On
           the
           West
           the
           Ocean
           :
           On
           the
           South
           the
           Cataracts
           of
           Nilus
           ,
           in
           the
           vtmost
           border
           of
           Aegypt
           ,
           and
           in
           Afrique
           the
           mountaine
           Atlas
           .
           Which
           ,
           beginning
           in
           the
           West
           ,
           on
           the
           shoare
           of
           the
           Ocean
           ,
           ouer
           against
           the
           Canarie
           Ilands
           ,
           runneth
           Eastward
           almost
           to
           Aegypt
           ,
           being
           in
           few
           places
           distant
           from
           the
           Mediterrane
           sea
           ,
           more
           then
           200
           miles
           .
           These
           I
           say
           ,
           were
           the
           ordinary
           bounds
           of
           that
           Empire
           in
           the
           Continent
           :
           for
           ,
           although
           the
           Romanes
           passed
           these
           bounds
           sometimes
           ,
           specially
           toward
           the
           East
           and
           North
           ,
           yet
           they
           kept
           little
           of
           what
           they
           wan
           ,
           but
           within
           those
           bounds
           mentioned
           ,
           the
           Empire
           was
           firmely
           established
           .
           But
           heere
           ,
           in
           our
           great
           Isle
           of
           Britaine
           ,
           the
           Pictes
           wall
           was
           the
           limit
           of
           it
           ,
           passing
           by
           Newcastle
           ,
           and
           Carleil
           ,
           from
           Tinmouth
           on
           the
           East
           sea
           ,
           to
           Solway
           frith
           on
           the
           West
           ,
           being
           *
           
             *
             Spartian
             .
             in
             Hadriano
             &
             in
             Seuero
             .
          
           first
           begunne
           by
           the
           Emperour
           Adrian
           ,
           and
           after
           finished
           or
           rather
           repaired
           ,
           by
           
             Septimius
             Seuerus
          
           .
        
         
           To
           this
           greatnesse
           of
           Dominion
           ,
           Rome
           at
           last
           arriued
           from
           her
           small
           beginnings
           .
           And
           small
           her
           
           beginnings
           were
           indeed
           ,
           considering
           the
           huge
           dominion
           to
           which
           she
           attained
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           the
           Circuit
           of
           the
           Cittie
           wall
           ,
           at
           the
           first
           building
           of
           it
           ,
           by
           Romulus
           in
           Mount
           Palatine
           ,
           could
           not
           be
           fully
           one
           mile
           :
           for
           the
           Hill
           it selfe
           ,
           as
           is
           obserued
           by
           
             Andrea
             Fuluio
          
           ,
           
           
             And
             ▪
             Fulu
             .
             l.
             2.
             
             Antiq.
             Rom.
             Ca.
             3.
             
          
           a
           Citizen
           and
           Antiquarie
           of
           Rome
           ,
           hath
           no
           more
           in
           circuite
           :
           And
           ,
           that
           Romulus
           bounded
           the
           Pomerium
           of
           the
           Citie
           (
           which
           extended
           somewhat
           beyond
           the
           wall
           )
           with
           the
           foot
           of
           that
           hill
           in
           compasse
           Gellius
           hath
           left
           registred
           .
           
           
             Gell.
             L.
             13.
             
             C.
             14.
             
             Strab.
             L.
             1.
             
          
           Secondly
           the
           Territorie
           and
           liberties
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           Strabo
           hath
           remembred
           ,
           extended
           at
           the
           first
           ,
           where
           it
           stretched
           farthest
           scarse
           six
           miles
           from
           the
           Citie
           .
           And
           thirdly
           ,
           the
           first
           Inhabitants
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           I
           finde
           recorded
           in
           Dionysius
           of
           Halicarnassus
           ,
           
           
             Dionys
             Hal.
             l.
             2.
             
             Antiq.
             Romanar
             .
          
           were
           not
           in
           number
           aboue
           3300
           ,
           at
           the
           most
           .
           Yet
           ,
           with
           Time
           ,
           and
           fortunate
           successe
           ,
           
           
             Vopisc
             .
             in
             Aureliano
             ,
          
           Rome
           so
           increased
           ,
           that
           in
           Aurelianus
           his
           time
           ,
           the
           circuit
           of
           the
           Citie
           wall
           ,
           was
           50.
           miles
           ,
           as
           Vopiscus
           hath
           recorded
           :
           And
           the
           Dominion
           ,
           grew
           to
           the
           largenesse
           aboue
           mentioned
           ,
           containing
           about
           3000
           miles
           in
           length
           ,
           and
           about
           1200
           in
           breadth
           :
           and
           lastly
           the
           number
           of
           free
           Cittizens
           ,
           euen
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Marius
           ,
           that
           is
           long
           before
           forraine
           Citties
           and
           Countries
           ,
           beganne
           to
           be
           receiued
           into
           participation
           of
           that
           freedome
           ,
           was
           found
           to
           be
           463000.
           as
           Eusebius
           hath
           remembred
           :
           
           
             Euseb.
             in
             Chronico
             .
             ad
             Olymp.
             174.
             
          
           Of
           free
           Cittizens
           I
           say
           ,
           (
           for
           they
           onely
           came
           into
           Cense
           )
           but
           if
           I
           should
           adde
           ,
           their
           wiues
           ,
           and
           Children
           ,
           and
           seruants
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           generally
           all
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Lipsius
             de
             Magni●
             .
             Romana
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             3.
             
          
           a
           learned
           man
           hath
           esteemed
           them
           ,
           and
           not
           without
           great
           likelihood
           of
           truth
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           no
           lesse
           ,
           then
           3.
           or
           4.
           millions
           .
        
         
         
           Beyond
           these
           bounds
           therefore
           of
           the
           Romane
           Empire
           ,
           (
           to
           speake
           to
           the
           point
           in
           hand
           )
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           could
           not
           be
           in
           any
           common
           vse
           ,
           as
           neither
           ,
           to
           speake
           of
           our
           kings
           dominions
           ,
           in
           
             Ireland
             ,
             Scotland
          
           ,
           nor
           Northumberland
           ,
           as
           being
           no
           subiects
           of
           the
           Romane
           Empire
           .
           And
           that
           within
           these
           bounds
           ,
           it
           stretched
           farre
           and
           wide
           ,
           (
           in
           such
           maner
           as
           I
           will
           afterward
           declare
           )
           two
           Principall
           causes
           there
           were
           .
           One
           was
           ,
           the
           multitude
           of
           colonies
           ,
           which
           partly
           to
           represse
           rebellion
           in
           the
           subdued
           Prouinces
           ,
           partly
           to
           resist
           forrain
           inuasions
           ,
           partly
           to
           reward
           the
           ancient
           soldiers
           ,
           partly
           to
           abate
           the
           redundance
           of
           the
           City
           ,
           &
           relieue
           the
           poorer
           sort
           ,
           were
           sent
           foorth
           to
           inhabite
           in
           all
           the
           Prouinces
           of
           the
           Empire
           :
           Another
           ,
           was
           the
           donation
           of
           Roman
           freedome
           ,
           or
           Communication
           of
           the
           right
           and
           benefit
           of
           Romane
           Citizens
           ,
           to
           very
           many
           of
           the
           Prouinciall
           ,
           both
           Cities
           ,
           and
           Regions
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           all
           Italie
           obtained
           that
           freedome
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Sylla
           and
           Marius
           ,
           
           
             Appian
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Ciuil
             longe
             ante
             med
             .
          
           at
           the
           compounding
           of
           the
           Italian
           war
           ,
           as
           Appian
           hath
           recorded
           :
           All
           Italie
           I
           say
           ,
           as
           then
           it
           was
           called
           ,
           and
           bounded
           ,
           with
           the
           Riuers
           of
           Rubicon
           and
           Arnus
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           narrower
           part
           of
           Italie
           ,
           lying
           betwixt
           the
           Adriatique
           and
           the
           Tyrrhene
           seas
           .
           Secondly
           
             Iulius
             Caesar
          
           in
           like
           sort
           infranchized
           the
           rest
           of
           Italie
           ,
           that
           is
           the
           broder
           part
           ,
           named
           then
           
             Gallia
             Cisalpina
          
           ,
           as
           is
           remembred
           by
           Dion
           .
           
           
             Dion
             .
             l.
             41.
             
          
           But
           not
           long
           after
           ,
           the
           forraine
           Prouinces
           also
           ,
           began
           to
           be
           infranchized
           ,
           Fraunce
           being
           indued
           with
           the
           libertie
           of
           Roman
           Citizens
           by
           Galba
           ,
           as
           I
           find
           in
           Tacitus
           ;
           
           
             Ta
             cit
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Historia●
             .
             Plin.
             l.
             3.
             ca.
             3.
             
          
           Spaigne
           by
           Vespasian
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           in
           Plinie
           .
           And
           at
           last
           ,
           by
           
             Antonius
             Pius
          
           ,
           all
           without
           exception
           ,
           that
           were
           subiect
           
           to
           the
           Empire
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           appeareth
           by
           the
           testimonie
           of
           Vlpian
           in
           the
           Digests
           .
           
           
             Digest
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Tit
             de
             Statu
             hominum
             Leg.
             In
             Orbe
             Romano
             .
          
           The
           benefite
           of
           which
           Romane
           freedome
           ,
           they
           that
           would
           vse
           ,
           could
           not
           with
           honestie
           doe
           it
           ,
           remaining
           ignorant
           of
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           .
        
         
           These
           two
           as
           I
           haue
           said
           ,
           were
           the
           principall
           causes
           of
           inlarging
           that
           language
           :
           yet
           other
           there
           were
           also
           ,
           of
           great
           importance
           ,
           to
           further
           it
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           concerning
           Ambassages
           ,
           suites
           ,
           appeals
           ,
           or
           whatsoeuer
           other
           businesse
           of
           the
           Prouincials
           ,
           or
           forraines
           ,
           nothing
           was
           allowed
           to
           be
           handled
           ,
           or
           spoken
           in
           the
           Senate
           at
           Rome
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           Lawes
           whereby
           the
           prouinces
           were
           gouerned
           ,
           were
           all
           written
           in
           that
           language
           ,
           as
           being
           in
           all
           of
           them
           ,
           excepting
           onely
           municipall
           Cities
           ,
           the
           ordinarie
           Roman
           law
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           the
           *
           
             *
             Digest
             .
             l.
             42
             Tit.
             de
             re
             iudicata
             .
             Leg.
             Decret
             .
          
           Praetors
           of
           the
           Prouinces
           ,
           were
           not
           allowed
           to
           deliuer
           their
           Iudgements
           saue
           in
           that
           language
           :
           and
           we
           read
           in
           
             Dion
             Cassius
          
           ,
           of
           a
           principall
           man
           of
           Greece
           ,
           that
           by
           Claudius
           was
           put
           from
           the
           order
           of
           Iudges
           ,
           
           
             Dion
             .
             l.
             57.
             
             Val.
             Maxim.
             l.
             2
             c.
             2.
             
          
           for
           being
           ignorant
           of
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           :
           and
           to
           the
           same
           effect
           in
           
             Valerius
             Maximus
          
           ,
           that
           the
           Romane
           Magistrates
           would
           not
           giue
           audience
           to
           the
           Grecians
           ,
           (
           lesse
           therefore
           I
           take
           it
           to
           the
           Barbarous
           nations
           )
           saue
           in
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           .
           Fourthly
           the
           generall
           schooles
           ,
           erected
           in
           sundry
           Cities
           of
           the
           Prouinces
           ,
           wherof
           we
           finde
           mention
           in
           Tacitus
           ,
           
           
             Tacit.
             l.
             3.
             
             Annal.
             Heron.
             in
             ●p
             st
             .
             ad
             Rusticum
             .
             Tom.
             1.
             
          
           Hierome
           ,
           and
           others
           (
           in
           which
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           was
           the
           ordinary
           and
           allowed
           speech
           ,
           as
           is
           vsuall
           in
           vniuersities
           till
           this
           day
           )
           was
           no
           small
           furtherance
           to
           that
           language
           .
           And
           ,
           to
           conclude
           that
           the
           Romans
           had
           generally
           (
           at
           least
           in
           the
           after
           times
           ,
           
           when
           Rome
           was
           become
           a
           Monarchy
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           flourish
           of
           the
           Empire
           )
           great
           care
           to
           inlarge
           their
           tongue
           ,
           together
           with
           their
           dominion
           ,
           is
           by
           Augustine
           in
           his
           bookes
           
             de
             Ciuitate
             Dei
          
           ,
           
           
             August
             .
             de
             Ciuit.
             De●
             .
             lib.
             19.
             c.
             7.
             
          
           specially
           remembred
           .
           I
           said
           it
           was
           so
           in
           the
           after
           times
           ,
           for
           certainly
           ,
           that
           the
           Romanes
           were
           not
           very
           anciently
           ,
           possessed
           with
           that
           humour
           of
           spreading
           their
           language
           ,
           appeareth
           by
           Liuie
           ,
           in
           whom
           we
           finde
           recorded
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           granted
           the
           Cumanes
           ,
           
           
             Liu.
             Histor.
             Rom.
             l.
             4●
             
          
           for
           a
           fauour
           ,
           and
           at
           their
           suite
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           publiquely
           vse
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           ,
           not
           fully
           140
           yeares
           before
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Emperours
           :
           And
           yet
           was
           Cuma
           but
           about
           100
           miles
           distant
           from
           Rome
           ,
           and
           at
           that
           time
           the
           Romanes
           had
           conquered
           all
           
             Italie
             ,
             Sicilie
             ,
             Sardinia
          
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           part
           of
           Spaine
           .
        
         
           But
           yet
           in
           all
           the
           Prouinces
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           found
           not
           alike
           acceptance
           ,
           and
           successe
           ,
           but
           most
           inlarged
           and
           spread
           it selfe
           toward
           the
           North
           ,
           and
           West
           ,
           and
           South
           bounds
           ,
           for
           first
           ,
           that
           in
           al
           the
           regions
           of
           Pannonia
           it
           was
           known
           Velleius
           is
           mine
           Author
           :
           
           
             Vellei
             .
             lib.
             2.
             
             Strab.
             lib.
             3.
             
             &
             4.
             
          
           Secondly
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           spoken
           in
           Fraunce
           and
           
             Spaine
             ,
             Strabo
          
           :
           Thirdly
           ,
           that
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           
           
             Apulei
             in
             Floridis
             .
          
           Apuleius
           ▪
           And
           it
           seemeth
           the
           sermons
           of
           Cyprian
           ,
           and
           Augustine
           ,
           yet
           extant
           ,
           (
           of
           Augustine
           it
           is
           manifest
           )
           that
           they
           preached
           to
           the
           people
           in
           latin
           .
           But
           in
           the
           East
           parts
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           as
           in
           Greece
           ,
           and
           Asia
           ,
           and
           so
           likewise
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           from
           the
           greater
           Syrtis
           Eastward
           ,
           I
           cannot
           in
           my
           reading
           finde
           that
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           euer
           grew
           into
           any
           common
           vse
           .
           And
           the
           reason
           of
           it
           seemes
           to
           be
           ,
           for
           that
           in
           those
           parts
           of
           the
           Empire
           it
           became
           most
           frequent
           ,
           where
           the
           most
           ,
           and
           greatest
           Roman
           Colonies
           ,
           
           were
           planted
           .
           And
           therefore
           ouer
           all
           Italy
           ,
           it
           became
           in
           a
           maner
           vulgar
           ,
           wherin
           I
           haue
           obserued
           in
           Histories
           ,
           and
           in
           registers
           of
           ancient
           inscriptions
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           planted
           by
           the
           Romanes
           at
           seuerall
           times
           aboue
           150
           Colonies
           :
           as
           in
           Afrique
           also
           nere
           60
           ,
           (
           namely
           57
           )
           in
           Spaine
           29.
           in
           Fraunce
           ,
           as
           it
           stretched
           to
           Rhene
           26
           ,
           and
           so
           in
           Illyricum
           ,
           and
           other
           North
           parts
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           betweene
           the
           Adriatique
           sea
           ,
           and
           Danubius
           verie
           manie
           .
           And
           yet
           I
           doubt
           not
           ,
           but
           in
           all
           these
           parts
           ,
           more
           there
           were
           ,
           then
           any
           historie
           or
           ancient
           inscription
           that
           now
           remaines
           hath
           remembred
           .
        
         
           And
           contrariewise
           in
           those
           Countries
           ,
           where
           fewest
           Colonies
           were
           planted
           ,
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           grew
           nothing
           so
           common
           :
           as
           for
           example
           heere
           in
           Britaine
           ,
           there
           were
           but
           foure
           :
           those
           were
           1
           
             1
             Eboracum
             
          
           Yorke
           ,
           2
           
             2
             Debuna
             .
          
           Chester
           ,
           3
           
             3
             Is●a
             .
          
           Ca●rusk
           in
           Monmouth-shire
           ,
           and
           4
           
             4
             Camalodunum
             .
          
           Maldon
           in
           Essex
           (
           for
           London
           ,
           although
           recorded
           for
           one
           by
           Onuphrius
           ,
           
           
             Onuphr
             .
             in
             Imper.
             Rom.
             
          
           was
           none
           ,
           as
           is
           manifest
           by
           his
           owne
           *
           
             *
             Tacit.
             l.
             14.
             
             Annal.
             
          
           Author
           ,
           in
           the
           place
           that
           himselfe
           alleageth
           )
           and
           therefore
           we
           finde
           in
           the
           British
           tongue
           which
           yet
           remaineth
           in
           Wales
           ,
           but
           little
           rellish
           (
           to
           account
           of
           )
           or
           reliques
           of
           the
           Latine
           .
           And
           ,
           for
           this
           cause
           also
           partly
           ,
           the
           East
           prouinces
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           sauoured
           little
           or
           nothing
           of
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           .
           For
           first
           in
           Afrique
           beyond
           the
           greater
           Syrtis
           ,
           I
           find
           neuer
           a
           Roman
           Colonie
           :
           for
           Onuphrius
           ,
           
           
             Onuphr
             .
             lib.
             iam
             citato
             .
          
           that
           hath
           recorded
           *
           
             *
             Vide
             Digest
             .
             l.
             50.
             
             Tit.
             de
             Censibus
             Leg.
             s●●endum
             .
          
           
             Indicia
             Cyrenensium
          
           for
           one
           ,
           alleaging
           Vlpian
           for
           Author
           ,
           was
           deceiued
           by
           some
           faultie
           Copie
           of
           the
           Digests
           .
           For
           the
           corrected
           copies
           haue
           Zernensium
           ,
           and
           for
           Indicia
           ,
           is
           to
           be
           read
           
             in
             Dacia
          
           ,
           as
           is
           rightly
           obserued
           (
           for
           in
           it
           the
           Citie
           of
           Zerne
           was
           )
           
           by
           Pancirellus
           .
           Secondly
           in
           Aegypt
           ,
           there
           were
           but
           two
           :
           
           
             Pancirell
             .
             id
             Comment
             .
             Notit
             .
             Imper
             Orien●alis
             Cap.
             138
             ▪
             
          
           and
           to
           be
           briefe
           ,
           Syria
           ,
           onely
           excepted
           ,
           which
           had
           about
           20
           Romane
           Colonies
           ,
           but
           most
           of
           them
           late
           planted
           ,
           especially
           by
           
             Septimius
             Seuerus
          
           ,
           and
           his
           sonne
           Bassianus
           ,
           to
           strengthen
           that
           side
           of
           the
           Empire
           against
           the
           Parthians
           (
           and
           yet
           I
           find
           not
           that
           in
           Syria
           ,
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           ,
           euer
           obtained
           any
           vulgar
           vse
           )
           the
           rest
           ,
           had
           but
           verie
           few
           ,
           in
           proportion
           to
           the
           largenesse
           of
           those
           regions
           .
        
         
           Of
           which
           little
           estimation
           ,
           and
           vse
           of
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           ,
           in
           the
           East
           parts
           ,
           beside
           the
           want
           of
           Colonies
           forementioned
           ,
           and
           to
           omit
           their
           loue
           to
           their
           owne
           languages
           ,
           which
           they
           held
           to
           be
           more
           ciuill
           then
           the
           Roman
           ,
           another
           great
           cause
           was
           the
           Greek
           ,
           which
           they
           had
           in
           farre
           greater
           account
           ,
           both
           ,
           for
           learning
           sake
           (
           insomuch
           that
           Cicero
           confesseth
           ,
           Graeca
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             leguntur
             in
             omnibus
             fere
             gentibus
          
           ,
           
           
             Cicer.
             in
             〈◊〉
             pro
             Archi●
             poeta
             .
          
           
             Latina
             suis
             finibus
             ,
             exiguis
             sane
             ,
             continentur
          
           )
           and
           for
           traffique
           ,
           to
           both
           which
           ,
           the
           Graecians
           ,
           aboue
           all
           nations
           of
           the
           world
           were
           anciently
           giuen
           :
           to
           omit
           ,
           both
           the
           excellēcy
           of
           the
           tongue
           it self
           ,
           for
           soūd
           &
           copiousnes
           ,
           &
           that
           it
           had
           forestalled
           the
           Roman
           in
           those
           parts
           .
           And
           certainly
           ,
           in
           how
           little
           regard
           ,
           the
           Romā
           tong
           was
           had
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           in
           the
           Easterne
           Countries
           ,
           may
           appeare
           by
           this
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           learned
           men
           of
           those
           parts
           ,
           whereof
           most
           liued
           in
           the
           flourish
           of
           the
           Romane
           Empire
           ,
           haue
           written
           in
           Greeke
           ,
           and
           not
           in
           Latine
           :
           as
           
             Philo
             ,
             Iosephus
             ,
             Ignatius
             ,
             Iustine
             Martyr
             ,
             Clemens
             Alexandrinus
             ,
             Origen
             ,
             Eusebius
             ,
             Athanasius
             ,
             Basil
             ,
             Gregorie
             Nyssene
             ,
          
           and
           
             Nazianzene
             ,
             Cirill
          
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           and
           of
           
             Ierusalem
             ,
             Epiphanius
             ,
             Synetius
             ,
             Ptolemie
             Strabo
             ,
             Porphyrie
             ,
          
           &
           verie
           
           many
           others
           ,
           so
           that
           of
           all
           the
           writers
           that
           liued
           in
           Asia
           ,
           or
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           beyond
           the
           greater
           Syrtis
           ,
           I
           thinke
           wee
           haue
           not
           one
           Author
           in
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           :
           and
           yet
           more
           euidently
           ,
           may
           it
           appeare
           by
           another
           instance
           ,
           that
           I
           finde
           in
           the
           third
           generall
           Counsell
           held
           at
           Ephesus
           ,
           
           
             Consil.
             Ephesi●
             .
             Tom.
             2
             Cap
             13.
             
             Edit
             .
             Bin.
             
          
           where
           the
           letters
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           hauing
           beene
           read
           by
           his
           Legates
           ,
           in
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           ,
           it
           was
           requested
           by
           all
           the
           Bishops
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           bee
           translated
           into
           Greeke
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           they
           might
           be
           vnderstood
           .
           It
           is
           manifest
           therefore
           ,
           that
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           was
           neither
           vulgar
           ,
           nor
           familiar
           in
           the
           East
           ,
           when
           the
           learned
           men
           gathered
           out
           of
           all
           parts
           of
           the
           East
           vnderstood
           it
           not
           .
        
      
       
         
           That
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           abolished
           not
           the
           vulgar
           languages
           ,
           in
           the
           foraine
           prouinces
           of
           the
           Romane
           Empire
           .
           CHAP.
           IIII.
           
        
         
           OF
           the
           weake
           impression
           therefore
           of
           the
           Romane
           language
           in
           the
           East
           ,
           and
           large
           intertainement
           of
           it
           in
           the
           West
           ,
           and
           other
           parts
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           causes
           of
           both
           ,
           I
           haue
           said
           enough
           .
           But
           in
           what
           sort
           ,
           
           
             Galat.
             de
             Situ
             〈◊〉
             98.
             
          
           and
           how
           farre
           it
           preuailed
           ,
           namely
           ,
           whether
           so
           farre
           ,
           as
           to
           extinguish
           the
           ancient
           vulgar
           languages
           of
           those
           parts
           ,
           and
           it selfe
           ,
           in
           stead
           of
           
           them
           ,
           to
           become
           the
           natiue
           and
           vulgar
           tongue
           ,
           as
           Galateus
           hath
           pronounced
           touching
           the
           Punique
           ,
           
           
             V●r
             L.
             3
             de
             Trad●n●
             discipl●n
             &
             ad
             August
             de
             Cauit
             .
             Deid
             .
             19.
             
             ●
             .
             ●
             .
          
           and
           Viues
           with
           many
           others
           of
           the
           Gallique
           ,
           and
           Spanish
           ,
           I
           am
           next
           to
           consider
           .
        
         
           First
           therefore
           ,
           it
           is
           certainely
           obserued
           ,
           that
           there
           are
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           foureteene
           mother
           tongues
           in
           Europe
           (
           beside
           the
           Latine
           )
           which
           remaine
           ,
           not
           onely
           not
           abolished
           ,
           but
           little
           or
           nothing
           altered
           ,
           or
           impaired
           by
           the
           Romanes
           .
           And
           those
           are
           the
           1
           Irish
           ,
           spoken
           in
           Ireland
           ,
           and
           a
           good
           part
           of
           Scotland
           :
           the
           2
           Brittish
           ,
           in
           
             Wales
             ,
             Cornewaile
          
           ,
           and
           Brittaine
           of
           Fraunce
           :
           the
           3
           Cantabrian
           neere
           the
           Ocean
           ,
           3
           
             3
             Scaligan
             Diatrib
             de
             ling
             Europ●●
             .
          
           about
           the
           Pyrene
           ,
           hils
           ,
           both
           in
           Fraunce
           &
           Spaine
           :
           the
           4
           Arabique
           ,
           4
           
             4
             Merul.
             Cosm
             part
             .
             2.
             
             L
             ,
             2.
             
             C.
             8.
             
          
           in
           the
           steepie
           mountaines
           of
           Granata
           ,
           named
           Alpuxarras
           :
           the
           5
           Finnique
           ,
           5
           
             5
             Scalig.
             loco
             .
             citato
             .
          
           in
           Finland
           ,
           and
           Lapland
           :
           the
           6
           Dutch
           ,
           in
           
             Germanie
             ,
             Belgia
             ,
             Denmarke
             ,
             Norwey
             ,
          
           and
           Suedia
           :
           the
           old
           7
           Cauchian
           ,
           (
           I
           take
           it
           to
           be
           that
           ,
           for
           in
           that
           part
           the
           Cauchi
           inhabited
           )
           in
           East
           Frisland
           ,
           for
           *
           
             *
             Ortel
             .
             in
             Tab.
             Fris.
             Oriental
             .
          
           although
           to
           straungers
           they
           speake
           Dutch
           ,
           yet
           among
           themselues
           they
           vse
           a
           peculiar
           language
           of
           their
           owne
           :
           the
           8
           Slauonish
           ,
           in
           
             Polonia
             ,
             Bohemia
             ,
             Moscouia
             ,
             Russia
             ,
          
           and
           many
           other
           regions
           ,
           (
           wherof
           I
           will
           after
           intreate
           in
           due
           place
           )
           although
           with
           notable
           difference
           of
           dialect
           ,
           as
           also
           the
           Brittish
           ,
           and
           Dutch
           ,
           in
           the
           countries
           mentioned
           haue
           :
           the
           old
           9
           Illyrian
           ,
           in
           the
           Isle
           of
           Veggia
           ,
           on
           the
           East
           side
           of
           Istria
           in
           the
           day
           of
           Liburnia
           :
           the
           10
           Greeke
           ,
           in
           Greece
           ,
           and
           the
           Islands
           about
           it
           ,
           and
           part
           of
           Macedon
           ,
           and
           of
           Thrace
           :
           the
           old
           11
           Epirotique
           *
           
             *
             Scalig.
             loco
             citato
             .
          
           in
           the
           mountaine
           of
           Epirus
           :
           the
           12
           Hungarian
           in
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           that
           kingdome
           :
           the
           13
           Iazygian
           ,
           13
           
             13
             Bert.
             in
             Descript
             .
             Hungar
             .
          
           in
           the
           North
           side
           of
           Hungaria
           betwixt
           Danubius
           &
           Tibiscus
           ,
           
           vtterly
           differing
           from
           the
           Hungarian
           language
           :
           And
           lastly
           ,
           the
           14
           Tarturian
           ,
           of
           the
           Precopenses
           ,
           betweene
           the
           Riuers
           of
           Tanais
           and
           Borysthenes
           ,
           neere
           Maeotis
           and
           the
           Euxine
           sea
           ,
           for
           ,
           of
           the
           
             English
             ,
             Italian
             ,
             Spanish
          
           ,
           and
           French
           ,
           as
           being
           deriuations
           ,
           or
           rather
           degenerations
           ,
           the
           first
           of
           the
           Dutch
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           three
           of
           the
           Latine
           ,
           seeing
           I
           now
           speake
           onely
           of
           originall
           or
           mother
           languages
           ,
           I
           must
           bee
           silent
           :
           And
           of
           all
           these
           foureteene
           it
           is
           certaine
           ,
           except
           the
           Arabique
           ,
           which
           is
           known
           to
           haue
           entred
           since
           ,
           and
           perhaps
           the
           Hungarian
           ,
           about
           which
           there
           is
           difference
           among
           Antiquaries
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           in
           Europe
           in
           time
           of
           the
           Romane
           Empire
           ,
           and
           sixe
           or
           seuen
           of
           them
           ,
           within
           the
           Limites
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
        
         
           And
           indeede
           ,
           how
           hard
           a
           matter
           it
           is
           ,
           vtterly
           to
           abolish
           a
           vulgar
           language
           ,
           in
           a
           populous
           country
           ,
           where
           the
           Conquerers
           are
           in
           number
           farre
           inferiour
           to
           the
           natiue
           inhabitants
           ,
           whatsoeuer
           art
           bee
           practized
           to
           bring
           it
           about
           ,
           may
           well
           appeare
           by
           the
           vaine
           attempt
           of
           our
           Norman
           Conquerour
           :
           who
           although
           he
           compelled
           the
           English
           ,
           to
           teach
           their
           young
           children
           in
           the
           Schooles
           nothing
           but
           French
           ,
           and
           set
           downe
           all
           the
           Lawes
           of
           the
           Land
           in
           French
           ,
           and
           inforced
           all
           pleadings
           at
           the
           Law
           to
           be
           performed
           in
           that
           language
           (
           which
           custome
           continued
           till
           King
           Edward
           the
           third
           his
           daies
           ,
           who
           disanulled
           it
           )
           purposing
           thereby
           to
           haue
           conquered
           the
           language
           together
           with
           the
           land
           ,
           and
           to
           haue
           made
           all
           French
           :
           yet
           ,
           the
           number
           of
           English
           farre
           exceeding
           the
           Normans
           ,
           all
           was
           but
           labour
           lost
           ,
           and
           obtained
           no
           further
           effect
           ,
           then
           the
           mingling
           
           of
           a
           few
           French
           words
           with
           the
           English.
           And
           euen
           such
           also
           was
           the
           successe
           of
           the
           Franks
           among
           the
           Gaules
           ,
           of
           the
           Gothes
           among
           the
           Italians
           and
           Spanyards
           ,
           and
           may
           be
           obserued
           ,
           to
           be
           short
           in
           all
           such
           conquests
           ,
           where
           the
           Conquerors
           (
           being
           yet
           in
           number
           farre
           inferiour
           )
           mingle
           themselues
           with
           the
           natiue
           inhabitants
           .
           So
           that
           ,
           in
           those
           Coūtries
           onely
           the
           mutation
           of
           languages
           hath
           ensued
           vpon
           conquests
           ,
           where
           either
           the
           ancient
           inhabitants
           haue
           beene
           destroyed
           or
           driuen
           forth
           ,
           as
           wee
           see
           in
           our
           Country
           to
           haue
           followed
           of
           the
           Saxons
           victories
           ,
           against
           the
           Brittains
           ,
           or
           else
           at
           least
           in
           such
           sort
           diminished
           ,
           that
           in
           number
           they
           remained
           inferior
           ,
           or
           but
           little
           superior
           to
           the
           Conquerors
           ,
           whose
           reputation
           and
           authority
           might
           preuaile
           more
           then
           a
           small
           excesse
           of
           multitude
           .
           But
           (
           that
           I
           digresse
           no
           further
           )
           because
           certaine
           Countries
           are
           specially
           alleaged
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           Romaine
           tongue
           is
           supposed
           most
           to
           haue
           preuailed
           ,
           I
           will
           restraine
           my
           discourse
           to
           them
           alone
           .
        
         
           And
           First
           ,
           that
           both
           the
           Punique
           and
           Gallique
           tongues
           ,
           remained
           in
           the
           time
           of
           
             Alexander
             Seuerus
          
           the
           Emperour
           (
           about
           230
           yeares
           after
           our
           Sauiours
           birth
           )
           appeareth
           by
           Vlpian
           ,
           who
           liued
           at
           that
           time
           ,
           and
           was
           with
           the
           Emperour
           of
           principall
           reputation
           ,
           teaching
           ,
           that
           *
           
             *
             Digest
             .
             l.
             32.
             lege
             .
             Fidei
             commissa
             .
          
           
             Fidei
             commissa
          
           might
           be
           left
           ,
           not
           onely
           in
           Latine
           ,
           or
           Greeke
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           Punique
           or
           Gallique
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           vulgar
           language
           .
           Till
           that
           time
           therefore
           ,
           it
           seemeth
           euident
           ,
           that
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           had
           not
           swallowed
           vp
           these
           vulgar
           languages
           ,
           and
           it selfe
           become
           vulgar
           in
           stead
           of
           them
           .
           But
           to
           insist
           a
           little
           in
           either
           
           seuerally
           .
           First
           ,
           touching
           the
           
             Punique
             ,
             Aurelius
             ,
             Victor
          
           hath
           recorded
           of
           
             Septimius
             Seuerus
          
           ,
           
           
             Aur.
             Victor
             in
             Epitom
             .
             Sep
             ●m
             .
             Seuer
             .
          
           that
           he
           was
           ,
           
             Latinis
             literis
             sufficienter
             instructus
          
           ,
           but
           
             Punica
             eloquentia
             promptior
             ,
             quippe
             genitus
             apud
             Leptim
             prouintiae
             Africae
             .
          
           Of
           which
           Emperors
           sister
           also
           ,
           dwelling
           at
           Leptis
           (
           it
           is
           the
           Cittie
           we
           now
           call
           Tripolie
           in
           Barbarie
           )
           and
           comming
           to
           see
           him
           ,
           
           
             Spartian
             ▪
             in
             Seuero
             .
             post
             m●d
             .
          
           Spartianus
           hath
           left
           written
           ,
           that
           she
           so
           badly
           spake
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           ,
           (
           yet
           was
           *
           
             *
             Antonin
             in
             Itinerario
             .
             Hieron
             .
             in
             Proem
             .
             l.
             2.
             
             Com.
             Epist.
             ad
             Galat●n
             fine
             .
          
           Leptis
           a
           Roman
           Colonie
           )
           that
           the
           Emperour
           blushed
           at
           it
           .
           Secondly
           long
           after
           that
           ,
           Hierome
           hath
           recorded
           of
           his
           time
           ,
           that
           the
           Africans
           had
           somewhat
           altered
           their
           lanuage
           ,
           from
           the
           Phaenicians
           :
           the
           language
           therefore
           then
           remained
           ,
           for
           else
           how
           could
           he
           pronounce
           of
           the
           present
           difference
           ?
           Thirdly
           ,
           Augustine
           (
           somewhat
           yonger
           then
           Hierom
           ,
           though
           liuing
           at
           the
           same
           time
           )
           writeth
           ,
           not
           onely
           ,
           that
           *
           
             *
             August
             .
             de
             C●u
             .
             Dei.
             L.
             16.
             
             C.
             6.
             
          
           hee
           knew
           diuerse
           nations
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           that
           spake
           the
           Punique
           tongue
           ,
           but
           also
           more
           particularly
           in
           *
           
             *
             Id.
             Serm.
             25.
             de
             verb.
             Apost
             
          
           another
           place
           ,
           mentioning
           a
           knowne
           Punique
           prouerb
           ,
           he
           would
           speake
           it
           (
           he
           said
           )
           in
           the
           Latine
           ,
           because
           all
           his
           auditors
           (
           for
           Hippo
           where
           he
           preached
           was
           a
           Roman
           Colonie
           )
           vnderstood
           not
           the
           Punique
           tongue
           :
           And
           some
           *
           
             *
             Id.
             Expos.
             in
             Chrat
             .
             epist
             ad
             Roman
             .
          
           other
           passages
           could
           I
           alleage
           out
           of
           Augustine
           ,
           for
           the
           direct
           confirmation
           of
           this
           point
           ,
           if
           these
           were
           not
           euident
           and
           effectuall
           enough
           .
           Lastly
           ,
           
             Leo
             Africanus
          
           ,
           
           
             Leo
             1.
             
             Africa
             ,
             Lt.
             descript
             .
             Africae
             .
             cap.
             de
             Ling.
             Africanis
             .
          
           a
           man
           of
           late
           time
           ,
           and
           good
           reputation
           ,
           affirmeth
           that
           there
           remaine
           yet
           in
           Barbarie
           ,
           very
           many
           ,
           descended
           of
           the
           old
           inhabitants
           ,
           that
           speake
           the
           African
           tongue
           ,
           whereby
           it
           is
           apparent
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           neuer
           extinguished
           by
           the
           Romanes
           .
        
         
         
           Secondly
           ,
           touching
           the
           ancient
           Gallique
           tongue
           ,
           that
           it
           also
           remained
           ,
           and
           was
           not
           abolished
           by
           the
           Romane
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Strabo
           ,
           who
           flourished
           vnder
           
             Tiberius
             Caesars
          
           gouernment
           ,
           it
           appeareth
           in
           the
           fourth
           booke
           of
           his
           Geographie
           ,
           
           
             S●rab
             .
             l
             4.
             ●●
             princip
             .
          
           writing
           that
           the
           Aquitani
           differed
           altogether
           in
           language
           from
           the
           other
           Gaules
           ,
           and
           they
           somewhat
           among
           themselues
           .
           Nor
           after
           that
           in
           Tacitus
           his
           time
           ,
           
           
             Tacit.
             in
             〈◊〉
             Agricola
             .
          
           noting
           that
           the
           language
           of
           Fraunce
           ,
           differed
           little
           from
           that
           of
           Brittaine
           .
           No
           ,
           nor
           long
           after
           that
           ,
           in
           
             Alexander
             Seuerus
          
           his
           time
           ,
           for
           beside
           the
           authority
           of
           Vlpian
           before
           alleaged
           out
           of
           the
           Digestes
           ,
           it
           is
           manifest
           by
           Lampridius
           also
           ,
           
           
             Lamprid.
             in
             Alexand.
             Seuero
             ,
             longe
             post
             med
             .
          
           who
           in
           the
           life
           of
           the
           said
           Alexander
           ,
           remembreth
           of
           a
           Druide
           woman
           ,
           that
           when
           hee
           was
           passing
           along
           ,
           in
           his
           expedition
           against
           the
           Germaines
           ,
           through
           Fraunce
           ,
           cried
           out
           after
           him
           in
           the
           Gallique
           tong
           (
           what
           needed
           that
           obseruation
           of
           the
           Gallique
           tongue
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           the
           Romane
           ?
           )
           goe
           thy
           way
           (
           quoth
           she
           )
           and
           looke
           not
           for
           the
           victory
           ,
           
           
             Strab.
             l.
             4.
             l●●●ante
             med
             .
          
           &
           trust
           not
           thy
           souldiers
           .
           And
           though
           Strabo
           he
           alleadged
           by
           some
           ,
           to
           prooue
           the
           vulgarnesse
           of
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           in
           Fraunce
           ,
           yet
           is
           it
           manifest
           ,
           that
           he
           speaketh
           nof
           of
           all
           the
           Gaules
           ,
           but
           of
           certaine
           onely
           ,
           in
           the
           prouince
           of
           Narbona
           ,
           about
           Rhodanus
           ,
           for
           which
           part
           of
           Fraunce
           ,
           there
           was
           speciall
           reason
           ,
           both
           for
           the
           more
           auncient
           and
           ordinarie
           conuersing
           of
           the
           Romanes
           ,
           in
           that
           region
           aboue
           all
           the
           rest
           :
           for
           of
           all
           the
           seuenteene
           prouinces
           of
           Fraunce
           ,
           that
           of
           Narbona
           was
           first
           reduced
           into
           the
           forme
           of
           a
           Prouince
           :
           And
           the
           Cittie
           of
           Narbona
           it selfe
           ,
           being
           a
           Mart
           town
           of
           exceeding
           traffique
           in
           those
           daies
           ,
           was
           the
           *
           
             *
             Vel.
             Pa●●●cul
             l.
             ●
             .
          
           first
           foraine
           Colonie
           ,
           
           that
           the
           Romanes
           planted
           out
           of
           
             Italie
             ,
             Carthage
          
           onely
           excepted
           :
           And
           yet
           furthermore
           ,
           as
           Plinie
           hath
           recorded
           ,
           many
           townes
           there
           were
           in
           that
           prouince
           ,
           
           
             Plin.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             4.
             
          
           infranchized
           ,
           and
           indued
           with
           the
           libertie
           and
           right
           of
           the
           Latins
           .
           And
           yet
           for
           all
           this
           ,
           Strabo
           saith
           not
           ,
           that
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           was
           the
           n●●iue
           or
           vulgar
           language
           in
           that
           part
           ,
           but
           that
           for
           the
           more
           part
           they
           spake
           it
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Spanish
           tongue
           :
           Howsoeuer
           Viues
           writ
           ,
           that
           the
           languages
           of
           Fraunce
           and
           Spaine
           were
           vtterly
           extinguished
           by
           the
           Romanes
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Latine
           was
           become
           *
           
             *
             Vid.
             Annot.
             ad
             August
             .
             de
             .
             ●●●
             De●
             .
             l.
             19.
             c.
             7.
             
          
           
             Vernacula
             Hispani●
          
           ,
           as
           also
           
             Galliae
             &
             Italiae
          
           ;
           and
           *
           
             *
             ●d
             l.
             3.
             de
             tradend
             .
             Dis●●p
             .
          
           some
           others
           ,
           of
           the
           same
           nation
           vaunt
           ,
           that
           had
           not
           the
           barbarous
           nations
           corrupted
           it
           ,
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           would
           haue
           beene
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           as
           pure
           in
           Spaine
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           in
           Rome
           it selfe
           in
           Tullies
           time
           :
           yet
           neuerthelesse
           ,
           manifest
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           Spanish
           tongue
           was
           neuer
           vtterly
           suppressed
           by
           the
           Latine
           .
           For
           to
           omit
           that
           of
           Strabo
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Marm.
             S●●●l
             .
             de
             Reb.
             Hispaniaed
             .
             5.
             c.
             4.
             
          
           that
           there
           were
           diuerse
           languages
           in
           the
           parts
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           as
           also
           in
           *
           
             *
             Strab.
             l.
             3.
             paul
             .
             a
             principio
             .
             Id
             l.
             4.
             in
             princip
             .
          
           another
           place
           ,
           that
           the
           speech
           of
           Aquitaine
           was
           liker
           the
           language
           of
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           then
           of
           the
           other
           Gaules
           :
           It
           is
           a
           common
           consent
           of
           the
           best
           Historians
           ,
           and
           Antiquaries
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Marian
             de
             Reb.
             Hispan
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             5.
             
             Marm●punc
             ;
             S●cul
             .
             de
             reb
             .
             Hispan
             l
             4
             c●l●m
             .
             &
             Al●b
             .
          
           that
           the
           Cantabrian
           tongue
           ,
           which
           yet
           remaineth
           in
           the
           North
           part
           of
           Spaine
           (
           and
           hath
           no
           rellish
           in
           a
           manner
           at
           all
           of
           the
           Roman
           )
           was
           either
           the
           ancient
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           one
           of
           the
           ancient
           languages
           ,
           of
           Spaine
           .
           And
           although
           *
           
             *
             Strab.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             1
             
          
           Strabo
           hath
           recorded
           ,
           that
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           was
           spoken
           in
           Spaine
           ,
           yet
           he
           speaketh
           not
           indefinitely
           ,
           but
           addeth
           a
           limitation
           ,
           namely
           ,
           about
           Baetis
           .
           And
           that
           in
           that
           
           part
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           so
           preuailed
           ,
           the
           reason
           is
           easie
           to
           be
           assigned
           ,
           by
           that
           we
           finde
           in
           Plinie
           .
           
           
             Plin.
             3.
             c.
             ●
             .
             Ve●●
             〈◊〉
             l.
             2.
             
          
           Namely
           ,
           that
           in
           Baetica
           ,
           were
           eight
           Roman
           Colonies
           ,
           eight
           Municipall
           Citties
           ,
           and
           29
           others
           indued
           with
           the
           right
           and
           libertie
           of
           the
           Latines
           .
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           to
           speake
           of
           the
           Pannonian
           tongue
           ,
           (
           Pannonia
           contained
           
             Hungarie
             ,
             Austria
             ,
             Stiria
          
           ,
           and
           Carinthia
           )
           it
           is
           certaine
           ,
           that
           the
           Romane
           did
           not
           extinguish
           it
           :
           For
           first
           ,
           Patercu●us
           (
           who
           is
           the
           onely
           author
           that
           I
           know
           alleadged
           for
           that
           purpose
           )
           saith
           not
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           become
           the
           language
           of
           the
           Country
           ,
           for
           how
           could
           it
           ,
           being
           but
           euen
           then
           newly
           conquered
           by
           
             Tiberius
             Caesar
          
           ?
           but
           onely
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Augustus
           ,
           by
           Tiberius
           his
           meanes
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           was
           spred
           in
           all
           Pannonia
           .
           And
           Secondly
           ,
           Tacitus
           after
           Tiberius
           his
           time
           ,
           
           
             Ta●●
             d●●●o●i●
             ,
             Germ.
             prope
             fin
             .
          
           hath
           recorded
           ,
           that
           the
           Osi
           in
           Germanie
           ,
           might
           be
           knowne
           to
           be
           no
           Germanes
           ,
           by
           the
           Pannonian
           tongue
           ,
           which
           *
           
             *
             Lib.
             cod
             .
             ●●ruma
             med
             .
          
           a
           little
           before
           in
           the
           same
           booke
           ,
           he
           plainely
           acknowledged
           to
           be
           spoken
           euen
           then
           in
           Pannonia
           .
        
         
           And
           as
           for
           these
           reasons
           it
           may
           well
           seeme
           that
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           became
           not
           the
           vulgar
           language
           in
           any
           of
           these
           parts
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           which
           yet
           are
           specially
           instanced
           ,
           for
           the
           large
           vulgarity
           of
           it
           So
           haue
           I
           other
           reasons
           to
           perswade
           mee
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           not
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           nor
           in
           any
           other
           forraine
           Countries
           subiect
           to
           the
           Empire
           ,
           either
           generally
           or
           perfectly
           spoken
           .
           Not
           generally
           (
           I
           say
           )
           because
           it
           is
           hard
           to
           conceaue
           ,
           that
           any
           whole
           Countries
           ,
           specially
           because
           so
           large
           as
           the
           mentioned
           are
           ,
           
           should
           generally
           speake
           two
           languages
           ,
           their
           owne
           natiue
           and
           the
           Romane
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           there
           was
           not
           anie
           law
           at
           all
           of
           the
           Romanes
           ,
           to
           inforce
           the
           subdued
           nations
           ,
           either
           to
           vse
           vulgarly
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           ,
           or
           not
           to
           vse
           their
           owne
           natiue
           languages
           (
           and
           very
           extreame
           and
           vnreasonable
           ,
           had
           such
           Lords
           bene
           ,
           as
           should
           compell
           men
           by
           lawes
           ,
           both
           to
           do
           ,
           and
           to
           speak
           ,
           only
           what
           pleased
           them
           .
           )
           Neither
           doe
           I
           see
           any
           other
           necessitie
           ,
           or
           any
           prouocation
           ,
           to
           bring
           them
           to
           it
           ,
           except
           for
           some
           speciall
           sorts
           of
           men
           ,
           as
           Merchants
           ,
           and
           Cittizens
           ,
           for
           their
           better
           traffique
           and
           trade
           ,
           Lawyers
           for
           the
           knowledge
           and
           practise
           of
           the
           Roman
           Lawes
           ,
           which
           carried
           force
           throughout
           the
           Empire
           (
           except
           priuiledged
           places
           )
           scholers
           for
           learning
           ,
           souldiers
           ,
           for
           their
           better
           conuersing
           with
           the
           Romane
           Legions
           ,
           and
           with
           the
           Latines
           ,
           Trauailers
           ,
           Gentlemen
           ,
           Officers
           ,
           or
           such
           other
           ,
           as
           might
           haue
           occasion
           of
           affaires
           and
           dealing
           with
           the
           Romans
           .
           But
           it
           soundeth
           altogether
           vnlike
           a
           truth
           ,
           that
           the
           poore
           scattered
           people
           ,
           abroade
           in
           the
           Country
           ,
           dwelling
           either
           in
           solitarie
           places
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           small
           townes
           ,
           and
           villages
           ,
           either
           generally
           spake
           it
           ,
           or
           could
           possibly
           attaine
           vnto
           it
           .
           An
           example
           wherof
           ,
           for
           the
           better
           euidence
           ,
           may
           at
           this
           day
           be
           noted
           ;
           in
           those
           parts
           of
           Greece
           ,
           which
           are
           subiect
           to
           the
           dominions
           of
           the
           Turks
           and
           Venetians
           :
           for
           as
           Bellonius
           hath
           obserued
           ,
           the
           people
           that
           dwell
           in
           the
           principall
           townes
           ,
           
           
             Bellon
             .
             Obs●runt
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             4.
             
          
           and
           Cities
           ,
           subiect
           to
           the
           Turke
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           trade
           ,
           speake
           both
           the
           Greeke
           and
           Turkish
           tongues
           ,
           as
           they
           also
           that
           are
           vnder
           the
           Venetians
           ,
           both
           the
           Greeke
           and
           Italian
           ,
           but
           the
           Country
           people
           vnder
           both
           gouernments
           ,
           
           speake
           onely
           Greeke
           .
           So
           likewise
           in
           Sardinia
           ,
           as
           is
           recorded
           by
           *
           
             *
             G●sner
             .
             in
             Mithrid●ts
             .
             in
             Lingua
             Sardi●
             &
             Rocca
             de
             Dialect
             in
             L●ng
             .
             Sard●●
             .
          
           others
           ,
           the
           good
           townes
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Spanish
           gouernment
           and
           trade
           ,
           speake
           also
           the
           Spanish
           tongue
           ,
           but
           the
           Country
           people
           the
           naturall
           Sardinian
           language
           onely
           :
           And
           ,
           the
           like
           by
           our
           owne
           experience
           ,
           we
           know
           to
           be
           true
           ,
           in
           the
           Prouinces
           subiect
           to
           our
           King
           ,
           namelie
           both
           in
           Wales
           and
           Ireland
           .
           It
           seemeth
           therefore
           that
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           was
           neuer
           generally
           spoken
           in
           any
           of
           the
           Roman
           Prouinces
           forth
           of
           Italie
           .
        
         
           And
           certainely
           much
           lesse
           can
           I
           perswade
           my selfe
           ,
           
           
             Porcac●●
             .
             l.
             dello
             Isole●●●d
             described
             Sardigna
             .
          
           that
           it
           was
           spoken
           abroad
           in
           the
           Prouinces
           perfectly
           .
           First
           ,
           because
           it
           seemes
           vnpossible
           for
           forraine
           nations
           ,
           speciallie
           for
           the
           rude
           &
           common
           people
           ,
           to
           attaine
           the
           right
           pronouncing
           of
           it
           ,
           who
           as
           we
           know
           doe
           ordinarily
           much
           mistake
           the
           true
           pronouncing
           of
           their
           natiue
           language
           :
           for
           which
           very
           cause
           ,
           we
           see
           the
           Chaldee
           tongue
           ,
           to
           haue
           degenerated
           into
           the
           Syriaque
           among
           the
           Iewes
           ,
           although
           they
           had
           conuersed
           70
           yeares
           together
           among
           the
           Chaldeans
           .
           And
           moreouer
           ,
           by
           daily
           experience
           we
           see
           in
           many
           ,
           with
           what
           labour
           and
           difficultie
           ,
           euen
           in
           the
           very
           schooles
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           most
           docible
           part
           of
           their
           age
           ,
           
           
             Vide
             August
             .
             in
             Enarrat
             .
             Psalm
             .
             123.
             
             &
             138.
             &
             l.
             ●
             .
             de
             doctrin
             .
             Chris.
             c.
             13.
             
             &
             Tract
             .
             7.
             in
             Ioan.
             
          
           the
           right
           speaking
           of
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           is
           attained
           .
           And
           to
           conclude
           ,
           it
           appeareth
           by
           Augustine
           in
           sundry
           places
           ,
           that
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           was
           vnperfect
           among
           the
           Africans
           ,
           (
           euen
           in
           the
           Colonies
           )
           as
           pronouncing
           ossum
           for
           
             os
             ,
             floriet
          
           for
           
             florebit
             ,
             dolus
          
           for
           dolor
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           ,
           insomuch
           that
           he
           confesseth
           ,
           he
           was
           faine
           sometimes
           to
           vse
           words
           that
           were
           no
           Latine
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           they
           might
           vnderstand
           him
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           beginnig
           of
           the
           Italian
           ,
           French
           and
           Spanish
           languages
           .
           CHAP.
           V.
           
        
         
           THe
           common
           opinion
           ,
           which
           supposeth
           that
           these
           Nations
           in
           the
           flourish
           of
           the
           Romane
           Empire
           ,
           spake
           vulgarly
           and
           rightly
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           ,
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           mixture
           of
           the
           Northerne
           barbarous
           nations
           among
           the
           ancient
           Inhabitants
           ,
           was
           the
           cause
           of
           changing
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           ,
           into
           the
           languages
           which
           now
           they
           speak
           ,
           the
           languages
           becomming
           mingled
           ,
           as
           the
           nations
           themselues
           were
           .
           Who
           ,
           while
           they
           were
           inforced
           to
           attemper
           and
           frame
           their
           speech
           ,
           one
           to
           the
           vnderstanding
           of
           another
           ,
           for
           else
           they
           could
           not
           mutually
           expresse
           their
           mindes
           (
           which
           is
           the
           end
           for
           which
           nature
           hath
           giuen
           speech
           to
           men
           )
           they
           degenerated
           both
           ,
           and
           so
           came
           to
           this
           medly
           wherein
           now
           we
           finde
           them
           .
        
         
           Which
           opinion
           if
           it
           were
           true
           ,
           the
           Italian
           tongue
           must
           of
           necessitie
           haue
           it
           beginning
           about
           the
           480
           yeare
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           :
           Because
           ,
           at
           that
           time
           ,
           the
           Barbarous
           nations
           began
           first
           to
           inhabite
           Italie
           ,
           vnder
           Odoacer
           ,
           for
           although
           they
           had
           entred
           and
           wasted
           Italie
           long
           before
           ,
           as
           first
           ,
           the
           Gothes
           vnder
           Alaricus
           ,
           about
           the
           yeare
           414
           :
           Then
           the
           Hunnes
           together
           with
           the
           Gothes
           ,
           and
           the
           Herula
           ,
           and
           the
           Gepidi
           ,
           and
           other
           Northerne
           people
           
           vnder
           Attila
           ,
           about
           An.
           450
           ,
           Then
           ,
           the
           Wandales
           vnder
           Gensericus
           ,
           crossing
           the
           sea
           out
           of
           Afrique
           about
           An.
           456.
           (
           to
           omit
           some
           other
           inuations
           of
           those
           barbarous
           nations
           ,
           because
           they
           prospered
           not
           )
           yet
           none
           of
           these
           ,
           setled
           themselues
           to
           stay
           and
           inhabite
           Italie
           ,
           till
           the
           Heruli
           as
           I
           sayd
           vnder
           Odoacer
           ,
           about
           An.
           480
           on
           a
           little
           before
           ,
           entred
           and
           possessed
           it
           neere
           hand
           20
           yeares
           ,
           He
           being
           (
           proclaymed
           by
           the
           Romans
           themselues
           )
           King
           of
           Italie
           ,
           about
           16
           yeares
           ,
           and
           his
           people
           becomming
           inhabiters
           of
           the
           Country
           .
           But
           ,
           they
           also
           ,
           within
           20
           yeares
           after
           their
           entrance
           ,
           were
           in
           a
           maner
           rooted
           out
           of
           Italie
           ,
           by
           Theodoricus
           King
           of
           Gothes
           ,
           who
           allotted
           them
           onely
           a
           part
           of
           Piemont
           aboue
           Turin
           to
           inhabite
           :
           for
           Theodoricus
           being
           by
           Zeno
           then
           Emperour
           ,
           inuested
           with
           the
           title
           of
           King
           of
           Italie
           ,
           and
           hauing
           ouercome
           Odoacer
           ,
           somewhat
           afore
           the
           yeare
           500
           ,
           ruled
           peaceably
           a
           long
           time
           ,
           as
           King
           of
           Italie
           ,
           and
           certaine
           others
           of
           the
           Gothes
           nation
           succeeded
           after
           him
           in
           the
           same
           gouernement
           ,
           the
           Gothes
           in
           the
           meane
           space
           ,
           growing
           into
           one
           with
           the
           Italians
           ,
           for
           the
           space
           neere
           hand
           of
           60.
           yeares
           togither
           .
           And
           although
           after
           that
           ,
           the
           dominion
           of
           Italie
           ,
           was
           by
           Narses
           againe
           recouered
           to
           the
           Empire
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Iustinian
           ,
           and
           many
           of
           the
           Gothes
           expelled
           Italie
           ,
           yet
           farre
           more
           of
           them
           remained
           ,
           Italie
           in
           that
           long
           time
           ,
           being
           growen
           well
           with
           their
           seed
           and
           posteritie
           .
           The
           Heruli
           therefore
           ,
           with
           their
           associats
           were
           the
           first
           ,
           and
           the
           Gothes
           the
           second
           ,
           of
           the
           barbarous
           nations
           ,
           that
           inhabited
           Italie
           .
           The
           third
           and
           the
           last
           ,
           were
           the
           Langbards
           ,
           who
           comming
           into
           Italie
           about
           the
           yeare
           570
           ,
           and
           
           long
           time
           obtaining
           the
           dominion
           ,
           and
           possession
           ,
           in
           a
           maner
           of
           all
           Italie
           ,
           namely
           about
           200
           yeares
           ,
           and
           during
           the
           succession
           of
           20
           Kings
           or
           more
           ,
           were
           neuer
           expelled
           forth
           of
           Italie
           ,
           although
           at
           last
           their
           dominion
           was
           sore
           broken
           by
           Pipin
           King
           of
           Fraunce
           ,
           and
           after
           ,
           more
           defaced
           ,
           by
           his
           sonne
           Charles
           the
           great
           ,
           who
           first
           restrained
           and
           confined
           it
           ,
           to
           that
           part
           ,
           which
           to
           this
           day
           ,
           of
           them
           retayneth
           the
           name
           of
           Lombardie
           ,
           and
           shortly
           after
           vtterly
           extinguished
           it
           ,
           carrying
           away
           their
           last
           King
           captiue
           into
           Fraunce
           .
           Now
           although
           diuers
           *
           
             *
             Blond
             in
             Ital.
             Illustrata
             in
             Marchia
             Triuisana
             .
          
           antiquaries
           of
           Italie
           there
           be
           ,
           which
           referre
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Italian
           tongue
           ,
           and
           the
           change
           of
           the
           Latine
           into
           it
           ,
           to
           these
           third
           inhabitants
           of
           Italie
           the
           Langbards
           ,
           
           
             Tinto
             della
             Nobilta
             .
             diuerona
             .
             l.
             2.
             ca.
             2.
             &
             alij
             .
          
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           long
           and
           perfect
           coalition
           into
           one
           with
           the
           Italian
           people
           :
           yet
           certainly
           ,
           the
           Italian
           tongue
           was
           more
           ancient
           then
           so
           ,
           for
           besides
           that
           there
           remains
           yet
           to
           be
           seen
           (
           as
           mē
           *
           
             *
             Lips.
             de
             Pronuntiat
             Ling.
             lat
             .
             cap.
             3.
             
             &
             Merul.
             par
             .
             2.
             
             Cosmogr
             .
             l.
             4.
             c.
             18.
             
          
           worthie
           of
           credit
           report
           )
           in
           the
           K.
           of
           Fraunce
           his
           Librarie
           at
           Paris
           ,
           an
           Instrument
           written
           in
           the
           Italian
           tongue
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Iustinian
           the
           first
           ,
           which
           was
           before
           the
           comming
           of
           the
           Langbards
           into
           Italie
           :
           another
           euidence
           more
           vulgar
           ,
           to
           this
           effect
           ,
           is
           to
           be
           found
           in
           
             Paulus
             Diaconus
          
           his
           miscellane
           history
           :
           
           
             Paul
             Diacon
             .
             hist.
             Miscel.
             l.
             17.
             longe
             ante
             med
             .
          
           where
           we
           read
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           Emperour
           Mauritius
           his
           time
           ,
           about
           the
           yeare
           590
           ,
           when
           the
           Langbards
           had
           indeed
           entred
           ,
           and
           wasted
           
             Gallia
             Cisalpina
          
           ,
           but
           had
           not
           inuaded
           the
           Roman
           dition
           in
           Italie
           ,
           that
           by
           the
           acclamation
           of
           the
           word
           
             Torna
             ,
             Torna
          
           ,
           (
           plaine
           Italian
           )
           which
           a
           Roman
           souldier
           spake
           to
           one
           of
           his
           fellowes
           afore
           ,
           whose
           beast
           had
           ouerturned
           his
           burthen
           )
           the
           whole
           armie
           (
           marching
           in
           the
           darke
           )
           
           began
           to
           crie
           out
           ,
           
             torna
             ,
             torna
          
           ,
           and
           so
           fell
           to
           flying
           away
           .
        
         
           But
           the
           French
           tongue
           ,
           if
           that
           afore
           mentioned
           were
           the
           cause
           of
           it
           ,
           began
           a
           little
           before
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Valentinian
           the
           3
           ,
           when
           in
           a
           maner
           ,
           all
           the
           West
           part
           of
           the
           Empire
           fell
           away
           ,
           (
           and
           among
           the
           rest
           ,
           our
           Country
           of
           England
           ,
           being
           first
           forsaken
           of
           the
           Romans
           themselues
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           grieuous
           warres
           at
           their
           owne
           doores
           ,
           and
           not
           long
           after
           ,
           conquered
           and
           possessed
           by
           the
           Saxons
           ,
           whose
           posteritie
           for
           the
           most
           part
           we
           are
           )
           namely
           ,
           about
           the
           yeare
           450
           :
           Fraunce
           being
           then
           subdued
           ,
           and
           peaceably
           possessed
           ,
           by
           the
           Franks
           and
           Burgundions
           nations
           of
           Germanie
           :
           the
           Burgundions
           occupying
           the
           Eastward
           and
           outward
           parts
           of
           it
           ,
           toward
           the
           riuer
           of
           Rhene
           ,
           and
           the
           Franks
           all
           the
           inner
           region
           .
           For
           although
           Fraunce
           before
           that
           had
           beene
           inuaded
           by
           the
           
             Wandali
             ,
             Sueui
          
           ,
           and
           Alani
           ,
           and
           after
           by
           the
           Gothes
           ,
           who
           hauing
           obtained
           Aquitayn
           for
           their
           seate
           and
           habitation
           ,
           by
           the
           grant
           of
           the
           Emperor
           Honorius
           ,
           expelled
           the
           former
           into
           Spaine
           about
           An.
           410
           :
           yet
           notwithstanding
           ,
           till
           the
           Conquest
           made
           by
           the
           Franks
           and
           Burgundions
           ,
           it
           was
           not
           generally
           ,
           nor
           for
           any
           long
           time
           mingled
           with
           strangers
           ,
           which
           after
           that
           Conquest
           beganne
           to
           spread
           ouer
           Fraunce
           ,
           and
           to
           become
           natiue
           Inhabitants
           of
           the
           Country
           .
        
         
           But
           of
           all
           ,
           the
           Spanish
           tongue
           for
           this
           cause
           ,
           must
           necessarilie
           be
           most
           ancient
           :
           for
           the
           Wandali
           &
           Alani
           ,
           being
           expelled
           Fraunce
           ,
           about
           the
           yeare
           410
           ,
           began
           then
           to
           inuade
           and
           to
           inhabite
           Spaine
           which
           they
           held
           &
           possessed
           many
           yeares
           ,
           till
           the
           Gothes
           
           being
           expelled
           by
           the
           Franks
           and
           Burgundians
           ,
           out
           of
           France
           into
           Spaine
           ,
           expelled
           them
           out
           of
           Spaine
           into
           Afrique
           (
           the
           Barbarous
           nations
           thus
           like
           nailes
           driuing
           out
           one
           another
           )
           and
           not
           onely
           them
           ,
           but
           with
           them
           all
           the
           remnants
           of
           the
           Roman
           garrisons
           ,
           and
           gouernment
           ,
           and
           so
           becomming
           the
           entier
           Lords
           and
           quiet
           possessours
           of
           all
           the
           Country
           ,
           from
           whom
           also
           the
           Kings
           of
           Spaine
           that
           now
           are
           ,
           be
           descended
           .
           Notwithstanding
           ,
           euen
           they
           also
           ,
           within
           lesse
           then
           300
           yeares
           after
           ,
           were
           driuen
           by
           the
           Saracens
           of
           Afrique
           into
           the
           northerne
           and
           mountainous
           parts
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           namely
           
             Asturia
             ,
             Biscay
          
           ,
           and
           Guipuscoa
           ,
           till
           after
           a
           long
           course
           of
           time
           ,
           by
           little
           and
           little
           they
           recouered
           it
           ,
           out
           of
           their
           hands
           againe
           ,
           which
           was
           at
           last
           fully
           accomplished
           by
           Ferdinand
           not
           past
           120
           yeares
           ago
           ,
           there
           hauing
           passed
           in
           the
           meane
           time
           ,
           from
           the
           Mores
           first
           entrance
           of
           Spaine
           at
           Gibraltar
           ,
           till
           their
           laft
           possession
           in
           Granada
           ,
           about
           770
           yeares
           .
        
         
           Whereby
           you
           may
           see
           also
           ,
           when
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           began
           to
           degenerate
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           (
           if
           that
           also
           ,
           as
           is
           supposed
           spake
           vulgarly
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           and
           if
           the
           mixture
           of
           barbarous
           people
           were
           cause
           of
           the
           decay
           ,
           &
           corruption
           of
           it
           )
           namely
           ,
           about
           the
           yeare
           430
           ,
           for
           about
           that
           time
           ,
           the
           Wandali
           and
           Alani
           ,
           partly
           wearied
           with
           the
           Gottish
           warre
           in
           Spaine
           ,
           and
           partly
           inuited
           by
           the
           Gouernour
           Bonifacius
           ,
           entred
           Afrique
           ,
           vnder
           the
           leading
           of
           Gensericus
           ,
           a
           part
           whereof
           for
           a
           time
           ,
           they
           held
           quietly
           ,
           for
           the
           Emperour
           Valentinianus
           guift
           :
           But
           shortly
           after
           ,
           in
           the
           same
           Emperours
           time
           ,
           when
           all
           the
           West
           Prouinces
           in
           a
           maner
           fell
           vtterly
           away
           
           from
           the
           Empire
           ,
           they
           also
           tooke
           Carthage
           ;
           and
           all
           the
           Pronince
           about
           it
           ,
           from
           the
           Romanes
           .
           And
           although
           the
           dominion
           of
           Afrique
           was
           regained
           by
           Bellisarius
           to
           the
           Empire
           almost
           100
           yeares
           after
           ,
           in
           Iustinians
           time
           ,
           yet
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Emperour
           Leontius
           ,
           (
           almost
           700
           yeares
           after
           our
           Sauiours
           birth
           )
           it
           was
           lost
           againe
           ,
           being
           anew
           conquered
           ,
           and
           possessed
           by
           the
           Sarracens
           of
           Arabia
           (
           and
           to
           this
           day
           remaineth
           in
           their
           hands
           )
           bringing
           together
           with
           their
           victories
           ,
           the
           language
           also
           ,
           and
           religion
           ,
           (
           Mahumetanisme
           )
           into
           all
           that
           coast
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           euen
           from
           Aegypt
           to
           the
           Strait
           of
           Gibraltar
           ,
           aboue
           2000
           miles
           in
           length
           .
        
         
           About
           which
           time
           also
           ,
           namely
           during
           the
           gouernment
           of
           Valentinian
           the
           3.
           
           
             Bulgaria
             ,
             Seruia
             ,
             Boscina
             ,
             Hungarie
             ,
             Austria
             ,
             Stiria
             ,
             Carinthia
             ,
             Bauaria
          
           and
           Sueuia
           (
           that
           is
           ,
           all
           the
           North-border
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           along
           the
           riuer
           Danubius
           )
           and
           some
           part
           of
           Thrace
           ,
           was
           spoiled
           and
           possessed
           by
           the
           Hunnes
           ,
           who
           yet
           principally
           planted
           themselues
           in
           the
           Lower
           Pannonia
           ,
           whence
           it
           obtained
           the
           name
           of
           Hungarie
           .
        
         
           Out
           of
           which
           discourse
           you
           may
           obserue
           these
           two
           points
           .
           First
           ,
           what
           the
           Countries
           were
           ,
           in
           which
           those
           wandring
           and
           warring
           nations
           after
           many
           transmigrations
           from
           place
           to
           place
           ,
           fixed
           at
           last
           their
           finall
           residence
           and
           habitation
           .
           Namely
           the
           Hunnes
           in
           Pannonia
           ,
           the
           Wandales
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           the
           East
           Gothes
           and
           Langbards
           in
           Italie
           the
           West
           Gothes
           in
           Aquitaine
           and
           Spaine
           ,
           which
           being
           both
           originally
           but
           one
           Nation
           ,
           gained
           these
           names
           of
           East
           and
           West
           Gothes
           ,
           from
           the
           position
           of
           these
           Countries
           which
           they
           conquered
           and
           inhabited
           ,
           
           the
           other
           barbarous
           nations
           of
           obscurer
           names
           ,
           being
           partly
           consumed
           with
           the
           warre
           ,
           and
           partly
           passing
           into
           the
           more
           famous
           appellations
           .
           And
           Secondly
           ,
           you
           may
           obserue
           ,
           that
           the
           maine
           dissolution
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           especially
           in
           Europe
           and
           Afrique
           ,
           fell
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Valentinian
           the
           third
           about
           the
           yeare
           450.
           being
           caused
           by
           the
           barbarous
           nations
           of
           the
           North
           (
           as
           after
           did
           the
           like
           dissolution
           of
           the
           same
           Empire
           in
           Asia
           ,
           by
           the
           Arabians
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Heraclius
           about
           the
           yeare
           640
           )
           and
           together
           with
           the
           ruine
           of
           the
           Empire
           in
           the
           West
           by
           the
           inundation
           of
           the
           foresaid
           barbarous
           Natitions
           ,
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           in
           all
           the
           Countries
           where
           it
           was
           vulgarly
           spoken
           (
           if
           it
           were
           rightly
           spoken
           any
           where
           in
           the
           West
           )
           became
           corrupted
           .
        
         
           Wherefore
           if
           the
           
             Spanish
             ,
             French
          
           and
           Italian
           tongues
           ,
           proceeded
           from
           this
           cause
           ,
           as
           a
           great
           number
           of
           learned
           men
           ,
           suppose
           they
           did
           ,
           you
           see
           what
           the
           antiquity
           of
           them
           is
           ;
           But
           to
           deliuer
           plainly
           my
           opinion
           ,
           hauing
           searched
           as
           farre
           as
           I
           could
           ,
           into
           the
           originals
           of
           those
           languages
           ,
           and
           hauing
           pondered
           what
           in
           my
           reading
           ,
           and
           in
           my
           reason
           I
           found
           touching
           them
           ,
           I
           am
           of
           another
           minde
           (
           as
           some
           learned
           men
           also
           are
           )
           namely
           ,
           that
           all
           those
           tongues
           are
           more
           auncient
           ,
           and
           haue
           not
           sprung
           from
           the
           corruption
           of
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           ,
           by
           the
           inundation
           and
           mixture
           of
           barbarous
           people
           in
           these
           prouinces
           ,
           but
           from
           the
           first
           vnperfect
           impression
           and
           receauing
           of
           it
           ,
           in
           those
           forraine
           Countries
           .
           Which
           vnperfectnesse
           notwithstāding
           of
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           although
           it
           had
           ,
           as
           I
           take
           it
           beginning
           from
           this
           euill
           framing
           of
           forraine
           
           tongues
           ,
           to
           the
           right
           pronouncing
           of
           the
           Latine
           ,
           yet
           I
           withall
           easily
           beleeue
           ,
           and
           acknowledge
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           greatly
           increased
           ,
           by
           the
           mixture
           and
           coalition
           of
           the
           barbarous
           Nations
           .
           So
           that
           me
           thinkes
           ,
           I
           haue
           obserued
           three
           degrees
           of
           corruption
           in
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           ,
           by
           the
           degenerating
           whereof
           ,
           these
           languages
           are
           supposed
           to
           haue
           receaued
           their
           beginning
           .
           The
           first
           of
           them
           ,
           was
           in
           Rome
           it selfe
           ,
           where
           ,
           towards
           the
           latter
           end
           of
           the
           Common
           wealth
           ,
           and
           after
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           the
           infinite
           multitude
           of
           seruants
           (
           which
           exceedingly
           exceeded
           the
           number
           of
           free
           borne
           Citizens
           )
           together
           with
           the
           vnspeakeable
           confluence
           of
           straungers
           ,
           from
           all
           prouinces
           ,
           did
           much
           impaire
           the
           purenesse
           of
           their
           language
           ,
           and
           as
           Isidore
           hath
           obserued
           brought
           manie
           barbarismes
           and
           solaecismes
           into
           it
           .
           Insomuch
           ,
           that
           Tertullian
           in
           his
           time
           ,
           
           
             Isidor
             .
             Origin
             .
             l.
             9.
             c.
             1.
             
             Tertul.
             in
             Apologet
             .
             adu
             .
             Gentes
             cap.
             6.
             
          
           when
           as
           yet
           none
           of
           the
           barbarous
           nations
           had
           by
           inuasion
           touched
           Italie
           (
           for
           he
           liued
           vnder
           
             Septimius
             Seuerus
          
           gouernment
           )
           chargeth
           the
           Romanes
           to
           haue
           renounced
           the
           language
           of
           their
           fathers
           .
           The
           Second
           steppe
           ,
           was
           the
           vnperfect
           impression
           (
           that
           I
           touched
           before
           )
           made
           of
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           abroad
           in
           the
           forraine
           prouinces
           among
           straungers
           ,
           whose
           tongues
           could
           not
           perfectly
           frame
           to
           speake
           it
           aright
           .
           And
           certainely
           ,
           if
           the
           Italians
           themselues
           ,
           as
           is
           remembred
           by
           Cicero
           failed
           of
           the
           right
           and
           perfect
           Romane
           pronounciation
           ,
           
           
             Cicer.
             l.
             3
             de
             Oratore
             .
          
           I
           see
           not
           how
           the
           tongues
           of
           strange
           Nations
           ,
           such
           as
           the
           Gaules
           and
           Spanyards
           were
           ,
           should
           exactly
           vtter
           it
           .
           And
           the
           Third
           ,
           was
           that
           mixture
           of
           manie
           barbarous
           people
           (
           to
           which
           others
           
           attribute
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           languages
           in
           question
           )
           which
           made
           the
           Latine
           ,
           that
           was
           before
           vnperfect
           ,
           yet
           more
           corrupt
           then
           they
           found
           it
           ,
           both
           for
           words
           and
           for
           pronouncing
           :
           So
           that
           ,
           I
           rather
           thinke
           the
           barbarous
           people
           to
           haue
           beene
           a
           cause
           of
           increasing
           the
           corruption
           ,
           and
           of
           further
           alteration
           and
           departure
           of
           those
           languages
           from
           the
           Romane
           ,
           then
           of
           beginning
           them
           .
           And
           me
           thinkes
           I
           haue
           very
           good
           reasons
           so
           to
           bee
           perswaded
           beeside
           all
           the
           arguments
           abou●
           mentioned
           ,
           which
           I
           produced
           ,
           both
           for
           the
           remaining
           of
           the
           vulgar
           languages
           and
           for
           the
           vnperfect
           speaking
           of
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           in
           the
           prouinces
           .
           First
           ,
           because
           the
           
             Gothes
             Wandales
             ,
             Langbards
          
           ,
           as
           also
           the
           Franks
           and
           Bargundions
           language
           was
           ,
           by
           the
           consent
           of
           *
           
             *
             Irenic
             .
             Exeg
             .
             German
             .
             l.
             1.
             ca.
             31.
             
             Lacing
             .
             l.
             10.
             de
             Migration
             .
             Gent.
             Gorop
             .
             Origin
             .
             Antwerp
             .
             l.
             7.
             
             Gesner
             .
             in
             Mithridate
             .
             Rhenan
             .
             l.
             2.
             
             Rer.
             German
             .
             Leunclau
             .
             in
             Pandect
             .
             Tur●e
             .
             §.
             71.
             et
             Al●
             multi
             .
          
           learned
           men
           ,
           the
           Germane
           tongue
           ,
           which
           hath
           but
           small
           affinitie
           or
           agreement
           ,
           with
           either
           the
           
             Italian
             ,
             French
          
           or
           Spanish
           tongues
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           because
           among
           all
           the
           auncient
           writers
           (
           and
           they
           are
           many
           )
           which
           haue
           written
           of
           the
           miserable
           changes
           ,
           made
           in
           these
           West
           parts
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           by
           those
           infinite
           swarmes
           of
           barbarous
           people
           ,
           I
           finde
           not
           one
           ,
           that
           mentioneth
           the
           change
           of
           any
           of
           these
           languages
           to
           haue
           beene
           caused
           by
           them
           :
           which
           me
           thinkes
           some
           auncient
           writers
           among
           so
           many
           learned
           ,
           as
           those
           times
           ,
           and
           those
           very
           Countries
           ,
           abounded
           withall
           ,
           and
           whose
           writings
           yet
           remaine
           ,
           would
           certainely
           haue
           recorded
           .
           But
           though
           wee
           finde
           mention
           in
           soundrie
           auncient
           writers
           ,
           of
           changing
           these
           languages
           into
           the
           Romane
           (
           whom
           yet
           I
           vnderstand
           of
           that
           vnperfect
           change
           before
           touched
           )
           yet
           nothing
           is
           found
           of
           any
           rechanging
           of
           those
           
           languages
           from
           the
           Romane
           ,
           into
           the
           state
           wherein
           now
           they
           are
           .
           But
           it
           is
           become
           a
           question
           onely
           of
           some
           late
           searchers
           of
           Antiquitie
           ,
           but
           of
           such
           ,
           as
           determine
           in
           this
           point
           ,
           without
           either
           sound
           reason
           or
           good
           countenance
           of
           Antiquitie
           .
        
      
       
         
           Obiections
           touching
           the
           extent
           of
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           and
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           mentioned
           Languages
           with
           their
           solutions
           .
           CHAP.
           VI.
           
        
         
           THese
           reasons
           perhaps
           (
           ioyned
           with
           the
           other
           aboue
           alleaged
           whereby
           I
           endeauoured
           to
           prooue
           that
           the
           latine
           tongue
           perfectly
           spoken
           ,
           was
           neuer
           the
           vulgar
           language
           of
           the
           Romane
           prouinces
           )
           may
           perswade
           you
           as
           they
           haue
           done
           mee
           ,
           that
           the
           barbarous
           nations
           of
           the
           north
           ,
           were
           not
           the
           first
           corrupters
           of
           the
           latine
           tongue
           ,
           in
           the
           prouinces
           subiect
           to
           Rome
           ,
           nor
           the
           beginners
           of
           the
           
             Italian
             ,
             French
          
           and
           Spanish
           tongues
           :
           yet
           some
           difficulties
           I
           finde
           (
           I
           confesse
           )
           in
           writers
           touching
           these
           points
           ,
           which
           when
           I
           haue
           resolued
           my
           opinion
           will
           appeare
           the
           more
           credible
           .
        
         
           One
           is
           out
           of
           Plutarch
           in
           his
           Platonique
           questions
           ,
           
           
             Plutarch
             .
             in
             quest
             .
             platonic
             .
             quaest
             .
             9.
             
          
           affirming
           that
           in
           his
           time
           all
           men
           in
           a
           manner
           spake
           the
           latin
           tongue
           .
        
         
           Another
           before
           touched
           that
           Strabo
           recordeth
           
           the
           Romane
           tongue
           to
           haue
           bene
           spoken
           in
           Spaine
           and
           France
           ,
           
           
             Strab.
             l.
             3.
             
             &
             4.
             
             Apul
             in
             Floridis
             .
          
           and
           Apuleius
           in
           Africke
           ,
           which
           also
           may
           appeare
           by
           sundry
           places
           in
           Augustine
           ,
           whose
           sermons
           seeme
           (
           as
           Cyprians
           also
           )
           to
           haue
           bin
           made
           to
           the
           people
           in
           that
           language
           .
        
         
           A
           third
           ,
           how
           it
           falleth
           if
           these
           vulgar
           tongues
           of
           adulterate
           latin
           be
           so
           ancient
           ,
           that
           nothing
           is
           found
           written
           in
           any
           of
           them
           of
           any
           great
           antiquity
           ?
        
         
           A
           fourth
           ,
           how
           in
           Rome
           and
           Latium
           ,
           where
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           was
           out
           of
           question
           ,
           natiue
           ,
           the
           latin
           could
           so
           degenerate
           ,
           as
           at
           this
           day
           is
           found
           in
           the
           Italian
           tongue
           ,
           except
           by
           some
           forraine
           corruption
           ?
        
         
           To
           the
           first
           of
           these
           I
           answere
           ,
           either
           that
           as
           Diuines
           are
           wont
           to
           interpret
           many
           generall
           propositions
           ,
           Plutarch
           is
           to
           be
           vnderstood
           
             de
             generibus
             singulorum
          
           ,
           not
           
             de
             singulis
             generum
          
           :
           So
           that
           the
           latine
           tongue
           was
           spoken
           almost
           in
           euery
           nation
           ,
           but
           not
           of
           euery
           one
           in
           any
           forraine
           nation
           :
           Or
           else
           ,
           that
           they
           spake
           the
           latine
           indeed
           ,
           but
           yet
           vnperfectly
           and
           corruptly
           ,
           as
           their
           tongues
           would
           frame
           to
           vtter
           it
           .
        
         
           To
           the
           second
           I
           answere
           :
           first
           ,
           that
           Strabo
           speaketh
           not
           generally
           of
           France
           or
           Spaine
           ,
           but
           with
           limitation
           to
           certaine
           parts
           of
           both
           ,
           the
           Prouince
           of
           Narbon
           in
           France
           ,
           and
           the
           tract
           about
           Boetis
           in
           Spaine
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           that
           although
           they
           speake
           it
           ,
           yet
           it
           followeth
           not
           ,
           that
           they
           speake
           it
           perfectly
           and
           aright
           ,
           (
           except
           perhaps
           in
           the
           Colonies
           )
           so
           that
           I
           wil
           not
           deny
           but
           it
           might
           be
           spoken
           abroad
           in
           the
           Prouinces
           ,
           yet
           I
           say
           it
           was
           spoken
           corruptly
           ,
           according
           as
           the
           peoples
           tongues
           would
           fashion
           to
           it
           ,
           
           namely
           in
           such
           sort
           ,
           that
           although
           the
           matter
           and
           body
           of
           the
           words
           ,
           were
           for
           the
           most
           part
           latine
           ,
           yet
           the
           forme
           and
           sound
           of
           them
           varied
           from
           the
           right
           pronouncing
           :
           which
           speech
           notwithstanding
           was
           named
           Latin
           ,
           partly
           for
           the
           reason
           now
           touched
           ,
           and
           partly
           ,
           because
           they
           learned
           it
           from
           the
           Romanes
           or
           Latines
           ,
           as
           the
           Spaniards
           call
           their
           language
           Romance
           till
           this
           day
           ,
           which
           yet
           we
           know
           to
           differ
           much
           from
           the
           right
           Romane
           tongue
           :
           
           
             Nithard
             .
             d●
             dissens
             filio●
             Ludon
             .
             P●
             l.
             
          
           and
           as
           Nithardus
           (
           nephew
           to
           Charles
           the
           great
           )
           in
           his
           history
           of
           the
           dissension
           of
           the
           sonnes
           of
           
             Ludouicus
             Pius
          
           ,
           calleth
           the
           French
           then
           vsuall
           (
           whereof
           he
           setteth
           downe
           examples
           ,
           )
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           ,
           which
           yet
           hath
           no
           more
           agreement
           with
           the
           latin
           then
           the
           French
           hath
           that
           is
           now
           in
           vse
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           to
           the
           obiection
           of
           Cyprians
           and
           Augustines
           preaching
           in
           latine
           ,
           
           
             Antonin
             .
             in
             Itinerario
             ,
             Plin.
             Iun.
             in
             Epist.
             l.
             8.
             ad
             Ca●●●●
             
          
           I
           answere
           that
           both
           *
           
             *
             Plin.
             Sec.
             Histor
             .
             nat
             .
             l.
             5.
             c.
             4.
             
          
           Hippo
           ,
           wherof
           Augustine
           was
           Bishop
           ,
           and
           
           
             Velleius
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Appian
             .
             l.
             de
             Bel.
             Punicis
             is
             fine
             .
          
           Carthage
           ,
           wherof
           Cyprian
           was
           Archbishop
           ,
           were
           Romane
           Colonies
           ,
           consisting
           for
           the
           most
           part
           of
           the
           progenie
           of
           Romanes
           ,
           for
           which
           sort
           of
           Citties
           ,
           there
           was
           speciall
           reason
           .
           Although
           neither
           in
           the
           Colonies
           themselues
           (
           as
           it
           seemeth
           )
           the
           Romane
           tong
           was
           altogether
           vncorrupt
           ,
           both
           for
           that
           which
           I
           alleadged
           before
           out
           of
           Spartianus
           of
           Seuerus
           his
           sister
           dwelling
           at
           Leptis
           ,
           and
           for
           that
           which
           I
           remembred
           out
           of
           Augustine
           for
           Hippo
           ,
           where
           they
           spake
           *
           
             *
             Enar●
             .
             Psal.
             138.
             
          
           Ossum
           &
           *
           
             *
             ●
             .
             2.
             de
             doc
             .
             Christ
             c.
             13.
             
          
           Floriet
           ,
           and
           *
           
             *
             Tract
             .
             7.
             
             ●●
             Ioannem
             .
          
           Dolus
           ,
           for
           Os
           and
           Florehit
           and
           dolor
           ,
           (
           &
           yet
           were
           both
           Leptis
           &
           Hippo
           Romane
           Colonies
           )
           :
           And
           yet
           it
           appeareth
           further
           by
           Augustine
           ,
           that
           in
           their
           translations
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Psalms
           sung
           in
           their
           Churches
           ,
           they
           had
           these
           
           corruptions
           ,
           where
           yet
           (
           as
           it
           is
           like
           )
           their
           most
           corrupt
           and
           vulgar
           latine
           had
           not
           place
           .
        
         
           To
           the
           third
           I
           answere
           ,
           that
           two
           reasons
           of
           it
           may
           be
           assigned
           :
           One
           ,
           that
           learned
           men
           would
           rather
           write
           ,
           in
           the
           learned
           and
           grammaticall
           ,
           then
           in
           the
           vulgar
           and
           prouinciall
           latine
           .
           Another
           ,
           that
           the
           workes
           of
           vnlearned
           men
           would
           hardly
           continue
           till
           our
           times
           ,
           seeing
           euen
           of
           the
           learned
           anciēt
           writings
           ,
           but
           few
           of
           infinite
           ,
           haue
           remained
           .
           Furthermore
           it
           is
           obserued
           of
           the
           Germane
           tongue
           ,
           by
           Tschudas
           and
           of
           the
           French
           by
           Genebrard
           ,
           
           
             Tschud
             .
             Des.
             ●●pt
             Alpinae
             cap.
             36.
             
             Genebr
             .
             l.
             4.
             
             Chron.
             Secul
             .
             11.
             
          
           that
           it
           is
           very
           little
           aboue
           400.
           yeares
           ,
           since
           bookes
           began
           to
           be
           written
           in
           both
           those
           languages
           ,
           and
           yet
           it
           is
           out
           of
           all
           doubt
           ,
           that
           the
           tongues
           are
           much
           ancienter
           .
        
         
           To
           the
           fourth
           I
           say
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           no
           language
           ,
           which
           of
           ordinary
           course
           is
           not
           subiect
           to
           change
           ,
           although
           there
           were
           no
           forraine
           occasion
           at
           all
           :
           which
           the
           very
           fancies
           of
           men
           ,
           weary
           of
           old
           words
           (
           as
           of
           old
           things
           )
           is
           able
           enough
           to
           worke
           ,
           which
           may
           be
           wel
           proued
           by
           obseruations
           and
           instances
           of
           former
           changes
           ,
           in
           this
           very
           tongue
           (
           the
           latine
           )
           whereof
           I
           now
           dispute
           .
           
           
             Quint●●
             .
             Iust
             Orator
             .
             l.
             1.
             ca.
             6.
             
          
           For
           Quintilian
           recordeth
           ,
           that
           the
           verses
           of
           the
           Salij
           which
           were
           saide
           to
           bee
           composed
           by
           Numa
           could
           hardly
           bee
           vnderstood
           of
           their
           Priests
           ,
           in
           the
           latter
           time
           of
           the
           common
           wealth
           ,
           
           
             Fest.
             in
             Dictiō
             .
             Latine
             loqui
             .
          
           for
           the
           absolutenesse
           of
           the
           speech
           And
           Festus
           in
           his
           booke
           
             de
             verborum
             significatione
          
           ,
           who
           liued
           in
           
             Augustus
             Caesars
          
           time
           ,
           hath
           left
           in
           obseruation
           ,
           that
           the
           Latine
           speech
           ,
           which
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           is
           so
           named
           of
           Latium
           ,
           was
           then
           in
           such
           manner
           changed
           ,
           that
           scarslie
           any
           part
           of
           it
           remained
           in
           knowledge
           .
           
           The
           lawes
           also
           of
           the
           Romane
           Kings
           and
           of
           the
           Decemuiri
           ,
           
           
             Fulu
             .
             Visin
             not
             .
             ad
             Anton.
             August
             .
             de
             L●g●h
             .
             et
             Sen●tusconsult
             
          
           (
           called
           the
           Lawes
           of
           the
           twelue
           Tables
           )
           collected
           and
           published
           in
           their
           owne
           wordes
           by
           
             Fuluius
             Vrsinus
          
           are
           no
           lesse
           euident
           testimonies
           ,
           if
           they
           be
           compared
           with
           the
           later
           latin
           ,
           of
           the
           great
           alteration
           of
           that
           language
           .
        
         
           Furthermore
           ,
           
           
             Polyb.
             l.
             3.
             
          
           Polybius
           hath
           also
           recorded
           ,
           that
           the
           articles
           of
           league
           ,
           betwixt
           the
           people
           of
           Rome
           &
           of
           Carthage
           ,
           made
           presently
           after
           the
           expulsion
           of
           the
           Kings
           from
           Rome
           ,
           could
           very
           hardly
           in
           his
           time
           be
           vnderstood
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           old
           forsaken
           words
           ,
           by
           any
           of
           the
           best
           skilled
           antiquaries
           in
           Rome
           .
           In
           which
           time
           notwithstanding
           ,
           they
           receiued
           very
           few
           strangers
           into
           their
           Cittie
           ,
           which
           mixture
           might
           cause
           such
           alteration
           ,
           and
           the
           difference
           of
           time
           was
           but
           about
           350.
           yeares
           .
           And
           yet
           to
           adde
           one
           instance
           more
           ,
           of
           a
           shorter
           reuolution
           of
           time
           ,
           and
           a
           cleerer
           euidence
           of
           the
           change
           ,
           that
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           was
           subiect
           to
           ,
           and
           that
           ,
           when
           no
           forraine
           cause
           thereof
           can
           bee
           alleadged
           :
           There
           remaineth
           at
           this
           day
           (
           as
           it
           is
           certainly
           *
           
             *
             Vid.
             Paul.
             Merul.
             Cosin
             .
             par
             .
             2.
             l.
             ●
             .
             c.
             18
             et
             .
             Celsu
             .
             C●●tad
             .
             in
             Tract●
             de
             Orig.
             ling.
             Vulgaris
             .
             Ital
             Cap.
             7.
             &c.
             
          
           recorded
           )
           in
           the
           Capitoll
           at
           Rome
           ,
           though
           much
           defaced
           by
           the
           iniury
           of
           time
           ,
           a
           piller
           (
           they
           call
           it
           
             Columnam
             rostratam
          
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           decked
           with
           beakes
           of
           ships
           )
           dedicated
           to
           the
           memory
           of
           Duillius
           a
           Roman
           Consull
           ,
           vpon
           a
           nauale
           victory
           obtained
           againg
           the
           Carthaginians
           ,
           in
           the
           first
           punicke
           war
           ,
           not
           past
           150.
           yeares
           before
           Ciceroes
           time
           ,
           when
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           ascended
           to
           the
           highest
           flourish
           of
           Elegancie
           ,
           that
           euer
           it
           obtained
           :
           And
           thus
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Pillar
           are
           ,
           (
           those
           that
           may
           be
           read
           )
           as
           I
           find
           thē
           obserued
           ,
           with
           the
           later
           latine
           vnder
           thē
           .
           
           
             Exemet
             .
             Leciones
             .
             Macistratos
             .
             Castreis
             .
             Exfociont
             .
             Exemit
             .
             Legiones
             .
             Magistratus
             .
             Castris
             .
             Effugiunt
             .
             Pucnandod
             .
             Cepet
             .
             Enque
             .
             Nauebos
             .
             Marid
             .
             Consol.
             Pugnando
             .
             Cepit
             .
             Inque
             .
             Nauibus
             .
             Mari.
             Consul
             .
             Primos
             .
             Ornauet
             .
             Nauebous
             .
             Claseis
             .
             Paenicas
             .
             Sumas
             .
             Primus
             .
             Ornauit
             .
             Nauibus
             .
             Classes
             .
             Punicas
             .
             Summas
             .
             Cartaciniensis
             .
             Dictatored
             .
             Altod.
             Socieis
             .
             Triresmos
             .
             Carthaginiensis
             .
             Dictatore
             .
             Alto.
             Socijs
             .
             Triremes
             .
             Naueis
             .
             Captom
             .
             Numei
             .
             Naualed
             .
             Praedad
             .
             Poplo
             ,
             &c.
             Naues
             .
             Captum
             .
             Nummi
             .
             Nauali
             .
             Praeda.
             Populo
             ,
             &c.
             
          
        
         
           Where
           you
           see
           in
           many
           words
           ,
           e
           for
           
             i
             ,
             c.
          
           for
           
             g
             ,
             o
          
           for
           u
           ,
           and
           somtime
           for
           e
           ,
           and
           d
           ,
           superfluously
           added
           to
           the
           end
           of
           many
           words
           .
           But
           (
           to
           let
           forrain
           toungs
           passe
           )
           of
           the
           great
           alteration
           that
           time
           is
           wont
           to
           worke
           in
           languages
           ,
           our
           owne
           tongue
           may
           afford
           vs
           examples
           euident
           enough
           :
           wherein
           since
           the
           times
           neere
           after
           ,
           and
           about
           the
           Conquest
           ,
           the
           change
           hath
           beene
           so
           great
           ,
           as
           I
           my selfe
           haue
           seen
           some
           euidences
           made
           in
           the
           time
           of
           King
           Henrie
           the
           first
           ,
           whereof
           I
           was
           able
           to
           vnderstand
           but
           few
           words
           .
           To
           which
           purpose
           also
           ,
           a
           certaine
           remembrance
           is
           to
           bee
           found
           in
           Holinsheds
           Chronicle
           ,
           in
           the
           end
           of
           the
           Conquerours
           raigne
           ,
           in
           a
           Charter
           giuen
           by
           him
           to
           the
           Citie
           of
           London
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           ancient
           Languages
           of
           Italie
           ,
           Spaine
           Fraunce
           and
           Afrique
           .
           CHAP.
           VII
           .
        
         
           BVt
           if
           the
           discourse
           of
           these
           points
           of
           Antiquitie
           ,
           in
           handling
           whereof
           I
           haue
           declared
           ,
           that
           while
           the
           Roman
           Empire
           flourished
           ,
           it
           neuer
           abolished
           the
           vulgar
           languages
           ,
           in
           Fraunce
           ,
           or
           Spaine
           or
           Afrique
           ,
           howsoeuer
           in
           Italie
           .
           If
           that
           discourse
           I
           say
           ,
           mooue
           in
           you
           perhaps
           a
           desire
           ,
           to
           know
           what
           the
           ancient
           vulgar
           languages
           of
           these
           parts
           were
           :
           I
           will
           also
           in
           that
           point
           ,
           out
           of
           my
           reading
           and
           search
           into
           Antiquitie
           ,
           giue
           you
           the
           best
           satisfaction
           that
           I
           can
           .
        
         
           And
           first
           for
           Italie
           :
           Certaine
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           many
           were
           the
           ancient
           tongues
           in
           the
           seuerall
           Prouinces
           of
           it
           ,
           tongues
           I
           say
           ,
           not
           dialects
           ,
           for
           they
           were
           many
           more
           .
           In
           Apulia
           ,
           the
           Mesapian
           tongue
           :
           In
           Tuscanie
           and
           Vmbria
           ,
           the
           Hetruscan
           ,
           both
           of
           them
           vtterly
           perished
           :
           
           
             Inscript
             .
             ver
             .
             pag.
             143.144.145.146
             .
          
           Yet
           in
           the
           booke
           of
           ancient
           Inscriptions
           ,
           set
           forth
           by
           Gruter
           ,
           and
           Scaliger
           ,
           there
           be
           some
           few
           monuments
           registred
           of
           these
           languages
           ,
           but
           not
           vnderstood
           now
           of
           any
           man.
           In
           Calabria
           both
           the
           higher
           and
           lower
           ,
           and
           farre
           along
           the
           maritime
           coast
           of
           the
           Tyrrhene
           sea
           ,
           the
           Greeke
           .
           In
           Latium
           (
           now
           
             Campagna
             di
             Roma
          
           )
           The
           Latine
           .
           In
           Lombardie
           ,
           and
           
           Liguria
           ,
           the
           old
           tongue
           of
           Fraunce
           whatsoeuer
           it
           was
           .
           Of
           which
           last
           three
           ,
           the
           two
           former
           are
           vtterly
           ceased
           to
           be
           vulgar
           :
           and
           the
           third
           ,
           no
           where
           to
           be
           found
           in
           Italie
           ,
           but
           to
           be
           sought
           for
           in
           some
           other
           Countrey
           ,
           And
           although
           ,
           beside
           these
           fiue
           ,
           we
           find
           mention
           ,
           in
           ancient
           writings
           of
           the
           Sabine
           ,
           the
           Oscan
           ,
           the
           Tusculan
           ,
           and
           some
           other
           tongues
           in
           Italie
           ,
           yet
           were
           they
           no
           other
           then
           differing
           dialects
           of
           some
           of
           the
           former
           languages
           ,
           as
           by
           good
           obseruations
           ,
           out
           of
           
             Varro
             ,
             Festus
             ,
             Seruius
             ,
             Paul.
             Diaconus
             ,
          
           and
           others
           ,
           might
           be
           easily
           prooued
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           of
           France
           what
           the
           ancient
           tong
           was
           ,
           hath
           bin
           much
           disputed
           ,
           and
           yet
           remaineth
           somewhat
           vncertain
           ;
           Some
           thinking
           it
           to
           haue
           been
           the
           Germane
           others
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           and
           some
           the
           Walsh
           tong
           .
           But
           ,
           
           
             ●●lard
             .
             1.
             de
             Bello
             Gallic
             .
             in
             principio
             .
             Strab.
             l.
             4.
             in
             princip
             .
          
           if
           the
           meaning
           of
           these
           resoluers
           bee
           ,
           that
           one
           language
           ,
           whatsoeuer
           it
           were
           ,
           was
           vulgar
           in
           all
           Fraunce
           ,
           they
           are
           very
           farre
           wide
           ,
           Caesar
           and
           Strabo
           hauing
           both
           recorded
           ,
           that
           there
           were
           diuerse
           languages
           spoken
           in
           the
           diuers
           parts
           .
           But
           ,
           to
           omit
           the
           speech
           of
           Aquitaine
           ,
           which
           Strabo
           writeth
           to
           haue
           had
           much
           affinitie
           with
           the
           Spanish
           :
           And
           ,
           of
           that
           part
           ,
           (
           in
           Caesar
           called
           Belgia
           )
           that
           at
           the
           riuer
           of
           Rhene
           confined
           with
           Germanie
           ,
           which
           for
           that
           neighbourhood
           ,
           might
           partake
           much
           of
           the
           German
           tongue
           :
           To
           omit
           those
           I
           say
           ,
           the
           maine
           question
           is
           ,
           about
           the
           language
           of
           the
           Celtae
           ,
           which
           as
           inhabiting
           the
           middle
           part
           of
           Fraunce
           ,
           were
           least
           of
           all
           infected
           with
           any
           forraine
           mixture
           .
           And
           certainly
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           not
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           appeareth
           out
           of
           Caesar
           ,
           
           
             Caes.
             l.
             5.
             de
             Bello
             Gallic
             .
             long
             post
             .
             med
             .
          
           writing
           to
           
             Q.
             Cicero
          
           ,
           then
           besieged
           by
           the
           Gaules
           )
           in
           Greeke
           ,
           lest
           the
           Gaules
           should
           intercept
           
           his
           letters
           :
           And
           secondly
           ,
           no
           lesse
           euidently
           by
           Varro
           ,
           
           
             Varro
             ap
             .
             Hieron
             .
             in
             praefat
             .
             l.
             2.
             
             Cōment
             .
             epist.
             ad
             Galat
             .
             &
             apud
             Isidorum
             l.
             1●
             Orig.
             cap.
             1.
             
          
           writing
           of
           the
           Massilians
           that
           they
           spake
           three
           languages
           ,
           the
           Roman
           ,
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           and
           the
           Gallique
           tongue
           :
           And
           thirdly
           ,
           the
           remnants
           of
           that
           tongue
           ,
           may
           serue
           for
           Instance
           ,
           whereof
           many
           old
           words
           ,
           are
           found
           dispersed
           in
           ancient
           writers
           ,
           that
           haue
           no
           affinitie
           at
           all
           with
           the
           Greeke
           .
           The
           Greeke
           therfore
           ,
           was
           not
           the
           ancient
           natiue
           language
           of
           the
           Gaules
           ;
           Neither
           was
           it
           the
           Germane
           :
           for
           else
           it
           had
           beene
           but
           an
           odde
           relation
           and
           reason
           of
           Caesars
           ,
           
           
             Caes.
             l
             de
             Bello
             Gallico
             .
             Tacit
             l
             de
             Mor.
             Germanor
             .
             prope
             finem
             .
             Sueton.
             in
             Caligula
             c.
             47.
             
          
           that
           Ariouistus
           a
           German
           Prince
           ,
           had
           liued
           so
           long
           in
           Gallia
           ,
           that
           hee
           spake
           the
           Gallique
           tongue
           :
           And
           that
           of
           Tacitus
           ,
           that
           the
           Gallique
           tongue
           proued
           the
           Gothines
           to
           be
           no
           Germanes
           :
           and
           that
           of
           Suetonius
           ,
           that
           Caligula
           compelled
           many
           of
           the
           Gaules
           to
           learn
           the
           Germane
           tongue
           .
           
           
             Hottom
             .
             in
             Fran.
             cogall
             .
             c.
             2.
             
          
           But
           Hottoman
           (
           of
           all
           that
           I
           haue
           read
           )
           speaking
           most
           distinctly
           ,
           touching
           the
           originall
           and
           composition
           of
           the
           French
           tongue
           ,
           diuideth
           it
           as
           now
           it
           is
           spoken
           ,
           equally
           into
           two
           parts
           ,
           of
           which
           he
           supposeth
           the
           one
           (
           and
           I
           thinke
           it
           is
           rather
           the
           greater
           part
           )
           to
           haue
           originall
           from
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           :
           and
           the
           other
           halfe
           ,
           to
           be
           made
           vp
           ,
           
           
             Perion
             .
             l
             de
             Cognat
             .
             Ling.
             Gal.
             &
             Graecae
             Postell
             .
             l.
             de
             12.
             
             Ling.
             
          
           by
           the
           German
           and
           Greeke
           ,
           and
           Brittish
           or
           Walsh
           words
           ,
           each
           almost
           in
           equall
           measure
           .
           Of
           the
           deduction
           of
           the
           French
           words
           from
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           you
           may
           read
           
             Perionius
             ,
             Postell
          
           ,
           and
           others
           :
           Of
           those
           from
           the
           
             Germane
             ,
             Tschudus
             ,
             Goropius
             ,
             Isacius
          
           &c.
           
           Of
           the
           
             Walsh
             Lhuid
          
           ,
           
           
             Tschud
             .
             in
             Descr.
             Rhet.
             Alp.
             c
             38.
             
             Gorop
             .
             in
             Francicis
             .
          
           Camden
           &c.
           
           Which
           last
           indeed
           for
           good
           reason
           ,
           seemeth
           to
           haue
           beene
           the
           natiue
           language
           of
           the
           ancient
           Celtae
           ,
           rather
           then
           either
           the
           Greeke
           or
           Dutch
           tongues
           :
           for
           of
           the
           Greeke
           words
           found
           in
           that
           language
           ,
           the
           neighbourhood
           of
           the
           
           Massilians
           ,
           
           
             Isac
             .
             in
             Glossa●rio
             ,
             Prisco-gal
             Lhuid
             in
             Descript
             .
             Britan.
             Camden
             in
             Britannia
             .
             Strab.
             l.
             4.
             
          
           and
           their
           Colonies
           ,
           inhabiting
           the
           maritime
           coast
           of
           Prouince
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           ready
           acceptance
           of
           that
           language
           in
           Fraunce
           ,
           (
           mentioned
           by
           Strabo
           )
           may
           bee
           the
           cause
           :
           As
           likewise
           of
           the
           Germane
           words
           ,
           the
           Franks
           and
           Burgundions
           conquest
           ,
           and
           possession
           of
           Fraunce
           ,
           may
           bee
           assigned
           for
           a
           good
           reason
           :
           But
           of
           the
           Brittish
           words
           none
           at
           all
           can
           be
           iustly
           giuen
           ,
           saue
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           the
           remnants
           of
           the
           ancient
           language
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           it
           seemeth
           to
           be
           so
           by
           Tacitus
           ,
           
           
             Tacit.
             in
             Iulio
             Agricola
             .
          
           writing
           ,
           that
           the
           speech
           of
           the
           Gaules
           ,
           little
           differed
           from
           that
           of
           the
           Brittaines
           .
           And
           thirdly
           ,
           by
           Caesar
           ,
           
           
             Caes
             l
             6.
             de
             Bel.
             Gallico
             .
          
           recording
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           the
           custome
           of
           the
           Gaules
           that
           were
           studious
           of
           the
           Druides
           discipline
           ,
           often
           to
           passe
           ouer
           into
           Brittaine
           to
           bee
           there
           instructed
           :
           wherefore
           seeing
           there
           was
           no
           vse
           of
           bookes
           among
           them
           ,
           as
           is
           in
           the
           same
           place
           affirmed
           by
           Caesar
           ,
           it
           is
           apparent
           that
           they
           spake
           the
           same
           language
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           the
           Spanish
           tongue
           as
           now
           it
           is
           ,
           consisteth
           of
           the
           old
           
             Spanish
             ,
             Latine
             ,
             Gottish
          
           ,
           and
           Arabique
           (
           as
           there
           is
           goood
           reason
           it
           should
           ,
           Spaine
           hauing
           beene
           so
           long
           ,
           in
           the
           possessions
           of
           the
           
             Romanes
             ,
             Gothes
          
           ,
           and
           Mores
           )
           of
           which
           ,
           the
           latine
           is
           the
           greatest
           part
           ,
           (
           next
           it
           the
           Arabique
           )
           and
           therefore
           they
           themselues
           call
           their
           language
           Romance
           .
           And
           certainely
           I
           haue
           seene
           an
           epistle
           written
           by
           a
           Spaniard
           ,
           whereof
           euery
           word
           was
           both
           good
           Latine
           &
           good
           Spanish
           ,
           &
           an
           example
           of
           the
           like
           is
           to
           be
           seene
           in
           Merula
           .
           
           
             Merul.
             Cosmogr
             .
             part
             .
             2.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             8.
             
          
           But
           the
           language
           of
           Valentia
           and
           Catalonia
           ,
           and
           part
           of
           Portugall
           ,
           is
           much
           tempered
           with
           the
           French
           also
           .
           Now
           the
           ancient
           and
           most
           generall
           language
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           spoken
           ouer
           the
           Country
           
           before
           the
           Romanes
           conquest
           ,
           seemeth
           to
           mee
           out
           of
           question
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           ,
           the
           Cantabrian
           tong
           ,
           that
           namely
           which
           yet
           they
           speak
           in
           
             Biscay
             ,
             Guipuscoa
             ,
             Nauarre
          
           ,
           and
           Asturia
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           in
           the
           northerne
           and
           mountainous
           parts
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           neare
           the
           Ocean
           ,
           with
           which
           the
           Vasconian
           tongue
           also
           in
           Aquitaine
           ,
           neere
           the
           Pyrene
           hilles
           ,
           hath
           as
           there
           is
           good
           reason
           (
           for
           out
           of
           those
           parts
           of
           Spaine
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           Gascoigne
           came
           )
           much
           affinitie
           and
           agreement
           .
           And
           my
           reason
           for
           this
           opinion
           is
           ,
           that
           in
           that
           part
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           the
           people
           haue
           euer
           continued
           without
           mixture
           of
           any
           forraine
           nation
           as
           being
           neuer
           subdued
           by
           the
           Carthaginians
           ,
           nor
           by
           the
           Mores
           ,
           no
           ,
           nor
           by
           the
           Romans
           ,
           (
           for
           all
           their
           long
           warring
           in
           Spaine
           )
           before
           
             Augustus
             Caesars
          
           time
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           hillinesse
           ,
           and
           barenesse
           ,
           and
           vnpleasantnesse
           of
           the
           Countrey
           ,
           hauing
           nothing
           in
           it
           ,
           to
           inuite
           strangers
           to
           dwell
           among
           them
           .
           For
           which
           cause
           ,
           the
           most
           ancient
           Nations
           and
           languages
           are
           for
           the
           most
           part
           preserued
           in
           such
           Countryes
           :
           as
           by
           Thucydides
           is
           specially
           obserued
           ,
           
           
             Thucyd.
             l.
             1.
             paul
             .
             a
             princip
             .
          
           of
           the
           Attiques
           ,
           and
           Arcadians
           ,
           in
           Greece
           ,
           dwelling
           in
           barren
           soiles
           :
           Of
           which
           nations
           the
           first
           ,
           for
           their
           Antiquitie
           ,
           vaunted
           of
           themselues
           that
           they
           were
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           and
           the
           second
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           as
           if
           they
           had
           beene
           bred
           immediately
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           or
           borne
           before
           the
           Moone
           .
           Another
           example
           whereof
           wee
           may
           see
           in
           Spaine
           it selfe
           ,
           for
           in
           the
           steepy
           mountaines
           of
           Granata
           ,
           named
           Alpuxarras
           ,
           the
           progeny
           of
           the
           Mores
           yet
           retaine
           the
           Arabique
           tongue
           (
           for
           the
           Spaniards
           call
           it
           Arauiga
           )
           which
           all
           the
           other
           remnants
           of
           the
           Mores
           in
           the
           plainer
           region
           had
           vtterly
           
           forgotten
           ,
           and
           receiued
           the
           Castilian
           (
           till
           their
           late
           expulsion
           out
           of
           Spaine
           )
           for
           their
           vulgar
           language
           .
           The
           like
           whereof
           ,
           is
           also
           to
           be
           seene
           in
           the
           old
           Epirotique
           speech
           and
           nation
           ,
           which
           yet
           continueth
           in
           the
           mountainous
           part
           of
           Epirus
           ,
           being
           (
           for
           the
           tongue
           )
           vtterly
           extinguished
           in
           all
           the
           Country
           beside
           .
           And
           (
           to
           let
           forraine
           instances
           goe
           )
           in
           the
           Brittaines
           or
           Welsh-men
           in
           the
           hillie
           part
           of
           our
           owne
           Country
           .
           What
           the
           reason
           thereof
           may
           be
           ,
           I
           will
           not
           stand
           now
           curiously
           to
           enquire
           :
           whether
           that
           being
           inured
           to
           labour
           ,
           to
           watching
           ,
           to
           sundry
           distemperatures
           of
           the
           aire
           ,
           and
           much
           other
           hardnesse
           (
           for
           otherwise
           their
           liuing
           will
           not
           be
           gotten
           of
           such
           barren
           ground
           )
           they
           prooue
           vpon
           occcasion
           good
           and
           able
           souldiers
           ?
           Or
           ,
           that
           the
           craggie
           rockes
           and
           hilles
           (
           like
           fortresses
           of
           natures
           owne
           erecting
           )
           are
           easily
           defended
           from
           forraine
           inuaders
           ?
           Or
           that
           their
           vnpleasant
           and
           fruitlesse
           ?
           soile
           ,
           hath
           nothing
           to
           inuite
           strangers
           to
           desire
           it
           ?
           Or
           ,
           that
           wanting
           richesse
           ,
           they
           want
           also
           the
           ordinary
           companions
           of
           richesse
           ,
           that
           is
           proud
           and
           audacious
           hearts
           ,
           to
           prouoke
           with
           their
           iniuries
           other
           nations
           to
           be
           reuenged
           on
           them
           ,
           either
           by
           the
           conquest
           or
           desolation
           of
           their
           Countries
           ?
           But
           whatsoeuer
           the
           cause
           may
           be
           ,
           certainely
           in
           effect
           so
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           most
           ancient
           Nations
           and
           Languages
           ,
           are
           for
           the
           most
           part
           to
           be
           found
           in
           such
           vnpleasant
           and
           fruitlesse
           regions
           :
           Insomuch
           that
           the
           Biscaynes
           who
           gaue
           me
           occasion
           of
           this
           digression
           ,
           vaunt
           of
           themselues
           among
           the
           Spanyards
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           the
           right
           Hidalgos
           ,
           (
           that
           is
           gentlemen
           )
           as
           some
           also
           report
           of
           the
           Welsh-men
           heere
           in
           Brittaine
           
           to
           say
           of
           themselues
           ,
           which
           yet
           I
           that
           am
           their
           neighbour
           ,
           (
           to
           confesse
           a
           truth
           )
           neuer
           heard
           them
           say
           .
        
         
           Now
           lastly
           touching
           the
           Punique
           tongue
           ,
           as
           I
           am
           not
           of
           Galateus
           his
           opinion
           ,
           
           
             Galat.
             de
             〈…〉
             
          
           that
           it
           was
           vtterly
           extinguished
           by
           the
           Romanes
           :
           So
           neither
           can
           I
           bee
           of
           the
           phantasie
           (
           for
           it
           is
           no
           better
           )
           that
           *
           
             *
             G●sner
             in
             Mithridate
             i●
             Ling.
             Afric
             .
             &
             Arab.
             Roccha
             de
             dialect
             .
             in
             Ling.
             Arabica
             Postell
             .
             de
             Ling.
             12
             in
             ling.
             Arab.
             Mas.
             in
             Gram
             Syriaca
             .
             prop.
             Init.
             Bibliand
             .
             de
             ration
             .
             Linguar
             .
             Schidler
             .
             in
             Lex
             .
             Pontaglotto
             in
             voce
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Mart.
             Galeott
             .
             de
             doctr
             .
             promiscua
             .
             cap.
             6.
             &
             alij
             multi
             .
          
           manie
           other
           learned
           men
           are
           :
           namely
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           the
           Arabique
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           the
           same
           language
           ,
           that
           is
           vulgar
           in
           Afrique
           at
           this
           day
           .
           For
           it
           is
           well
           knowen
           to
           the
           skilfull
           in
           histories
           ,
           that
           the
           Puniques
           were
           of
           another
           off-spring
           (
           not
           of
           Arabian
           race
           )
           and
           that
           it
           is
           not
           yet
           a
           thousand
           yeares
           ,
           since
           that
           tongue
           was
           by
           the
           Arabians
           together
           with
           their
           victories
           brought
           into
           Afrique
           .
           And
           as
           certaine
           also
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           remnants
           of
           the
           Africans
           progenie
           ,
           as
           *
           
             *
             Leo
             Afric
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Descrip.
             Afr.
             cap.
             de
             Ling.
             Africae
             .
             Flo.
             in
             Epitom
             Liu
             l.
             51.
             
             Strab.
             l.
             17.
             
          
           
             Leo
             Africanus
          
           hath
           recorded
           ,
           haue
           a
           different
           language
           from
           the
           Arabique
           .
           But
           the
           Punique
           tongue
           seemeth
           to
           me
           out
           of
           question
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           the
           Chananitish
           or
           old
           Hebrew
           language
           ,
           though
           I
           doubt
           not
           somwhat
           altered
           from
           the
           original
           pronuntiation
           ,
           as
           is
           wont
           in
           tract
           of
           time
           ,
           to
           befall
           Colonies
           ,
           planted
           among
           strangers
           farre
           from
           home
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           Carthage
           it selfe
           ,
           the
           Queene
           of
           the
           Cities
           of
           Afrique
           (
           and
           well
           might
           she
           be
           termed
           so
           ,
           that
           contained
           in
           circuit
           24
           miles
           ,
           as
           Florus
           in
           his
           abridgement
           of
           Liuie
           hath
           recorded
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           vtter
           wall
           360
           furlongs
           (
           that
           is
           45
           miles
           )
           as
           it
           is
           in
           Strabo
           :
           And
           held
           out
           in
           emulation
           with
           Rome
           as
           is
           noted
           by
           Plinie
           ,
           120
           yeare
           ,
           and
           to
           conclude
           (
           before
           the
           second
           Punique
           warre
           )
           had
           in
           subiection
           all
           the
           coast
           of
           the
           mediterrane
           sea
           ,
           
           
             Plin.
             l.
             15.
             c.
             18.
             
          
           from
           the
           bottome
           of
           the
           greater
           
           Syrtis
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           to
           the
           riuer
           
             Ebro
             (
             Iberus
          
           )
           in
           Spain
           ,
           which
           is
           about
           2000.
           miles
           of
           length
           )
           that
           the
           same
           Carthage
           I
           say
           ,
           and
           diuers
           other
           Cities
           of
           Afrique
           (
           of
           which
           Plinie
           nameth
           Vtica
           and
           Leptis
           ,
           as
           being
           the
           printipall
           )
           were
           Colonies
           of
           the
           Phoenicians
           ,
           and
           namely
           of
           the
           Tyrians
           ,
           is
           not
           onely
           by
           Strabo
           ,
           
           
             Strab.
             lib.
             citato
             .
             Mela.
             l.
             1.
             c.
             ●
             Liu.
             lib.
             33.
             
             Plin.
             l.
             5.
             c.
             19.
             
             Appian
             .
             l.
             de
             Bel.
             Pun●cis
             in
             principio
             Curtius
             .
             l.
             4.
             et
             A●●
             plures
             .
          
           
             Mela
             ,
             Liuie
             ,
             Plinie
             ,
             Appian
             ,
          
           and
           many
           other
           certaine
           Authors
           ,
           acknowledged
           ,
           and
           by
           none
           denied
           ,
           but
           also
           the
           very
           names
           of
           Poeni
           and
           Punici
           ,
           beeing
           but
           variations
           or
           mutilations
           of
           the
           name
           Phoenicij
           import
           so
           much
           ,
           and
           lastly
           their
           language
           assureth
           it
           .
           For
           Hierome
           writing
           ,
           that
           their
           language
           was
           growne
           somewhat
           different
           from
           the
           Phoenician
           tongue
           ,
           doth
           manifestly
           in
           those
           words
           imply
           ,
           it
           had
           bene
           the
           same
           .
        
         
           And
           what
           were
           the
           Phoenicians
           but
           Chanaanites
           ?
           The
           Phoenicians
           I
           say
           ,
           of
           whose
           exceeding
           merchādizing
           we
           reade
           so
           much
           in
           ancient
           histories
           ,
           what
           were
           they
           but
           Chanaanites
           ,
           whose
           very
           
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           name
           signifieth
           merchants
           ?
           for
           ,
           the
           very
           same
           nation
           ,
           that
           the
           Graecians
           called
           Phoenicians
           (
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           and
           the
           Romanes
           in
           imitation
           of
           that
           name
           Poenos
           &
           Punicos
           ,
           for
           the
           exceeding
           store
           of
           good
           Palmes
           ,
           
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             in
             the
             Greeke
             ,
             signifieth
             the
             Palme
             ,
             for
             as
             touching
             the
             deduction
             of
             the
             name
             Phoenicia
             ,
             either
             from
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             by
             Montanus
             ,
             or
             from
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             by
             Postellus
             ,
             signifying
             the
             delicacy
             of
             the
             inhabitants
             by
             the
             first
             ,
             and
             their
             obseruation
             or
             adoration
             of
             the
             fire
             ,
             by
             the
             second
             ,
             they
             are
             but
             late
             sprung
             fantasies
             ,
             and
             haue
             not
             any
             groūd
             of
             reason
             at
             all
             :
             for
             as
             much
             ,
             as
             in
             al
             the
             Hebrew
             writings
             of
             the
             Bible
             ,
             that
             country
             is
             neuer
             termed
             by
             any
             name
             sounding
             toward
             Phoenicia
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             Greeke
             onely
             .
             But
             in
             many
             olde
             coynes
             that
             I
             haue
             seen
             ,
             I
             haue
             noted
             the
             Palme
             tree
             as
             the
             speciall
             cognisance
             of
             Phoenicia
             ,
             (
             as
             I
             haue
             also
             the
             Oliue
             branch
             and
             Conies
             to
             be
             of
             Spain
             :
             the
             Horse
             of
             Mauritania
             :
             the
             Elephant
             ,
             or
             the
             spoile
             of
             the
             Elephāt
             of
             Afrique
             :
             the
             Camell
             ,
             of
             Arabia
             :
             the
             Crocodile
             ,
             or
             the
             bird
             Ibis
             ,
             of
             Aegypt
             :
             and
             diuers
             other
             specialties
             for
             other
             countries
             :
             )
             And
             namely
             I
             haue
             seene
             ,
             sundrie
             olde
             coynes
             of
             the
             Emperour
             Vespatian
             ,
             of
             seuerall
             deuises
             and
             imagerie
             ,
             stamped
             for
             a
             memoriall
             of
             his
             conquest
             of
             Iudaea
             ,
             and
             taking
             of
             Ierusalem
             (
             for
             the
             inscription
             is
             in
             euery
             of
             them
             ,
             
               Iudaea
               capta
            
             )
             and
             in
             each
             of
             them
             I
             specially
             obserued
             a
             woman
             sitting
             in
             a
             sad
             and
             mournefull
             fashion
             ,
             with
             her
             back
             to
             a
             Palme
             tree
             :
             wherein
             ,
             I
             make
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             the
             desolate
             woman
             signifieth
             Iudaea
             ,
             and
             the
             Palme
             Phoenicia
             ,
             euen
             as
             Phoenicia
             is
             immediately
             toward
             the
             north
             ,
             at
             the
             backe
             of
             Iudaea
             .
          
           wherwith
           that
           country
           aboūded
           :
           
           
             Arias
             Mont.
             lib.
             Chanaan
             .
             ●a
             .
             3.
             
             Postel
             .
             in
             deserio
             .
             Syriae
             .
             c.
             de
             Syriae
             No●inib
             .
          
           Insomuch
           that
           in
           monuments
           of
           antiquitie
           ,
           the
           Palme
           tree
           is
           
           obserued
           for
           the
           Ensigne
           of
           Phoenicia
           :
           the
           same
           nation
           I
           say
           ,
           called
           thēselues
           ,
           &
           by
           the
           Israelites
           ,
           their
           next
           neighbours
           ,
           were
           called
           ,
           Chanaanites
           .
           And
           that
           they
           were
           indeed
           no
           other
           ,
           I
           am
           able
           easily
           to
           prooue
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           the
           same
           woman
           that
           in
           Mathew
           is
           named
           a
           Canaanite
           ,
           
           
             Math.
             15.22
             .
          
           is
           in
           Marke
           called
           a
           Syrophoenician
           .
           
           
             Marc.
             7.26
             .
          
           2.
           
           Where
           mētion
           is
           made
           in
           Iosua
           ,
           
           
             Ios.
             5.1
             .
          
           of
           the
           Kings
           of
           Canaan
           ,
           they
           are
           in
           the
           Septuagints
           translation
           named
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
        
         
         
           3.
           
           To
           put
           it
           out
           of
           questiō
           .
           All
           that
           coast
           ,
           from
           Sidon
           to
           Azzah
           ,
           (
           that
           was
           Gaza
           )
           neere
           to
           Gerar
           ,
           is
           registred
           by
           *
           
             *
             Gen.
             10.19
             .
          
           Moses
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           possessed
           by
           the
           posterity
           of
           Chanaan
           :
           Of
           which
           coast
           the
           more
           northren
           part
           aboue
           the
           promontory
           of
           Carmell
           ,
           or
           rather
           from
           the
           riuer
           Chorseus
           ,
           (
           Kison
           the
           Iewes
           called
           it
           )
           that
           nere
           the
           promontory
           of
           Carmel
           ,
           
           
             Strab.
             l.
             16.
             nō
             long
             .
             ante
             med
             .
             Plin.
             l.
             5.
             c.
             12.
             
             Pt●lem
             .
             Tab.
             4.
             
             A●ae
             .
             Dionys
             Alex.
             in
             Periegesi
             .
          
           entreth
           the
           sea
           ,
           to
           the
           city
           of
           Orthosia
           ,
           aboue
           Sidon
           northward
           ,
           is
           by
           
             Strabo
             ,
             Plinie
             ,
             Ptolomy
          
           and
           others
           ,
           referred
           to
           Phoenicia
           ,
           (
           although
           Strabo
           extend
           that
           name
           ,
           along
           all
           the
           maritime
           coast
           of
           Palestina
           also
           ,
           to
           the
           confines
           of
           Aegypt
           ,
           as
           
             Dionysius
             Periegetes
          
           also
           doth
           ,
           placing
           Ioppa
           and
           Gaza
           ,
           and
           
             Elath
             in
             Phoenicia
          
           )
           which
           very
           tract
           ,
           to
           haue
           bin
           the
           seuerall
           possessions
           of
           Zidon
           ,
           and
           Cheth
           ,
           &
           Girgashi
           ,
           and
           Harki
           ,
           and
           Aruadi
           ,
           and
           Chamathi
           ,
           sixe
           of
           the
           eleuen
           sonnes
           of
           Canaan
           ,
           (
           the
           other
           fiue
           inhabiting
           more
           to
           the
           south
           in
           Palestina
           )
           they
           that
           are
           skilful
           in
           the
           ancient
           Chorography
           of
           the
           Holy
           land
           ,
           cannot
           be
           ignorant
           .
           Seeing
           therefore
           out
           of
           this
           part
           of
           the
           land
           of
           Canaan
           (
           for
           in
           this
           part
           Tyrus
           was
           )
           the
           Carthaginians
           ,
           and
           other
           colonies
           of
           the
           Phaenicians
           in
           Afrique
           came
           ,
           it
           is
           out
           of
           all
           doubt
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           of
           the
           Chananites
           progenie
           :
           
           
             August
             expos
             :
             ●●●hoat
             .
             epist.
             ad
             Roman
             .
             in
             med
             .
          
           and
           for
           such
           in
           very
           deede
           ,
           and
           no
           other
           ,
           they
           reputed
           and
           professed
           themselues
           to
           be
           :
           for
           as
           Austine
           hath
           left
           recorded
           ,
           who
           was
           borne
           &
           liued
           among
           them
           ,
           the
           country
           people
           of
           the
           Puniques
           ,
           when
           they
           were
           asked
           touching
           themselues
           what
           they
           were
           ,
           they
           would
           make
           answere
           that
           they
           were
           Channai
           ,
           meaning
           ,
           as
           
           Austine
           himselfe
           doth
           interprete
           them
           ,
           Canaanites
           .
        
         
           Certaine
           therefore
           it
           is
           that
           the
           natiue
           Punique
           langauge
           was
           not
           the
           Chanaanitish
           tongue
           :
           but
           that
           I
           added
           for
           explication
           this
           clause
           ,
           (
           or
           the
           olde
           Hebrew
           ,
           meaning
           by
           the
           olde
           Hebrew
           that
           which
           was
           vulgarly
           spoken
           among
           the
           Iewes
           before
           the
           captiuity
           )
           you
           will
           perhaps
           suspect
           my
           credite
           ,
           and
           bee
           offended
           ,
           for
           I
           am
           not
           ignorant
           ,
           how
           superstitiously
           Diuines
           for
           the
           most
           part
           are
           affected
           toward
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           :
           yet
           when
           I
           had
           set
           downe
           the
           Africans
           language
           to
           haue
           beene
           the
           Canaanitish
           tongue
           ,
           I
           thought
           good
           to
           adde
           for
           plainesse
           sake
           (
           or
           the
           old
           Hebrew
           )
           because
           J
           take
           them
           indeede
           to
           be
           the
           very
           same
           language
           ,
           and
           that
           Abraham
           and
           his
           posterity
           ,
           brought
           it
           not
           out
           of
           Chaldaea
           ,
           but
           learned
           it
           in
           the
           land
           of
           Chanaan
           .
           Neither
           is
           this
           opinion
           of
           mine
           ,
           a
           meere
           paradox
           and
           fantasie
           ,
           but
           I
           haue
           *
           
             *
             Postel
             .
             lib.
             de
             Phoenic
             .
             lit
             .
             c.
             2.
             
             §.
             5.
             
             Arias
             Monta.
             L.
             Chanaan
             .
             ca.
             9.
             
             G●●ebrard
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Chron.
             an
             .
             D●lunij
             131
             Scal●●
             .
             ●d
             se●
             .
             in
             di●t
             .
             ●●rte
             .
             &
             in
             ep
             ●d
             V.
             ●ert●e
             ad
             Tomson
             .
          
           three
           or
           foure
           of
           the
           best
           skilled
           in
           the
           language
           and
           antiquities
           of
           that
           nation
           ,
           that
           the
           later
           times
           could
           afford
           ,
           of
           the
           same
           minde
           :
           And
           certainly
           ,
           by
           *
           
             *
             Isa.
             19.18
             .
          
           Isaiah
           it
           is
           called
           in
           direct
           termes
           ,
           the
           language
           of
           Chanaan
           :
           And
           it
           is
           moreouer
           manifest
           ,
           that
           the
           names
           of
           the
           places
           ,
           and
           cities
           of
           Chanaan
           ,
           (
           the
           olde
           names
           I
           meane
           by
           which
           they
           were
           called
           before
           the
           Israelites
           dwelt
           in
           them
           ,
           as
           is
           to
           be
           seene
           in
           the
           whole
           course
           of
           the
           books
           of
           Moses
           and
           of
           Ioshuah
           )
           were
           Hebrew
           names
           :
           touching
           which
           point
           ,
           although
           I
           could
           produce
           other
           forceable
           reasons
           ,
           such
           as
           might
           ,
           (
           except
           my
           fantasie
           delude
           me
           )
           vex
           the
           best
           wit
           in
           the
           world
           to
           giue
           them
           iust
           solution
           ,
           yet
           I
           will
           adde
           no
           more
           ,
           both
           to
           auoide
           prolixity
           ,
           and
           because
           I
           
           shall
           haue
           in
           another
           place
           fitter
           occasion
           .
        
         
           But
           to
           speake
           particularly
           of
           the
           Punique
           tongue
           which
           hath
           brought
           vs
           into
           this
           discourse
           ,
           and
           which
           I
           proued
           before
           to
           be
           the
           Canaanitish
           language
           :
           it
           is
           not
           only
           *
           
             *
             Augu.
             in
             ser.
             35.
             de
             verb.
             Dom.
             in
             Euāgel
             .
             sec.
             Lucā
             .
          
           in
           one
           place
           pronounced
           by
           Augustine
           (
           who
           knew
           it
           well
           ,
           no
           man
           better
           )
           to
           haue
           neer
           affinitie
           with
           the
           Hebrew
           tong
           ,
           which
           also
           the
           *
           
             *
             As
             in
             the
             Punique
             tongue
             Salus
             three
             ,
             
               Augustin
               .
               in
               expos
               .
               inchoat
               .
               epist.
               ad
               Roman
               .
               Heb.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Edom
               ,
            
             bloud
             .
             
               Enar.
               Psalm
            
             .
             136.
             
             
               Heb.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Mamon
               ,
               lucre
               ,
               De
               Sermon
               .
               Dom.
               in
               Mont.
               l.
            
             2.
             c.
             14.
             
             
               Heb.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Bal.
            
             the
             Lord.
             
               Quaest.
               in
               Iudie
               .
               cap.
            
             16.
             
             
               Hebr.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Samen
            
             ,
             Heauen
             .
             
               Ibid.
               Heb.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Messe
            
             ,
             to
             annoint
             .
             Tract
             .
             15.
             
               in
               Ioan.
               Heb.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Alma
               ,
            
             a
             Virgine
             .
             
               Hieron
               .
               in
               c.
            
             7.
             
             
               Isai.
               Heb.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Gadir
            
             .
             a
             fence
             or
             wall
             .
             
               Plinie
               .
               l.
            
             4.
             c.
             22.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             and
             some
             other
             that
             diligence
             might
             obserue
             .
          
           Punick
           words
           dispearsed
           in
           the
           writings
           of
           Augustine
           ,
           and
           of
           others
           ,
           (
           as
           many
           as
           come
           to
           my
           remembrance
           )
           proue
           to
           be
           true
           .
           But
           more
           effectually
           in
           *
           
             *
             Aug
             l.
             2
             ▪
             cōt
             .
             litter
             Petiliani
             ●ap
             .
             104.
             
          
           an
           other
           place
           ,
           to
           agree
           with
           it
           in
           very
           many
           ,
           yea
           almost
           in
           euerie
           worde
           .
           Which
           speech
           seeing
           they
           could
           in
           no
           sort
           haue
           from
           the
           Israelites
           ,
           being
           not
           of
           Abrahams
           posterity
           (
           both
           because
           no
           such
           transmigration
           of
           them
           is
           remembred
           in
           the
           holy
           histories
           ,
           and
           for
           that
           the
           Punique
           colonies
           ,
           are
           specially
           mentioned
           to
           haue
           beene
           deduced
           from
           Tyre
           ,
           which
           neuer
           came
           into
           the
           possession
           of
           the
           Israelites
           )
           but
           from
           the
           Canaanites
           whose
           of-spring
           they
           were
           :
           It
           followeth
           therupon
           that
           the
           language
           of
           the
           Canaanites
           ,
           
           was
           either
           the
           very
           same
           or
           exceeding
           neere
           the
           Hebrew
           .
           And
           certainely
           touching
           the
           difference
           that
           was
           betweene
           the
           Hebrew
           and
           the
           Punique
           ,
           I
           make
           no
           doubt
           ,
           but
           the
           great
           distance
           from
           their
           primitiue
           habitation
           ,
           and
           their
           conuersation
           with
           strangers
           among
           whom
           they
           were
           planted
           ,
           and
           together
           with
           both
           ,
           the
           length
           of
           time
           ,
           which
           is
           wont
           to
           bring
           alteration
           to
           all
           the
           languages
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           were
           the
           causes
           of
           it
           .
           And
           although
           that
           Punique
           speech
           in
           Plautus
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           onely
           continued
           speech
           of
           that
           language
           ,
           
           
             Plau●
             .
             i●
             P●e
             nulo
             .
             Act.
             6.
             
          
           that
           to
           my
           knowledge
           remaineth
           extant
           in
           any
           Author
           ,
           haue
           no
           such
           great
           conuenience
           with
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           ,
           yet
           I
           assure
           my selfe
           the
           faults
           ,
           &
           corruptions
           that
           haue
           crept
           into
           it
           by
           many
           transcriptions
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           the
           cause
           of
           so
           great
           difference
           ,
           by
           reason
           whereof
           ,
           it
           is
           much
           changed
           ,
           from
           what
           at
           the
           first
           it
           was
           ,
           when
           Plautus
           writ
           it
           ,
           about
           1800.
           yeares
           agoe
           :
           And
           specially
           because
           in
           transcribing
           thereof
           there
           would
           be
           so
           much
           the
           lesse
           care
           taken
           ,
           as
           the
           language
           was
           lesse
           vnderstood
           ,
           by
           the
           writers
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           readers
           ,
           and
           so
           the
           escapes
           lesse
           subiect
           to
           obseruation
           and
           controlement
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           largenesse
           of
           the
           Slauonish
           ,
           Turkish
           ,
           and
           Arabique
           languages
           .
           CHAP.
           VIII
           .
        
         
           MAny
           are
           the
           nations
           that
           haue
           for
           their
           vulgar
           language
           the
           Slauonish
           tongue
           in
           Europe
           ,
           &
           some
           in
           Asia
           .
           Among
           which
           the
           principall
           in
           Europe
           ,
           are
           the
           Slauonians
           themselues
           ,
           inhabiting
           Dalmatia
           &
           Liburnia
           ,
           the
           West
           Macedonians
           ,
           the
           Epirotes
           ,
           the
           
             Bosinates
             ,
             Seruians
             ,
             Russians
             ,
             Bulgarians
             ,
             Moldauians
             ,
             Podolians
             ,
             Russians
             ,
             Muscouites
             ,
             Bohemians
             ,
             Polonians
             ,
             Silesians
             .
          
           And
           in
           Asia
           the
           
             Circassians
             ,
             Mangrellians
          
           ,
           and
           Gazarites
           .
           
           
             Gesner
             .
             in
             Mithrid
             .
             in
             Ling.
             Illyrica
             .
             Boccha
             in
             Append
             .
             de
             dia●●ct
             in
             Illyrica
             .
          
           These
           I
           say
           are
           the
           principall
           but
           they
           are
           not
           all
           :
           for
           Gesner
           and
           Roccha
           reckken
           vp
           the
           names
           of
           60.
           nations
           ,
           that
           haue
           the
           Slauonian
           tongue
           for
           their
           vulgar
           language
           .
           So
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           knowne
           to
           bee
           vulgarly
           spoken
           ouer
           all
           the
           East
           parts
           of
           Europe
           (
           in
           more
           then
           a
           third
           part
           of
           the
           whole
           )
           euen
           to
           the
           vtmost
           bonds
           of
           it
           the
           riuers
           of
           Droyna
           and
           
             Tanais
             ;
             Greece
          
           and
           Hungary
           ,
           and
           Wala●hia
           onely
           excepted
           .
           Indeed
           the
           regions
           of
           
             Seruia
             ,
             Bosina
             ,
             Bulgaria
             ,
             Rascia
             ,
             Moldauia
             ,
             Russia
          
           and
           Moscouia
           ,
           namely
           all
           the
           nations
           of
           the
           Easterne
           parts
           ,
           which
           celebrate
           their
           diuine
           seruice
           after
           the
           Greek
           ceremony
           ,
           and
           professe
           ecclesiasticall
           obedience
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           write
           in
           a
           diuerse
           ●o●●
           of
           Character
           ,
           from
           that
           of
           the
           
             Dalmatians
             ,
             Croatians
             ,
             
             Istrians
             ,
             Polonians
             ,
             Bohemians
             ,
             Silesians
          
           &
           other
           nations
           toward
           the
           west
           (
           both
           which
           sorts
           of
           characters
           are
           to
           bee
           seene
           in
           Postels
           booke
           of
           the
           Orientall
           languages
           )
           of
           which
           ,
           this
           last
           is
           called
           the
           Dalmatian
           or
           Illyrian
           character
           ,
           &
           was
           of
           *
           
             *
             Posteli
             .
             ●●
             ling.
             Dalma●
             Rocch
             .
             in
             ●iblioth
             .
             Vatican
             pagin
             .
             16
             &
             alij
             .
          
           Hieromes
           deuising
           ,
           that
           other
           bering
           for
           the
           most
           part
           much
           resemblance
           with
           the
           Greek
           ,
           is
           termed
           the
           Seruian
           character
           ,
           and
           was
           of
           *
           
             *
             Roccha
             .
             lib.
             citato
             pag.
             168.
             
          
           Cyrils
           inuention
           :
           for
           which
           cause
           ,
           as
           Roccha
           hath
           remembred
           ,
           they
           terme
           the
           language
           written
           in
           that
           character
           *
           
             *
             Id.
             pag.
             17●
             .
          
           Chiurilizza
           .
           But
           yet
           notwithstanding
           the
           difference
           of
           characters
           in
           the
           writing
           of
           these
           nations
           ,
           they
           speake
           all
           of
           them
           (
           the
           difference
           of
           dialect
           excepted
           )
           the
           same
           language
           .
        
         
           But
           yet
           is
           not
           the
           Slauonique
           tongue
           (
           to
           answere
           your
           question
           )
           for
           all
           this
           large
           extent
           ,
           the
           vulgar
           language
           of
           the
           Turkish
           Empire
           .
           For
           of
           the
           Turks
           dominion
           onely
           Epirus
           ,
           the
           west
           part
           of
           
             Macedon
             ,
             Bosina
             ,
             Seruia
             ,
             Bulgaria
             ,
             Rascia
             ,
          
           and
           part
           of
           Thrace
           ,
           &
           that
           hee
           hath
           in
           Dalmatia
           and
           Croacia
           ,
           (
           beside
           the
           Mengrelli
           in
           Asia
           )
           speake
           vulgarly
           the
           Slauonian
           tongue
           .
           But
           no
           where
           for
           the
           more
           precise
           limitation
           ,
           neither
           in
           Asia
           nor
           in
           Europe
           ,
           is
           that
           language
           spoken
           more
           southward
           ,
           then
           the
           north
           Parallel
           of
           40.
           degrees
           :
           some
           part
           of
           Epirus
           onely
           excepted
           :
           I
           meane
           it
           is
           not
           spoken
           as
           the
           vulgar
           language
           of
           any
           nation
           more
           southward
           .
           For
           else
           ,
           being
           acceptable
           and
           vsuall
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           ,
           in
           the
           Great
           Turkes
           Serrail
           at
           Constantinople
           ,
           and
           familiar
           with
           most
           of
           the
           Turkish
           souldiers
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           garrisons
           and
           other
           great
           imployment
           in
           those
           parts
           toward
           the
           confines
           of
           Christian
           Princes
           ,
           all
           which
           parts
           as
           
           before
           I
           said
           (
           Hungarie
           and
           Walachia
           excepted
           )
           speake
           that
           language
           :
           for
           these
           reasons
           I
           say
           ,
           it
           is
           spoken
           by
           diuerse
           particular
           men
           ,
           in
           many
           places
           of
           the
           Turkish
           dominion
           ,
           and
           the
           Ianizares
           and
           officers
           for
           the
           most
           part
           can
           speake
           it
           ,
           and
           many
           others
           also
           of
           the
           better
           sort
           ,
           but
           yet
           the
           generall
           and
           vulgar
           language
           of
           his
           dominion
           (
           excepting
           those
           places
           afore
           mentioned
           )
           it
           is
           not
           .
        
         
           But
           in
           Anatolia
           ,
           although
           the
           old
           languages
           still
           remaine
           ,
           being
           for
           the
           most
           part
           corrupt
           Greeke
           ,
           as
           also
           in
           Armenia
           ,
           they
           haue
           their
           peculiar
           language
           ,
           yet
           is
           the
           Turkish
           tongue
           very
           frequent
           and
           preuaileth
           in
           them
           hoth
           :
           which
           being
           originally
           none
           other
           then
           the
           Tartarian
           tongue
           ,
           as
           Michouius
           ,
           
           
             Michou
             .
             l.
             1.
             de
             Sarmatia
             .
             cap.
             15.
             
             Rocch
             de
             dialect
             .
             in
             Ling.
             Tur●ica
             .
          
           and
           others
           haue
           obserued
           ,
           yet
           partaketh
           much
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           Armenian
           and
           Persian
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Turkes
           long
           continuance
           in
           both
           those
           regions
           ,
           before
           they
           setled
           the
           seate
           of
           their
           Dominion
           ,
           and
           themselues
           among
           the
           Grecians
           ,
           for
           which
           cause
           it
           is
           not
           without
           mixture
           of
           Greeke
           also
           ,
           but
           chiefely
           and
           aboue
           all
           other
           of
           the
           Arabique
           ,
           both
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           religion
           written
           in
           that
           language
           ,
           and
           their
           training
           vp
           in
           schooles
           vnto
           it
           ,
           as
           their
           learned
           tongue
           .
           And
           yet
           although
           the
           Turkish
           be
           well
           vnderstood
           both
           in
           Natolia
           and
           Armenia
           ,
           yet
           hath
           it
           neither
           extinguished
           the
           vulgar
           languages
           of
           those
           parts
           neither
           obtained
           to
           it selfe
           (
           for
           ought
           I
           can
           by
           my
           reading
           finde
           )
           any
           peculiar
           prouince
           at
           all
           ,
           wherein
           it
           is
           become
           the
           sole
           natiue
           and
           vulgar
           language
           ,
           but
           is
           only
           a
           common
           scattered
           tongue
           ,
           which
           appeareth
           to
           be
           so
           much
           the
           more
           euidently
           true
           ,
           because
           the
           very
           Citties
           that
           haue
           beene
           
           successiuely
           the
           seates
           of
           the
           
             Ottaman
             Sultans
          
           ;
           namely
           Iconium
           (
           now
           Cogna
           )
           in
           Lycaonia
           ,
           then
           Prusa
           in
           Bithynia
           ;
           thirdly
           ,
           Adrianople
           in
           Thrace
           ;
           and
           lastly
           ,
           Constantinople
           ,
           are
           yet
           knowne
           to
           retaine
           their
           old
           natiue
           language
           ,
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           :
           Although
           the
           Turkish
           tongue
           also
           bee
           common
           in
           them
           all
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           likewise
           in
           all
           other
           Greeke
           Citties
           both
           of
           Greece
           and
           Asia
           .
        
         
           But
           in
           the
           East
           part
           of
           Cilicia
           beyond
           the
           riuer
           Pyramus
           ,
           as
           in
           all
           Syria
           also
           ,
           and
           Mesopotamia
           and
           Palestina
           ,
           and
           Arabia
           and
           Aegypt
           ,
           and
           thence
           Westward
           in
           all
           that
           long
           tract
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           that
           extendeth
           from
           Aegypt
           to
           the
           Strait
           of
           Gibralter
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           in
           all
           that
           lieth
           betwixt
           the
           Mountaine
           Atlas
           ,
           and
           the
           mediterrane
           sea
           (
           now
           termed
           Barbarie
           )
           excepting
           Marocco
           ,
           and
           here
           and
           there
           some
           scattered
           remnants
           of
           the
           old
           Africans
           in
           the
           Inland
           parts
           ,
           the
           Aribique
           tongue
           is
           become
           the
           vulgar
           language
           ,
           although
           somewhat
           corrupted
           and
           varied
           in
           dialect
           ,
           as
           among
           so
           many
           seuerall
           nations
           it
           is
           vnpossible
           but
           it
           should
           bee
           .
           And
           although
           I
           bee
           farre
           from
           *
           
             *
             Postell
             .
             in
             praefat
             .
             Grammat
             .
             Arabic
             .
             Ludouic
             .
             Reg.
             l.
             8.
             de
             Vicissitud
             .
             Rer.
             ad
             finem
             .
          
           their
           opinion
           ,
           which
           write
           (
           too
           ouerlashingly
           )
           that
           the
           Arabian
           tongue
           is
           in
           vse
           in
           two
           third
           partes
           of
           the
           inhabited
           world
           ,
           or
           in
           more
           ,
           yet
           I
           finde
           that
           it
           extendeth
           verie
           farre
           ,
           and
           specially
           where
           the
           religion
           of
           Mahumed
           is
           professed
           .
           For
           which
           cause
           (
           ouer
           and
           besides
           the
           partes
           aboue
           mentioned
           ,
           in
           which
           it
           is
           (
           as
           I
           said
           )
           become
           the
           natiue
           language
           )
           in
           all
           the
           Northerne
           part
           of
           the
           Turkish
           Empire
           also
           ,
           I
           meane
           that
           part
           that
           lieth
           on
           the
           North
           side
           of
           the
           Mediterrane
           sea
           ,
           as
           likewise
           among
           the
           
             Mahumetane
             Tartars
          
           ,
           it
           
           is
           thought
           not
           the
           vulgar
           tongue
           ,
           yet
           familiar
           with
           verie
           many
           ,
           both
           because
           all
           their
           religion
           is
           written
           in
           that
           language
           ,
           and
           for
           that
           *
           
             *
             Bellon
             .
             Obseruard
             .
             3.
             c.
             12
             
          
           euery
           boy
           that
           goeth
           to
           schoole
           ,
           is
           taught
           it
           ,
           as
           in
           our
           schooles
           they
           are
           taught
           Latin
           and
           Greeke
           :
           Insomuch
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           Turkes
           write
           their
           owne
           language
           in
           Arabique
           characters
           .
           So
           that
           you
           see
           the
           cōmon
           languages
           of
           the
           Turkish
           Empire
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           Slauonish
           ,
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           the
           Turkish
           and
           Arabique
           tongues
           ,
           seruing
           seuerally
           for
           the
           parts
           that
           I
           mentioned
           before
           .
        
      
       
         
           Of
           the
           Syriaque
           and
           Hebrew
           tongues
           .
           CHAP.
           IX
           .
        
         
           THE
           Syriaque
           tongue
           is
           certainly
           *
           
             *
             Masius
             in
             prae●at
             .
             Grammat
             .
             Syric
             .
             Sixt
             Senen
             .
             Biblioth
             .
             Sanctae
             .
             l.
             4
             in
             voce
             .
             Thargum
             .
             Canin
             .
             in
             praef●t
             .
             Institat
             .
             Syr●c
             .
             Ar.
             Montan.
             de
             ratione
             Mazzoreth
             in
             Apparat.
             ad
             Bibl.
             Reg.
             Fabrit
             .
             in
             praefat
             ad
             Lexic
             .
             Syrochalda●cum
             .
             Genebrard
             .
             l.
             2
             Chronog
             .
             ad
             An.
             3690.
             
             Bellarmin
             .
             l.
             2.
             de
             verbo
             Dei
             ca.
             14
             &
             15.
             &c.
             Posseum
             .
             Apporat
             sacr
             .
             in
             Dictione
             .
             Bi
             〈◊〉
             
          
           thought
           to
           haue
           had
           beginning
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Captiuitie
           of
           the
           Iewes
           in
           Babilon
           ,
           while
           they
           were
           mingled
           among
           the
           Chaldeans
           .
           In
           which
           long
           reuolution
           of
           seuenty
           yeares
           ,
           the
           vulgar
           sort
           of
           the
           Iewes
           ,
           forgot
           their
           owne
           language
           ,
           and
           began
           to
           speake
           the
           Caldee
           :
           But
           yet
           ,
           pronouncing
           it
           a
           misse
           ,
           and
           framing
           it
           somewhat
           to
           their
           owne
           Country
           fashion
           ,
           in
           notation
           of
           poincts
           ,
           affixes
           ,
           Coniugarions
           ,
           and
           some
           other
           properties
           of
           their
           antient
           speech
           ,
           it
           became
           a
           mixt
           language
           of
           Hebrew
           and
           Chaldee
           :
           a
           great
           part
           Chaldee
           for
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           words
           ,
           but
           more
           Hebrew
           for
           the
           fashion
           ,
           and
           so
           degenerating
           much
           from
           both
           :
           The
           old
           and
           right
           Hebrew
           ,
           
           remaining
           after
           that
           time
           ,
           onely
           among
           the
           learned
           men
           ,
           and
           being
           taught
           in
           schooles
           ,
           as
           among
           vs
           the
           learned
           tongues
           are
           accustomed
           to
           be
           .
           And
           yet
           ,
           after
           the
           time
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           this
           language
           began
           much
           more
           to
           alter
           ,
           and
           to
           depart
           further
           ,
           both
           from
           the
           Chaldee
           and
           Hebrew
           ,
           as
           receauing
           much
           mixture
           of
           Greeke
           ,
           some
           also
           of
           Romane
           and
           Arabique
           words
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           Talmud
           (
           named
           of
           Ierusalem
           )
           gathered
           by
           R.
           Iochanan
           ,
           about
           300
           yeares
           after
           Christ
           ,
           is
           apparent
           being
           farre
           fuller
           of
           them
           ,
           then
           those
           parts
           of
           the
           Chaldee
           paraphrase
           on
           the
           holy
           Scriptures
           ,
           which
           were
           made
           by
           R.
           Ionathan
           ,
           a
           little
           before
           Christ
           ,
           and
           by
           R.
           Aquila
           ,
           whom
           they
           call
           Onkelos
           ,
           not
           long
           after
           .
        
         
           But
           yet
           certaine
           it
           is
           ,
           both
           for
           the
           great
           difference
           of
           the
           words
           themselues
           ,
           which
           are
           in
           the
           Syriaque
           tongue
           for
           the
           most
           part
           Chaldee
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           diuersitie
           of
           those
           adherents
           of
           words
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           praefixa
           ,
           and
           suffixa
           ,
           as
           also
           ,
           for
           the
           differing
           sound
           of
           some
           vowels
           ,
           and
           sundrie
           other
           considerations
           :
           Certaine
           it
           is
           I
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           vnlearned
           Iewes
           ,
           whose
           vulgar
           speech
           the
           Syriaque
           then
           was
           ,
           could
           not
           vnderstād
           their
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           &
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           that
           their
           lectures
           of
           Moses
           and
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           vsed
           in
           their
           synagogues
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           .
           And
           that
           seemeth
           to
           haue
           beene
           the
           originall
           reason
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           publique
           speeches
           and
           declarations
           of
           learned
           men
           to
           the
           people
           ,
           vsual
           in
           their
           synagogues
           on
           the
           Sabboaths
           ,
           after
           the
           readings
           of
           the
           Law
           and
           of
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           whereof
           in
           the
           *
           
             *
             Act.
             13.15
             .
          
           new
           Testament
           we
           finde
           some
           mention
           ,
           and
           also
           ,
           of
           the
           translations
           of
           Ionathan
           ,
           and
           Onkelos
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           made
           into
           
           their
           vulgar
           language
           ,
           for
           that
           the
           difference
           betwixt
           the
           Hebrew
           and
           the
           Chaldee
           was
           so
           great
           ,
           that
           the
           tongue
           of
           the
           one
           nation
           could
           not
           be
           vnderstood
           by
           the
           other
           .
           First
           ,
           the
           tongues
           themselues
           ,
           which
           yet
           remaine
           with
           vs
           ,
           may
           bee
           euident
           demonstrations
           ,
           of
           which
           wee
           see
           that
           one
           may
           bee
           skilfull
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           and
           yet
           not
           vnderstand
           the
           Chaldee
           ,
           and
           therefore
           neither
           could
           they
           ,
           whose
           speech
           the
           Chaldee
           then
           was
           (
           although
           much
           degenerated
           )
           vnderstand
           the
           Hebrew
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           wee
           finde
           ,
           that
           whē
           *
           
             *
             Nehem.
             ca
             8
             v.
             7.8.9
             .
          
           Ezra
           at
           the
           returne
           from
           the
           Captiuitie
           ,
           read
           the
           booke
           of
           the
           law
           before
           the
           people
           ,
           others
           were
           faine
           to
           interprete
           that
           which
           was
           read
           vnto
           them
           .
           And
           Thirdly
           ,
           the
           answer
           made
           to
           Rabshakeh
           ,
           by
           the
           officers
           of
           K.
           Hezekiah
           ,
           may
           put
           it
           out
           of
           question
           ,
           willing
           him
           *
           
             *
             Reg.
             l.
             2.
             ca.
             18.
             v.
             26.
             
          
           to
           speake
           vnto
           them
           in
           the
           Chaldee
           tongue
           ,
           that
           the
           common
           people
           of
           Ierusalem
           (
           in
           whose
           hearing
           it
           was
           )
           might
           not
           vnderstand
           what
           was
           spoken
           .
           But
           yet
           it
           might
           be
           ,
           that
           as
           at
           this
           day
           the
           Iewes
           vse
           to
           doe
           ,
           so
           also
           in
           Christs
           time
           of
           conuersing
           on
           the
           Earth
           ,
           they
           might
           also
           reade
           the
           
             Chaldee
             Targ●min
          
           (
           and
           certainely
           some
           *
           
             *
             Iunius
             in
             Bellarm.
             Cont.
             1.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             15.
             
             §.
             11
             
          
           learned
           men
           affirme
           they
           did
           so
           )
           together
           with
           the
           Hebrew
           lectures
           of
           Moses
           and
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           for
           certaine
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           
             Ionathan
             Ben
             Vziel
          
           ,
           had
           before
           the
           birth
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           translated
           ,
           not
           the
           Prophets
           onely
           into
           Chaldee
           ,
           for
           it
           is
           his
           Paraphrase
           that
           wee
           haue
           at
           this
           day
           on
           the
           Prophets
           (
           and
           the
           language
           which
           wee
           now
           call
           the
           Syriaque
           ,
           was
           but
           the
           
             Iewish
             Chaldee
          
           ,
           although
           in
           the
           after
           times
           ,
           by
           the
           mixture
           of
           Greeke
           ,
           and
           manie
           other
           forraine
           words
           it
           beecame
           somewhat
           
           changed
           ,
           from
           what
           in
           the
           times
           afore
           and
           about
           our
           Sauiours
           incarnation
           it
           had
           beene
           )
           but
           the
           Pentateuch
           also
           :
           at
           least
           ,
           if
           that
           bee
           true
           ,
           which
           
             Sixtus
             Senensis
          
           hath
           recorded
           ,
           
           
             Sixt.
             Senens
             .
             Biblioth
             .
             Sanct.
             l.
             4.
             indiction
             .
             Syr●
             editio
             .
             Galatin
             .
             de
             Arcan
             .
             Catholicae
             Ve●●
             l.
             1.
             c.
             3.
             
          
           namely
           ,
           that
           such
           is
           the
           tradition
           among
           the
           Iewes
           ,
           and
           which
           Galatine
           writeth
           ,
           that
           himselfe
           hath
           seene
           that
           translation
           of
           Ionathans
           ,
           beside
           that
           of
           Onkelos
           ,
           
           
             for
             of
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Chaldee
             Paraphrase
             ,
             which
             wee
             haue
             in
             the
             Complutense
             ,
             and
             K.
             Philips
             Bibles
             ,
             on
             the
             Bookes
             of
             
               Moses
               ,
               Onkelos
            
             is
             the
             Author
             :
             of
             that
             on
             Iosuah
             ,
             the
             Iudges
             ,
             the
             booke
             of
             the
             Kings
             and
             of
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             Ionathan
             .
             Of
             that
             on
             
               Ruth
               ,
               Hester
               ,
               Iob
            
             ,
             the
             Psalmes
             and
             the
             bookes
             of
             
               Salomon
               ,
               R.
               Ioseph
               Caecus
            
             .
          
           the
           beginning
           of
           both
           which
           hee
           setteth
           downe
           ,
           differing
           one
           from
           another
           ,
           in
           the
           first
           wordes
           .
           Which
           (
           namely
           touching
           the
           publique
           reading
           of
           the
           
             Chaldee
             Targamin
          
           ,
           either
           together
           with
           the
           Hebrew
           text
           or
           instead
           of
           it
           )
           I
           may
           as
           well
           conceiue
           to
           bee
           true
           ,
           as
           that
           the
           forraine
           *
           
             *
             Vid.
             Salmeron
             .
             De
             Canonica
             .
             scriptura
             .
             Prolegom
             .
             3.
             in
             Tomo
             .
             1.
             &
             de
             interpretat
             .
             Septuagint
             .
             Prol.
             5.
             
          
           Iewes
           ,
           
           
             Tertull.
             in
             Apologetico
             .
             ca.
             19.
             
          
           dwelling
           in
           Alexandria
           ,
           and
           other
           parts
           of
           Aegypt
           ,
           in
           Asia
           also
           ,
           and
           other
           Greeke
           prouinces
           abroad
           ,
           vsed
           publiquely
           in
           stead
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           which
           now
           they
           vnderstood
           not
           ,
           the
           
             Septuagints
             Greek
          
           translation
           ,
           as
           is
           euident
           in
           Tertullian
           :
           And
           of
           some
           others
           of
           them
           in
           the
           Constitutions
           of
           *
           
             *
             Nouell
             146.
             
          
           Iustinian
           .
           Which
           Iewes
           for
           that
           very
           cause
           :
           are
           sundry
           times
           in
           the
           *
           
             *
             Act.
             6.1
             .
             &
             9.29
             .
             &
             11.20
             .
             Scalig.
             in
             Chron.
             Euseb.
             ad
             An●um
             .
             MDCCXXXIV
             .
             &
             Iu●
             .
             contra
             .
             Bellarm
             Controu
             .
             1.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             15.
             
             §.
             ●1
             .
             &
             Drus.
             Praetoritor
             .
             l.
             5.
             
             Annot.
             ad
             .
             Act.
             Ap.
             6.1
             .
          
           Acts
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           termed
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           For
           by
           that
           name
           ,
           in
           the
           iudgement
           of
           learned
           men
           the
           naturall
           Grecians
           are
           not
           meant
           ,
           which
           are
           alwaies
           named
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           not
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           But
           ,
           the
           Iewes
           dispersed
           among
           
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           that
           vsed
           to
           read
           the
           Greeke
           Scriptures
           in
           their
           Synagogues
           .
        
         
           And
           heere
           shall
           bee
           the
           period
           of
           my
           first
           Enquiry
           ,
           touching
           Languages
           ,
           and
           beginning
           of
           the
           second
           ,
           concerning
           the
           sorts
           of
           Religions
           ,
           abroad
           in
           the
           World.
           In
           discoursing
           whereof
           you
           must
           be
           content
           ,
           to
           accept
           of
           moderne
           Authors
           ,
           because
           I
           am
           to
           intreate
           of
           moderne
           matters
           :
           And
           ,
           if
           I
           happe
           to
           steppe
           awry
           ,
           where
           I
           see
           no
           path
           ,
           and
           can
           discerne
           but
           few
           steppes
           afore
           mee
           ,
           you
           must
           pardon
           it
           .
           And
           yet
           this
           one
           thing
           I
           will
           promise
           you
           ,
           that
           if
           either
           they
           that
           should
           direct
           mee
           ,
           mislead
           me
           not
           ,
           or
           (
           where
           my
           reason
           suspects
           ,
           that
           my
           guides
           wander
           ,
           and
           I
           am
           mislead
           )
           if
           my
           circumspect
           obseruing
           ,
           or
           diligent
           inquiring
           ,
           may
           preserue
           me
           from
           errour
           ,
           I
           will
           not
           depart
           a
           haire
           from
           the
           way
           of
           Truth
           .
        
      
       
         
           Of
           the
           sundry
           parts
           of
           the
           World
           inhabited
           by
           Christians
           .
           CHAP.
           X.
           
        
         
           ALL
           Europe
           is
           possessed
           by
           Christians
           ,
           except
           the
           vtmost
           corners
           of
           it
           ,
           toward
           the
           East
           ,
           and
           the
           North
           ,
           for
           the
           small
           companie
           of
           Mahumetanes
           ,
           inhabiting
           their
           
           
             Michou
             .
             de
             Sarmatia
             .
             l
             2.
             c
             3.
             
          
           peculiar
           villages
           about
           Wilna
           in
           Litunia
           ,
           or
           the
           
           scattered
           
           
             Boem
             de
             Morib
             .
             gent
             l
             3.
             c.
             7.
             
             Boter
             Relat.
             Par.
             3.
             l.
             1.
             
             Ziegl
             tr
             .
             in
             Schondia
             ▪
             c
             de
             Lapponia
             .
             Damian
             .
             a
             Goas
             Tract
             .
             de
             Lappijs
             .
             Michou
             .
             l.
             2.
             de
             Sarmatia
             .
             c.
             5.
             
             Munster
             .
             Cosmog
             .
             l.
             4
             c.
             37.
             
             Boter
             .
             Relation
             pa
             1.
             l.
             c.
             de
             Bothnia
             .
          
           remnants
           of
           Idolaters
           ,
           in
           the
           same
           prouince
           ,
           and
           in
           Samogitia
           ,
           are
           not
           woorthy
           mentioning
           .
           But
           toward
           the
           North
           ,
           
             Lappia
             ,
             Scricfinia
             ,
             Biarmia
             ,
             Corelia
             ,
          
           and
           the
           North
           part
           of
           Finmarke
           (
           all
           which
           together
           passe
           commonly
           vnder
           the
           name
           of
           Lapland
           ,
           and
           make
           a
           region
           about
           900
           miles
           in
           circuit
           )
           are
           inhabited
           by
           Idolaters
           :
           and
           toward
           the
           East
           ,
           all
           the
           Region
           betwixt
           Tanais
           and
           Borysthenes
           ,
           along
           Maeotis
           and
           the
           Euxine
           sea
           (
           the
           true
           natiue
           Country
           of
           the
           ancient
           Gothes
           )
           being
           more
           then
           twise
           as
           large
           as
           the
           former
           ,
           and
           withall
           much
           better
           peopled
           ,
           is
           inhabited
           by
           the
           Tartars
           called
           Crimaei
           or
           Precopitae
           ,
           who
           are
           all
           Mahumetans
           ,
           excepting
           onely
           a
           small
           remainder
           of
           Christians
           ,
           in
           some
           parts
           of
           Taurica
           .
        
         
           But
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           Turks
           dominion
           that
           he
           hath
           in
           Europe
           ,
           inclosed
           after
           a
           peninsular
           figure
           ,
           betweene
           Danubius
           and
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           containing
           in
           circuit
           about
           2300
           miles
           (
           for
           
             Moldauia
             ,
             Walachia
          
           and
           Transiluania
           ,
           I
           rekon
           not
           for
           parts
           of
           his
           dominiō
           )
           namely
           ,
           from
           aboue
           Buda
           ,
           on
           Danubius
           side
           ,
           and
           from
           Ragusa
           ,
           on
           the
           sea
           side
           Eastward
           ,
           to
           the
           vtmost
           bounds
           of
           Europe
           ,
           as
           also
           in
           the
           Iles
           of
           the
           Aegaean
           sea
           ,
           Christians
           are
           mingled
           with
           Mahumetans
           .
           All
           which
           dominion
           yet
           of
           the
           Turks
           in
           Europe
           ,
           though
           so
           much
           in
           circuit
           as
           I
           said
           ,
           is
           neuerthelesse
           (
           measured
           by
           squares
           )
           no
           greater
           then
           Spaine
           ,
           the
           continent
           of
           it
           ,
           being
           no
           way
           answearable
           to
           the
           circumference
           :
           both
           ,
           because
           it
           runneth
           far
           out
           in
           sharpe
           angles
           ,
           toward
           the
           West
           and
           South
           ,
           namely
           in
           Hungarie
           and
           Moraea
           ,
           and
           is
           beside
           ,
           in
           Greece
           in
           many
           places
           ,
           extraordinarily
           indented
           with
           the
           sea
           .
           And
           
           in
           this
           dominion
           of
           the
           Turks
           in
           Europe
           ,
           such
           is
           notwithstanding
           the
           mixture
           of
           Mahumetans
           with
           Christians
           ,
           that
           the
           Christians
           *
           
             *
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             pa.
             2.
             l.
             4.
             nel
             Relation
             .
             del
             gran
             .
             Turco
             .
             Georgeuitz
             .
             de
             Affliction
             .
             Christian.
             sub
             Turca
             l.
             1.
             ca.
             de
             Tributis
             .
          
           make
           two
           third
           parts
           at
           least
           ,
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           :
           for
           the
           Turke
           ,
           so
           that
           Christians
           pay
           him
           his
           yearely
           tribute
           (
           which
           is
           one
           fourth
           part
           of
           their
           increase
           ,
           and
           a
           Sultanie
           for
           euery
           poll
           )
           and
           speake
           nothing
           against
           the
           religion
           and
           sect
           of
           Mahumet
           ,
           permitteth
           them
           the
           libertie
           of
           their
           religion
           ,
           And
           euen
           in
           Greece
           it selfe
           ,
           although
           more
           dissolute
           then
           any
           region
           of
           Europe
           subiect
           to
           the
           Turke
           ,
           (
           as
           hauing
           beene
           anciently
           more
           wasted
           with
           intestine
           discord
           ,
           and
           longest
           groaned
           vnder
           the
           Turks
           oppression
           )
           there
           remain
           yet
           neuerthelesse
           in
           ⸫
           
             ⸫
             Chitrae
             de
             ●tatu
             Ecclesi●r
             non
             longé
             ab
             initio
             .
          
           Constantinople
           ,
           the
           very
           seate
           of
           the
           Turkish
           Empire
           ,
           aboue
           20
           Churches
           of
           Christians
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Citie
           of
           
             Salonichi
             (
             Thessalonica
          
           )
           aboue
           30
           ,
           (
           wheras
           in
           this
           later
           the
           Mahumetans
           haue
           but
           3
           )
           beside
           very
           many
           Churches
           abroad
           in
           the
           Prouince
           vnder
           suffragan
           Bishops
           ,
           
           
             Gerlach
             in
             epist.
             ad
             Crus
             .
             Turcograeciae
             .
             l.
             pag.
             
          
           of
           whom
           the
           Metropolitan
           of
           Salonichi
           ,
           hath
           no
           lesse
           then
           10
           ,
           belōging
           to
           his
           Iurisdiction
           ,
           as
           there
           are
           also
           recorded
           yet
           to
           remaine
           vnder
           the
           Metropolitans
           of
           Philippi
           ,
           150
           Churches
           :
           of
           Athens
           ,
           as
           many
           :
           of
           Corinth
           ,
           100
           ,
           together
           with
           sundry
           suffragan
           Bishops
           vnder
           each
           of
           them
           .
        
         
           But
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           all
           the
           Regions
           in
           a
           maner
           ,
           that
           Christian
           religion
           had
           gained
           from
           Idolatry
           ,
           Mahumetanisme
           hath
           regained
           from
           Christianitie
           :
           Insomuch
           ,
           that
           not
           onely
           the
           North
           part
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           lying
           along
           the
           Mediterrane
           sea
           ,
           
           
             Concil
             Carthag
             .
             4.
             
             &
             Cōcil
             .
             African
             .
             seu
             Carthag
             .
             6.
             
          
           namely
           ,
           betwixt
           it
           and
           the
           Mountaine
           Atlas
           ,
           euen
           from
           Spaine
           to
           Aegypt
           ,
           where
           Christianitie
           sometime
           exceedingly
           
           flourished
           ,
           as
           the
           we
           reade
           Synodes
           of
           aboue
           200
           Bishops
           to
           haue
           beene
           gathered
           ,
           and
           *
           
             *
             Martin
             .
             Polon
             .
             Supput
             .
             An.
             475.
             
          
           300
           Catholique
           Bishops
           to
           haue
           beene
           there
           expelled
           ,
           by
           Gensericus
           K.
           of
           the
           Wandales
           :
           And
           in
           some
           one
           Prouince
           alone
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Victor
             .
             l
             1.
             de
             Persecut
             .
             Vandalec
             .
          
           Zengitana
           by
           name
           ,
           (
           it
           is
           that
           wherein
           Carthage
           stood
           )
           to
           haue
           beene
           164
           Bishops
           vnder
           one
           Metropolitan
           :
           )
           Not
           onely
           that
           North
           part
           of
           Afrique
           I
           say
           ,
           is
           at
           this
           present
           vtterly
           voide
           of
           Christians
           ,
           excepting
           a
           few
           Townes
           belonging
           to
           the
           King
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           (
           of
           which
           onely
           Septa
           and
           Tanger
           are
           Episcopall
           Cities
           :
           )
           but
           euen
           in
           all
           the
           vast
           continent
           of
           Aphrique
           ,
           being
           about
           thrice
           as
           large
           as
           Europe
           ,
           there
           is
           not
           any
           Region
           entierly
           possessed
           by
           Christians
           ,
           but
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Habassia
           ,
           no
           ,
           nor
           yet
           ,
           (
           which
           is
           more
           lamentable
           )
           any
           other
           ,
           where
           Christians
           are
           mingled
           ,
           either
           with
           Mahumetans
           ,
           but
           onely
           Aegypt
           :
           or
           where
           with
           Idolaters
           ,
           but
           the
           kingdomes
           of
           *
           
             *
             Pigafet
             .
             hist.
             Regni
             Congens
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             2.
             
          
           Congo
           and
           Angola
           :
           which
           two
           about
           120
           yeares
           agoe
           (
           An.
           1491
           )
           beganne
           first
           to
           receiue
           Christianity
           :
           All
           the
           rest
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           being
           entirly
           gouerned
           ,
           and
           possessed
           by
           Pagans
           ,
           or
           Mahumetans
           .
           To
           which
           ,
           if
           I
           should
           adde
           ,
           those
           few
           places
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           afore
           mentioned
           ,
           near
           the
           Strait
           of
           Gibraltar
           ,
           which
           the
           KK
           .
           of
           Portugall
           and
           Castile
           ,
           haue
           conquered
           from
           the
           Mores
           ,
           with
           the
           other
           few
           dispersed
           fortresses
           ,
           which
           the
           Portugalles
           hold
           in
           other
           places
           on
           the
           coast
           of
           Afrique
           (
           altogether
           euen
           betwixt
           Spaine
           and
           India
           are
           but
           11
           or
           12
           )
           I
           know
           not
           where
           to
           finde
           ,
           euen
           among
           all
           the
           natiue
           Inhabitants
           of
           Aphrique
           ,
           any
           Christians
           more
           .
           For
           ,
           as
           for
           the
           large
           region
           of
           Nubia
           ,
           which
           had
           from
           the
           Apostles
           time
           ,
           (
           as
           is
           
           thought
           )
           professed
           the
           Christian
           faith
           ,
           it
           hath
           againe
           aboue
           100
           yeares
           since
           ,
           forsaken
           it
           ,
           and
           embraced
           in
           steade
           of
           it
           ,
           partly
           Mahumetanisme
           ,
           and
           partly
           Idolatrie
           ,
           and
           that
           by
           the
           most
           miserable
           occasion
           that
           might
           befall
           ,
           namely
           famine
           of
           the
           word
           of
           God
           through
           lacke
           of
           Ministers
           :
           for
           as
           Albarez
           hath
           recorded
           ,
           
           
             Aluarez
             .
             Hist.
             Aethiopic
             .
             ca.
             137.
             
          
           at
           his
           being
           in
           the
           K.
           of
           Habassia
           his
           Court
           ,
           there
           were
           Embassadours
           out
           of
           Nubia
           ,
           to
           intreat
           him
           for
           a
           supply
           of
           Ministers
           ,
           to
           instruct
           their
           nation
           ,
           and
           repaire
           Christianity
           gone
           to
           ruine
           among
           them
           :
           but
           were
           reiected
           .
        
         
           And
           yet
           are
           the
           Christians
           of
           Aegypt
           ,
           namely
           those
           of
           the
           natiue
           Inhabitants
           ,
           but
           very
           few
           in
           respect
           of
           that
           infinitenesse
           of
           people
           ,
           wherwith
           Aegypt
           doth
           ,
           and
           euer
           did
           abound
           ,
           as
           being
           esteemed
           ,
           not
           to
           passe
           *
           
             *
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             pa.
             1.
             l.
             3.
             cap.
             de
             1
             popoli
             del
             Egitto
             .
             Thom.
             a
             Ies.
             de
             Conuers
             .
             gent.
             l.
             7.
             par
             .
             1.
             c.
             5.
             
          
           50000.
           
           And
           ,
           as
           touching
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Habassia
           ,
           neither
           is
           it
           all
           Christians
           ,
           but
           a
           great
           part
           of
           Gentiles
           ,
           namely
           toward
           the
           West
           ,
           and
           South
           bounds
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           some
           part
           Mahumetans
           ,
           toward
           the
           East
           border
           :
           neither
           so
           large
           and
           spatio●s
           ,
           as
           many
           mens
           relations
           haue
           made
           it
           thought
           to
           be
           .
           For
           although
           I
           cannot
           assent
           to
           them
           ,
           who
           assigne
           to
           that
           great
           Kingdome
           ,
           but
           about
           
           
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             pa.
             1.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             de
             Abassia
             .
          
           662
           leagues
           of
           compasse
           ,
           by
           which
           reckoning
           (
           suppose
           they
           were
           Spanish
           leagues
           )
           it
           should
           be
           little
           larger
           then
           Germany
           ,
           (
           for
           I
           know
           full
           well
           ,
           by
           infallible
           obseruations
           ,
           that
           sparing
           limitation
           of
           theirs
           ,
           to
           be
           vntrue
           )
           yet
           ,
           neither
           can
           I
           yeeld
           to
           them
           ,
           who
           esteem
           it
           *
           
             *
             Horat.
             Malaguz
             .
             nel
             discor
             so
             de
             ●
             .
             cinque
             massimi
             Signo●i
             .
          
           greater
           ,
           then
           the
           vast
           dominions
           of
           the
           Emperours
           of
           Turkie
           or
           of
           Tartarie
           &c
           :
           Or
           ,
           to
           them
           ,
           that
           extend
           it
           from
           the
           one
           Tropique
           ,
           to
           the
           other
           ,
           and
           from
           the
           red
           sea
           ,
           almost
           to
           the
           
           west
           Ocean
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           certaine
           it
           is
           (
           that
           I
           may
           speake
           a
           little
           of
           the
           limits
           of
           this
           kingdome
           )
           that
           it
           attaineth
           not
           to
           the
           redde
           sea
           (
           Eastward
           )
           neither
           within
           the
           straits
           of
           
             Babel
             mandel
          
           ,
           nor
           without
           :
           for
           within
           those
           straits
           ,
           
           
             Boter
             .
             〈◊〉
             pro●im
             .
             cita●o
             .
          
           along
           the
           Bay
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           continuall
           ledge
           of
           mountaines
           ,
           knowne
           to
           bee
           inhabited
           with
           Moores
           ,
           betwixt
           that
           Bay
           ,
           and
           the
           dominion
           of
           Habassia
           :
           So
           that
           ,
           only
           one
           Port
           there
           is
           ,
           along
           all
           that
           coast
           ,
           
           
             Somman
             .
             dei
             regni
             Oriental
             .
             apud
             Ramos
             vol
             1.
             pag
             ,
             324
             ▪
             
          
           (
           Ercoco
           by
           name
           )
           where
           those
           mountaines
           open
           to
           the
           Sea
           ,
           that
           at
           this
           present
           belongeth
           to
           it
           .
           Neither
           without
           those
           Straits
           doth
           it
           any
           where
           approach
           to
           the
           Ocean
           .
           All
           that
           coast
           ,
           as
           farre
           as
           Mozambique
           ,
           being
           well
           knowne
           to
           be
           inhabited
           with
           Arabians
           .
        
         
           And
           as
           touching
           the
           west
           limits
           of
           Habassia
           ,
           I
           can
           not
           finde
           by
           any
           certaine
           history
           or
           relation
           (
           vnskilfull
           men
           may
           rumour
           what
           they
           will
           ,
           and
           I
           know
           also
           that
           the
           common
           Charts
           represent
           it
           otherwise
           )
           I
           cannot
           find
           I
           say
           ,
           that
           it
           stretcheth
           beyond
           the
           riuer
           Nilus
           ,
           so
           far
           commeth
           it
           short
           of
           the
           West
           Ocean
           .
           For
           it
           is
           knowne
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           west
           bank
           of
           Nilus
           ,
           from
           the
           riuer
           of
           Zaire
           to
           the
           confines
           of
           Nubia
           ,
           
           
             Boter
             .
             Rel●●
             .
             p
             1
             lib.
             3.
             ca.
             Loango
             .
             A●●zichi
             .
          
           is
           possessed
           by
           the
           Anzichi
           ,
           being
           an
           idolatrous
           and
           man-eating
           nation
           ,
           &
           subiect
           to
           a
           great
           Prince
           of
           their
           own
           ,
           thus
           then
           it
           is
           with
           the
           bredth
           of
           the
           Empire
           of
           Habassia
           ,
           betwixt
           East
           and
           West
           :
           And
           now
           to
           speake
           of
           the
           length
           of
           it
           ,
           lying
           north
           and
           South
           ,
           neither
           doth
           it
           approach
           northward
           on
           Nilus
           side
           ,
           further
           then
           the
           south
           end
           of
           the
           Isle
           of
           Meroe
           ,
           (
           Meroe
           it selfe
           is
           inhabited
           by
           Mahumetans
           ,
           and
           the
           deadly
           enemies
           of
           the
           king
           of
           Habassia
           )
           nor
           on
           the
           Sea
           side
           farther
           then
           about
           the
           port
           
           of
           Suachem
           .
           And
           toward
           the
           south
           ,
           although
           the
           bounds
           of
           that
           kingdom
           ,
           be
           not
           perfectly
           known
           ,
           yet
           that
           it
           approacheth
           nothing
           neere
           the
           circle
           of
           Capricorne
           ,
           as
           hath
           bin
           supposed
           ,
           is
           most
           manifest
           ,
           because
           the
           great
           kingdomes
           of
           Moenhemage
           ,
           and
           Benomotapa
           ,
           and
           some
           others
           ,
           are
           situate
           betwixt
           Habassia
           and
           that
           circle
           .
           But
           ,
           as
           neere
           as
           I
           am
           able
           to
           coniecture
           ,
           hauing
           made
           the
           best
           search
           that
           I
           can
           ,
           in
           the
           itineraries
           and
           relations
           ,
           that
           are
           extant
           of
           those
           parts
           ,
           the
           south
           limit
           of
           that
           Empire
           ,
           passeth
           not
           the
           south
           parallel
           of
           six
           or
           seuen
           degrees
           at
           the
           most
           ,
           where
           it
           confineth
           with
           Moenhemage
           .
           So
           that
           to
           make
           a
           respectiue
           estimate
           of
           the
           largenesse
           of
           that
           dominion
           ,
           by
           comparing
           it
           with
           our
           knowne
           regions
           of
           Europe
           ,
           It
           seemeth
           equall
           to
           Germany
           and
           France
           ,
           and
           Spaine
           ,
           and
           Italie
           laid
           together
           :
           Equall
           I
           say
           in
           dimension
           of
           ground
           ,
           but
           nothing
           neere
           equall
           in
           habitation
           or
           multitude
           of
           people
           ,
           which
           the
           distemperature
           of
           that
           climate
           ,
           and
           the
           drye
           barrennes
           of
           the
           ground
           ,
           in
           many
           regions
           of
           it
           ,
           wil
           not
           allow
           .
           For
           which
           cause
           the
           torride
           parts
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           are
           by
           Piso
           in
           Strabo
           resembled
           to
           a
           Libbards
           skinne
           ,
           
           
             Strab.
             l.
             2.
             
          
           the
           distance
           of
           whose
           spots
           ,
           represent
           the
           dispersednesse
           of
           habitations
           or
           townes
           in
           Afrique
           .
           But
           if
           I
           should
           absolutely
           set
           downe
           the
           circuit
           of
           that
           whole
           dominion
           ,
           I
           esteeme
           the
           limitation
           of
           Pigafetta
           ,
           
           
             Pigafett
             .
             de
             Regn.
             Cong
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             10.
             
          
           nere
           about
           the
           truth
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           it
           hath
           in
           circūference
           4000.
           miles
           (
           about
           1500.
           in
           length
           ,
           and
           about
           600.
           in
           breadth
           :
           )
           beeing
           inclosed
           with
           Mahumetans
           on
           the
           north
           ,
           and
           east
           ,
           and
           with
           Idolaters
           ,
           on
           the
           West
           and
           South
           .
        
         
           Such
           then
           as
           I
           haue
           declared
           ,
           is
           the
           condition
           of
           
           Christians
           in
           the
           continent
           of
           Afrique
           :
           but
           the
           Inhabitants
           of
           the
           Isles
           along
           the
           west
           coast
           of
           Africk
           ,
           as
           namely
           Madera
           ;
           the
           Canaries
           ,
           the
           Isles
           of
           
             Cabo
             verde
          
           ,
           and
           of
           S.
           Thomas
           ,
           and
           some
           other
           of
           lesse
           importance
           ,
           are
           by
           the
           Portugals
           and
           Castilians
           instruction
           ,
           become
           Christian
           :
           but
           on
           the
           East
           side
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           excepting
           only
           *
           
             *
             Paul.
             Venet.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             38.
             
          
           Zocotora
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           Christian
           Isle
           .
        
         
           Euen
           such
           is
           the
           state
           of
           Christians
           in
           the
           firme
           land
           ,
           and
           the
           adiacent
           Isles
           of
           Afrique
           .
           And
           it
           is
           not
           much
           better
           in
           Asia
           ,
           for
           excepting
           first
           the
           Empire
           of
           Russia
           ,
           (
           and
           yet
           of
           it
           ,
           a
           great
           part
           is
           Idolatrous
           ,
           namely
           the
           region
           betweene
           the
           riuers
           of
           Pechora
           and
           Ob
           ,
           and
           some
           part
           of
           Permia
           )
           secondly
           ,
           the
           regions
           of
           Circassia
           ,
           and
           Mengrelia
           ,
           lying
           along
           Moe●tis
           and
           the
           Euxine
           sea
           ,
           from
           Tanais
           Eastward
           as
           farre
           as
           the
           riuer
           Phasis
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           the
           prouince
           of
           Georgia
           ,
           and
           fourthly
           the
           mountaine
           Libanus
           in
           Syria
           ,
           (
           and
           yet
           the
           last
           of
           these
           is
           of
           the
           Turkes
           dominion
           )
           excepting
           these
           few
           I
           say
           ,
           there
           is
           not
           any
           region
           in
           all
           Asia
           ,
           where
           Christians
           liue
           seueral
           ,
           without
           mixture
           ,
           either
           of
           Mahumetans
           ,
           or
           of
           Pagās
           ,
           for
           although
           Vitriacus
           a
           man
           well
           experienced
           in
           some
           parts
           of
           the
           orient
           ,
           
           
             Iacob
             .
             a
             Vitriaco
             .
             Histor.
             Orient
             .
             c.
             77.
             
          
           (
           as
           being
           Bishop
           of
           Acon
           and
           the
           Popes
           Legate
           in
           the
           East
           ,
           at
           what
           time
           Palestina
           and
           Syria
           were
           in
           the
           hands
           of
           Christians
           )
           hath
           left
           registred
           ,
           that
           the
           Christians
           of
           the
           Easterlie
           parts
           of
           Asia
           ,
           exceeded
           in
           multitude
           the
           Christians
           of
           the
           Greek
           and
           Latine
           Churches
           :
           yet
           in
           his
           time
           (
           for
           he
           writ
           almost
           400.
           yeares
           agoe
           )
           Christianity
           began
           to
           decline
           ,
           and
           since
           his
           time
           ,
           it
           hath
           proceeded
           infinitely
           to
           decay
           ,
           in
           all
           those
           parts
           of
           Asia
           :
           
           first
           ,
           by
           the
           inundation
           of
           the
           idolatrous
           Tartars
           ,
           who
           subdued
           all
           those
           regions
           ,
           and
           after
           by
           the
           intertaining
           of
           Mahumetanisme
           in
           many
           of
           them
           .
           The
           time
           was
           indeed
           ,
           (
           and
           but
           about
           400.
           yeares
           agoe
           )
           when
           the
           King
           of
           Tenduc
           ,
           whom
           the
           histories
           of
           those
           times
           name
           
             Presbyter
             Iohannes
          
           ,
           a
           Christian
           ,
           but
           a
           Nestorian
           Prince
           ,
           ruled
           farre
           and
           wide
           ,
           in
           the
           Northeast
           part
           of
           Asia
           :
           as
           hauing
           vnder
           his
           dominion
           ,
           beside
           Tenduc
           ,
           (
           which
           was
           his
           owne
           natiue
           and
           peculiar
           kingdome
           )
           all
           the
           neighbouring
           prouinces
           ,
           which
           were
           at
           that
           time
           for
           a
           great
           part
           ,
           Christian
           :
           but
           after
           that
           his
           Empire
           was
           brought
           to
           ruine
           ,
           and
           he
           subdued
           by
           Chingis
           a
           rebell
           of
           his
           owne
           dominion
           (
           and
           the
           first
           founder
           of
           the
           Tartarian
           Empire
           )
           which
           happened
           about
           the
           yeare
           1190.
           the
           state
           of
           Christian
           Religion
           became
           in
           short
           time
           strangely
           altered
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           
           
             Paul
             Venet.
             l.
             ●
             .
             cap.
             8.
             
          
           for
           I
           find
           in
           
             Marcus
             Paulus
          
           ,
           who
           liued
           within
           50.
           yeares
           after
           Vitriacus
           ,
           and
           was
           a
           man
           of
           more
           experience
           in
           those
           parts
           then
           hee
           ,
           as
           hauing
           spent
           seuenteene
           yeares
           together
           in
           Tartarie
           ,
           partly
           in
           the
           Emperours
           Court
           ,
           and
           partly
           in
           trauailing
           ouer
           those
           Regions
           ,
           about
           the
           Emperours
           affaires
           ,
           that
           except
           the
           Prouince
           of
           Tenduc
           ,
           which
           as
           I
           saide
           was
           the
           kingdome
           of
           
             Presbyter
             Iohns
          
           residence
           (
           for
           it
           was
           the
           Prince
           of
           that
           kingdōe
           ,
           
           
             Scaliger
             .
             de
             En●●●ndat
             .
             tempor
             .
             l
             7.
             
             Annot
             .
             in
             comput
             Aethiop
             .
          
           which
           is
           rightly
           &
           vsually
           ,
           
           
             For
             Scaligers
             imagination
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             the
             King
             of
             the
             Habassines
             ,
             that
             inlarged
             his
             dominion
             so
             far
             in
             the
             northe
             east
             of
             Asia
             ,
             till
             hee
             was
             driuen
             into
             Afrique
             by
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             hath
             neither
             any
             foundation
             at
             all
             in
             historie
             ,
             nor
             probability
             in
             reason
             .
             Namely
             that
             a
             King
             in
             Afrique
             should
             subdue
             the
             most
             distant
             parts
             of
             all
             Asia
             from
             him
             ,
             and
             there
             hould
             residence
             ,
             al
             the
             regions
             betwixt
             belonging
             to
             other
             Princes
             .
             Moreouer
             it
             is
             certainly
             known
             of
             
               Presbyter
               Iohn
            
             of
             Asia
             ,
             that
             hee
             was
             a
             Nestorian
             ,
             whereas
             hee
             of
             Habassia
             was
             ,
             and
             still
             is
             ,
             a
             Iacobite
             .
             Besides
             ,
             it
             hath
             bene
             recorded
             from
             time
             to
             time
             ,
             of
             the
             Christians
             of
             Habassia
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             circumcised
             ,
             which
             of
             those
             of
             the
             East
             ,
             was
             neuer
             reported
             by
             any
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           by
           the
           anciēter
           historians
           named
           
             Presbyter
             
             Iohn
          
           ,
           howsoeuer
           the
           mistaking
           fantasies
           of
           many
           ,
           haue
           trāsported
           it
           out
           of
           Asia
           into
           Africk
           and
           by
           errour
           bestowed
           it
           on
           the
           K.
           of
           Habassia
           ,
           )
           except
           that
           Prouince
           of
           Tēduc
           I
           say
           ,
           whereof
           *
           
             *
             Paul
             ,
             Ven●t
             .
             l.
             1.
             ca.
             64.
             
          
           
             Marcus
             Paulus
          
           cōfesseth
           the
           greater
           part
           ,
           to
           haue
           professed
           the
           Christiā
           religion
           at
           his
           being
           in
           Tartary
           ,
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           inhabitāts
           ,
           being
           partly
           Mahumetans
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Vtriae
             .
             Histor
             .
             Orient
             c.
             78.
             
             Otho
             Phrisingen
             s.
             l.
             7.
             c.
             33.
             
             &
             Alij
             .
          
           and
           partly
           Idolaters
           :
           in
           all
           the
           other
           prouinces
           of
           those
           parts
           beside
           ,
           that
           ,
           hee
           obserueth
           the
           Christians
           to
           bee
           but
           few
           ,
           as
           namely
           in
           the
           kingdomes
           of
           *
           
             *
             L.
             1.
             c.
             45.
             
          
           Tanguth
           ,
           of
           *
           
             *
             L.
             1.
             c.
             47.
             
          
           Chinchintales
           ,
           of
           *
           
             *
             L.
             1.
             c.
             48.
             
          
           Succhuir
           ,
           of
           *
           
             *
             L.
             2.
             c.
             39.
             
          
           Caraiam
           ,
           of
           *
           
             *
             L.
             1.
             c.
             38.
             
          
           Cassar
           ,
           of
           *
           
             *
             L.
             1.
             c.
             40.
             
          
           Carcham
           ,
           of
           *
           
             *
             L.
             1.
             c.
             62.
             
          
           Ergimuli
           ,
           of
           *
           
             *
             L.
             1.
             c.
             63.
             
          
           Cerguth
           ,
           of
           Egrigaia
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           other
           regions
           of
           Tartary
           mentioning
           no
           Christians
           at
           al.
           Two
           cities
           onely
           I
           finde
           in
           him
           excepted
           ,
           the
           one
           was
           *
           
             *
             L.
             2.
             c.
             61.
             
          
           Cingiangifu
           in
           Mangi
           ,
           (
           that
           is
           China
           )
           where
           he
           noteth
           ,
           that
           many
           Christians
           dwelt
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           *
           
             *
             L.
             2.
             c.
             64.
             
          
           Quinsay
           ,
           in
           which
           later
           yet
           ,
           (
           although
           the
           greatest
           city
           in
           the
           world
           )
           he
           hath
           recorded
           to
           be
           found
           but
           one
           Church
           of
           Christians
           .
           But
           ,
           these
           
           places
           excepted
           before
           mentioned
           .
           I
           can
           finde
           no
           certaine
           relation
           ,
           neither
           in
           
             Paul
             Venetus
          
           ,
           nor
           anie
           other
           ,
           of
           any
           Christians
           of
           the
           natiue
           inhabitants
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           East
           of
           Asia
           ,
           but
           Idolatrie
           keepeth
           still
           her
           ould
           possession
           ,
           and
           ouerspreadethall
           .
        
         
           But
           yet
           indeede
           ,
           in
           the
           more
           Southerly
           partes
           of
           Asia
           (
           especially
           in
           those
           where
           Christianity
           was
           first
           planted
           ,
           and
           had
           taken
           deepest
           roote
           )
           as
           
             Natolia
             ,
             Syria
             ,
             Palestine
             ,
             Chaldaea
             ,
             Assyria
             ,
             Mesopotamia
             ,
             Armenia
             ,
             Media
             ,
             Persia
             ,
          
           the
           North
           part
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           and
           the
           South
           of
           India
           ,
           Christians
           are
           not
           onely
           to
           be
           found
           ,
           but
           in
           certaine
           of
           those
           regions
           ,
           as
           in
           
             Natolia
             ,
             Armenia
             ,
             Syria
             ,
             Mesopotamia
             ,
          
           somewhat
           thicke
           mingled
           with
           Mahum●tans
           :
           as
           they
           are
           also
           in
           the
           South
           of
           India
           not
           farre
           from
           the
           Promontorie
           of
           Comorijn
           ,
           in
           some
           reasonable
           number
           ,
           in
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Contan
           ,
           of
           Cranganor
           ,
           and
           of
           Choromandeb
           ,
           but
           mingled
           with
           Idolaters
           .
           But
           yet
           ,
           is
           not
           this
           mixture
           of
           Christians
           with
           them
           of
           other
           religions
           ,
           in
           any
           part
           of
           Asia
           ,
           after
           the
           proportiō
           of
           their
           mixture
           in
           Europe
           (
           where
           I
           obserued
           the
           Christians
           to
           make
           the
           preuailing
           number
           )
           but
           they
           are
           farre
           inferiour
           ,
           to
           the
           multitude
           of
           the
           Mahumetans
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Idolaters
           ,
           among
           whom
           they
           are
           mingled
           ,
           and
           yet
           touching
           their
           number
           ,
           decrease
           euerie
           day
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           parts
           aforesaid
           ,
           India
           onely
           excepted
           .
           Where
           since
           the
           Portugales
           held
           Goa
           (
           which
           they
           haue
           erected
           into
           an
           Archbishopricke
           )
           and
           intertained
           Malabar
           ,
           and
           some
           other
           parts
           of
           India
           ,
           what
           with
           commerce
           ,
           and
           what
           with
           amitie
           ,
           the
           number
           of
           Christians
           is
           greatly
           multiplied
           ,
           in
           sundrie
           places
           of
           that
           region
           ,
           but
           yet
           not
           so
           ,
           as
           to
           
           compare
           in
           any
           sort
           ,
           with
           the
           Mahumetans
           ,
           and
           much
           lesse
           with
           the
           Idolaters
           among
           whom
           they
           liue
           .
        
         
           Thus
           it
           is
           with
           Christians
           in
           the
           firme
           Land
           of
           Asia
           :
           but
           in
           the
           Islands
           about
           Asia
           ,
           Christianitie
           is
           as
           yet
           but
           a
           tender
           plant
           :
           for
           although
           it
           hath
           made
           some
           entrance
           into
           the
           Isles
           called
           Philippinas
           ,
           namely
           into
           30
           of
           them
           ,
           for
           so
           manie
           onely
           of
           11000
           termed
           by
           that
           name
           ,
           are
           subiect
           to
           the
           King
           of
           
             Spaine
             .
             Th.
             Ies.
             de
             Conu
             .
             gent.
             l.
          
           1.
           c.
           1.
           by
           the
           industrie
           of
           the
           Castilians
           ,
           as
           also
           by
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           Portugales
           ,
           into
           Ormuz
           in
           the
           Bay
           of
           Persia
           ,
           and
           into
           C●ilan
           in
           the
           Sea
           of
           India
           ,
           and
           some
           few
           other
           of
           the
           infinite
           multitude
           of
           Islands
           ,
           dispersed
           in
           that
           Easterne
           sea
           ,
           yet
           hath
           it
           hetherto
           found
           in
           all
           those
           places
           ,
           rather
           some
           faire
           beginning
           ,
           then
           any
           great
           proceeding
           .
           Onely
           in
           Iaponia
           Christianity
           hath
           obtained
           (
           notwithstanding
           many
           hinderances
           and
           oppositions
           )
           more
           prosperous
           successe
           .
           Insomuch
           that
           many
           yeares
           since
           ,
           there
           were
           recorded
           to
           haue
           beene
           by
           estimation
           ,
           about
           *
           
             *
             Plat.
             de
             Bono
             Stat
             Religiosi
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             30.
             
          
           200000
           Christians
           in
           Iaponia
           .
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           in
           America
           ,
           there
           be
           foure
           large
           regions
           ,
           and
           those
           of
           the
           most
           fruitefull
           and
           populous
           part
           of
           it
           ,
           possessed
           and
           gouerned
           by
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           
             Nu●ua
             Espana
             ,
             Castilla
             del
             Oro
          
           (
           otherwise
           termed
           
             Nu●bo
             Reino
          
           )
           Peru
           ,
           and
           part
           of
           Brasile
           ,
           the
           first
           three
           ,
           by
           the
           Castilians
           ,
           and
           the
           fourth
           ,
           by
           the
           Portugales
           ,
           all
           which
           together
           ,
           may
           by
           estimation
           ,
           make
           a
           region
           as
           large
           as
           Europe
           .
           In
           which
           ,
           as
           also
           in
           the
           Islands
           ,
           specially
           in
           the
           greater
           Islands
           of
           
             Hispaniola
             ,
             Cuba
             ,
             Iamaica
          
           ,
           and
           
             Puerto
             rico
          
           ,
           the
           Christian
           
           religion
           is
           so
           largely
           spred
           ,
           that
           *
           
             *
             Amand.
             Ziriean
             Chron.
             circ
             .
             An.
             1519.
             
          
           one
           hath
           presumed
           ,
           to
           equall
           in
           a
           manner
           ,
           the
           Christians
           of
           America
           ,
           to
           those
           of
           the
           Latine
           Church
           in
           Europe
           :
           And
           *
           
             *
             Surius
             .
             in
             Chron.
             ad
             .
             An
             Christ.
             1558.
             
          
           another
           ,
           hath
           left
           recorded
           ,
           that
           within
           a
           few
           yeares
           after
           the
           entrance
           of
           the
           Gospell
           among
           them
           ,
           there
           were
           no
           lesse
           then
           seuen
           Millions
           ,
           or
           as
           others
           reported
           fourteene
           Millions
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           sacrament
           of
           baptisme
           had
           giuen
           their
           names
           to
           Christ.
           But
           especially
           in
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Mexico
           (
           or
           
             Nueua
             Espanna
          
           )
           Christian
           Religion
           obtained
           that
           plentifull
           and
           prosperous
           successe
           ,
           that
           we
           finde
           recorded
           of
           sundrie
           of
           the
           Preachers
           ,
           employed
           about
           the
           conuersion
           of
           that
           people
           ,
           that
           they
           baptised
           ech
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           
           
             Vid.
             epist.
             Petri
             Gaudens
             .
             in
             Comment
             .
             Sedulij
             ad
             vitam
             .
             S.
             Francisci
             .
             pa.
             229.
             et
             Epist.
             Martin
             .
             2
             Valentia
             .
             Ibid
             .
             pag.
             232.
             et
             Epist.
             Episcopi
             Mexicani
             .
             pag.
             235.
             
          
           aboue
           100000.
           and
           that
           in
           few
           yeares
           ▪
           Insomuch
           that
           (
           as
           is
           storied
           by
           Surius
           )
           It
           is
           to
           be
           found
           among
           the
           records
           of
           Charles
           the
           fift
           ,
           that
           some
           old
           Priest
           hath
           baptised
           700000.
           another
           ,
           300000
           ,
           and
           certaine
           others
           verie
           great
           multitudes
           .
           But
           yet
           ,
           what
           maner
           of
           Christians
           manie
           of
           those
           proselytes
           were
           ,
           I
           am
           loth
           to
           remember
           ,
           or
           report
           (
           and
           it
           may
           be
           by
           this
           time
           ,
           they
           are
           better
           affected
           and
           instructed
           then
           they
           were
           )
           for
           certainely
           ,
           Ouiedo
           ,
           and
           Benzo
           ,
           men
           that
           had
           long
           liued
           ,
           and
           were
           well
           experienced
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           haue
           left
           recorded
           ,
           the
           first
           of
           *
           
             *
             Ouied
             Hiftor
             .
             Ind.
             Occidental
             .
             l.
             17.
             c.
             4.
             
          
           Cuba
           ,
           that
           there
           was
           scare
           any
           one
           ,
           or
           but
           very
           few
           ,
           that
           willingly
           became
           Christians
           ,
           
           
             Benzo
             .
             histor
             .
             Nou.
             Orbis
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             19.
             
          
           and
           both
           Ouiedo
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           Benzo
           of
           the
           Christians
           of
           
             Nueua
             Espanna
          
           ,
           that
           they
           had
           nothing
           almost
           belonging
           to
           Christianitie
           ,
           but
           onely
           the
           bare
           name
           of
           Christians
           ,
           being
           so
           vtterly
           mindelesse
           ,
           and
           carelesse
           of
           Christian
           religion
           ,
           that
           they
           remembred
           not
           any
           thing
           of
           the
           couenant
           
           and
           profession
           ,
           they
           made
           in
           their
           baptisme
           :
           Onely
           ,
           they
           kept
           in
           minde
           ,
           the
           name
           they
           receaued
           then
           ,
           which
           very
           name
           also
           ,
           they
           forgot
           soone
           after
           .
           But
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           America
           except
           the
           regions
           afore
           mentioned
           ,
           which
           compared
           to
           the
           parts
           possessed
           by
           the
           Castilians
           and
           Portugales
           (
           to
           make
           estimation
           by
           the
           Mappes
           that
           wee
           haue
           of
           those
           regions
           ,
           for
           the
           North
           and
           West
           coasts
           of
           America
           ,
           are
           not
           yet
           perfectly
           discouered
           )
           may
           be
           as
           sixe
           to
           one
           ,
           is
           possessed
           by
           Idolaters
           .
        
      
       
         
           Of
           the
           parts
           of
           the
           World
           possessed
           by
           Mahumetans
           .
           CHAP.
           XI
           .
        
         
           HAuing
           declared
           the
           amplitude
           of
           Christianitie
           ,
           I
           will
           proceede
           to
           shew
           the
           state
           of
           other
           religions
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           &
           with
           all
           ,
           what
           parts
           of
           it
           ,
           the
           professours
           of
           those
           religions
           doe
           seuerally
           inhabite
           ;
           and
           lastly
           ,
           what
           proportion
           they
           may
           haue
           each
           to
           other
           ,
           and
           all
           of
           them
           to
           Christians
           .
           To
           indeuour
           therefore
           your
           satisfaction
           in
           this
           behalfe
           .
           There
           are
           foure
           sorts
           or
           sects
           of
           Religion
           ,
           obserued
           in
           the
           sundrie
           regions
           of
           the
           World.
           Namely
           ,
           Idolatrie
           ,
           
             Mahumetanisme
             ,
             Iudaisme
          
           ,
           and
           Christianity
           .
           Of
           Christians
           I
           haue
           alreadie
           spoken
           :
           now
           therefore
           will
           I
           relate
           for
           your
           better
           
           contentment
           ,
           of
           the
           other
           three
           ;
           and
           first
           of
           Mahumetans
           .
        
         
           Mahumetans
           then
           possesse
           in
           Europe
           ,
           as
           I
           said
           before
           (
           hauing
           in
           that
           part
           but
           small
           mixture
           of
           Christians
           )
           all
           the
           region
           betwixt
           Tanais
           and
           Boristhenes
           (
           Don
           and
           Nieper
           they
           are
           now
           called
           )
           being
           about
           a
           twentith
           part
           of
           Europe
           :
           beside
           
           
             Mathi●a
             Michou
             .
             de
             Sarmat
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             3.
             
          
           some
           villages
           in
           Lituania
           about
           Wilna
           ,
           where
           the
           vse
           of
           their
           religion
           is
           by
           the
           King
           of
           Poland
           permitted
           them
           ,
           for
           in
           
             Greece
             ,
             Macedon
             ,
             Thrace
             ,
             Bulgaria
             ,
             Rascia
             ,
             Seruia
             ,
             Bosina
             ,
             Epirus
             ,
          
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           Hungaria
           ,
           and
           some
           part
           of
           Dalmatia
           (
           which
           may
           bee
           together
           about
           one
           foureteenth
           part
           of
           Europe
           )
           although
           the
           gouernment
           be
           wholy
           the
           Turkes
           ,
           yet
           Mahumetans
           scarcely
           passe
           one
           third
           part
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           .
        
         
           But
           in
           
             Afrique
             Mahumetanisme
          
           is
           spred
           exceeding
           farre
           ,
           for
           ,
           first
           to
           consider
           the
           maritime
           coast
           :
           It
           possesseth
           all
           the
           shoare
           of
           the
           Atlantique
           Ocean
           ,
           from
           
             Cape
             Blanco
          
           to
           the
           Strait
           of
           Gibralter
           ,
           being
           about
           1100
           miles
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           on
           the
           shoare
           of
           the
           mediterrane
           ,
           all
           from
           that
           Strait
           to
           Aegypt
           ,
           about
           2400
           miles
           ,
           excepting
           onely
           on
           the
           one
           coast
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           other
           ,
           some
           seuen
           townes
           ,
           in
           the
           possession
           of
           the
           Spaniards
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           on
           the
           East
           side
           of
           Afrique
           all
           the
           coast
           of
           the
           Bay
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           euen
           from
           Suez
           to
           C.
           
             Gardafu
             .
          
           ,
           about
           1600
           miles
           ,
           excepting
           onely
           one
           port
           (
           Ercoco
           )
           being
           of
           the
           dominion
           of
           the
           King
           of
           Habassia
           .
           And
           thence
           (
           doubling
           that
           Cape
           )
           Southward
           ,
           all
           the
           shore
           of
           the
           Aethiopique
           sea
           ,
           as
           farre
           as
           Mozambique
           (
           that
           is
           ouer
           against
           the
           middest
           of
           Madagascar
           )
           about
           1800
           miles
           .
           And
           in
           all
           the
           coasts
           of
           Afrique
           hitherto
           mentioned
           ,
           being
           
           altogether
           about
           7000
           miles
           (
           that
           is
           ,
           by
           some
           excesse
           more
           then
           halfe
           the
           circumference
           of
           Afrique
           )
           the
           professors
           of
           Mahumeds
           religion
           ,
           haue
           both
           possession
           and
           dominion
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           *
           
             *
             Paul.
             Venet.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             39.
             
             Linschot
             .
             l.
             ●
             .
             c.
             3.
             
          
           maritime
           parts
           ,
           of
           the
           great
           Isle
           of
           Madagascar
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           Islands
           along
           the
           coast
           of
           Afrique
           .
           And
           yet
           ,
           euen
           beyond
           Mozambique
           also
           ,
           as
           farre
           as
           to
           the
           
             Cape
             das
             Corrientes
          
           (
           it
           is
           vnder
           the
           circle
           of
           Capricorne
           )
           although
           they
           haue
           there
           no
           rule
           ,
           yet
           they
           are
           found
           mingled
           with
           Idolaters
           .
           But
           yet
           neuerthelesse
           ,
           obserued
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           along
           the
           East
           shoare
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           namely
           from
           Suachem
           to
           Mozambique
           (
           being
           towards
           3000
           miles
           of
           the
           mentioned
           coast
           )
           Mahumetans
           possesse
           onely
           the
           Margent
           of
           the
           land
           ,
           or
           the
           sea
           shoare
           ,
           and
           haue
           gotten
           but
           little
           footing
           in
           the
           inland
           parts
           ,
           except
           in
           the
           kingdomes
           of
           Dangali
           and
           Adel
           ,
           confining
           together
           ,
           the
           first
           within
           and
           the
           second
           without
           the
           straite
           of
           
             Babel
             Mandel
          
           ,
           which
           yet
           are
           but
           small
           prouinces
           .
           And
           this
           also
           (
           to
           extenuate
           their
           number
           )
           is
           also
           true
           ,
           that
           from
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Adel
           ,
           and
           
             Cape
             Guardafu
          
           ,
           to
           Mozambique
           ,
           there
           is
           found
           among
           the
           Mahumetans
           ,
           some
           mixture
           of
           Idolaters
           ,
           although
           the
           dominion
           bee
           onely
           in
           the
           Mahumetans
           hands
           .
        
         
           But
           yet
           on
           the
           North
           and
           West
           parts
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           it
           is
           farre
           otherwise
           ,
           and
           farre
           worse
           :
           Mahumetanisme
           hauing
           ouerspread
           all
           the
           maine
           land
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           betweene
           the
           Mediterraine
           sea
           and
           the
           great
           riuer
           Neger
           :
           and
           along
           the
           course
           of
           Nilus
           ,
           as
           farre
           as
           the
           Isle
           of
           Meroe
           ,
           which
           lieth
           also
           about
           the
           same
           parallel
           with
           the
           riuer
           Niger
           ,
           and
           is
           possessed
           by
           Mahumetans
           .
           And
           yet
           ,
           
           *
           
             *
             Leo.
             Afri●
             .
             l.
             1
             cap.
             de
             Religion
             .
             Afror
             .
          
           beyond
           Niger
           also
           ,
           it
           hath
           inuaded
           and
           obtained
           ,
           all
           the
           kingdomes
           of
           the
           Nigrites
           that
           border
           on
           that
           riuer
           .
           So
           that
           all
           Barbarie
           and
           
             Biled
             elgerid
          
           ,
           and
           
             Libya
             deserta
          
           ,
           and
           the
           region
           of
           Negroes
           ,
           are
           become
           of
           that
           religion
           .
           Excepting
           first
           some
           maritime
           parts
           toward
           the
           Atlantique
           sea
           ,
           namely
           from
           C.
           Blanco
           southward
           ,
           which
           are
           inhabited
           by
           Gentils
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Borno
           ,
           and
           some
           part
           of
           Nubia
           :
           And
           thirdly
           ,
           certaine
           scattered
           multitudes
           of
           the
           old
           African
           progenie
           ,
           that
           still
           retaine
           their
           ancient
           gentilisme
           ,
           and
           are
           found
           in
           diuers
           places
           heere
           and
           there
           in
           the
           mountaines
           &
           wilder
           parts
           of
           Barbary
           ,
           of
           Biled-elgerid
           ,
           and
           of
           Libya
           .
           These
           I
           say
           ,
           beeing
           excepted
           ,
           all
           Afrique
           beside
           ,
           frō
           the
           mediterrane
           sea
           ,
           som
           what
           more
           southward
           then
           the
           riuer
           Niger
           ,
           is
           ouerspread
           with
           Mahumetans
           :
           which
           (
           adding
           these
           before
           mentioned
           ,
           along
           the
           east
           coast
           of
           Aethiopia
           )
           may
           by
           estimation
           ,
           take
           vp
           foure
           nine
           parts
           of
           Afrique
           .
        
         
           And
           yet
           in
           Asia
           ,
           Mahumetanism
           is
           farther
           spred
           ,
           beeing
           imbraced
           and
           maintained
           chiefly
           ,
           by
           foure
           mighty
           nations
           ,
           namely
           ,
           the
           
             Arabians
             ,
             Persians
             ,
             Turkes
          
           ,
           and
           
             Tartars
             .
             Arabia
          
           was
           indeed
           the
           nest
           ,
           that
           bred
           and
           fostered
           that
           vncleane
           bird
           ,
           and
           had
           it
           bene
           the
           cage
           also
           ,
           for
           euer
           to
           enclose
           it
           ,
           it
           had
           bin
           but
           too
           much
           space
           and
           liberty
           ,
           for
           Arabia
           is
           in
           circuit
           aboue
           4000.
           miles
           ,
           and
           except
           a
           small
           mixture
           of
           Christians
           in
           Eltor
           ,
           a
           port
           towne
           toward
           the
           inmost
           angle
           of
           the
           bay
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           and
           Petra
           ,
           (
           Krac
           now
           it
           is
           called
           )
           a
           midland
           towne
           ,
           and
           two
           Monasteries
           about
           the
           Hill
           of
           Sinai
           ,
           all
           is
           possessed
           with
           Mahumetans
           .
           But
           from
           Arabia
           that
           poison
           
           hath
           in
           such
           sort
           dispersed
           it selfe
           through
           the
           veynes
           of
           Asia
           ,
           that
           neere
           the
           one
           halfe
           ,
           is
           at
           this
           day
           corrupted
           by
           it
           .
           For
           although
           it
           hath
           not
           hetherto
           attained
           to
           the
           north
           coast
           of
           Asia
           ,
           which
           is
           partly
           inhabited
           by
           Christians
           ,
           namely
           ,
           from
           the
           riuer
           of
           Dwyna
           to
           Pechora
           ,
           and
           partly
           by
           idolaters
           from
           Pechora
           to
           the
           East
           Ocean
           :
           nor
           yet
           to
           the
           east
           coast
           ,
           which
           from
           the
           most
           northerly
           part
           of
           Tartary
           ,
           to
           the
           most
           southerly
           part
           of
           India
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Boter
             .
             Rel.
             pa.
             3.
             l.
             2.
             cap.
             de
             Mahometan●
             .
          
           (
           except
           some
           few
           places
           in
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Siam
           )
           Idolaters
           in
           l●ke
           sort
           generally
           obtaine
           :
           yet
           neuerthelesse
           ,
           it
           is
           as
           I
           saide
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           a
           very
           great
           part
           of
           Asia
           ,
           is
           infected
           with
           that
           pestilence
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           all
           the
           southerly
           coast
           of
           Asia
           ,
           from
           the
           Bay
           of
           Arabia
           to
           the
           riuer
           Indus
           ,
           is
           possessed
           by
           Mahumetans
           :
           and
           if
           wee
           proceed
           further
           along
           that
           shore
           ,
           euen
           beyond
           the
           riuer
           of
           Indus
           also
           ,
           the
           great
           kingdomes
           of
           Cambaia
           ,
           and
           Bengala
           ,
           for
           a
           great
           part
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           about
           one
           fourth
           part
           of
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           Malabar
           ,
           are
           obserued
           to
           be
           Mahumetans
           .
           And
           secondly
           ,
           to
           consider
           the
           inland
           parts
           :
           all
           from
           the
           westerly
           bounds
           of
           Asia
           ,
           namely
           the
           riuer
           Tanais
           ,
           with
           the
           Euxine
           ,
           Aegaean
           ,
           and
           Mediterane
           seas
           ,
           as
           farre
           Eastward
           ,
           as
           the
           mountaine
           Imaus
           ,
           (
           which
           is
           more
           then
           halfe
           the
           length
           of
           Asia
           )
           is
           possessed
           by
           them
           :
           Except
           ,
           first
           the
           *
           
             *
             Guaguin
             .
             Descr.
             Tartar.
             in
             Kyrges●orum
             Horda
             .
          
           Kirgessi
           neere
           Imaus
           ,
           who
           are
           Idolaters
           :
           and
           secondly
           ,
           the
           mixture
           of
           Christians
           among
           them
           ,
           who
           yet
           haue
           very
           small
           proportion
           (
           for
           their
           multitude
           )
           to
           Mahumetans
           ,
           in
           any
           prouince
           ,
           of
           all
           the
           mentioned
           vast
           circuit
           ,
           for
           howsoeuer
           Burchardus
           about
           320.
           yeares
           agoe
           ,
           hath
           left
           
           recorded
           of
           those
           parts
           of
           Asia
           ,
           that
           there
           were
           to
           be
           found
           in
           them
           30.
           
           Christians
           for
           one
           Mahumetan
           .
           
             Descr.
             ter
             .
             sanct
             .
             pa.
          
           2.
           c.
           2.
           
           §
           .
           9.
           yet
           certainely
           ,
           that
           in
           these
           present
           times
           the
           excesse
           of
           multitude
           is
           growne
           great
           on
           the
           Mahumetans
           side
           in
           respect
           of
           Christians
           ,
           the
           experience
           of
           many
           putteth
           out
           of
           question
           .
           And
           ,
           if
           wee
           shall
           proceed
           yet
           farther
           eastward
           ,
           in
           the
           inland
           parts
           of
           Asia
           ,
           and
           passe
           in
           our
           speculation
           ,
           beyond
           the
           mountaine
           Imaus
           ,
           euen
           there
           also
           sundry
           prouinces
           are
           obserued
           ,
           as
           *
           
             *
             Paul.
             Venet.
             l.
             1.
             c.
             41.42.43
             .
          
           
             Peim
             ,
             Cotam
             ,
             Lop
          
           ,
           where
           Mahumetans
           are
           the
           maine
           and
           sole
           inhabitants
           ,
           and
           many
           more
           ,
           as
           *
           
             *
             Id.
             l.
             1.
             ca.
             38.40.47.62.63.64
             .
             &c.
             
          
           
             Cassar
             ,
             Carcham
             ,
             Chinchintilus
             ,
             Tanguth
             ,
             Ergimul
             ,
             Cerguth
             ,
             Tenduc
             ,
          
           &c.
           where
           they
           are
           mingled
           among
           idolaters
           ,
           which
           may
           for
           a
           great
           part
           ,
           counteruaile
           those
           regions
           of
           Asia
           ,
           which
           Christians
           and
           Idolaters
           take
           vp
           on
           this
           side
           that
           mountaine
           .
           So
           that
           ,
           in
           my
           estimation
           ,
           hauing
           about
           these
           points
           cōferred
           history
           with
           Geography
           in
           the
           most
           circumspect
           &
           considerate
           manner
           that
           I
           was
           able
           ,
           about
           nine
           parts
           of
           20.
           of
           Asia
           ,
           are
           possessed
           by
           Mahumetans
           .
        
         
           Thus
           then
           is
           Mahumetanisme
           spread
           ouer
           the
           one
           halfe
           almost
           of
           the
           firme
           land
           of
           Asia
           .
           And
           yet
           moreouer
           in
           the
           Ilands
           also
           that
           are
           about
           Asia
           ,
           that
           religion
           hath
           found
           large
           intertainment
           .
           For
           not
           onely
           a
           good
           part
           of
           the
           small
           *
           
             *
             Nicol.
             de
             cō●i
             .
             Viag
             nelle
             Indie
             .
             Ba●bos
             .
             ●p
             .
             Ramus
             .
             Vol.
             1.
             de
             Viaggi
             .
             p
             :
             313
             ▪
             318.319
             .
             Boter
             .
             Relat
             p.
             3.
             l.
             2
             de
             Mahometani
             ,
          
           Isles
           of
           Maldiuia
           ,
           namely
           those
           of
           them
           that
           are
           inhabited
           ,
           (
           for
           they
           are
           aboue
           7000.
           in
           all
           ,
           and
           most
           without
           habitation
           )
           are
           possessed
           with
           Mahumetans
           ,
           but
           moreouer
           ,
           all
           the
           ports
           of
           the
           Isle
           of
           Ceilan
           ,
           (
           except
           Colombo
           which
           the
           Portugalls
           haue
           )
           the
           Sea
           coasts
           of
           Sumatra
           ,
           the
           ports
           of
           Iaua
           ,
           with
           the
           Isle
           
           of
           Sunda
           ,
           the
           ports
           of
           Banda
           ,
           of
           Bornéo
           and
           of
           Gilolo
           ,
           with
           some
           of
           the
           ilands
           Malucos
           ,
           are
           in
           the
           hands
           of
           Mahumetans
           .
        
         
           Of
           the
           great
           spreading
           &
           inlargement
           of
           which
           religion
           ,
           if
           the
           causes
           were
           demanded
           of
           mee
           ,
           I
           should
           make
           answere
           ,
           that
           beside
           the
           iustice
           of
           almighty
           God
           ,
           punishing
           by
           that
           violent
           and
           wicked
           sect
           ,
           the
           sinnes
           of
           Christians
           (
           for
           we
           see
           that
           by
           the
           conquests
           of
           the
           Arabians
           ,
           and
           Turks
           ,
           it
           hath
           cheefly
           seased
           on
           those
           regions
           ,
           where
           Christianity
           in
           ancient
           time
           most
           flourished
           ,
           both
           in
           Afrique
           and
           Asia
           ,
           and
           partly
           in
           Europe
           )
           one
           cause
           J
           say
           ,
           of
           the
           large
           spreading
           of
           their
           Religion
           ,
           is
           the
           large
           spreading
           of
           their
           victories
           .
           For
           it
           hath
           euer
           beene
           the
           condition
           of
           the
           conquered
           ,
           to
           follow
           for
           the
           most
           part
           the
           religion
           of
           the
           conquerors
           .
           A
           secōd
           ,
           their
           peremptory
           restraint
           ,
           (
           euen
           on
           the
           paine
           of
           death
           )
           of
           all
           disputation
           touching
           their
           religion
           ,
           and
           calling
           any
           point
           of
           it
           into
           question
           .
           A
           third
           ,
           their
           suppression
           of
           the
           studie
           of
           Philosophy
           ,
           by
           the
           light
           whereof
           ,
           the
           grosnesse
           and
           vanity
           of
           many
           parts
           of
           their
           religion
           might
           bee
           discouered
           ,
           which
           is
           inhibited
           to
           bee
           taught
           in
           their
           vniuersities
           ,
           and
           so
           hath
           beene
           ,
           about
           these
           400.
           yeares
           ,
           whereas
           till
           then
           ,
           it
           greatly
           flourished
           among
           thē
           ,
           in
           Cordoua
           ,
           in
           Fess
           ,
           in
           Maroccho
           ,
           in
           Bagded
           ,
           and
           other
           cities
           .
           And
           yet
           ,
           as
           Bellonius
           and
           *
           
             *
             Bellon
             .
             Obser
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             30.
             
             Georgeuitz
             .
             l.
             2.
             de
             Ritib
             .
             Turcar.
             cap.
             de
             Scholis
             .
          
           others
           write
           ,
           the
           Turkes
           fall
           now
           againe
           ,
           to
           those
           studies
           afresh
           .
           A
           fourth
           cause
           may
           well
           bee
           assigned
           ,
           the
           sensuall
           liberty
           allowed
           by
           it
           ,
           namely
           ,
           to
           haue
           many
           wiues
           ,
           and
           the
           like
           promise
           of
           sensual
           pleasures
           ,
           to
           succeed
           after
           this
           life
           (
           to
           the
           Religious
           obseruers
           of
           it
           ,
           )
           in
           
           Paradise
           ,
           wherewith
           men
           for
           the
           greatest
           part
           ,
           as
           being
           of
           things
           wherewith
           their
           sense
           is
           affected
           ,
           &
           whereof
           they
           haue
           had
           certaine
           experience
           ,
           are
           more
           allured
           and
           perswaded
           ,
           then
           with
           promises
           of
           spiritual
           delights
           ,
           presented
           only
           to
           their
           hopes
           ,
           and
           for
           which
           present
           and
           sensible
           pleasures
           must
           in
           the
           meane
           time
           be
           forsaken
           .
        
      
       
         
           Of
           the
           sundrie
           regions
           of
           the
           world
           inhabited
           by
           Idolaters
           .
           CHAP.
           XII
           .
        
         
           NOW
           touching
           Idolaters
           ,
           they
           possesse
           in
           Europe
           ,
           a
           region
           as
           I
           before
           obserued
           ,
           about
           900.
           miles
           in
           circuit
           ,
           (
           although
           the
           ordinary
           Geographical
           charts
           represent
           it
           ,
           (
           but
           falslie
           )
           more
           then
           twise
           so
           large
           )
           containing
           
             Lappia
             ,
             Corelia
             ,
             Biarmia
             ,
             Scricfinia
             ,
          
           and
           the
           north
           part
           of
           Finmarch
           .
           All
           which
           together
           ,
           may
           by
           estimation
           make
           about
           one
           sixtieth
           part
           of
           Europe
           ,
           or
           a
           little
           more
           ,
           more
           I
           meane
           in
           magnitude
           rather
           then
           in
           multitude
           ,
           for
           it
           is
           indeed
           a
           little
           greater
           then
           so
           .
           Beside
           which
           prouinces
           ,
           there
           are
           also
           to
           bee
           found
           in
           diuers
           places
           of
           *
           
             *
             Beem
             .
             de
             Morib
             .
             gent.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             7.
             
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             p.
             ●
             l.
             1.
             c.
             Litunia
             
          
           Lituania
           ,
           and
           Samagotia
           ,
           some
           scattered
           remnants
           of
           Idolaters
           .
        
         
           But
           in
           Afrique
           their
           multitude
           is
           very
           great
           ,
           for
           from
           
             C.
             Blanco
          
           on
           the
           coast
           of
           Libya
           ,
           the
           most
           westerly
           
           point
           of
           all
           Afrique
           (
           being
           about
           the
           north
           latitude
           of
           twenty
           degrees
           )
           euen
           al
           the
           coast
           of
           Afrique
           southward
           ,
           to
           the
           cape
           of
           
             Buena
             Esperanza
          
           :
           And
           thence
           turning
           by
           the
           backe
           of
           Afrique
           as
           farre
           as
           the
           cape
           of
           Mozambique
           ,
           beeing
           (
           ouer
           against
           the
           middest
           of
           Madagascar
           )
           in
           the
           south
           latitude
           of
           fifteene
           degrees
           :
           all
           this
           coast
           I
           say
           ,
           beeing
           not
           much
           lesse
           ,
           then
           halfe
           the
           circumference
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           is
           inhabited
           by
           Idolaters
           .
           Onely
           ,
           on
           the
           East
           side
           ,
           from
           Mozambique
           to
           
             Cape
             de
             Corrientes
          
           (
           which
           is
           the
           south
           latitude
           of
           24
           degrees
           )
           they
           are
           mingled
           with
           Mahumetans
           :
           And
           on
           the
           west
           side
           ,
           in
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Congo
           ,
           and
           the
           north
           part
           of
           Angola
           ,
           with
           Christians
           :
           But
           yet
           in
           both
           these
           places
           of
           their
           mixture
           ,
           idolaters
           are
           the
           greater
           multitude
           .
        
         
           But
           now
           ,
           if
           wee
           consider
           the
           inland
           Region
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           all
           betweene
           the
           riuer
           Nilus
           ,
           and
           the
           West
           sea
           of
           Aethiopia
           ,
           from
           about
           the
           north
           parallel
           of
           tenne
           degrees
           ,
           to
           the
           south
           parallel
           of
           6.
           or
           7.
           degrees
           ,
           but
           from
           that
           parallel
           of
           6.
           or
           7.
           degrees
           ,
           euen
           all
           Aethiopia
           southward
           ,
           on
           both
           the
           sides
           of
           Nilus
           ,
           from
           the
           east
           sea
           of
           Aethiopia
           ,
           to
           the
           West
           ,
           euen
           to
           the
           most
           southerly
           point
           of
           all
           Afrique
           ,
           the
           cape
           of
           
             Buona
             Speranza
          
           ,
           is
           possessed
           by
           idolaters
           :
           excepting
           onely
           some
           part
           of
           Congo
           and
           Angola
           afore
           mentioned
           ,
           toward
           the
           west
           sea
           ,
           inhabited
           by
           Christians
           ,
           and
           the
           vtmost
           shore
           of
           the
           East
           sea
           ,
           frō
           Mozambique
           northward
           ,
           which
           is
           replenished
           with
           Mahumetans
           :
           And
           yet
           ,
           beside
           all
           the
           regions
           before
           mentioned
           ,
           euen
           all
           the
           kingdome
           of
           *
           
             *
             Leo
             African
             .
             l.
             7.
             ca.
             de
             Borno
             Regno
             .
          
           Borno
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           part
           *
           
             *
             Aluarez
             .
             hist.
             Aethiop
             .
             c.
             30.
             
          
           of
           Nubia
           is
           possessed
           by
           them
           ;
           to
           
           speake
           nothing
           of
           the
           infinite
           multitudes
           of
           the
           *
           
             *
             Leo
             Afric
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             de
             vitij●
             Afror
             .
          
           ancient
           Africans
           ,
           dispersed
           in
           sundry
           tracts
           of
           Barbary
           ,
           of
           Biled-elgerid
           ,
           and
           of
           
             Libya
             Deserta
          
           ,
           which
           still
           continue
           in
           their
           ancient
           paganisme
           .
           So
           that
           (
           ouer
           and
           beside
           these
           last
           )
           very
           neere
           abouth
           halfe
           Afrique
           ,
           is
           possessed
           by
           idolaters
           .
        
         
           And
           yet
           in
           Asia
           idolaters
           abound
           more
           then
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           euen
           as
           Asia
           is
           larger
           then
           Afrique
           for
           the
           continent
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           people
           ,
           beter
           inhabited
           ,
           for
           of
           Asia
           also
           ,
           very
           neere
           about
           the
           one
           halfe
           ,
           or
           rather
           a
           little
           more
           is
           possessed
           by
           idolaters
           .
           For
           first
           if
           wee
           consider
           the
           maritime
           parts
           ,
           all
           from
           the
           riuer
           of
           Pechora
           ,
           Eastward
           to
           the
           Ocean
           ,
           and
           then
           turning
           downeward
           ,
           to
           the
           most
           southerly
           point
           of
           India
           ,
           (
           and
           of
           all
           Asia
           )
           the
           cape
           of
           Cincapura
           ,
           and
           from
           that
           point
           returning
           westward
           ,
           by
           the
           south
           coast
           ,
           to
           the
           outlets
           of
           the
           riuer
           Indus
           ,
           al
           that
           maritime
           tract
           I
           say
           ,
           is
           entirely
           possessed
           by
           idolaters
           .
           Sauing
           onely
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           neerer
           part
           of
           India
           ,
           betweene
           Indus
           and
           Ganges
           ,
           there
           is
           among
           them
           some
           mixture
           both
           of
           Mahumetans
           and
           Christians
           :
           and
           in
           the
           further
           part
           ,
           the
           city
           and
           territory
           of
           Malacca
           ,
           is
           held
           by
           Portugalls
           ,
           and
           some
           part
           of
           the
           sea
           coast
           of
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Siam
           ,
           by
           Moores
           .
           So
           that
           by
           this
           account
           ,
           a
           good
           deale
           more
           then
           halfe
           the
           circumference
           of
           Asia
           ,
           is
           possessed
           by
           Idolaters
           .
           And
           ,
           although
           in
           the
           inland
           parts
           their
           proportion
           bee
           somewhat
           lesse
           ,
           then
           in
           the
           Maritime
           ,
           yet
           if
           we
           consider
           well
           ,
           the
           whole
           dimension
           of
           Asia
           ,
           we
           shall
           find
           by
           good
           estimation
           ,
           as
           before
           I
           said
           ,
           that
           the
           one
           halfe
           ,
           or
           rather
           a
           little
           more
           ,
           is
           replenished
           with
           Idolaters
           :
           for
           the
           better
           declaring
           
           of
           which
           point
           ,
           you
           may
           vnderstand
           ,
           that
           as
           Strabo
           and
           Ptolomie
           ,
           haue
           obserued
           ,
           of
           the
           mountaine
           Taurus
           ,
           
           
             Strab.
             l.
             2.
             
             Ptolē
             in
             Tab.
             Orb.
             general
             .
          
           that
           beginning
           in
           the
           west
           parts
           of
           Asia
           (
           in
           the
           confines
           of
           Lycia
           and
           Pamphilia
           ouer
           against
           the
           Chelidonian
           isles
           )
           it
           runneth
           Eastward
           e●en
           to
           the
           Ocean
           ,
           keeping
           between
           the
           parallels
           of
           30.
           and
           40.
           degrees
           ,
           and
           so
           deuiding
           the
           north
           part
           of
           Asia
           from
           the
           south
           .
           Euen
           so
           must
           we
           obserue
           of
           the
           mountaine
           *
           
             *
             Vid.
             Ptolem.
             in
             Tab.
             o●bis
             .
             ●niuer
             .
             et
             Mercator
             in
             Tab.
             general●
             Asiae
             .
          
           Imaus
           that
           beginning
           on
           the
           shoare
           of
           the
           north
           Ocean
           ,
           it
           runneth
           along
           through
           the
           middest
           of
           Asia
           to
           the
           south
           ,
           keeping
           still
           about
           the
           same
           meridian
           ,
           namely
           about
           the
           longitude
           of
           30.
           degrees
           ,
           and
           crossing
           (
           at
           right
           angles
           in
           a
           manner
           )
           the
           mountaine
           Taurus
           deuideth
           the
           east
           part
           of
           Asia
           from
           the
           west
           .
           Imaus
           therfore
           in
           this
           sort
           diuiding
           Asia
           into
           two
           parts
           ,
           not
           much
           vnequall
           ,
           diuideth
           also
           in
           a
           manner
           ,
           between
           the
           idolaters
           &
           Mahumetans
           of
           Asia
           ,
           for
           although
           the
           hether
           part
           of
           Asia
           ,
           west
           of
           Imaus
           ,
           and
           possessed
           of
           Mahumetans
           ,
           take
           vp
           more
           in
           the
           longitude
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           namely
           east
           and
           west
           :
           yet
           the
           further
           part
           east
           of
           Imaus
           ,
           spreadeth
           more
           in
           latitude
           ,
           north
           and
           south
           ,
           which
           may
           make
           some
           recompence
           toward
           that
           excesse
           .
           But
           ,
           if
           withall
           we
           subtract
           those
           parts
           of
           the
           hether
           Asia
           ,
           that
           are
           couered
           with
           the
           Persian
           ,
           and
           Caspian
           seas
           ,
           beside
           large
           parts
           of
           the
           Euxine
           &
           Mediterrane
           ,
           the
           further
           Asia
           (
           I
           thinke
           )
           will
           fully
           equall
           it
           .
           Now
           ,
           although
           many
           Mahumetans
           bee
           also
           found
           on
           the
           other
           side
           of
           Imaus
           toward
           the
           northeast
           of
           Asia
           ,
           both
           seuerall
           in
           sundry
           prouinces
           ,
           and
           otherwise
           mingled
           with
           idolaters
           or
           Christians
           ,
           or
           with
           both
           ,
           as
           before
           was
           partly
           
           obserued
           :
           Yet
           many
           more
           whole
           regions
           of
           Idolaters
           ,
           (
           to
           counteruaile
           those
           Mahumetans
           )
           are
           found
           on
           this
           side
           Imaus
           ,
           both
           ,
           toward
           the
           South
           ,
           in
           the
           Kingdomes
           of
           the
           nearer
           India
           ,
           and
           toward
           the
           North
           ,
           betwixt
           Imaus
           and
           the
           riuer
           Pechora
           ,
           all
           which
           coast
           of
           Asia
           is
           inhabited
           by
           Idolaters
           ,
           And
           lastly
           ,
           in
           the
           middest
           betwixt
           both
           ,
           the
           Kirgessi
           ,
           and
           some
           other
           of
           their
           neighbour
           Nations
           .
           And
           not
           onely
           in
           the
           firme
           land
           of
           Asia
           ,
           is
           idolatry
           thus
           spred
           :
           but
           in
           those
           many
           thousand
           Ilands
           that
           lie
           dispersed
           in
           the
           vast
           Ocean
           ,
           on
           the
           East
           and
           Southeast
           parts
           of
           Asia
           :
           *
           
             *
             Paul.
             Ven.
             l.
             3.
             c
             8.
             
             Id
             ,
             l.
             3.
             cap.
             42.
             
          
           which
           ouer
           against
           China
           ,
           are
           recorded
           vpon
           the
           report
           of
           Mariners
           ,
           long
           practised
           in
           those
           seas
           ,
           to
           be
           7448
           ,
           and
           ,
           about
           *
           
             *
             Paul.
             Ven.
             l.
             3.
             c
             8.
             
             Id
             ,
             l.
             3.
             cap.
             42.
             
          
           India
           ,
           to
           be
           127000
           :
           And
           which
           might
           for
           their
           largenesse
           ,
           if
           they
           were
           all
           layed
           together
           ,
           make
           a
           Continent
           as
           large
           as
           three
           foure
           parts
           of
           Europe
           .
           In
           those
           Islands
           I
           say
           ,
           Idolatrie
           ouerspreaddeth
           all
           ,
           excepting
           onely
           those
           few
           ,
           which
           I
           before
           obserued
           ,
           to
           be
           possessed
           by
           the
           Spanyards
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           Arabians
           .
        
         
           Finally
           ,
           of
           all
           other
           parts
           of
           the
           Earth
           yet
           discouered
           ,
           Idolatry
           spreadeth
           farthest
           in
           America
           ,
           which
           being
           but
           little
           lesse
           ,
           then
           the
           Easterne
           continent
           ,
           (
           that
           we
           terme
           the
           old
           world
           )
           is
           at
           least
           six
           parts
           of
           seuen
           ,
           inhabited
           with
           heathenish
           and
           idolatrous
           people
           .
           For
           ,
           except
           the
           regions
           aboue
           mentioned
           ,
           possessed
           namely
           by
           the
           Portugalles
           and
           Castilians
           ,
           (
           and
           yet
           the
           inner
           ,
           and
           wilder
           tracts
           euen
           of
           those
           ,
           remaine
           still
           for
           a
           great
           part
           ,
           in
           their
           ancient
           paganisme
           )
           and
           many
           notwithstanding
           their
           baptisme
           ,
           
           
             Th●a
             Ies
             de
             Con.
             ge●t
             .
             l.
             ●
             .
             c.
             1.
             
          
           withal
           worship
           Idols
           together
           with
           some
           later
           Conuerts
           made
           in
           the
           region
           about
           &
           aboue
           
           the
           Bay
           of
           California
           ,
           of
           whō
           as
           yet
           ,
           histories
           make
           so
           little
           report
           ,
           that
           of
           their
           number
           I
           can
           make
           no
           estimate
           :
           And
           lastly
           2
           ,
           or
           3
           fortresses
           ,
           held
           by
           the
           Spanyards
           ,
           on
           the
           coast
           of
           Florida
           ,
           with
           the
           English
           colonies
           in
           Virginia
           ,
           and
           the
           French
           in
           Canada
           ,
           these
           I
           say
           being
           excepted
           ,
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           America
           ,
           being
           as
           I
           sayd
           about
           six
           seuenth
           parts
           remaineth
           in
           their
           olde
           Idolatry
           .
        
         
           And
           thus
           haue
           I
           declared
           the
           three
           principall
           sects
           as
           touching
           Religion
           ,
           that
           are
           at
           this
           present
           found
           in
           the
           seuerall
           parts
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           with
           their
           particular
           regions
           .
           But
           beside
           these
           ,
           obserued
           there
           are
           ,
           two
           or
           three
           irregular
           Nations
           ,
           being
           ,
           for
           their
           religion
           mingled
           as
           it
           were
           ,
           of
           some
           of
           the
           former
           sects
           .
           As
           first
           ,
           in
           Asia
           ,
           the
           Cardi
           ,
           inhabiting
           in
           the
           Mountainous
           Country
           aboue
           Mozal
           ,
           betweene
           Armenia
           ,
           and
           Mesopotamia
           .
           Secondly
           the
           Drusi
           ,
           dwelling
           in
           Syria
           ,
           about
           the
           skirts
           of
           Libanus
           ,
           the
           religion
           of
           both
           which
           Nations
           ,
           (
           such
           as
           it
           is
           )
           partaketh
           somewhat
           ,
           both
           of
           Mahumetanisme
           and
           Christianitie
           .
           And
           thirdly
           ,
           the
           Morduites
           in
           Europe
           ,
           possessing
           the
           middle
           confines
           betwixt
           the
           
             Precopite
             Tartars
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Muscouites
           ,
           that
           are
           in
           a
           manner
           as
           touching
           their
           religion
           ,
           mingled
           of
           all
           three
           sects
           :
           for
           they
           are
           both
           baptised
           like
           Christians
           ,
           and
           circumcised
           like
           Mahumetans
           ,
           and
           withall
           worship
           Idols
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           Iewes
           dispersed
           in
           seuerall
           parts
           of
           the
           World.
           CHAP.
           XIII
           .
        
         
           NOw
           ,
           will
           I
           intreat
           a
           little
           ,
           of
           the
           Professours
           of
           the
           fourth
           sort
           and
           sect
           of
           religion
           ,
           that
           is
           founde
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           namely
           of
           Iudaisme
           ,
           for
           ,
           although
           the
           Iewes
           haue
           not
           for
           their
           mansion
           ,
           any
           peculiar
           Country
           ,
           but
           are
           dispersed
           abroad
           among
           forrayne
           Nations
           ,
           for
           their
           ancient
           Idolatries
           ,
           and
           their
           later
           vnthankfulnesse
           ,
           in
           reiecting
           their
           Sauiour
           the
           sonne
           of
           God
           :
           So
           that
           euen
           in
           Ierusalem
           ,
           there
           be
           not
           to
           bee
           found
           at
           this
           time
           ,
           an
           hundred
           housholds
           of
           Iewes
           :
           
           
             Boter
             .
             Relat
             ▪
             pa.
             ●
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             de
             Gindei
             .
          
           (
           Onely
           of
           all
           the
           townes
           of
           
             Palestina
             ,
             Tiberias
          
           (
           which
           Amurath
           the
           great
           Turke
           gaue
           to
           
             Aluarez
             Mendez
          
           a
           Iew
           )
           and
           Staff●letto
           ,
           are
           somewhat
           peopled
           with
           them
           )
           Neither
           haue
           they
           at
           this
           present
           ,
           for
           any
           thing
           that
           is
           certainly
           knowen
           ,
           any
           other
           region
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           seuerall
           to
           themselues
           :
           Yet
           ,
           because
           there
           be
           some
           prouinces
           ,
           wherein
           they
           are
           obserued
           specially
           to
           abound
           ,
           as
           others
           also
           ,
           whence
           they
           are
           excluded
           and
           banished
           ,
           I
           will
           consider
           a
           little
           of
           their
           present
           condition
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           Country
           of
           Christendome
           ,
           whence
           the
           Iewes
           were
           expelled
           ,
           with
           out
           hope
           of
           returne
           ,
           was
           our
           Country
           of
           England
           ,
           whence
           they
           were
           banished
           ,
           Anno
           1290
           by
           King
           Edward
           the
           first
           .
           Not
           long
           after
           they
           were
           likewise
           banished
           
             France
             An.
          
           1307.
           by
           
             Philippus
             Pulcher
          
           :
           Onely
           of
           all
           the
           
           Countryes
           of
           France
           ,
           in
           the
           Iurisdiction
           of
           Auignon
           (
           the
           Popes
           state
           )
           some
           are
           remaining
           .
           Out
           of
           
             Spaine
             ,
             An.
          
           1492
           ,
           by
           Ferdinand
           ,
           and
           shortly
           after
           out
           of
           
             Portugall
             ,
             An
          
           ,
           1497
           by
           Emanuel
           .
           Out
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Naples
           and
           
             Sicilie
             ,
             An.
          
           1539.
           by
           Charles
           the
           5.
           
           In
           other
           regions
           of
           Europe
           they
           are
           found
           ,
           and
           in
           some
           of
           them
           in
           great
           numbers
           ,
           as
           in
           
             Germanie
             ,
             Bohem
             ,
             Polonia
             ,
             Lituania
             ,
             Russia
             ,
          
           and
           part
           of
           Italie
           ,
           specially
           Venice
           and
           Rome
           .
           In
           Greece
           also
           a
           great
           multitude
           ,
           wherein
           two
           Citties
           (
           beside
           all
           them
           of
           other
           places
           )
           Constantinople
           and
           Thessalonica
           are
           esteemed
           to
           be
           about
           160000
           Iewes
           .
           As
           also
           they
           are
           to
           be
           found
           by
           plentifull
           numbers
           ,
           in
           many
           parts
           of
           the
           Turks
           dominion
           ,
           both
           in
           Asia
           ,
           and
           Afrique
           .
           And
           for
           Asia
           ,
           specially
           in
           Aleppo
           ,
           in
           Tripoli
           ,
           in
           Damascus
           ,
           in
           Rhodes
           ,
           and
           almost
           in
           euery
           City
           of
           great
           trade
           and
           traffique
           in
           the
           Turk●sh
           Empire
           :
           As
           likewise
           in
           diuers
           parts
           of
           the
           Persian
           gouernment
           ,
           in
           Arabia
           also
           ,
           &
           lastly
           in
           India
           ,
           (
           namely
           about
           Cranganor
           )
           and
           in
           some
           other
           more
           remote
           regions
           .
           And
           ,
           to
           come
           to
           Afrique
           ,
           they
           are
           not
           only
           foundin
           the
           Cities
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           and
           Cair
           in
           Aegypt
           ,
           but
           ,
           as
           in
           many
           other
           regions
           &
           places
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           so
           principally
           ,
           in
           the
           Cities
           of
           Fess
           ,
           and
           Tremisen
           :
           and
           specially
           ,
           in
           the
           Hilles
           of
           Sensaua
           ,
           and
           Demen
           in
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Maroccho
           many
           of
           which
           last
           ,
           are
           by
           
             Leo
             Africanus
          
           ,
           specially
           noted
           to
           be
           of
           that
           Sect
           ,
           
           
             Leo
             African
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             36.
             &c.
             
          
           which
           the
           Iewes
           name
           *
           
             *
             For
             of
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             as
             touching
             their
             religion
             ,
             there
             bee
             in
             these
             times
             three
             fects
             .
             The
             first
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             of
             them
             ,
             is
             named
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             who
             beside
             the
             holy
             scriptures
             ,
             imbrace
             the
             Talmud
             also
             for
             Authenticall
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             cause
             ,
             they
             are
             also
             termed
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             The
             second
             are
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             which
             receiue
             onely
             the
             scriptures
             .
             And
             the
             Third
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             Samaritans
             (
             at
             this
             day
             but
             very
             few
             )
             which
             ,
             of
             all
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             ,
             admit
             onely
             the
             Pentateuch
             or
             bookes
             of
             Moses
             .
          
           Karraim
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           other
           Iewes
           of
           Afrique
           ,
           are
           reputed
           no
           better
           
           then
           heretiques
           .
        
         
           But
           yet
           ,
           beside
           these
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           dispersions
           of
           the
           Iewish
           Nation
           ,
           that
           may
           be
           elsewhere
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           phantasie
           of
           many
           learned
           men
           ,
           not
           vnwoorthy
           some
           diligent
           consideration
           ,
           that
           the
           Tartars
           of
           Scythia
           ,
           who
           about
           the
           yeare
           1200
           ,
           or
           a
           little
           before
           ,
           became
           first
           knowen
           abroad
           in
           the
           world
           by
           that
           name
           ,
           and
           hold
           at
           this
           day
           a
           great
           part
           of
           Asia
           ,
           in
           subiection
           ;
           That
           those
           Tartars
           I
           say
           ,
           are
           of
           the
           *
           
             *
             
               Postell
               .
               Descript
               .
               Syriae
               .
               cap.
               1.
               
            
             
               Genebrad
               .
               Chron.
               l.
               1.
               
               Bote●
               Relat.
               pa.
               1.
               l.
               2.
               c.
               vl●ima
               parte
               della
               Tartaria
               &
               pa.
               3.
               l.
               2.
               c.
               de
               Gindei
               .
            
          
           Israelites
           progeny
           :
           Namely
           of
           the
           ten
           Tribes
           ,
           which
           by
           Salmanazar
           ,
           and
           some
           of
           his
           predecessours
           ,
           were
           carried
           captiue
           into
           Assyria
           .
           Which
           although
           it
           be
           as
           I
           said
           no
           other
           then
           a
           vain
           and
           cappriccious
           phantasie
           ,
           yet
           ,
           hath
           it
           ,
           not
           onely
           found
           acceptance
           and
           entertainement
           ,
           with
           sundrie
           learned
           and
           vnderstanding
           men
           :
           but
           reason
           and
           authority
           are
           produced
           ,
           or
           pretended
           to
           establish
           it
           for
           a
           truth
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           It
           is
           alleaged
           that
           the
           word
           Tatari
           ,
           or
           Totari
           ,
           (
           for
           so
           indeed
           they
           are
           rightly
           called
           ,
           as
           *
           
             *
             
               Leunclau
               .
               in
               Pandect
               .
               Hist.
               Turcic
               .
            
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Heb.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Syr.
               
            
          
           learned
           men
           obserue
           ,
           and
           not
           Tartari
           )
           signifieth
           in
           the
           Syriaque
           and
           Hebrew
           tongues
           ,
           a
           Residue
           or
           Remainder
           such
           as
           these
           Tartars
           are
           supposed
           to
           bee
           of
           the
           Ten
           Tribes
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           because
           ,
           (
           as
           the
           Patrons
           of
           
           this
           phantasie
           say
           )
           they
           haue
           alwaies
           embraced
           (
           the
           ancient
           character
           of
           Iudaisme
           )
           Circumcision
           .
           And
           thirdly
           ,
           
           
             2
             Esdras
             13.
             v.
             41.42.43.44.45
             .
          
           the
           authority
           of
           supposed
           Esdras
           ,
           (
           the
           very
           spring
           I
           take
           it
           ,
           whence
           hath
           flowed
           this
           streame
           of
           opinion
           )
           is
           alleaged
           .
           Namely
           ,
           that
           the
           Tenne
           
             Tribes
             tooke
             this
             course
             to
             themselues
             ,
             that
             they
             would
             leaue
             the
             multitude
             of
             the
             heathen
             ,
             and
             goe
             foorth
             into
             a
             farther
             Country
             ,
             where
             neuer
             mankinde
             dwelt
             .
             That
             they
             might
             there
             keepe
             their
             statutes
             ,
             which
             they
             neuer
             kept
             in
             their
             owne
             land
             .
             And
             that
             they
             entred
             in
             at
             the
             narrow
             passages
             of
             the
             Riuer
             Euphrates
             .
             The
             most
             high
             shewing
             them
             signes
             ,
             and
             staying
             the
             Springs
             of
             the
             floud
             ,
             till
             they
             were
             passed
             ouer
             .
             And
             ,
             that
             their
             Iourney
             was
             great
             ,
             euen
             of
             a
             yeare
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             and
             the
             region
             is
             called
             Arsareth
             .
          
        
         
           But
           ,
           to
           the
           first
           of
           these
           arguments
           ,
           I
           may
           answere
           ,
           that
           the
           Tartars
           obtained
           that
           name
           ,
           neither
           from
           Hebrew
           nor
           Syriaque
           originall
           ,
           and
           appellation
           ,
           but
           ,
           from
           the
           riuer
           Tartar
           ,
           saith
           Leunclauius
           ,
           
           
             Leunclau
             .
             in
             Pand.
             histor
             .
             Turcic
             .
             §.
             3.
             
          
           and
           *
           
             *
             Boem
             .
             de
             Morib
             gent.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             10.
             
             Haitti
             .
             lib.
             de
             Tartaris
             .
             cap.
             16.
             
          
           others
           .
           Or
           else
           from
           the
           Region
           ,
           as
           sayth
           Haitho
           ,
           where
           the
           principall
           of
           them
           anciently
           dwelled
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           that
           the
           name
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           or
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           or
           Syriaque
           signification
           ,
           importing
           a
           residue
           or
           remainder
           ,
           can
           but
           full
           ill
           (
           as
           it
           seemes
           )
           be
           applied
           to
           the
           Tartars
           in
           relation
           of
           the
           Israelites
           ,
           whom
           they
           exceedingly
           surpasse
           in
           multitude
           ,
           as
           ouerspreading
           halfe
           the
           vast
           continent
           of
           Asia
           ,
           or
           thereabout
           .
           For
           all
           the
           Nations
           of
           Asia
           ,
           from
           the
           great
           riuers
           of
           Wolgha
           and
           Oby
           ,
           Eastward
           ,
           and
           from
           the
           Caspian
           sea
           ,
           the
           riuer
           Oxus
           ,
           the
           Countryes
           of
           India
           and
           China
           ,
           northward
           ,
           are
           contained
           vnder
           the
           Appellation
           of
           Tartars
           :
           and
           yet
           without
           these
           
           bounds
           many
           Tartars
           there
           are
           ,
           both
           toward
           the
           West
           ,
           and
           South
           .
           And
           what
           if
           the
           innumerable
           people
           of
           so
           many
           Nations
           ,
           as
           are
           knowen
           to
           inhabite
           and
           ouerspread
           the
           huge
           continent
           of
           America
           ,
           be
           also
           of
           the
           same
           of-spring
           ?
           Certainely
           ,
           if
           I
           bee
           not
           greatly
           deceiued
           ,
           they
           are
           no
           other
           .
           For
           first
           that
           their
           originall
           must
           bee
           deriued
           from
           Asia
           is
           apparent
           ,
           because
           ,
           (
           as
           he
           that
           readeth
           the
           relations
           and
           histories
           of
           those
           Countryes
           of
           America
           may
           easily
           obserue
           )
           they
           haue
           no
           rellish
           nor
           resemblance
           at
           all
           ,
           of
           the
           Arts
           ,
           or
           learning
           ,
           or
           ciuility
           of
           Europe
           :
           And
           their
           colour
           restifieth
           ,
           they
           are
           not
           of
           the
           Africans
           progenie
           (
           there
           being
           not
           found
           in
           all
           that
           large
           Continent
           ,
           any
           blacke
           men
           ,
           except
           a
           few
           about
           the
           Riuer
           of
           
             S.
             Martha
          
           ,
           in
           a
           small
           Countrey
           called
           Quarequa
           ,
           which
           by
           force
           and
           violence
           of
           some
           tempest
           ,
           are
           supposed
           to
           haue
           beene
           transported
           thether
           ,
           from
           the
           parts
           of
           Guinie
           or
           Aethiopia
           .
           )
           Therfore
           it
           seemeth
           ,
           that
           they
           had
           their
           originall
           from
           Asia
           .
           Which
           yet
           ,
           will
           appeare
           more
           credible
           ,
           if
           it
           be
           obserued
           ,
           which
           by
           the
           Spanyards
           discoueries
           is
           well
           knowen
           to
           be
           true
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           the
           West
           side
           of
           America
           respecting
           Asia
           ,
           is
           exceeding
           much
           better
           peopled
           then
           the
           opposite
           or
           East
           side
           ,
           that
           respecteth
           toward
           Europe
           .
           And
           ,
           as
           for
           these
           reasons
           it
           is
           very
           likely
           ,
           that
           America
           receiued
           her
           first
           inhabitants
           ,
           from
           the
           East
           border
           of
           Asia
           :
           So
           is
           it
           altogether
           vnlike
           ,
           that
           is
           receiued
           them
           from
           any
           other
           part
           of
           all
           that
           border
           ,
           saue
           from
           Tartarie
           .
           Because
           ,
           in
           America
           there
           is
           not
           to
           be
           discerned
           ,
           any
           token
           or
           indication
           at
           all
           ,
           of
           the
           arts
           or
           industry
           of
           China
           ,
           or
           India
           ,
           or
           Cataia
           ,
           or
           any
           
           other
           ciuill
           region
           ,
           along
           all
           that
           border
           of
           Asia
           :
           But
           in
           their
           grosse
           ignorance
           of
           letters
           ,
           and
           of
           arts
           ,
           in
           their
           Idolatrie
           ,
           and
           the
           specialties
           of
           it
           ,
           in
           their
           inciuilitie
           ,
           and
           many
           barbarous
           properties
           ,
           they
           resemble
           the
           olde
           and
           rude
           Tartars
           ,
           aboue
           all
           the
           nations
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           Which
           opinion
           of
           mine
           ,
           touching
           the
           Americans
           descending
           from
           the
           Tartars
           ,
           rather
           then
           from
           any
           other
           nation
           in
           that
           border
           of
           Asia
           ,
           after
           the
           neere
           vicinitie
           of
           Asia
           to
           America
           ,
           this
           reason
           aboue
           all
           other
           ,
           may
           best
           establish
           and
           perswade
           :
           Because
           it
           is
           certaine
           ,
           that
           that
           Northeast
           part
           of
           Asia
           possessed
           by
           the
           Tartars
           ,
           is
           if
           not
           continent
           with
           the
           West
           side
           of
           America
           ,
           which
           yet
           remaineth
           somewhat
           doubtfull
           :
           yet
           certainely
           ,
           and
           without
           all
           doubt
           ,
           it
           is
           the
           least
           disioyned
           by
           sea
           ,
           of
           all
           that
           coast
           of
           Asia
           ,
           for
           that
           those
           parts
           of
           Asia
           and
           America
           ,
           are
           continent
           one
           with
           the
           other
           ,
           or
           at
           most
           ,
           disioyned
           but
           by
           some
           narrow
           channell
           of
           the
           Ocean
           ,
           the
           rauenous
           and
           harmefull
           beasts
           ,
           wherewith
           America
           is
           stored
           ,
           as
           Beares
           ,
           Lions
           ,
           Tigers
           ,
           Wolues
           ,
           Foxes
           ,
           &c.
           (
           which
           men
           as
           is
           likely
           ,
           would
           neuer
           to
           their
           owne
           harme
           transporte
           out
           of
           the
           one
           continent
           to
           the
           other
           )
           may
           import
           .
           For
           from
           Noahs
           Arke
           ,
           which
           rested
           after
           the
           deluge
           ,
           in
           Asia
           ,
           all
           those
           beasts
           must
           of
           necessitie
           fetch
           their
           beginning
           ,
           seeing
           they
           could
           not
           proceede
           by
           the
           course
           of
           nature
           ,
           as
           the
           vnperfect
           sort
           of
           liuing
           creatures
           doe
           ,
           of
           Putrefaction
           :
           or
           if
           they
           might
           haue
           Putrefaction
           for
           their
           parentage
           ,
           or
           receaue
           their
           originall
           (
           by
           any
           other
           new
           sort
           of
           generation
           )
           of
           the
           earth
           without
           special
           procreation
           of
           their
           owne
           kinde
           ,
           then
           I
           see
           no
           nececessitie
           ,
           
           why
           they
           should
           by
           Gods
           speciall
           appointment
           ,
           be
           so
           carefully
           preserued
           in
           Noahs
           Arke
           (
           as
           they
           were
           )
           in
           time
           of
           the
           deluge
           .
           Wherefore
           ,
           seeing
           it
           is
           certaine
           ,
           that
           those
           rauenous
           beasts
           of
           America
           ,
           are
           the
           progenie
           of
           those
           of
           the
           same
           kinde
           in
           Asia
           ,
           and
           that
           men
           ,
           as
           is
           likely
           ,
           conueighed
           them
           not
           (
           to
           their
           owne
           preiudice
           )
           from
           the
           one
           continent
           to
           the
           other
           ,
           it
           carrieth
           a
           great
           likelihood
           and
           appearance
           of
           truth
           ,
           that
           if
           they
           ioine
           not
           together
           ,
           yet
           are
           they
           neer
           neighbours
           ,
           &
           but
           little
           disioyned
           each
           from
           other
           ,
           for
           euen
           to
           this
           day
           ,
           in
           the
           Isles
           of
           
             Cuba
             ,
             Iamaica
             ,
             Hispaniola
             ,
             Burichena
             ,
          
           and
           all
           the
           rest
           ,
           which
           are
           so
           farre
           remoued
           from
           the
           firme
           land
           ,
           that
           these
           beasts
           cannot
           swimme
           from
           it
           to
           them
           ,
           the
           Spanyards
           record
           ,
           
           
             Ioseph
             Acosta
             De
             N●tur
             .
             Nou
             Orb.
             l.
             1.
             c.
             21.
             
          
           that
           none
           of
           these
           are
           found
           .
           Wherefore
           it
           seemeth
           (
           to
           digresse
           no
           farther
           )
           that
           the
           natiō
           of
           the
           Tartarians
           ,
           spreading
           so
           exceeding
           farre
           ,
           as
           it
           doth
           ,
           cannot
           certainely
           be
           the
           posteritie
           of
           those
           captiue
           Israelites
           .
        
         
           Neither
           (
           to
           answer
           the
           second
           obiection
           )
           doth
           their
           circumcision
           in
           any
           sort
           inforce
           it
           :
           for
           ,
           neither
           was
           circumcision
           ,
           among
           the
           Tartars
           ancienter
           then
           Mahumetanisme
           ,
           but
           was
           receaued
           among
           them
           together
           with
           it
           ,
           as
           Michouius
           hath
           remembred
           ,
           
           
             Michou
             .
             de
             Sa●matia
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             ●
             .
             ●
             .
          
           so
           that
           to
           this
           day
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           intertained
           (
           for
           ought
           I
           can
           finde
           in
           Historie
           )
           among
           those
           Tartarians
           ,
           which
           haue
           not
           receaued
           Mahumetanisme
           ,
           but
           remaine
           in
           their
           auncient
           Idolatrie
           ,
           as
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           both
           the
           Tartars
           of
           Cataia
           ,
           beyond
           the
           mountaine
           Imaus
           towards
           the
           East
           Ocean
           ,
           and
           the
           Tartars
           of
           Sarmatia
           ,
           towards
           the
           North
           ,
           on
           both
           sides
           the
           riuer
           of
           Oby
           ,
           do
           .
           Neither
           if
           it
           should
           be
           graunted
           ,
           
           that
           circumcision
           had
           beene
           auncienter
           among
           them
           then
           Mahumetanisme
           ,
           were
           that
           an
           argument
           of
           anie
           importance
           ,
           to
           prooue
           them
           to
           bee
           of
           the
           Israelites
           progenie
           .
           Because
           it
           is
           certainely
           knowen
           ,
           tha●
           the
           ceremony
           &
           custome
           of
           circumcision
           hath
           beene
           &
           stil
           is
           vsual
           among
           many
           nations
           ,
           of
           whom
           there
           was
           neuer
           any
           suspition
           ,
           that
           they
           descended
           from
           the
           Israelites
           ,
           
           
             
               Diodor.
               Sic●●●
               part
               2
               c.
               1
               Philo.
               Iudae
               ▪
               l.
               de
               C●●umcisione
               .
            
             
               Strab.
               l.
               16.
               
               Herodot
               .
               l.
               2.
               parum
               .
               a
               Med.
               Strab.
               l.
               16.
               long
               .
               post
               med
               .
            
          
           for
           Diodorus
           hath
           recorded
           of
           the
           
             Colchians
             ,
             Philo
             Iudaeus
          
           ,
           and
           Strabo
           ,
           of
           the
           
             Aegyptians
             ,
             Herodotus
          
           of
           both
           those
           nations
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Aethiopians
           besides
           ,
           that
           they
           vsed
           circumcision
           ,
           and
           that
           that
           custome
           among
           the
           Aegyptians
           and
           Aethiopians
           ,
           did
           seeme
           very
           auncient
           ,
           euen
           as
           it
           is
           also
           by
           both
           those
           nations
           retained
           till
           this
           day
           .
           And
           yet
           ,
           beside
           these
           countries
           already
           mentioned
           ,
           the
           like
           is
           also
           recorded
           of
           the
           Troglodites
           by
           Strabo
           ,
           and
           by
           *
           
             *
             
               Diodor.
               Sic.
               l
               3.
               c.
               3.
               
            
             
               Agatharchid
               .
               l
               de
               Mar.
               Rubr.
               c.
               49.
               ap
               .
               Phot.
               in
               Bibliotheca
               Cyprian
               .
               l.
               de
               circumcision
               .
               in
               principio
               .
               Niceph.
               Callist
               .
               l.
               8.
               ca.
               35.
               
               Ierem
               9.26
               .
               Hieron
               in
               Comment
               locitam
               citati
               .
            
          
           others
           :
           Of
           the
           Phaenicians
           ,
           and
           Arabians
           ,
           by
           Cyprian
           and
           Nicephorus
           .
           And
           (
           to
           leaue
           this
           accumulating
           of
           humane
           testimonies
           )
           it
           is
           not
           obscurely
           acknowledged
           by
           the
           Prophet
           Ieremie
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           vsuall
           (
           beside
           the
           Israelites
           )
           with
           the
           
             Aegyptians
             ,
             Edomites
             ,
             Ammonites
             ,
             Moabites
             ,
          
           &
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           the
           desert
           ,
           that
           is
           the
           *
           
             *
             For
             ,
             that
             the
             Ismaelites
             and
             Sarracens
             are
             the
             same
             nation
             ,
             is
             manifest
             by
             Hierome
             ,
             and
             Sozomen
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             which
             being
             anciently
             termed
             Scenitae
             (
             as
             Ammianus
             hath
             obserued
             )
             namely
             of
             the
             Graecians
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             because
             they
             dwelled
             in
             tents
             (
             for
             such
             to
             bee
             the
             manner
             of
             their
             habitation
             ,
             is
             not
             onely
             affirmed
             by
             *
             
               *
               Loco
               iam
               citato
               .
            
             Hierome
             ,
             but
             signified
             (
             and
             not
             obscurely
             )
             by
             *
             
               *
               Psalm
               .
               120.5
               .
               vid.
               etiam
               Ierem.
               49.28.29
               .
            
             Dauid
             lamenting
             his
             dwelling
             in
             the
             tents
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             by
             which
             name
             
               Arabia
               deserta
            
             is
             termed
             in
             the
             Hebre●
             )
             were
             of
             their
             dwelling
             in
             the
             desert
             ,
             by
             the
             Arabians
             themselues
             named
             Sarracens
             (
             for
             
             Sarrasignifieth
             ,
             a
             desert
             ,
             and
             Sakan
             to
             inhabite
             ,
             in
             the
             Arabique
             tongue
             )
             or
             else
             ,
             if
             not
             of
             their
             place
             ,
             yet
             at
             least
             (
             as
             *
             
               *
               
                 Scaliger
                 in
                 Animadu
                 .
                 Euseb
                 .
                 pa.
                 17.
                 
                 An.
                 88.
                 
              
               
                 Fuller
                 .
                 Miscel●an
                 .
                 Theolog.
                 l.
                 2.
                 ca.
                 1●
                 .
              
            
             learned
             men
             certainly
             thinke
             )
             of
             their
             property
             ,
             they
             might
             obtaine
             that
             name
             of
             Sarracens
             ,
             namely
             ,
             because
             they
             liued
             much
             by
             rapine
             (
             for
             that
             the
             word
             Saracke
             in
             Arabique
             doth
             import
             )
             to
             which
             aboue
             all
             nations
             they
             euer
             were
             ,
             and
             still
             are
             addicted
             .
             For
             the
             deduction
             of
             the
             name
             Sarracens
             ,
             from
             *
             
               *
               By
               Sozomen
               ●
               .
               6.
               ca.
               38.
               
            
             Sara
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             claimed
             descēt
             from
             hir
             ,
             being
             indeede
             Hagarens
             ,
             (
             the
             progenie
             of
             Hagar
             )
             is
             a
             meere
             fancie
             and
             fable
             .
             They
             claime
             it
             not
             .
          
           Ismaelites
           ,
           or
           Sarracens
           of
           Arabia
           :
           Of
           which
           nations
           ,
           Hierome
           also
           (
           to
           whom
           those
           regions
           were
           well
           knowen
           ,
           (
           as
           Epiphanius
           also
           of
           the
           most
           of
           them
           )
           hath
           left
           testified
           ,
           
           that
           they
           retained
           circumcision
           ,
           
           
             
               Hieron
               .
               Comment
               .
               in
               sa●
               .
               ca.
               21.
               
            
             
               Sozomen
               .
               Histor
               .
               l.
               6.
               c.
               38.
               
               Ammian
               .
               l.
               22.
               post
               med
               .
            
          
           euen
           in
           his
           time
           .
           Touching
           some
           of
           which
           ,
           although
           it
           may
           be
           probablie
           coniectured
           ,
           that
           they
           receaued
           it
           (
           in
           som
           sort
           )
           from
           the
           Israelites
           :
           if
           not
           as
           their
           progenie
           (
           which
           yet
           in
           some
           sense
           may
           be
           said
           of
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           the
           desert
           ,
           being
           the
           posteritie
           of
           Ismael
           the
           son
           of
           Abraham
           :
           and
           likewise
           of
           the
           Edomites
           ,
           being
           the
           seed
           of
           Esau
           the
           sonne
           of
           Isaac
           )
           yet
           at
           least
           ,
           by
           imitation
           of
           Abrahams
           familie
           ,
           to
           whom
           also
           in
           blood
           they
           were
           allied
           ,
           as
           the
           Ammonites
           &
           Moabites
           ,
           the
           posteritie
           of
           
             Lot
             ,
             Abrahams
          
           brothers
           son
           ,
           and
           who
           had
           liued
           long
           in
           his
           familiarity
           and
           family
           .
           Although
           I
           say
           of
           these
           nations
           it
           may
           bee
           coniectured
           ,
           that
           their
           ceremonie
           of
           circumcision
           was
           taken
           vp
           ,
           by
           imitation
           of
           the
           
           Israelites
           :
           yet
           that
           the
           same
           rite
           ,
           or
           custome
           was
           also
           deriued
           originally
           ,
           from
           them
           to
           the
           whole
           nation
           of
           the
           Arabians
           (
           which
           was
           exceeding
           great
           )
           or
           to
           the
           Aegyptians
           ,
           or
           other
           neighbouring
           prouinces
           ,
           I
           know
           not
           why
           anie
           should
           conceaue
           ,
           or
           if
           they
           doe
           ,
           yet
           appeareth
           it
           to
           bee
           otherwise
           ,
           because
           they
           circumcised
           not
           in
           the
           eight
           day
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           inuiolable
           custome
           of
           the
           Israelites
           :
           
           
             Ambros.
             l.
             2.
             de
             Abraham
             .
             Patriarcha
             .
             c.
             12.
             
          
           but
           the
           Aegyptians
           in
           the
           foureteenth
           yeare
           ,
           as
           is
           recorded
           by
           Ambrose
           ,
           &
           the
           Arabians
           in
           the
           thirteenth
           (
           and
           some
           of
           them
           both
           sexes
           ,
           as
           *
           
             *
             Sard.
             de
             Riti
             .
             gent.
             l.
             1.
             c.
             10.
             
          
           learned
           men
           haue
           recorded
           .
           Euen
           as
           the
           *
           
             *
             Bellon
             .
             Obser
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             28.
             
             Georgenitr
             .
             l.
             2.
             de
             Ritib
             .
             Turcar.
             c.
             de
             Circūcisione
             .
          
           Turkes
           also
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           who
           receaued
           the
           rite
           of
           circumcision
           from
           the
           Arabians
           ,
           are
           knowne
           to
           circumcise
           in
           the
           eight
           or
           twelfth
           ,
           or
           fifteenth
           yeare
           or
           sooner
           ,
           or
           later
           ,
           as
           opportunitie
           may
           serue
           .
           Of
           these
           nations
           I
           say
           ,
           how
           circumcision
           should
           proceede
           from
           the
           Israelites
           to
           them
           ,
           I
           cannot
           conceaue
           :
           no
           more
           then
           I
           can
           of
           the
           great
           nation
           of
           the
           *
           
             *
             
               Pigafet
               .
               de
               Regn.
               Cong
               .
               l.
               1
               c.
               5.
               
            
             
               Boter
               Rebat
               .
               pa.
               1.
               
               ●
               .
               c.
               Loange
               .
            
          
           Anzichi
           ,
           on
           the
           West
           side
           of
           Nilus
           beyond
           Nubia
           ,
           or
           of
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           *
           
             *
             Ma●●y●
             Ocean
             .
             ●ecad
             .
             4.
             c
             1.
             
          
           Iucatana
           in
           America
           ,
           whereof
           the
           first
           yet
           are
           ,
           and
           the
           second
           (
           till
           they
           came
           vnder
           the
           gouernment
           of
           the
           Spaniards
           )
           were
           meere
           Idolaters
           ,
           for
           of
           these
           also
           ,
           the
           second
           had
           ,
           &
           the
           first
           still
           haue
           circumcision
           in
           vse
           .
        
         
           And
           although
           these
           instances
           ,
           vtterly
           dissolue
           the
           force
           of
           this
           reason
           ,
           touching
           the
           Tartarians
           circumcision
           (
           though
           it
           were
           admitted
           to
           haue
           beene
           anciently
           in
           vse
           among
           them
           ,
           as
           being
           vsuall
           
           with
           many
           other
           nations
           ,
           of
           whom
           no
           suspition
           at
           all
           can
           be
           conceaued
           ,
           to
           be
           of
           the
           Israelites
           progenie
           )
           yet
           this
           may
           furthermore
           declare
           them
           ,
           not
           to
           be
           of
           that
           race
           ,
           because
           namely
           ,
           nothing
           else
           was
           to
           be
           found
           among
           them
           ,
           that
           might
           sauour
           of
           Israel
           .
           For
           First
           ,
           they
           were
           meere
           Idolaters
           ,
           and
           without
           knowledge
           of
           the
           true
           God
           ,
           as
           is
           recorded
           by
           
             Marcus
             Paulus
          
           ,
           
           
             
               Paul.
               Venet.
               l.
               3.
               c
               47.
               
            
             
               Haith
               .
               l.
               de
               .
               Tartar.
               c.
               1.
               
            
          
           by
           Haitho
           ,
           and
           others
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           they
           had
           no
           remembrance
           of
           the
           law
           at
           all
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           they
           neither
           obserued
           the
           Sabboath
           ,
           nor
           other
           rites
           and
           ceremonies
           of
           the
           Israelites
           ,
           but
           touching
           their
           matrimonies
           ,
           married
           without
           impeachment
           the
           verie
           *
           
             *
             
               Vicent
               .
               Spec.
               Historialis
               .
               l.
               32
               c.
               6.
               
            
             
               Paul.
               Venet.
               l.
               1.
               c.
               55.
               
            
             
               Guiliel
               de
               Rubric
               .
               Itin.
               Tartar
               .
               c.
               9.
               
            
          
           wiues
           ,
           and
           sisters
           of
           their
           fathers
           :
           and
           touching
           their
           feeding
           ,
           abstained
           not
           at
           all
           ,
           from
           vncleane
           beasts
           ,
           but
           fed
           on
           the
           flesh
           of
           *
           
             *
             Sigism
             .
             com
             .
             Rer.
             Moscou
             .
             Gu.
             l.
             de
             Rubricis
             Itinerar
             Tartar.
             l.
             5.
             
             Boem
             .
             de
             Motib
             .
             gentium
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             10.
             
          
           horses
           ,
           dogges
           ,
           cattes
           ,
           and
           dead
           carion
           ,
           and
           dranke
           their
           blood
           ,
           all
           vtterly
           forborne
           and
           forbidden
           among
           the
           Israelites
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           they
           haue
           no
           records
           ,
           nor
           regard
           of
           their
           auncestors
           and
           linage
           ,
           from
           whom
           ,
           or
           by
           whom
           ,
           they
           are
           descended
           ,
           whereof
           Israelites
           were
           euer
           curious
           .
           Fifthly
           ,
           they
           haue
           no
           affinitie
           of
           language
           at
           all
           ,
           with
           either
           the
           Hebrew
           or
           Chaldee
           tongues
           ,
           neither
           had
           any
           vse
           of
           those
           letters
           ,
           nor
           of
           any
           other
           ,
           till
           together
           with
           Mahumetan
           religion
           ,
           the
           Arabique
           characters
           came
           in
           vse
           among
           some
           of
           them
           .
           Neither
           (
           in
           a
           word
           )
           doe
           I
           finde
           any
           thing
           at
           all
           ,
           wherein
           the
           Tartarians
           sauored
           of
           Israelites
           ,
           for
           touching
           their
           abstinence
           from
           swines
           flesh
           ,
           which
           we
           finde
           recorded
           of
           them
           ,
           neither
           is
           it
           generall
           among
           them
           ,
           but
           peculiar
           to
           those
           that
           are
           Mahumetans
           :
           Nor
           if
           it
           were
           so
           ,
           were
           that
           any
           good
           argument
           ,
           because
           wee
           know
           that
           the
           auncient
           
           *
           
             *
             Herodot
             .
             l.
             4.
             
          
           Scythians
           ,
           and
           *
           
             *
             Aelian
             .
             de
             Animalib
             .
             l.
             10.
             c.
             17.
             
          
           Aegyptians
           ,
           and
           Arabians
           did
           ,
           and
           almost
           all
           Mahumetans
           at
           this
           day
           doe
           the
           same
           ,
           which
           yet
           are
           well
           knowne
           to
           be
           in
           no
           sort
           descended
           of
           the
           Israelites
           .
        
         
           Now
           touching
           the
           authority
           of
           forged
           *
           
             *
             Esdr.
             2.13
             .
          
           Esdras
           ,
           which
           hath
           stirred
           vp
           as
           it
           seemeth
           this
           vapourous
           fantasie
           ,
           in
           the
           braines
           of
           new
           fangled
           antiquaries
           :
           neither
           doth
           that
           which
           hee
           writeth
           of
           the
           ten
           tribes
           ,
           agree
           at
           all
           with
           the
           Tartars
           :
           nor
           ,
           if
           it
           did
           ,
           could
           yet
           the
           circumstances
           of
           that
           history
           agree
           with
           the
           truth
           .
           It
           agreeth
           not
           with
           the
           Tartars
           I
           say
           ,
           for
           whereas
           they
           are
           noted
           in
           that
           reuelation
           ,
           to
           bee
           *
           
             *
             Vers.
             39.
             
          
           a
           
             peaceable
             people
             ,
             and
             that
             they
          
           *
           
             *
             Vers.
             41.
             
          
           
             left
             the
             multitude
             of
             the
             heathen
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             keepe
             their
             statutes
             ,
             which
             they
             neuer
             kept
             in
             their
             owne
             land
          
           :
           neither
           of
           both
           those
           properties
           ,
           hath
           any
           conuenience
           or
           agreement
           at
           all
           with
           the
           Tartarians
           .
           For
           how
           are
           they
           a
           peaceable
           people
           ,
           that
           with
           their
           wars
           haue
           troubled
           and
           ouerturned
           almost
           all
           Asia
           ,
           and
           sundry
           countries
           of
           Europe
           ,
           and
           hold
           a
           great
           part
           of
           the
           former
           in
           subiection
           to
           this
           day
           ?
           Or
           how
           kept
           they
           the
           statutes
           of
           the
           Israelites
           ,
           that
           were
           meere
           idolaters
           ,
           and
           vtterly
           ignorant
           of
           all
           Iewish
           lawes
           and
           ceremonies
           ?
           And
           touching
           the
           history
           it selfe
           of
           the
           Israelites
           departure
           out
           of
           Assyria
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           set
           downe
           in
           that
           Apocryphall
           Esdras
           (
           howsoeuer
           it
           might
           otherwise
           agree
           with
           the
           Tartars
           )
           there
           is
           no
           wise
           or
           considerate
           man
           ,
           I
           think
           ,
           that
           can
           bring
           his
           vnderstanding
           to
           giue
           credit
           to
           it
           .
           For
           first
           it
           contradicteth
           the
           vndoubted
           canonicall
           histories
           of
           the
           Chronicles
           ,
           
           
             1.
             
             Chro.
             5.26
             .
             2.
             
             Kin.
             17.23
             .
          
           and
           of
           the
           Kings
           ,
           in
           both
           which
           
           it
           is
           recorded
           of
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           carried
           away
           into
           Ashur
           ,
           &
           disposed
           in
           seuerall
           parts
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           namely
           *
           
             *
             If
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             be
             Cholchi
             ,
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Iberia
             ,
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Armenia
             ,
             so
             called
             for
             the
             mountainousnes
             of
             it
             )
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Gauzania
             in
             Media
             ,
             then
             all
             confined
             together
             ,
             and
             bounded
             the
             north
             side
             of
             the
             Assyrian
             Empire
             ,
             which
             stretched
             northward
             ,
             but
             to
             that
             Isthme
             betweene
             the
             Euxine
             &
             the
             Caspian
             seas
             :
             So
             that
             ,
             the
             Israelites
             were
             by
             that
             meanes
             ,
             seated
             farthest
             off
             from
             their
             owne
             countrey
             ,
             and
             placed
             in
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Empire
             most
             wast
             and
             desolate
             of
             inhabitāts
             ,
             as
             the
             confines
             of
             warring
             nations
             vsually
             are
             .
             But
             if
             Calach
             be
             Calacine
             ,
             and
             Chabor
             the
             hil
             Chaboras
             ,
             (
             being
             part
             of
             Taurus
             ,
             and
             seuering
             Assyria
             ,
             from
             Armenia
             ,
             and
             Media
             )
             and
             Hara
             the
             other
             hilly
             parts
             in
             the
             north
             side
             of
             Assyria
             ,
             as
             seemeth
             more
             agreeable
             to
             the
             obseruations
             of
             
               Beniamin
               Tudelensis
            
             ,
             for
             about
             those
             parts
             ,
             he
             found
             in
             his
             trauail
             ,
             the
             greatest
             multitudes
             of
             the
             Israelites
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             places
             aleaged
             ,
             I
             would
             vnderstand
             by
             Ashur
             ,
             not
             the
             Empire
             or
             dominion
             ,
             but
             the
             peculiar
             kingdome
             of
             Assyria
             .
          
           Calach
           ,
           and
           Chabor
           ,
           and
           Hara
           ,
           and
           Gozan
           ,
           vnto
           this
           day
           ,
           which
           limitation
           of
           time
           (
           vnto
           this
           day
           )
           must
           at
           least
           of
           necessitie
           import
           ,
           the
           time
           wherein
           that
           history
           (
           of
           their
           remaining
           in
           Ashur
           )
           recorded
           in
           the
           books
           of
           the
           Kings
           ,
           &
           of
           the
           Chronicles
           was
           writtē
           .
           Of
           which
           later
           ,
           either
           Esdras
           himselfe
           was
           the
           Author
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           iudgmēt
           *
           
             *
             R.
             Dau.
             Kimchi
             &
             R.
             Shelomo
             ex
             sententia
             seniorū
             apud
             Sixt.
             Senens
             .
             Biblioth
             .
             Sanctae
             lib.
             1.
             
          
           of
           learned
           men
           he
           is
           reputed
           ,
           &
           therfore
           could
           not
           
           (
           as
           it
           seemeth
           )
           be
           the
           Author
           of
           that
           apocryphall
           history
           :
           
           
             Abulens
             .
             in
             praef
             .
             Paralipō
             .
             in
             Quaestiō
             .
             5.
             
          
           or
           ,
           at
           least
           ,
           if
           Esdras
           were
           not
           the
           Author
           ,
           yet
           ,
           that
           the
           Author
           (
           whosoeuer
           he
           was
           )
           liued
           and
           writ
           that
           history
           of
           the
           Chronicles
           ,
           after
           the
           return
           of
           the
           Iewes
           from
           the
           captiuity
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           end
           of
           it
           ,
           (
           that
           is
           in
           Esdras
           time
           ,
           )
           is
           euident
           by
           the
           end
           of
           the
           booke
           :
           where
           Cyrus
           his
           benignity
           ,
           for
           restoring
           of
           the
           Iewes
           ,
           &
           his
           proclamation
           for
           their
           returne
           to
           Ierusalem
           is
           recorded
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           the
           very
           same
           words
           ,
           wherein
           Esdras
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           his
           own
           booke
           hath
           registred
           them
           .
           At
           that
           time
           therfore
           ,
           it
           is
           euident
           ,
           that
           the
           Israelites
           were
           not
           departed
           out
           of
           the
           dominions
           of
           Ashur
           .
           No
           nor
           long
           after
           that
           in
           Iosephus
           his
           time
           :
           
           
             Ioseph
             .
             Antiq.
             l.
             11.
             c.
             
          
           who
           hath
           recorded
           that
           euen
           then
           the
           tenne
           Tribes
           remained
           beyond
           Euphrates
           ,
           and
           were
           there
           growne
           into
           innumerable
           multitudes
           :
           neither
           yet
           many
           hundred
           yeares
           after
           Iosephus
           was
           dead
           :
           for
           R.
           Beniamin
           a
           Iew
           ,
           that
           liued
           but
           about
           440.
           yeares
           agoe
           ,
           and
           trauailed
           diligently
           those
           parts
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           to
           visite
           his
           dispersed
           countrimen
           ,
           hath
           in
           his
           Itinerary
           left
           obserued
           ,
           not
           only
           ,
           that
           he
           found
           exceeding
           far
           greater
           multitudes
           of
           the
           Israelites
           ,
           
           
             Beniamin
             in
             Itiner
             .
             pag.
             57.58.59.70.71.74
             75.76.77.78.80.81.86
             .
          
           to
           be
           then
           remaining
           in
           those
           prouinces
           of
           the
           ancient
           dominion
           of
           Ashur
           ,
           then
           he
           found
           in
           other
           places
           ,
           possessing
           *
           
             *
             Pag.
             75.
             
             &
             87
             
          
           large
           regions
           ,
           and
           *
           
             *
             Pag.
             76.
             &c.
             
          
           many
           cities
           ,
           so
           that
           in
           the
           cities
           of
           some
           one
           Region
           *
           
             *
             Pag
             cad
             .
          
           300000.
           
           Iewes
           were
           by
           him
           numbred
           ,
           obseruing
           specially
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           parts
           of
           Media
           ,
           many
           thousand
           Israelites
           of
           the
           progeny
           of
           them
           that
           Salmanaser
           ledde
           into
           
           captiuity
           ,
           were
           then
           remaining
           ,
           but
           withall
           ,
           he
           setteth
           downe
           particularly
           and
           precisely
           ,
           the
           very
           places
           of
           those
           regions
           ,
           where
           certaine
           of
           the
           Tribes
           were
           seated
           ,
           &
           there
           grown
           into
           great
           multitudes
           :
           As
           namely
           ,
           in
           *
           
             *
             Pag.
             77.
             
          
           one
           place
           ,
           the
           Tribes
           of
           
             Ruben
             ,
             Gad
          
           ,
           and
           Manasse
           :
           And
           in
           *
           
             *
             Pag.
             87.
             
          
           an
           other
           ,
           the
           4.
           
           Tribes
           of
           
             Dan
             ,
             Asher
             ,
             Zebulon
          
           ,
           and
           Naphtali
           .
        
         
           But
           yet
           if
           there
           were
           neither
           authority
           of
           holy
           Scripture
           ,
           nor
           experience
           to
           refell
           this
           fable
           ,
           &
           the
           fancies
           that
           haue
           sprung
           of
           it
           :
           yet
           ordinary
           reason
           ,
           at
           least
           of
           men
           that
           are
           not
           ignorant
           of
           Geography
           and
           are
           meanly
           skilled
           in
           the
           affaires
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           may
           easily
           discerne
           the
           futility
           of
           it
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           what
           neede
           was
           there
           of
           such
           a
           miracle
           ,
           
           
             2.
             
             Esdr.
             13.
             
          
           as
           to
           *
           
             *
             And
             the
             most
             high
             thē
             shewed
             them
             signes
             ,
             &
             stayed
             the
             springs
             of
             the
             floud
             (
             Euphrates
             )
             till
             they
             were
             pas●ed
             ouer
             .
             ●ecs
             .
             44.
             
          
           stay
           the
           course
           of
           Euphrates
           ,
           for
           the
           Israelites
           passage
           from
           Assyria
           ,
           or
           Media
           toward
           Tartary
           ,
           the
           riuer
           lying
           far
           to
           the
           west
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           one
           region
           and
           of
           the
           other
           ,
           &
           no
           way
           crossing
           or
           impeaching
           their
           iourney
           ,
           which
           lay
           northward
           betweene
           that
           riuer
           and
           the
           Caspian
           Sea
           ?
           Or
           ,
           how
           might
           those
           poore
           captiue
           Israelites
           ,
           disarmed
           as
           they
           were
           ,
           and
           dispersed
           in
           sundry
           Prouinces
           of
           the
           Assyrian
           Empire
           ,
           and
           being
           vnder
           the
           ouersight
           and
           gouernment
           of
           Assyrian
           presidents
           ,
           be
           able
           to
           leaue
           the
           places
           ,
           where
           by
           the
           Kings
           commandement
           they
           were
           to
           inhabite
           ?
           Or
           ,
           
           
             They
             tooke
             this
             counsel
             to
             themselues
             that
             they
             would
             leaue
             the
             multitude
             of
             the
             Heathen
             .
             v.
             41.
             
          
           if
           the
           Israelites
           were
           able
           by
           force
           to
           depart
           ,
           and
           free
           themselues
           from
           the
           dominion
           of
           the
           king
           of
           Ashur
           ,
           yet
           were
           they
           so
           wise
           also
           ,
           as
           to
           forsake
           the
           places
           where
           they
           were
           peaceably
           setled
           ,
           and
           venture
           their
           small
           remainders
           vpon
           perils
           and
           vncertainties
           ,
           namely
           ,
           to
           finde
           out
           a
           place
           where
           neuer
           mankind
           dwelt
           ?
           Or
           ,
           if
           their
           stomacke
           
           serued
           them
           so
           well
           ,
           and
           their
           wit
           so
           ill
           ,
           as
           in
           such
           manner
           to
           forsake
           Assyria
           ,
           
           
             And
             goe
             forth
             into
             a
             country
             where
             neuer
             mankind
             dwelt
             .
             v.
             41.
             
          
           yet
           were
           they
           also
           able
           to
           make
           themselues
           way
           (
           euen
           a
           way
           as
           hee
           saith
           ,
           of
           18.
           moneths
           passage
           )
           through
           the
           fierce
           and
           mighty
           nations
           of
           Scythia
           ,
           whom
           neither
           the
           conquerours
           of
           the
           Israelites
           ,
           the
           Assyrians
           I
           meane
           ,
           nor
           the
           Persians
           (
           and
           I
           might
           adde
           also
           the
           Grecians
           and
           the
           Romans
           )
           were
           neuer
           able
           to
           subdue
           ,
           but
           were
           in
           the
           after
           times
           subdued
           by
           them
           ?
           for
           that
           the
           parts
           of
           Scythia
           should
           bee
           without
           Inhabitants
           (
           &
           in
           Scythia
           it
           must
           bee
           where
           they
           would
           find
           that
           country
           where
           neuer
           mankind
           dwelt
           ,
           or
           else
           it
           is
           not
           in
           Tartary
           )
           is
           scarse
           credible
           ,
           as
           wherof
           we
           read
           in
           histories
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Iustin.
             hist.
             l.
             2.
             in
             princip
             .
          
           to
           haue
           cōtended
           with
           Aegypt
           for
           antiquity
           of
           habitation
           ,
           &
           to
           haue
           preuailed
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           aboundance
           of
           people
           ,
           to
           bee
           termed
           
             Hominum
             Officina
          
           .
           Insomuch
           that
           the
           greatest
           occasion
           of
           swarming
           abroad
           of
           those
           nations
           of
           Scythia
           ,
           and
           of
           their
           ouerwhelming
           of
           Asia
           &
           Europe
           ,
           with
           their
           infinite
           multitudes
           and
           colonies
           ,
           is
           in
           histories
           recorded
           ,
           to
           be
           lacke
           of
           room
           for
           habitation
           in
           their
           owne
           countries
           .
        
         
           And
           lastly
           ,
           to
           make
           an
           end
           of
           this
           tedious
           discourse
           ,
           with
           the
           ende
           of
           their
           imagined
           tedious
           iourney
           :
           what
           ancient
           Geographer
           or
           Historian
           is
           there
           ,
           (
           set
           our
           Esdras
           aside
           )
           that
           euer
           remembred
           of
           such
           a
           Region
           as
           Arsareth
           ,
           where
           they
           are
           saide
           to
           haue
           seated
           themselues
           .
           True
           it
           is
           indeed
           that
           I
           find
           the
           city
           of
           Arsaratha
           ,
           
           
             Beros
             .
             lib.
             3.
             
             Ptolem.
             Geog.
             l.
             5.
             c.
             13.
             et
             in
             Tab.
             3.
             
             Asiae
             .
          
           mentioned
           both
           in
           Berosus
           fragments
           ,
           and
           in
           Ptolomie
           placed
           neer
           the
           issue
           of
           the
           riuer
           Araxes
           into
           the
           Caspian
           sea
           :
           and
           ,
           it
           was
           perhaps
           one
           of
           the
           Israelitish
           colonies
           ,
           planted
           in
           
           the
           confines
           of
           the
           empire
           of
           Assyria
           :
           for
           it
           may
           well
           bee
           that
           Arsaratha
           ,
           is
           but
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           or
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           that
           is
           the
           City
           ,
           or
           the
           hill
           of
           the
           remainder
           :
           or
           perhaps
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           (
           the
           last
           letter
           of
           the
           first
           word
           cut
           of
           in
           the
           Greeke
           pronunciation
           for
           sounds
           sake
           )
           the
           Land
           of
           the
           remainder
           :
           but
           the
           tale
           of
           eighteene
           months
           iourney
           ,
           wil
           no
           more
           agree
           with
           this
           citie
           ,
           then
           the
           region
           of
           Arsareth
           doth
           ,
           with
           Geography
           or
           Historie
           .
        
         
           So
           that
           me
           thinks
           this
           forged
           story
           of
           the
           Israelites
           voyage
           and
           habitation
           ,
           in
           such
           remote
           regions
           where
           neuer
           mankind
           dwelt
           ,
           sauoureth
           of
           the
           same
           phantastical
           and
           Talmudical
           spirit
           ,
           that
           *
           
             *
             Esd.
             6.42
             .
          
           an
           other
           tale
           of
           the
           same
           author
           doth
           ,
           touching
           the
           collection
           of
           all
           the
           waters
           ,
           into
           a
           seuenth
           part
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           the
           other
           sixe
           beeing
           left
           vncouered
           :
           or
           *
           
             *
             Cap.
             eod
             .
             vers
             .
             50.
             
          
           a
           third
           ,
           of
           (
           the
           Elephant
           and
           the
           Whale
           )
           Behemoth
           and
           Leuiathan
           :
           namely
           ,
           that
           God
           appointed
           the
           sea
           to
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           the
           land
           to
           the
           other
           ,
           because
           they
           were
           so
           great
           that
           the
           Sea
           could
           not
           hold
           them
           both
           :
           for
           else
           belike
           ,
           if
           the
           Sea
           had
           bene
           large
           enough
           ,
           we
           might
           haue
           gone
           a
           fishing
           for
           Elephants
           .
           For
           how
           is
           the
           sea
           gathered
           into
           a
           seauenth
           part
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           whose
           expansion
           is
           not
           only
           by
           the
           most
           skilfull
           Philosophers
           esteemed
           ,
           but
           found
           by
           experiēce
           of
           nauigations
           hitherto
           made
           ,
           to
           ouerspred
           as
           neerly
           as
           may
           be
           discerned
           ,
           about
           halfe
           the
           compasse
           of
           the
           Earth
           ?
           Or
           ,
           being
           of
           that
           bredth
           ,
           and
           withall
           of
           the
           depth
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           knowne
           to
           be
           how
           should
           it
           not
           bee
           spatious
           enough
           ,
           to
           receiue
           Elephants
           and
           Whales
           together
           ?
           The
           dimensions
           of
           the
           Elephant
           ,
           euen
           of
           the
           greatest
           sort
           
           of
           Indian
           Elephants
           ,
           (
           and
           the
           earth
           breedeth
           none
           so
           large
           as
           those
           of
           India
           )
           are
           ,
           
           
             Aelian
             de
             Animalib
             .
             l.
             12.
             c.
             8.
             
          
           saith
           Aelianus
           ,
           nine
           cubits
           of
           heigth
           (
           the
           length
           in
           that
           beast
           is
           equall
           to
           the
           height
           )
           and
           fiue
           of
           bredth
           ,
           the
           greatest
           that
           haue
           bene
           seene
           in
           Europe
           ,
           being
           *
           
             *
             Vid.
             Gilliū
             in
             Descript
             :
             6
             ,
             Elephant
             ,
             c.
             6.
             et
             Gorop
             l.
             2.
             
             Origin
             .
             Antuerptan
             .
          
           obserued
           to
           be
           far
           lesse
           .
           The
           dimension
           of
           the
           Whale
           indeed
           is
           far
           greater
           (
           fiue
           times
           saith
           *
           
             *
             Aelian
             .
             l.
             16.
             ca.
             12.
             
             Rondelet
             .
             de
             Piscib
             .
             l.
             16.
             c.
             11.
             
             Arriā
             .
             de
             Reb.
             Indicis
             longe
             ante
             finem
             .
          
           Aelianus
           then
           the
           largest
           sort
           of
           Elephants
           )
           But
           yet
           his
           ordinary
           dimensiō
           is
           ,
           but
           36.
           cubits
           long
           ,
           and
           8.
           cubits
           high
           ,
           as
           Rondeletius
           hath
           obserued
           .
           But
           admit
           notwithstanding
           some
           of
           them
           to
           bee
           50.
           cubits
           ,
           of
           which
           length
           ,
           Nearchus
           in
           Arrianus
           is
           saide
           to
           haue
           measured
           one
           in
           the
           East
           Ocean
           :
           nay
           ,
           to
           be
           600.
           foot
           long
           ,
           and
           360.
           foote
           thicke
           ,
           as
           *
           
             *
             Ap.
             Plin.
             l.
             32.
             c.
             1.
             
          
           Iuba
           in
           Plinie
           related
           to
           bee
           found
           in
           the
           Bay
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           (
           where
           yet
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           well
           knowne
           by
           the
           foundings
           of
           nauigators
           ,
           that
           sea
           is
           not
           by
           a
           good
           deale
           360.
           foote
           deepe
           )
           Or
           ,
           let
           them
           be
           more
           yet
           ,
           
           
             Plin.
             l
             9.
             c.
             3.
             
          
           euen
           foure
           Acres
           long
           ,
           (
           that
           is
           960.
           foote
           )
           as
           Plinie
           hath
           related
           of
           some
           in
           the
           sea
           of
           India
           .
           For
           ,
           although
           the
           two
           last
           reports
           bee
           in
           truth
           no
           better
           then
           fancies
           and
           fables
           ,
           
           
             Basil.
             in
             Hexaemer
             .
             Homil.
             7
             
          
           which
           the
           impudence
           of
           some
           ,
           hath
           made
           the
           ignorance
           of
           others
           ,
           to
           beleeue
           ,
           yet
           I
           will
           exclude
           none
           ,
           but
           onely
           Basil
           ,
           as
           intolerably
           hyperbolical
           ,
           affirming
           namely
           that
           whales
           are
           equal
           to
           the
           greatest
           mountaines
           ,
           &
           their
           backs
           whē
           they
           shew
           aboue
           the
           water
           ,
           like
           to
           Islands
           .
           But
           admitting
           all
           the
           rest
           I
           say
           ,
           what
           proportion
           haue
           those
           dimensions
           of
           the
           Whale
           &
           the
           Elephant
           ,
           to
           the
           huge
           bredth
           &
           depth
           of
           the
           Oceā
           ?
        
         
           For
           if
           I
           may
           without
           offence
           intersert
           a
           short
           Philosophicall
           speculaton
           :
           the
           depth
           of
           the
           Sea
           (
           to
           speake
           nothing
           of
           the
           bredth
           ,
           which
           euery
           common
           
           mappe
           doth
           represent
           )
           is
           determined
           by
           Fabianus
           in
           Plinie
           ,
           
           
             Fabian
             .
             apud
             Plin.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             102
             Cleomed
             .
             Meteot
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             10.
             
          
           and
           by
           Cleomedes
           ,
           to
           be
           15
           furlongs
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           one
           mile
           and
           seuen
           eight
           parts
           :
           Or
           else
           ,
           equall
           to
           the
           height
           of
           the
           greatest
           mountaines
           ,
           to
           whose
           height
           ,
           and
           the
           deepenesse
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           the
           Geometricians
           (
           as
           Plutarch
           hath
           recorded
           )
           anciently
           assigned
           equall
           dimensions
           .
           
           
             Plutarch
             in
             Vita
             Aemilij
             Pauli
             .
          
           Or
           yet
           rather
           (
           if
           you
           will
           any
           thing
           respect
           my
           opinion
           )
           it
           is
           a
           great
           deale
           more
           .
           
           
             Scalig.
             de
             Subtilitate
             .
             Exercit.
             38.
             
          
           For
           ,
           as
           for
           the
           shallow
           speculation
           of
           Scaliger
           ,
           and
           *
           
             *
             And.
             Baccius
             de
             Thermis
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             4.
             
             &
             Alij
             .
          
           others
           ,
           of
           the
           shallownesse
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           determining
           the
           height
           of
           Hilles
           ,
           farre
           to
           surpasse
           the
           deepenesse
           of
           the
           sea
           :
           And
           that
           in
           very
           few
           places
           ,
           it
           attaineth
           100
           passes
           of
           depth
           ,
           is
           indeed
           true
           in
           the
           narrow
           Channels
           and
           Straits
           of
           the
           Sea
           :
           But
           in
           the
           free
           and
           large
           Ocean
           ,
           it
           is
           by
           the
           experience
           of
           Nauigators
           knowen
           to
           bee
           as
           false
           as
           the
           Gospell
           is
           true
           .
           Indeed
           touching
           the
           height
           of
           mountaines
           ,
           I
           finde
           it
           pronounced
           by
           the
           great
           Mathematician
           Eratosthenes
           in
           Theon
           ,
           
           
             Theon
             .
             in
             Comment
             .
             Magnae
             Construction
             .
             Ptolom
             .
             l.
             1.
             
          
           that
           the
           highest
           sort
           of
           them
           ,
           passe
           not
           in
           perpendicular
           erectnesse
           10
           furlongs
           (
           that
           is
           one
           mile
           and
           one
           fourth
           part
           )
           of
           which
           height
           also
           ,
           it
           is
           obserued
           in
           Plinie
           ,
           
           
             Plin.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             63.
             
             Plutarch
             .
             loc
             .
             supra
             citato
             .
          
           that
           Dicaearchus
           by
           Dioptricall
           Instruments
           ,
           found
           the
           Hill
           Pelius
           in
           Thessalie
           to
           bee
           ,
           and
           in
           Plutarch
           ,
           that
           Xenagoras
           (
           another
           Mathematician
           )
           obserued
           the
           height
           of
           Olympus
           ,
           in
           the
           same
           Region
           ,
           sauing
           ,
           that
           in
           this
           later
           ,
           there
           is
           an
           addition
           of
           20
           passes
           ,
           for
           the
           whole
           number
           of
           passes
           ,
           is
           1270.
           
           Neither
           do
           I
           find
           any
           greater
           perpendicular
           height
           attributed
           to
           Mountaines
           ,
           by
           any
           ancient
           writer
           ,
           Cleomedes
           excepted
           :
           
           
             Cleomed
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Meteor
             .
             c.
             10.
             
          
           who
           assigneth
           to
           the
           height
           of
           Hils
           ,
           as
           he
           doth
           also
           to
           the
           depth
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           15
           furlongs
           .
           
           (
           For
           Alhazen
           I
           omit
           ,
           because
           he
           onely
           restraineth
           the
           height
           of
           hilles
           ,
           
           
             Alhazen
             .
             de
             Crepuscul
             .
             propos
             .
             1.
             
          
           as
           namely
           ,
           not
           to
           exceed
           8
           miles
           ,
           without
           determining
           what
           their
           height
           should
           be
           )
           But
           yet
           ,
           all
           these
           ,
           are
           to
           bee
           vnderstood
           ,
           I
           take
           it
           ,
           with
           relation
           to
           the
           Mountaines
           in
           and
           about
           Greece
           ,
           with
           which
           themselues
           were
           acquainted
           ,
           which
           may
           in
           no
           sort
           compare
           with
           the
           huge
           Mountaines
           of
           vast
           Continents
           ,
           such
           as
           are
           the
           Alpes
           in
           
             Europe
             ,
             Atlas
          
           in
           
             Afrique
             ,
             Caucasus
          
           in
           India
           ,
           the
           Andes
           in
           Peru
           ,
           and
           such
           other
           .
        
         
           But
           ,
           whatsoeuer
           the
           height
           of
           Hilles
           may
           bee
           aboue
           the
           common
           superficies
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           it
           seemeth
           to
           me
           after
           good
           consideration
           ,
           that
           the
           depth
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           is
           a
           great
           deale
           more
           .
           For
           declaration
           of
           which
           point
           ,
           I
           require
           to
           be
           supposed
           ,
           first
           ,
           that
           the
           Earth
           at
           the
           first
           forming
           of
           it
           ,
           was
           in
           the
           superficies
           ,
           regular
           ,
           and
           sphericall
           :
           which
           the
           Holy
           Scripture
           directs
           vs
           to
           beleeue
           ,
           because
           the
           water
           couered
           and
           compassed
           all
           the
           face
           of
           the
           Earth
           :
           And
           secondly
           ,
           that
           the
           face
           of
           the
           Land
           is
           in
           largenesse
           and
           expansion
           ,
           at
           least
           equall
           to
           that
           of
           the
           sea
           :
           And
           thirdly
           ,
           that
           the
           vneuennesse
           and
           irregularity
           ,
           which
           is
           now
           seene
           in
           the
           superficies
           of
           the
           Earth
           was
           caused
           (
           as
           is
           noted
           in
           Damascen
           )
           either
           ,
           
           
             Damascen
             .
             l.
             1.
             de
             fide
             Orthodoxa
             c.
             10.
             
          
           by
           taking
           of
           some
           parts
           out
           of
           the
           vpper
           face
           of
           the
           Earth
           in
           sundry
           places
           ,
           to
           make
           it
           more
           hollow
           ,
           and
           laying
           them
           in
           other
           places
           ,
           to
           make
           it
           more
           conue●e
           ▪
           Or
           else
           (
           which
           in
           effect
           is
           equiualent
           to
           that
           )
           by
           raysing
           vp
           some
           ,
           and
           depressing
           others
           to
           make
           roome
           and
           receite
           for
           the
           sea
           :
           that
           mutation
           being
           wrought
           by
           the
           power
           of
           that
           word
           ,
           
           
             Genes
             .
             1.9
             .
          
           
             Let
             the
             waters
             be
             gathered
             into
             one
             place
             ,
             that
             the
             
             dry
             land
             may
             appeare
             .
          
           For
           ,
           as
           for
           the
           fancy
           of
           
             Aquinas
             ,
             Dionysius
          
           ,
           
           
             Aquin.
             in
             Sum
             pa.
             1.
             q.
             69.
             a.
             1.
             
             Dionys.
             Carth
             Catharin
             .
             &
             Alij
             in
             Comment
             .
             cap.
             1.
             
             Genes
             .
          
           Catharinus
           and
           some
           other
           Diuines
           namely
           ,
           that
           that
           gathering
           of
           waters
           and
           discouerie
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           was
           made
           ,
           not
           by
           any
           mutation
           in
           the
           Earth
           ,
           but
           by
           a
           violent
           accumulation
           of
           the
           waters
           ,
           or
           heaping
           them
           vp
           on
           high
           ,
           it
           is
           too
           vnreasonable
           .
           Because
           it
           is
           vtterly
           against
           the
           nature
           of
           water
           ,
           being
           a
           flexible
           and
           ponderous
           body
           ,
           so
           to
           consist
           ,
           and
           stay
           it selfe
           ,
           and
           not
           fall
           to
           the
           lower
           parts
           about
           it
           ,
           where
           in
           nature
           there
           is
           nothing
           at
           all
           to
           hinder
           it
           .
           Or
           ,
           if
           it
           be
           hindered
           and
           restrayned
           supernaturally
           ,
           by
           the
           hand
           and
           bridle
           of
           the
           almighty
           ,
           lest
           it
           should
           ouerwhelme
           and
           drowne
           the
           Land
           ,
           it
           must
           follow
           thereof
           ,
           that
           God
           in
           the
           very
           institution
           of
           nature
           ,
           imposed
           a
           perpetuall
           violence
           vpon
           nature
           :
           And
           this
           withall
           ,
           that
           at
           the
           Deluge
           ,
           there
           had
           beene
           no
           necessitie
           at
           all
           ,
           to
           break
           vp
           the
           springs
           of
           the
           deepe
           ,
           and
           to
           open
           the
           Cataracts
           of
           Heauen
           ,
           and
           powre
           downe
           water
           continually
           ,
           so
           many
           dayes
           and
           nights
           together
           vpon
           the
           Earth
           ,
           seeing
           ,
           the
           only
           withdrawing
           of
           that
           hand
           ,
           or
           letting
           goe
           of
           that
           bridle
           ,
           which
           restrayned
           the
           water
           ,
           would
           presently
           haue
           ouerwhelmed
           all
           .
        
         
           But
           ,
           to
           come
           to
           the
           Point
           .
           It
           seemeth
           vpon
           the
           former
           suppositions
           (
           of
           which
           ,
           the
           holy
           scripture
           establisheth
           the
           first
           ,
           Experience
           of
           Trauailers
           ,
           and
           Nauigators
           the
           second
           ,
           and
           Reason
           the
           third
           )
           that
           in
           making
           estimation
           of
           the
           depth
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           wee
           are
           not
           to
           reckon
           and
           consider
           onely
           ,
           the
           height
           of
           the
           Hilles
           ,
           aboue
           the
           common
           superficies
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           vnto
           which
           the
           extraordinary
           depthes
           
           or
           whirlpooles
           ,
           that
           are
           found
           in
           the
           Sea
           ,
           doe
           properly
           answere
           (
           descending
           beneath
           the
           ordinary
           bottome
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           as
           the
           Hilles
           ascend
           aboue
           the
           ordinary
           face
           of
           the
           Land
           )
           but
           ,
           the
           aduantage
           or
           height
           of
           all
           the
           dry
           Land
           aboue
           the
           superficies
           of
           the
           Sea.
           Because
           the
           whole
           Masse
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           that
           now
           appeareth
           aboue
           the
           waters
           ,
           being
           taken
           as
           it
           were
           out
           of
           the
           place
           ,
           which
           the
           waters
           now
           possesse
           ,
           must
           bee
           equall
           to
           the
           place
           out
           of
           which
           it
           was
           taken
           ,
           and
           consequently
           it
           seemeth
           ,
           that
           the
           height
           or
           eleuation
           of
           the
           one
           ,
           should
           answere
           the
           depth
           or
           descending
           of
           the
           other
           .
           And
           therefore
           as
           I
           sayd
           ,
           in
           estimating
           the
           deepenesse
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           wee
           are
           not
           to
           consider
           onely
           the
           erection
           of
           the
           Hilles
           ,
           aboue
           the
           ordinary
           land
           ,
           but
           the
           aduantage
           of
           all
           the
           dry
           land
           aboue
           the
           sea
           .
           Which
           later
           ,
           I
           meane
           the
           height
           of
           the
           ordinary
           maine
           Land
           ,
           (
           euen
           excluding
           the
           hilles
           )
           is
           in
           my
           opinion
           more
           in
           large
           Continents
           aboue
           the
           Sea
           ,
           then
           that
           of
           the
           Hilles
           ,
           is
           aboue
           the
           Land.
           For
           first
           ,
           that
           the
           plaine
           and
           common
           face
           of
           the
           drie
           Land
           ,
           is
           not
           leuell
           ,
           or
           equally
           distant
           from
           the
           Center
           ,
           but
           hath
           great
           decliuity
           and
           descent
           toward
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           accliuitie
           or
           rising
           toward
           the
           Midland
           parts
           ,
           although
           it
           appeare
           not
           so
           to
           the
           common
           view
           of
           the
           Eye
           ,
           is
           to
           reason
           notwithstanding
           manifest
           .
           Because
           as
           it
           is
           found
           in
           that
           part
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           which
           the
           Sea
           couereth
           that
           it
           descendeth
           lower
           ,
           and
           lower
           toward
           the
           middest
           of
           the
           sea
           ,
           (
           for
           the
           Sea
           which
           touching
           the
           vpper
           face
           of
           it
           ,
           is
           knowen
           to
           beleuell
           by
           nature
           ,
           and
           euenly
           distant
           from
           the
           Center
           ,
           is
           withall
           obserued
           to
           waxe
           deeper
           and
           deeper
           ,
           the
           
           farther
           one
           sayleth
           from
           the
           shore
           toward
           the
           Maine
           )
           Euen
           so
           ,
           in
           that
           part
           which
           is
           vncouered
           ,
           the
           coursings
           and
           streamings
           of
           Riuers
           on
           all
           sides
           from
           the
           midland
           parts
           toward
           the
           Sea
           ,
           *
           
             *
             By
             which
             rule
             of
             the
             proceeding
             of
             Riuers
             by
             the
             decliuity
             of
             the
             earth
             and
             euer
             sliding
             from
             the
             higher
             ground
             to
             the
             lower
             ,
             till
             they
             come
             to
             the
             Sea
             ,
             is
             euident
             to
             bee
             discerned
             ,
             that
             in
             Continents
             ,
             those
             Regions
             are
             the
             higher
             Land
             frō
             which
             Riuers
             streame
             ,
             &
             those
             the
             lower
             ground
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             proceed
             ,
             and
             consequently
             ,
             that
             of
             all
             ,
             those
             are
             the
             highest
             which
             receiuing
             no
             forrain
             Riuers
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             giue
             passage
             through
             them
             ,
             do
             send
             forth
             the
             longest
             Riuers
             on
             all
             sides
             to
             the
             regions
             round
             about
             thē
             .
             By
             which
             obseruation
             is
             to
             be
             discerned
             ,
             that
             Heluetia
             and
             Rhetia
             ,
             sending
             forth
             the
             longest
             Riuers
             of
             Europe
             ,
             which
             on
             all
             sides
             descend
             from
             them
             and
             their
             confines
             ,
             Danubius
             toward
             the
             East
             ,
             Rhene
             North
             ,
             Rhodanus
             West
             ,
             beside
             
               Ticinus
               ,
               Addua
            
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             that
             fall
             into
             Padus
             South
             ,
             are
             the
             highest
             land
             of
             Europe
             :
             As
             the
             Region
             of
             Pamer
             ,
             and
             Kirgessi
             ,
             with
             some
             other
             neere
             the
             crossing
             of
             the
             great
             mountaines
             Taurus
             and
             Imaus
             aboue
             India
             ,
             whēce
             are
             directed
             ,
             the
             greatest
             and
             longest
             Riuers
             of
             
               Asia
               ,
               Indus
            
             and
             Ganges
             toward
             the
             South
             ,
             Oxus
             and
             Iaxartus
             toward
             the
             West
             ,
             Oechardes
             North
             ,
             Cantan
             East
             ,
             is
             proued
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             heighest
             part
             of
             Afrique
             &
             Asia
             ,
             and
             in
             my
             opinion
             of
             all
             the
             Earth
             .
             And
             as
             the
             region
             also
             about
             the
             springs
             of
             Nilus
             ,
             from
             which
             beside
             Nilus
             ,
             that
             runneth
             towards
             the
             North
             ,
             are
             sent
             forth
             ,
             the
             riuer
             of
             Magnice
             ,
             towards
             the
             South
             ,
             of
             Zaire
             West
             ,
             of
             Coauo
             &
             Zuama
             East
             ,
             being
             (
             Niger
             excepted
             )
             the
             greatest
             riuers
             of
             Afrique
             ,
             is
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             ,
             proued
             to
             be
             ,
             the
             heighest
             part
             of
             that
             continent
             .
          
           whose
           propertie
           wee
           know
           is
           to
           slide
           from
           the
           higher
           to
           the
           lower
           ,
           euidently
           declare
           so
           much
           .
        
         
           And
           although
           I
           am
           not
           able
           precisely
           to
           determine
           ,
           what
           the
           ordinary
           decliuity
           of
           the
           earth
           may
           be
           ,
           yet
           ,
           if
           that
           be
           conuenient
           in
           the
           workes
           of
           nature
           ,
           which
           is
           required
           in
           the
           workes
           of
           Art
           ,
           that
           imitateth
           Nature
           ,
           it
           will
           bee
           found
           true
           that
           before
           I
           sayd
           :
           Namely
           ,
           that
           in
           great
           Continents
           ,
           through
           which
           Riuers
           haue
           long
           Courses
           ,
           some
           of
           1000
           ,
           or
           2000
           miles
           ,
           the
           height
           of
           the
           ordinary
           Midland
           ,
           aboue
           the
           face
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           is
           more
           ,
           then
           of
           the
           Hilles
           aboue
           the
           common
           face
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           for
           Plinie
           in
           the
           deriuation
           of
           water
           ,
           
           
             〈◊〉
             31.
             
             ●6
             .
          
           requireth
           one
           cubit
           of
           declining
           ,
           in
           240
           foot
           of
           proceeding
           (
           for
           he
           saith
           
             vnum
             cubitum
             in
             binos
             Actus
          
           &
           Actus
           as
           may
           
           
             Col●mell
             .
             de
             Re
             Rustica
             .
             l.
             5.
             c●
             
          
           bee
           obserued
           in
           Columella
           and
           others
           is
           a
           dimension
           of
           120
           
           foote
           long
           )
           Vitruuius
           and
           Palladius
           in
           their
           conduction
           of
           waters
           ,
           
           
             Vitrum
             Archirectur
             .
             l.
             8
             〈◊〉
             Pallad
             .
             〈◊〉
             Ru●●●ca
             l.
             5.
             
             Tic.
             II.
             
          
           require
           indeede
           somewhat
           lesse
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           in
           proceeding
           of
           200
           foote
           forward
           ,
           there
           should
           bee
           allowed
           one
           foote
           of
           descending
           downeward
           ,
           which
           yet
           in
           the
           course
           of
           1000
           miles
           (
           as
           Danubius
           or
           Wolgha
           ,
           or
           Indus
           &c.
           haue
           so
           much
           or
           more
           )
           will
           make
           fiue
           miles
           of
           descent
           in
           perpendicular
           account
           :
           And
           in
           the
           course
           of
           2000
           ,
           or
           more
           ,
           (
           as
           Nilus
           ,
           and
           Niger
           ,
           and
           the
           Riuer
           of
           Amazons
           haue
           )
           10
           mile
           or
           more
           of
           like
           descent
           .
        
         
           And
           ,
           although
           I
           know
           well
           enough
           ,
           that
           water
           being
           (
           as
           it
           is
           )
           heauy
           and
           flexible
           ,
           will
           slide
           away
           at
           any
           inequalitie
           ,
           and
           therefore
           am
           altogether
           perswaded
           ,
           that
           this
           rule
           of
           Vitruuius
           touching
           conueiance
           of
           waters
           ,
           is
           not
           to
           be
           taken
           as
           a
           rule
           of
           necessitie
           ,
           to
           be
           obserued
           in
           the
           deriuing
           of
           them
           ,
           as
           if
           water
           could
           not
           runne
           without
           that
           aduantage
           ,
           (
           for
           in
           that
           respect
           the
           Conueiers
           of
           waters
           of
           these
           times
           ,
           contēt
           themselues
           euen
           with
           one
           inch
           
           in
           600
           foote
           ,
           as
           Philander
           also
           on
           Vitruuius
           ,
           
           
             Philand
             in
             Vitruu
             .
             l.
             8.
             c.
             7.
             
          
           hath
           obserued
           )
           but
           is
           rather
           to
           bee
           vnderstood
           as
           a
           rule
           of
           commodity
           ,
           namely
           with
           relation
           to
           the
           expedition
           and
           holesomenesse
           of
           the
           water
           so
           conueied
           ,
           lest
           resting
           too
           long
           in
           the
           pipes
           it
           should
           contract
           from
           them
           some
           vnholesome
           qualitie
           ,
           or
           else
           through
           the
           slacknesse
           of
           motion
           ,
           or
           long
           closenesse
           ,
           or
           banishment
           from
           the
           aire
           ,
           it
           might
           gather
           some
           aptnesse
           and
           disposition
           to
           putrefie
           .
           Although
           I
           say
           ,
           such
           excesse
           of
           aduantage
           as
           in
           the
           artificiall
           conueance
           of
           waters
           the
           forenamed
           authors
           require
           ,
           be
           not
           of
           necessitie
           exacted
           ,
           in
           the
           naturall
           deriuation
           of
           thē
           :
           yet
           neuerthelesse
           certaine
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           descent
           of
           riuers
           ,
           being
           as
           it
           is
           continuall
           ,
           and
           the
           course
           of
           some
           of
           them
           verie
           long
           ,
           and
           in
           many
           places
           swift
           ,
           and
           here
           ,
           and
           there
           headlong
           &
           furious
           ,
           the
           difference
           of
           height
           or
           aduantage
           ,
           can
           not
           but
           be
           great
           ,
           betwixt
           the
           springs
           of
           riuers
           and
           their
           outlets
           ,
           betwixt
           their
           first
           rising
           out
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           and
           their
           falling
           into
           the
           sea
           .
        
         
         
           Vnto
           which
           decliuitie
           of
           the
           land
           ,
           seeing
           the
           deepenesse
           of
           the
           sea
           doth
           in
           proportion
           answer
           (
           as
           I
           before
           declared
           )
           &
           not
           onely
           to
           the
           height
           of
           hils
           .
           It
           remaineth
           that
           we
           esteeme
           and
           determine
           that
           deepenesse
           to
           be
           a
           great
           deale
           more
           ,
           then
           it
           hath
           beene
           hetherto
           by
           Philosophers
           commonly
           reputed
           .
           And
           although
           the
           deepenesse
           of
           the
           Sardinian
           sea
           (
           which
           indeede
           Aristotle
           acknowledgeth
           for
           the
           deepest
           part
           of
           the
           mediterrane
           )
           bee
           specially
           recorded
           by
           Posidonius
           in
           Strabo
           ,
           
           
             Arist.
             Meteor
             l.
             2.
             c.
             1.
             
             Strabo
             .
             l.
             1.
             longe
             post
             medium
             .
          
           to
           haue
           beene
           found
           but
           1000
           fadomes
           (
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           which
           is
           but
           a
           mile
           and
           one
           fift
           part
           :
           yet
           what
           may
           the
           depth
           in
           that
           narrow
           sea
           bee
           ,
           compared
           to
           the
           hollow
           deepenesse
           of
           the
           vast
           Ocean
           ?
           Or
           rather
           (
           to
           turne
           this
           Instance
           to
           our
           aduantage
           )
           if
           in
           so
           narrow
           a
           sea
           as
           the
           mediterraine
           is
           (
           whose
           bredth
           attayneth
           not
           where
           it
           is
           largest
           ,
           600
           miles
           )
           the
           depth
           bee
           so
           great
           ,
           what
           may
           wee
           esteeme
           the
           deepenesse
           of
           the
           huge
           Ocean
           to
           be
           ,
           that
           is
           in
           many
           places
           aboue
           fiue
           times
           as
           broade
           ?
           especially
           ,
           seeing
           that
           the
           broader
           that
           seas
           are
           ,
           if
           they
           be
           withall
           entire
           ,
           and
           free
           from
           Islands
           ,
           they
           are
           answerablie
           obserued
           to
           be
           the
           deeper
           .
        
         
           But
           whether
           haue
           I
           beene
           carried
           by
           these
           Elephants
           and
           Whales
           ?
           to
           what
           heights
           and
           depths
           ,
           of
           Mountaines
           ,
           and
           Seas
           ?
           I
           pray
           you
           pardon
           mee
           ,
           for
           I
           see
           I
           haue
           digressed
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           transgressed
           ,
           now
           I
           returne
           into
           the
           way
           againe
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           Quantitie
           and
           proportion
           of
           the
           parts
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           possessed
           by
           the
           seueral
           sorts
           of
           the
           abou
           mentioned
           religions
           .
           CHAP.
           XIIII
           .
        
         
           NOw
           ,
           if
           out
           of
           the
           former
           long
           discourse
           ,
           I
           should
           collect
           a
           short
           somme
           ,
           and
           estimate
           the
           proportion
           with
           respect
           to
           the
           whole
           earth
           ,
           that
           each
           one
           of
           the
           forementioned
           religions
           ,
           haue
           to
           the
           other
           .
           It
           being
           first
           supposed
           ,
           which
           vpon
           exact
           consideration
           and
           calcalation
           ,
           will
           bee
           found
           to
           swarue
           very
           little
           from
           the
           truth
           ,
           that
           the
           proportions
           of
           
             Europe
             ,
             Afrique
             ,
             Asia
          
           ,
           and
           America
           ,
           are
           as
           1.3.4
           &
           7.
           
           And
           that
           the
           professors
           of
           the
           forementioned
           religions
           ,
           possesse
           the
           seuerall
           portions
           and
           proportions
           ,
           of
           each
           of
           them
           ,
           which
           is
           before
           set
           downe
           :
           It
           will
           be
           found
           I
           say
           vpon
           these
           suppositions
           (
           which
           the
           best
           Gographie
           ,
           and
           histories
           doe
           perswade
           mee
           to
           bee
           true
           )
           that
           Christians
           possesse
           ,
           neere
           about
           a
           fixt
           part
           of
           the
           knowne
           inhabited
           earth
           :
           Mahumetans
           ,
           a
           fift
           part
           (
           not
           as
           *
           
             *
             Pos●el
             in
             p●aefat
             .
             Grammat
             .
             Arabic
             .
             Ludouic
             .
             Reg●us
             de
             Vicissitud
             .
             Rerum
             .
             l
             〈◊〉
             ●ue
             .
          
           some
           haue
           exceedingly
           ouerlashed
           ,
           halfe
           the
           world
           or
           more
           )
           and
           Idolaters
           ,
           two
           thirds
           ,
           or
           but
           little
           lesse
           .
           So
           that
           ,
           if
           we
           diuide
           the
           knowne
           regions
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           into
           30
           equall
           parts
           .
           The
           Christians
           part
           is
           as
           fiue
           ,
           the
           Mahumetans
           as
           sixe
           ,
           and
           the
           Idolaters
           as
           nineteene
           ,
           for
           the
           poore
           dispersed
           and
           distressed
           Christians
           ,
           which
           are
           found
           in
           Asia
           and
           Afrique
           ,
           mingled
           among
           
           Mahumetans
           ,
           and
           Idolaters
           ,
           I
           receaue
           not
           into
           this
           account
           ,
           both
           because
           they
           are
           but
           thinne
           dispersed
           ,
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           multitudes
           of
           Mahumetans
           and
           Idolaters
           in
           those
           regions
           among
           whom
           they
           liue
           (
           being
           withall
           vnder
           their
           dominion
           )
           and
           because
           also
           ,
           many
           Mahumetans
           ,
           are
           found
           mingled
           among
           Christians
           in
           Europe
           ,
           to
           recompence
           and
           counteruaile
           a
           great
           part
           of
           that
           number
           .
        
         
           Such
           therefore
           may
           be
           the
           generall
           proportion
           of
           Christians
           to
           Mahumetans
           and
           Idolaters
           ,
           in
           the
           continents
           of
           the
           earth
           hetherto
           discouered
           ,
           namely
           ,
           in
           this
           our
           neighbour
           continent
           of
           the
           East
           comprehending
           
             Europe
             ,
             Afrique
          
           ,
           and
           Asia
           ,
           and
           in
           that
           other
           continent
           of
           the
           West
           ,
           called
           America
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Islands
           belonging
           to
           them
           both
           .
           But
           if
           the
           South
           or
           Antarctique
           continent
           ,
           be
           so
           large
           ,
           as
           I
           am
           verily
           perswaded
           it
           is
           (
           euen
           no
           lesse
           ,
           then
           that
           of
           the
           East
           before
           mentioned
           ,
           which
           containeth
           Europe
           ,
           Afrique
           and
           Asia
           together
           )
           then
           will
           the
           Idolaters
           be
           found
           to
           surpasse
           all
           the
           other
           religions
           ,
           in
           exceeding
           great
           proportion
           ,
           for
           that
           the
           Inhabitants
           of
           that
           South
           continent
           ,
           are
           Idolaters
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           question
           at
           all
           (
           as
           I
           take
           it
           )
           to
           bee
           made
           ,
           both
           because
           in
           the
           parts
           hitherto
           known
           ,
           as
           namely
           in
           the
           region
           of
           *
           
             *
             Varro
             .
             l.
             6.
             de
             Ling.
             Latina
             .
          
           Beach
           ,
           ouer
           against
           Iaua
           ,
           they
           were
           found
           to
           be
           so
           :
           And
           also
           ,
           because
           they
           are
           knowne
           to
           be
           no
           other
           then
           Idolaters
           ,
           that
           inhabite
           all
           those
           parts
           of
           the
           other
           continents
           ,
           that
           neighbour
           most
           towards
           them
           ,
           from
           whom
           it
           is
           likely
           ,
           they
           should
           haue
           receaued
           the
           change
           of
           their
           religion
           ,
           if
           any
           were
           :
           for
           first
           ,
           in
           Asia
           ,
           both
           
           India
           ,
           and
           the
           Islands
           of
           the
           Indian
           sea
           ,
           whereof
           some
           lie
           close
           on
           the
           South
           continent
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           in
           Afrique
           ,
           the
           regions
           about
           the
           Cape
           of
           
             Buona
             Speranza
          
           .
           And
           Thirdly
           ,
           in
           America
           ,
           the
           Countries
           that
           border
           on
           Magaglians
           Straite
           ,
           which
           are
           the
           neerest
           neighbours
           to
           the
           foresaid
           continent
           of
           the
           South
           ,
           are
           knowne
           to
           bee
           all
           ouerspred
           with
           Idolaters
           .
        
         
           Now
           that
           the
           South
           continent
           is
           no
           lesse
           then
           I
           before
           esteemed
           it
           ,
           namely
           ,
           then
           that
           of
           
             Asia
             ,
             Afrique
          
           and
           Europe
           altogether
           ,
           although
           I
           might
           be
           probablie
           induced
           to
           beleeue
           so
           ,
           because
           it
           is
           well
           knowne
           ,
           both
           (
           touching
           latitude
           )
           to
           approach
           in
           some
           parts
           neere
           the
           equator
           ,
           and
           (
           touching
           longitude
           )
           to
           runne
           along
           in
           a
           continuall
           circuite
           about
           the
           earth
           ,
           fronting
           both
           the
           other
           continents
           :
           Yet
           haue
           I
           also
           another
           reason
           of
           more
           certaine
           importance
           ,
           to
           perswade
           me
           :
           Namely
           ,
           because
           it
           is
           well
           knowne
           ,
           that
           the
           land
           to
           the
           North
           side
           of
           the
           line
           ,
           in
           the
           other
           continents
           (
           the
           old
           and
           new
           world
           )
           yet
           altogether
           is
           at
           least
           foure
           times
           as
           large
           as
           that
           part
           of
           them
           which
           lieth
           to
           the
           South
           .
           Now
           ,
           forasmuch
           as
           it
           is
           certaine
           ,
           
           
             For
             touching
             the
             first
             of
             these
             suppositions
             .
             It
             is
             the
             propertie
             of
             water
             ,
             euer
             to
             fall
             that
             way
             ,
             where
             it
             findeth
             decliuitie
             .
             Wherefore
             ,
             if
             the
             water
             ,
             in
             the
             vpper
             face
             of
             it
             ,
             were
             higher
             in
             one
             place
             then
             in
             another
             ,
             it
             would
             necessarily
             fall
             ,
             from
             the
             heigher
             position
             to
             the
             lower
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             heauie
             and
             flexible
             ,
             &
             hath
             nothing
             in
             the
             open
             and
             free
             Sea
             ,
             to
             let
             or
             hinder
             it
             .
             And
             consequently
             ,
             would
             neuer
             rest
             setled
             and
             stable
             ,
             till
             the
             face
             of
             it
             were
             leuelled
             ,
             in
             an
             euen
             distance
             from
             the
             cēter
             .
          
           first
           by
           Archimedes
           his
           rule
           ,
           
           
             Archimed
             .
             de
             Insidentib
             .
             Aquae
             l.
             1.
             
             Propos
             .
             2.
             
          
           that
           the
           face
           of
           the
           sea
           ,
           is
           in
           all
           parts
           naturally
           leuell
           ,
           or
           equally
           distant
           from
           the
           center
           of
           the
           water
           ,
           for
           which
           equalitie
           ,
           it
           
           hath
           obtained
           the
           name
           of
           Aequer
           &
           Aqua
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Varro
             .
             l.
             ●
             .
             de
             Ling.
             Latina
             .
             Isidor
             .
             Origi●
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             12
             &
             Alij
             .
          
           as
           Grammarians
           say
           :
           
           
             And
             touching
             the
             second
             if
             the
             earth
             were
             vnequallie
             poysed
             on
             opposite
             sides
             of
             the
             center
             ,
             then
             must
             it
             follow
             ,
             that
             the
             least
             and
             lighter
             masse
             of
             the
             earth
             should
             presse
             downe
             as
             forciblie
             ,
             as
             the
             greater
             and
             weightier
             ,
             because
             it
             attaineth
             the
             center
             as
             well
             as
             it
             .
             But
             if
             it
             be
             graunted
             ,
             which
             reason
             doth
             inforce
             ,
             that
             the
             weightier
             part
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             should
             presse
             downeward
             ,
             with
             greater
             force
             ,
             and
             with
             more
             right
             challenge
             the
             center
             ,
             then
             the
             lighter
             part
             :
             it
             must
             follow
             ,
             that
             the
             lighter
             masse
             or
             side
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             must
             yeelde
             and
             giue
             place
             to
             the
             weightier
             ,
             so
             farre
             ,
             till
             the
             center
             of
             that
             whole
             masse
             of
             the
             earth
             take
             possession
             of
             the
             center
             of
             the
             world
             (
             for
             till
             then
             ,
             one
             side
             will
             be
             still
             heauier
             then
             the
             other
             )
             and
             so
             the
             opposite
             halfes
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             heauinesse
             ,
             be
             brought
             on
             all
             sides
             ,
             about
             the
             center
             ,
             vnto
             a
             perfect
             equilibration
             .
          
           And
           secondly
           ,
           by
           the
           Philosophers
           knowne
           rule
           ,
           that
           the
           earth
           is
           equally
           poised
           on
           both
           sides
           of
           her
           owne
           center
           .
           
           
             And
             the
             third
             may
             be
             established
             ,
             by
             manifest
             demonstration
             .
             Because
             ,
             a
             clod
             of
             earth
             ,
             suffered
             to
             fall
             from
             any
             point
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             wheresoeuer
             ,
             on
             the
             face
             of
             the
             sea
             (
             the
             same
             doth
             water
             ,
             falling
             on
             euen
             &
             plaine
             land
             )
             when
             all
             is
             calme
             ,
             and
             the
             aire
             not
             troubled
             with
             windes
             ,
             nor
             the
             sea
             with
             waues
             ,
             will
             descend
             by
             a
             perpendicular
             line
             ,
             on
             the
             face
             of
             the
             water
             .
             In
             such
             sort
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             line
             by
             which
             it
             falleth
             maketh
             exactly
             equall
             and
             right
             angles
             on
             all
             sides
             ,
             with
             the
             face
             of
             the
             water
             whereon
             it
             falleth
             .
             Therefore
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             that
             the
             earth
             so
             falling
             ,
             tēdeth
             directly
             to
             the
             center
             of
             the
             water
             Because
             no
             straight
             line
             insisteth
             perpendicularly
             ,
             on
             the
             face
             or
             circumference
             of
             any
             special
             body
             (
             as
             the
             water
             is
             )
             except
             only
             those
             that
             proceede
             directly
             to
             the
             center
             of
             the
             sphaire
             :
             But
             certaine
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             earth
             is
             withal
             directly
             carried
             toward
             it
             own
             center
             ,
             therefore
             there
             is
             but
             one
             common
             center
             of
             the
             water
             and
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           And
           thirdly
           ,
           that
           the
           center
           of
           the
           earth
           &
           of
           the
           water
           are
           all
           one
           (
           both
           of
           thē
           being
           indeede
           no
           other
           thē
           the
           center
           of
           the
           world
           )
           which
           though
           some
           phantastical
           heads
           haue
           called
           into
           question
           yet
           no
           sound
           philosopher
           euer
           doubted
           of
           :
           It
           followeth
           thereupon
           ,
           that
           the
           earth
           should
           in
           answerable
           measure
           and
           proportion
           ,
           lift
           it selfe
           and
           appeare
           aboue
           the
           face
           of
           the
           sea
           ,
           on
           the
           south
           side
           of
           the
           line
           ,
           as
           it
           doth
           on
           the
           north
           .
           
           And
           consequently
           ,
           that
           what
           is
           wanting
           in
           the
           South
           parts
           of
           the
           two
           foresaid
           continents
           towards
           the
           counteruailing
           of
           the
           North
           parts
           (
           which
           is
           about
           three
           fiue
           parts
           of
           both
           the
           other
           continents
           laied
           together
           )
           must
           of
           necessitie
           be
           supplied
           in
           the
           continents
           of
           the
           South
           .
           And
           yet
           I
           omit
           all
           the
           land
           ,
           that
           may
           be
           about
           the
           Arctique
           Pole
           ,
           beyond
           the
           Scythian
           or
           Sarmatian
           sea
           ,
           which
           must
           be
           also
           counterpoysed
           in
           that
           Antarchtique
           continent
           ,
           for
           nothing
           comes
           within
           the
           compasse
           of
           my
           vnderstanding
           ,
           to
           bee
           hereto
           replied
           ,
           except
           any
           would
           perhaps
           imagine
           ,
           that
           either
           the
           sea
           
           on
           the
           South
           side
           of
           the
           equator
           ,
           is
           verie
           shallow
           ,
           or
           that
           the
           land
           of
           that
           cōtinēt
           ,
           may
           be
           much
           higher
           aboue
           the
           face
           of
           the
           sea
           ,
           thē
           the
           land
           of
           the
           other
           two
           (
           &
           so
           equal
           in
           masse
           ,
           though
           lesse
           in
           circuit
           )
           or
           that
           the
           earth
           on
           the
           south
           side
           of
           the
           Equator
           ,
           should
           be
           of
           a
           more
           ponderous
           disposition
           ,
           thē
           on
           the
           North
           ,
           in
           which
           cases
           ,
           some
           cōpensation
           of
           weightines
           ,
           may
           be
           made
           for
           the
           want
           of
           extention
           .
           But
           of
           these
           three
           ,
           the
           experience
           of
           sailers
           euidently
           refelleth
           the
           first
           ,
           who
           in
           equall
           distance
           from
           the
           land
           ,
           obserue
           an
           equall
           deepenesse
           of
           the
           sea
           ,
           in
           both
           South
           and
           North
           latitude
           .
           And
           neither
           is
           there
           any
           experience
           ,
           nor
           good
           reason
           that
           can
           be
           alleadged
           to
           establish
           either
           of
           the
           later
           :
           which
           ,
           but
           that
           I
           haue
           alreadie
           too
           much
           offended
           by
           digressions
           ,
           I
           could
           prooue
           I
           doubt
           not
           against
           all
           exception
           .
           But
           this
           for
           a
           conclusion
           to
           this
           discourse
           ,
           I
           dare
           pronounce
           touching
           that
           South
           cōtinent
           ,
           that
           it
           wil
           certainely
           be
           foūd
           (
           in
           the
           after
           times
           ,
           when
           it
           shall
           be
           better
           discouered
           )
           much
           larger
           then
           any
           globe
           or
           map
           hitherto
           extant
           ,
           hath
           represented
           it
           .
        
         
           Such
           therfore
           (
           as
           I
           haue
           declared
           )
           is
           the
           general
           state
           of
           Christianity
           at
           this
           present
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           &
           the
           proportion
           of
           it
           to
           other
           religions
           .
           But
           because
           you
           require
           yet
           further
           to
           be
           specially
           informed
           of
           the
           diuers
           sorts
           and
           sects
           of
           Christians
           that
           are
           abroad
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           withall
           of
           their
           diuers
           regions
           and
           religions
           ,
           at
           least
           of
           those
           principall
           characters
           
           of
           their
           religion
           ,
           wherin
           they
           specially
           differ
           each
           from
           other
           ,
           I
           will
           here
           set
           downe
           my
           second
           period
           ,
           touching
           the
           generall
           differences
           of
           religions
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           seuerall
           parts
           of
           the
           world
           where
           they
           are
           maintained
           :
           and
           will
           now
           proceed
           to
           that
           particular
           consideration
           touching
           the
           sects
           of
           Christianity
           ,
           and
           indeuour
           to
           giue
           you
           the
           best
           satisfaction
           that
           my
           poore
           reading
           ,
           and
           obseruation
           may
           inable
           me
           to
           performe
           .
        
      
       
         
           Of
           the
           dinerse
           sorts
           or
           sects
           of
           Christians
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           of
           their
           seuerall
           regions
           .
           And
           first
           of
           the
           Grecians
           .
           CHAP.
           XV.
           
        
         
           THE
           sects
           therefore
           of
           Christians
           ,
           that
           carrie
           name
           &
           report
           at
           this
           present
           in
           the
           World
           ,
           beside
           the
           Protestants
           and
           Romans
           in
           the
           West
           ,
           of
           whom
           I
           will
           bee
           silent
           ,
           because
           you
           know
           their
           condition
           better
           then
           my selfe
           ,
           are
           1
           the
           Grecians
           ,
           2
           Melchites
           or
           Syrians
           ,
           3
           Georgians
           ,
           4
           Moscouites
           &
           Russians
           ,
           5
           Nestorians
           ,
           6
           Indians
           termed
           the
           Christians
           of
           S
           
           t.
           Thomas
           ,
           7
           Iacobites
           ,
           8
           Cophites
           ,
           9
           Armenians
           ,
           10
           Habassines
           ,
           and
           11
           Maronites
           .
           Of
           which
           eleuen
           sects
           ,
           there
           be
           three
           Principall
           ,
           namely
           the
           
             Grecians
             ,
             Iacobites
          
           and
           Nestorians
           ,
           with
           which
           the
           rest
           haue
           ,
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           
           either
           some
           dependance
           and
           deriuation
           ,
           or
           neerer
           conuenience
           and
           agreement
           .
        
         
           The
           Grecians
           acknowledge
           obedience
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           vnder
           whose
           Iurisdiction
           are
           in
           Asia
           ,
           
           
             Bellon
             .
             Obseruation
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             35.
             
          
           the
           Christians
           of
           Natolia
           (
           excepting
           Armenia
           the
           lesse
           ,
           and
           Cilicia
           )
           of
           Circassia
           ,
           of
           Mengrelia
           ,
           and
           of
           Russia
           :
           As
           in
           Europe
           also
           ,
           the
           Christians
           of
           
             Greece
             ,
             Macedon
             ,
             Epirus
             ,
             Thrace
             ,
             Bulgaria
             ,
             Rascia
             ,
             Seruia
             ,
             Bosina
             ,
             Walachia
             ,
             Moldauia
             ,
             Podolia
             ,
          
           and
           Moscouia
           :
           together
           with
           all
           the
           Islands
           of
           the
           Aegean
           sea
           ,
           and
           others
           about
           Greece
           ,
           as
           farre
           as
           Corfu
           ,
           beside
           a
           good
           part
           of
           the
           large
           dominion
           of
           Polonia
           ,
           and
           those
           parts
           of
           Dalmatia
           ,
           and
           of
           Croatia
           ,
           that
           are
           subiect
           to
           the
           Turkish
           dominion
           .
        
         
           Of
           which
           great
           extendment
           of
           the
           Greeke
           Patriarchs
           iurisdiction
           ,
           if
           you
           demand
           the
           reason
           :
           I
           haue
           obserued
           sundry
           occasions
           ,
           from
           whence
           it
           hath
           proceeded
           .
           For
           first
           ,
           his
           originall
           or
           Primitiue
           authority
           assigned
           ,
           or
           rather
           confirmed
           to
           him
           ,
           (
           as
           Bishop
           of
           the
           Jmperiall
           citie
           )
           by
           the
           coūcell
           of
           Chalcedon
           ;
           contained
           all
           the
           Prouinces
           of
           Thrace
           ,
           
           
             Concil
             .
             Chalcedone●s
             .
             can
             .
             23.
             
          
           and
           of
           Anatolia
           ,
           (
           Isauria
           ,
           and
           Cilicia
           ,
           onelie
           excepted
           ,
           which
           belonged
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Antiochia
           )
           and
           they
           were
           in
           all
           ,
           no
           lesse
           then
           28.
           
           Romane
           Prouinces
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           voluntary
           submission
           of
           the
           Grecians
           vpon
           their
           separation
           from
           the
           latin
           Church
           ,
           greatly
           increased
           it
           :
           for
           thereby
           not
           onely
           
             Greece
             ,
             Macedon
             ,
             ●spirus
             ,
             Candie
             ,
          
           and
           the
           Isles
           about
           Greece
           (
           in
           all
           seuen
           Prouinces
           )
           came
           vnder
           his
           obedience
           ,
           but
           also
           Sicil●e
           ,
           and
           the
           East
           point
           of
           Italie
           ,
           named
           Calabria
           ,
           reuolted
           from
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           for
           a
           long
           time
           ,
           pertained
           to
           
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           
           
             Nouell
             .
             Leon.
             De
             ordine
             Metropolitan
             in
             Lib.
             2.
             
             To●ri
             L●uris
             .
          
           as
           appeareth
           in
           the
           Nouell
           of
           
             Leo
             Sophus
          
           touching
           the
           order
           and
           precedence
           of
           Metropolitans
           ,
           belonging
           to
           that
           Patriarchie
           .
           And
           by
           the
           like
           ordination
           set
           downe
           by
           
             Andronicus
             Paloeologus
          
           ,
           in
           Curopalates
           ,
           
           
             Orientalis
             .
             Curopalat
             .
             de
             Official
             .
             Palat.
             Constātinop
             .
             prope
             sinem
             .
          
           where
           wee
           find
           ,
           the
           Metropolitans
           of
           Syracusa
           ,
           and
           Catana
           in
           Sicilie
           ,
           of
           
             Rhegium
             ,
             Seueriana
             ,
             Rosia
          
           ,
           and
           Hydruntum
           in
           Calabria
           ,
           registred
           among
           the
           Metropolitans
           of
           that
           Iurisdiction
           .
           Thirdly
           it
           was
           inlarged
           by
           the
           conuersion
           of
           the
           north
           regions
           to
           Christian
           Religion
           ,
           performed
           by
           his
           Suffragans
           and
           ministers
           ,
           euen
           from
           Thrace
           to
           *
           
             *
             Cromer
             .
             de
             .
             script
             .
             Polon
             .
             L.
             1.
             
             Herdenst
             de
             Bell.
             Mosc
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Gu●guin
             .
             Descript●on
             .
             Moscou
             .
             c.
             2.
             
          
           Russia
           and
           the
           Scythian
           Sea
           (
           the
           like
           whereof
           was
           the
           principall
           cause
           ,
           that
           so
           farre
           inlarged
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           his
           Iurisdiction
           in
           the
           west
           parts
           of
           Europe
           .
           )
           And
           fourthly
           ,
           by
           the
           Turks
           conquests
           made
           vpon
           the
           Westerne
           countries
           ,
           subiect
           before
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           :
           all
           which
           ,
           while
           partly
           ,
           the
           former
           Bishops
           and
           Pastors
           fled
           ,
           to
           auoid
           the
           Turks
           oppression
           (
           like
           the
           hireling
           that
           forsaketh
           the
           flocke
           ,
           when
           he
           seeth
           the
           wolfe
           comming
           )
           and
           partly
           ,
           while
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           to
           supply
           that
           default
           ,
           was
           faine
           to
           prouide
           them
           of
           new
           ministers
           ,
           they
           haue
           beene
           by
           little
           and
           little
           brought
           &
           trained
           to
           the
           Greeke
           religion
           .
        
         
           Now
           as
           touching
           the
           proper
           characters
           of
           their
           religion
           ,
           I
           must
           ,
           for
           the
           better
           designing
           and
           remembring
           of
           them
           ,
           set
           before
           me
           some
           instance
           or
           patterne
           ,
           to
           compare
           it
           ,
           and
           other
           sects
           of
           Religion
           withall
           :
           And
           that
           is
           most
           fit
           to
           be
           the
           Romane
           Church
           ,
           both
           because
           their
           differences
           with
           that
           Church
           specially
           ,
           are
           in
           writers
           most
           obserued
           .
           
           So
           that
           ,
           by
           that
           meanes
           my
           discourse
           may
           be
           the
           shorter
           ,
           and
           yet
           no
           lesse
           perspicuous
           to
           you
           ,
           that
           know
           the
           opinions
           of
           the
           Romane
           Church
           so
           well
           .
           The
           principall
           characters
           then
           of
           the
           Grecians
           religion
           ,
           (
           for
           none
           but
           the
           principall
           you
           require
           ,
           and
           to
           mention
           euery
           slender
           difference
           of
           ceremonies
           ,
           would
           be
           but
           tedious
           ,
           and
           fruitlesse
           ,
           (
           and
           is
           beside
           without
           my
           compasse
           )
           are
           these
           that
           follow
           .
        
         
           
             1.
             
             1
             
               1
               Concil
               .
               Florent
               .
               Sess.
               18.
               &
               sequentib
               .
               Ierem.
               Patriarch
               Cōstant
               in
               Resp.
               1.
               ad
               Germanos
               .
               cap.
               1.
               
            
             That
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             proceedeth
             from
             the
             father
             onely
             ,
             not
             from
             the
             sonne
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             2
             
               2
               Cōcil
               .
               Florentin
               .
               prope
               Initium
               .
               Respons
               .
               Graecer
               ad
               cardinal
               .
               Guisan
               .
               Quest.
               9.
               
            
             That
             there
             is
             no
             purgatory
             fire
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             3
             
               3
               Resp.
               cad
               .
               Graecor
               .
               Q.
               5.
               
               Ierem.
               Patr.
               Resp.
               1.
               cap.
               1.
               
            
             That
             they
             celebrate
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Eucharist
             in
             both
             kinds
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             4
             
               4
               Ierem.
               Resp.
               cad
               .
               c.
               10.
               
               &
               21
               
            
             And
             in
             leauened
             bread
             ,
             and
             thinke
             it
             cannot
             be
             effectually
             consecrated
             in
             bread
             vnleauened
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             5
             
               5
               Posseuin
               .
               de
               Rebus
               Mosco
               .
               uiae
               pag.
               43.
               
            
             That
             they
             reiect
             extreame
             vnction
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             6
             
               6
               Id.
               lib.
               citat
               .
               pag.
               40.
               
            
             And
             confirmation
             .
          
           
             7.
             
             7
             
               7
               Ierem.
               Respons
               .
               cap.
               21.
               
            
             That
             they
             deny
             the
             soules
             of
             holy
             men
             to
             enioy
             the
             blissefull
             vision
             of
             God
             ,
             or
             the
             soules
             of
             wicked
             men
             to
             be
             tormented
             in
             hel
             ,
             before
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             .
             
               Th.
               a
               Ies.
               de
               Conu
               .
               gent.
               l.
            
             6.
             c.
             1.
             
          
           
             8.
             
             8
             
               8
               Tom.
               vnionis
               inter
               nouel
               .
               Constantin
               .
               Porphyrogen
               .
               in
               Tomo
               1
               Tur.
               Orientalis
               .
               lib.
               2.
               
               Zonar
               .
               Annal.
               Tom.
               3.
               in
               Im
               pe
               Leon's
               philosophi
               .
            
             That
             they
             admit
             Priests
             marriages
             ,
             namely
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             may
             keepe
             their
             wiues
             married
             before
             their
             ordination
             ,
             but
             must
             not
             marry
             after
             ordination
             .
          
           
             9.
             
             9
             
               9
               Resp.
               Graecor
               .
               ad
               Guisan
               Quest
               8.
               
               Posse●i●
               .
               de
               reb
               .
               Moscou
               .
            
             That
             they
             prohibite
             vtterly
             the
             fourth
             marriage
             ,
             as
             a
             thing
             intolerable
             .
             Insomuch
             ,
             that
             (
             as
             we
             find
             recorded
             )
             their
             Patriarchs
             haue
             for
             that
             cause
             excommunicated
             some
             of
             their
             Emperours
             ,
             although
             they
             had
             no
             issue
             left
             of
             their
             three
             former
             marriages
             .
          
           
             
             10
             
               10
               
                 Posseu
                 l●b
                 .
                 〈◊〉
                 pag.
                 41
                 et
                 2.
                 
              
               
                 ●●llamont
                 on
                 ●oyag
                 .
                 l
                 2.
                 c
                 21
              
            
             10.
             
             That
             they
             reiect
             the
             religious
             vse
             of
             massie
             images
             ,
             or
             statues
             ,
             admitting
             yet
             pictures
             or
             plaine
             images
             in
             their
             Churches
             .
          
           
             11
             
               11
               Vil●am
               .
               on
               Vo●ag
               .
               l.
               2.
               c.
               21
               ●t
               Alij
               .
            
             11.
             
             That
             they
             solemnize
             Saturday
             (
             the
             old
             sabbath
             )
             festiually
             ,
             and
             eat
             therin
             flesh
             ,
             forbidding
             as
             vnlawfull
             to
             fast
             any
             Saturday
             in
             the
             yeare
             ,
             except
             Easter
             Eue.
             
          
           
             12
             
               12
               Posseuin
               .
               l.
               〈◊〉
               p.
               42.
               
            
             12.
             
             That
             they
             obserue
             foure
             lents
             in
             the
             yeare
             .
          
           
             13
             
               13
               N●lus
               Episcop
               .
               Thes●al
               .
               de
               Primatu
               Papae
               Barlaam
               de
               primatu
               Papae
               et
               Alij
               .
               Leo.
               9.
               epist.
               1.
               
               〈◊〉
               Episcop
               .
               Constātinop
               .
            
             13.
             
             That
             they
             eate
             not
             of
             any
             thing
             strangled
             ,
             nor
             of
             bloud
             .
          
           
             14
             
               14
               
                 Acrican
                 .
                 et
                 in
                 pluribus
                 〈◊〉
                 .
              
               
                 S●●●bert
                 .
                 in
                 Ch●onico
                 ad
                 An.
                 ●●5●
                 .
              
               
                 Possen
                 .
                 de
                 Reb
                 Mosco
                 .
                 p
                 38.
                 
                 〈…〉
                 .
              
            
             14.
             
             And
             lastly
             ,
             that
             they
             deny
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Romes
             primacy
             ,
             and
             (
             reputing
             him
             &
             his
             Church
             for
             schismaticks
             )
             exclude
             them
             from
             their
             communion
             :
             And
             so
             haue
             done
             ,
             as
             I
             finde
             in
             Leo
             the
             ninth
             his
             Epistles
             ,
             and
             in
             Sigebert
             ,
             aboue
             these
             500.
             years
             ,
             And
             if
             you
             desire
             to
             see
             more
             differences
             of
             the
             Greeke
             and
             Romane
             Church
             ,
             you
             may
             see
             them
             ,
             (
             but
             they
             are
             of
             lesse
             importance
             then
             those
             I
             haue
             related
             in
             Posseuines
             booke
             of
             the
             matters
             of
             Moscouia
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           Syrians
           or
           Melchites
           .
           CHAP.
           XVI
           .
        
         
           SYrians
           are
           the
           same
           ,
           that
           in
           some
           Histories
           are
           termed
           Melchites
           :
           beeing
           esteemed
           for
           their
           number
           the
           *
           
             *
             Botar
             .
             Relat.
             pa.
             3.
             l.
             2.
             ca.
             de
             Melchiti
             .
          
           greatest
           sect
           of
           Christians
           in
           the
           Orient
           .
           The
           first
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Postel
             .
             in
             Descript.
             Syriae
             .
             pag.
             30.
             
          
           being
           properly
           the
           name
           of
           their
           nation
           ,
           And
           the
           second
           noting
           the
           property
           of
           their
           religion
           .
           Surians
           they
           were
           named
           (
           to
           let
           vaine
           fancies
           go
           )
           of
           the
           Citty
           of
           Tyre
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           ancient
           language
           of
           the
           Phoenicians
           ,
           
           
             
               Gellius
               .
               l.
               14.
               c.
               6.
               
            
             
               Festus
               in
               D●●ctione
               sarra
               ▪
            
          
           was
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           and
           certainelie
           ,
           that
           Tyre
           was
           anciētly
           called
           Sarra
           ,
           is
           recorded
           by
           the
           *
           
             *
             For
             Pos●els
             phantasie
             deriuing
             Suria
             from
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             meerelie
             vaine
             ,
             &
             beeing
             neuer
             so
             named
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             tongue
             ,
             but
             alwaies
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             by
             which
             name
             also
             it
             seemeth
             anciētly
             to
             haue
             bene
             knowne
             ,
             euen
             among
             the
             Grecians
             for
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             mentioned
             in
             Homer
             ,
             are
             no
             other
             ,
             as
             Possidonius
             in
             *
             
               *
               Strad
               .
               l.
               26.
               in
               fine
               .
            
             Strabo
             expounds
             him
             ,
             then
             the
             
               Syrians
               :
               Strabo
            
             himselfe
             also
             recording
             in
             other
             places
             ,
             that
             the
             Syrians
             *
             
               *
               
                 Vitria
                 histor
                 .
                 Oriental
                 .
                 c.
                 43
                 Niger
                 in
                 commenta●
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 Asiae
                 .
              
               
                 Postell
                 .
                 in
                 descrip
                 .
                 Syriae
                 .
                 pag.
                 50.
                 
              
            
             were
             called
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             his
             time
             :
             And
             ,
             that
             the
             *
             
               *
               Strad
               .
               l.
               13.
               non
               long
               ante
               fine
               .
            
             naturall
             inhabitants
             of
             Syria
             ,
             so
             called
             themselues
             .
             Yet
             neuerthelesse
             they
             were
             vulgarly
             knowne
             by
             the
             name
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             among
             the
             Grecians
             ,
             because
             the
             Citie
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             beeing
             the
             maine
             mart
             towne
             of
             all
             those
             parts
             ,
             was
             the
             place
             ,
             where
             they
             had
             their
             trade
             &
             commerce
             ,
             with
             those
             Aramites
             .
             But
             when
             the
             Phoenician
             tongue
             began
             to
             degenerate
             into
             Chaldee
             ,
             then
             the
             name
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             was
             conuerted
             into
             Tur
             ,
             the
             letter
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             beeing
             turned
             into
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             sound
             made
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             As
             *
             
               *
               Vid.
               Scaliger
               as
               Fest.
               in
               dictione
               Sarra
               .
               et
               Guidon
               .
               Fabric
               .
               in
               Grammatic
               .
               Chaldaea
               &c.
               
            
             they
             that
             obserue
             the
             differences
             of
             the
             Hebrew
             and
             the
             Chaldee
             ,
             and
             the
             transitions
             of
             the
             first
             into
             the
             latter
             ,
             know
             to
             be
             ordinary
             .
          
           Roman
           writers
           :
           and
           it
           is
           also
           acknowledged
           by
           *
           
             *
             
               Strab.
               l.
               1
               post
               med
               .
            
             
               Burchard
               .
               descr
               .
               terrae
               Sanctae
               .
            
          
           
             Vitriacus
             ,
             Niger
             ,
             Postell
          
           and
           others
           ,
           that
           the
           place
           of
           Tyre
           ,
           
           (
           for
           the
           city
           was
           vtterlie
           ruined
           three
           hundred
           yeares
           ago
           )
           is
           still
           called
           the
           port
           of
           Sur
           ,
           
           
             Hieron
             .
             in
             lib.
             de
             Nominib
             .
             Hebraicis
             .
             Plin.
             l.
             5.
             c.
             19.
             
          
           which
           name
           it
           seemeth
           to
           haue
           obtained
           ,
           either
           because
           it
           was
           built
           on
           a
           Rocke
           ,
           for
           so
           Burchardus
           that
           viewed
           the
           place
           hath
           obserued
           )
           which
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           the
           Phoenician
           toung
           signifies
           :
           or
           else
           as
           Hierome
           deriues
           it
           ,
           of
           the
           straitnesse
           and
           scarcenes
           of
           roome
           ,
           as
           being
           seated
           in
           a
           smal
           Iland
           (
           but
           19.
           miles
           in
           circuit
           as
           Plinie
           noteth
           )
           a
           small
           Territory
           for
           such
           a
           City
           :
           or
           perhaps
           ,
           because
           it
           was
           the
           strongest
           fortres
           (
           for
           that
           also
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           importeth
           )
           of
           all
           those
           Regions
           ,
           as
           being
           founded
           on
           a
           rocke
           ,
           enuironed
           with
           the
           sea
           ,
           (
           for
           it
           was
           before
           *
           
             *
             Q
             Curt.
             l.
             4.
             
          
           Alexanders
           time
           *
           
             *
             Plin.
             loc
             .
             citabo
             .
          
           700.
           paces
           distant
           from
           the
           firme
           land
           )
           mightily
           strengthened
           by
           fortifications
           of
           Art
           ,
           populous
           as
           beeing
           the
           Metropolis
           of
           Phoenicia
           ,
           and
           exceeding
           rich
           as
           sometime
           the
           Cittie
           of
           greatest
           traffique
           in
           the
           World.
           
        
         
           Of
           this
           city
           then
           ,
           both
           the
           region
           and
           inhabitants
           of
           Suria
           obtained
           their
           names
           :
           but
           Melchitae
           
           as
           I
           saide
           they
           were
           termed
           ,
           meerely
           in
           respect
           of
           their
           religion
           ,
           wherein
           namely
           they
           altogether
           followed
           the
           examples
           and
           decrees
           of
           the
           Emperours
           .
           For
           whereas
           after
           the
           Councell
           of
           Chalcedon
           ,
           infinite
           perplexity
           and
           trouble
           began
           to
           arise
           in
           the
           East
           parts
           ,
           principally
           about
           the
           opinion
           of
           Eutyches
           and
           Dioscorus
           ,
           of
           one
           only
           nature
           in
           Christ
           ,
           which
           that
           councel
           had
           condemned
           ,
           but
           notwithstanding
           found
           many
           that
           maintained
           it
           ,
           and
           reiected
           the
           Councell
           ,
           in
           those
           Easterne
           countries
           :
           And
           thereupon
           the
           Emperour
           Leo
           began
           to
           exact
           ,
           (
           as
           diuers
           other
           of
           his
           Successours
           afterward
           did
           )
           the
           suffrages
           and
           subscriptions
           of
           the
           Easterne
           Bishops
           ,
           for
           the
           better
           establishment
           of
           the
           Councel
           .
           
           
             Niceph.
             Callist
             Histor.
             Ecclesiast
             .
             l.
             18.
             c.
             52.
             
          
           Then
           began
           they
           that
           embraced
           and
           approued
           the
           authority
           of
           that
           Councell
           ,
           because
           they
           followed
           the
           Emperours
           decrees
           ,
           made
           in
           behalfe
           of
           it
           ,
           to
           be
           termed
           by
           their
           aduersaries
           ,
           Melchitae
           ,
           of
           Melchi
           ,
           saith
           Nicephorus
           ,
           (
           rather
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           which
           in
           the
           speech
           of
           Syria
           signifieth
           a
           King
           :
           (
           as
           one
           would
           say
           of
           the
           Kings
           Religion
           )
           whereas
           they
           that
           opposed
           themselues
           to
           the
           Councell
           ,
           were
           distracted
           into
           no
           lesse
           then
           twelue
           seueral
           sects
           ,
           and
           not
           long
           after
           into
           many
           more
           ,
           as
           the
           same
           *
           
             *
             Lib.
             18.
             c.
             45.
             
          
           Nicephorus
           hath
           recorded
           .
        
         
           Now
           although
           the
           Syrians
           or
           Melchites
           ,
           are
           for
           their
           religion
           meerely
           of
           the
           Grecians
           opinions
           .
           As
           :
           
             
               1.
               
               That
               the
               Holy
               Ghost
               proceedeth
               only
               from
               the
               father
               .
               
               
                 1.2.3.4.5
                 .
                 Iacob
                 a
                 Vitriaco
                 Hist.
                 Orient
                 .
                 ca.
                 75.
                 
              
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               they
               celebrate
               diuine
               seruice
               as
               solemnly
               on
               the
               Sabbath
               ,
               as
               on
               the
               Lords
               day
               .
            
             
               
               3.
               
               That
               they
               keepe
               that
               day
               festiuall
               ,
               eating
               therein
               flesh
               ,
               and
               fast
               no
               Saturday
               in
               the
               yeare
               but
               Easter
               Eue.
               
            
             
               4
               
                 4
                 Villamont
                 ●n
                 voyag
                 .
                 l.
                 2.
                 c.
                 22.
                 
              
               4.
               
               That
               their
               Priests
               and
               Deacons
               contract
               not
               marriage
               ,
               being
               already
               in
               Orders
               ,
               but
               yet
               retaine
               their
               wiues
               before
               married
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               That
               the
               fourth
               Matrimony
               is
               vtterlie
               vnlawfull
               .
            
             
               6.7.8.
               
                 6.7.8.
                 Villamont
                 .
                 loco
                 citato
                 .
              
               6.
               
               That
               they
               communicate
               the
               Eucharist
               in
               both
               kinds
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               That
               they
               acknowledge
               not
               Purgatory
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               That
               they
               obserue
               foure
               Lents
               in
               the
               yeare
               ,
               &c.
               
               And
               in
               a
               word
               ,
               although
               they
               be
               meerely
               *
               
                 *
                 
                   Vitriac
                   .
                   loco
                   iam
                   citato
                   .
                
                 
                   Salignici●
                   .
                   Itiner
                   .
                   Tom.
                   8.
                   c.
                   1
                   Bamugart
                   .
                   Peregrin
                   .
                   l.
                   2.
                   c.
                   9.
                   
                   〈◊〉
                   Alij
                   .
                
              
               of
               the
               same
               Religion
               &
               communion
               with
               the
               Grecians
               :
               yet
               are
               they
               not
               of
               the
               iurisdiction
               of
               the
               Patriarch
               of
               Constantinople
               ,
               but
               of
               the
               Archbishop
               of
               Damascus
               ,
               by
               the
               title
               of
               the
               Patriarch
               of
               Antiochia
               .
               For
               Antiochia
               it selfe
               (
               where
               yet
               the
               name
               of
               Christians
               was
               first
               heard
               in
               the
               world
               ,
               &
               was
               long
               knowne
               by
               the
               name
               of
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               lying
               at
               this
               present
               in
               a
               manner
               wast
               ,
               or
               broken
               and
               dispersed
               into
               small
               villages
               ,
               of
               which
               ,
               onely
               one
               ,
               of
               about
               60
               houses
               ,
               with
               a
               smal
               Temple
               belongeth
               to
               Christians
               ,
               *
               
                 *
                 
                   Bellon
                   .
                   ob●eru
                   .
                   l.
                   c.
                   
                
                 
                   Chitrae
                   .
                   de
                   stat
                   .
                   Ecclesiar
                   .
                   pag.
                   5.
                   
                
              
               the
               Patriarchall
               seat
               was
               translated
               thence
               to
               Damascus
               (
               where
               as
               is
               reported
               are
               
               
                 
                   Bote●
                   .
                   Relat.
                   pa.
                   3.
                   l.
                   2.
                   c.
                   de
                   Maro●●ti
                   .
                
                 
                   Cru●
                   .
                   Tur●o
                   .
                   grar
                   .
                   l.
                   4
                   p.
                   296.
                   ex
                   relatione
                   Gerlachij
                   .
                
              
               aboue
               1000
               houses
               of
               Christians
               )
               and
               there
               remaineth
               .
               For
               although
               *
               
                 *
                 Boter
                 loco
                 〈◊〉
                 citato
                 .
              
               the
               Patriachs
               of
               the
               Maronites
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               Iacobites
               ,
               whereof
               the
               former
               keepeth
               residence
               in
               Libanus
               ,
               and
               the
               later
               in
               Mesopotamia
               ,
               intitle
               themselues
               Patriarchs
               of
               Antiochia
               ,
               and
               by
               the
               Christians
               of
               their
               owne
               sects
               ,
               bee
               so
               acknowledged
               :
               yet
               do
               the
               Melchites
               ,
               who
               retaine
               the
               auncient
               religion
               
               of
               Syria
               ,
               acknowledge
               none
               for
               patriarche
               ,
               but
               the
               Archbishop
               of
               Damascus
               ,
               reputing
               both
               the
               other
               for
               schismaticks
               ,
               as
               hauing
               departed
               from
               the
               obedience
               and
               communion
               of
               the
               true
               Patriarch
               .
               And
               yet
               ,
               beside
               all
               these
               ,
               a
               fourth
               there
               is
               ,
               of
               the
               Popes
               designation
               ,
               that
               vsurpeth
               the
               title
               of
               the
               Patriarche
               of
               Antiochia
               .
               For
               *
               
                 *
                 Boter
                 .
                 Relat.
                 p.
                 3.
                 l.
                 1.
                 ca.
                 del
                 Patriarcha
                 latino
                 d●
                 Constantinopoli
                 .
              
               euer
               since
               the
               Latines
               surprised
               Constantinople
               ,
               (
               which
               was
               about
               the
               yeare
               1200
               )
               &
               held
               the
               possession
               of
               the
               east
               Empire
               about
               70.
               yeares
               ,
               al
               which
               time
               the
               Patriarchs
               of
               Constantinople
               ,
               were
               consecrated
               by
               the
               Pope
               :
               As
               also
               ,
               since
               the
               holy
               Land
               ,
               and
               the
               Prouinces
               about
               it
               ,
               were
               in
               the
               hands
               of
               the
               Christian
               Princes
               of
               the
               West
               ,
               which
               began
               to
               bee
               about
               An.
               1100.
               
               And
               so
               continued
               about
               80.
               yeares
               ,
               during
               which
               season
               the
               Patriarchs
               of
               Antiochia
               also
               ,
               and
               of
               Ierusalem
               ,
               were
               of
               the
               Popes
               consecration
               :
               Euer
               since
               then
               I
               say
               ,
               the
               Church
               of
               Rome
               ,
               hath
               ,
               and
               doth
               still
               create
               successiuely
               ,
               imaginary
               or
               titular
               Patriarchs
               (
               without
               iurisdiction
               )
               of
               Constantinople
               ,
               Antiochia
               ,
               Ierusalem
               and
               Alexandria
               ,
               so
               loth
               is
               the
               Pope
               ,
               to
               loose
               the
               remembrance
               of
               any
               superiority
               or
               title
               :
               that
               hee
               hath
               once
               compassed
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           Georgians
           ,
           Circassians
           and
           Mengrellians
           .
           CHAP.
           XVII
           .
        
         
           THe
           Georgians
           inhabite
           the
           Country
           ,
           that
           was
           anciently
           named
           Iberia
           ,
           betwixt
           the
           Euxine
           and
           the
           Caspian
           Seas
           :
           inclosed
           with
           
             Sheruan
             (
             Media
          
           )
           East
           :
           with
           
             Mengrelia
             ,
             (
             Colchis
          
           )
           West
           :
           with
           Turcomania
           (
           Armenia
           the
           greater
           )
           South
           :
           *
           
             *
             Volaterran
             .
             l.
             11.
             c.
             de
             Sect.
             Syriae
             Prateo
             l.
             de
             Sectis
             .
             Hae●et
             .
             in
             Verbo
             .
             Georgiani
             .
             &
             Alij
             .
          
           And
           with
           
             Albania
             (
             Zuiria
          
           )
           North.
           The
           vulgar
           opinion
           of
           Historians
           is
           ,
           that
           they
           haue
           obtained
           the
           name
           of
           Georgians
           ,
           from
           their
           deuotion
           to
           S
           
           t.
           George
           ,
           whom
           they
           principally
           honour
           for
           their
           Patron
           :
           and
           whose
           Image
           they
           alwayes
           beare
           in
           their
           military
           Ensignes
           .
           But
           yet
           ,
           (
           as
           I
           take
           it
           )
           this
           vulgar
           opinion
           is
           but
           vulgar
           errour
           :
           
           
             Mela
             l.
             1.
             c.
             2.
             
             Plin.
             l.
             6.
             c.
             13.
             
          
           because
           I
           finde
           mention
           made
           of
           the
           nation
           of
           the
           Georgians
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           both
           in
           Mela
           and
           Plinie
           ,
           afore
           S
           
           t.
           George
           was
           borne
           ,
           whosoeuer
           hee
           was
           .
           Touching
           the
           properties
           of
           whose
           religion
           this
           may
           be
           sufficient
           to
           obserue
           for
           all
           :
           That
           *
           
             *
             Paul.
             Venet.
             lib.
             1
             ca.
             14.
             
          
           it
           is
           the
           same
           both
           in
           substance
           and
           ceremonies
           with
           that
           of
           the
           Grecians
           *
           
             *
             Chitrae
             .
             de
             statu
             Ecclesiat
             .
             pag
             23
             &
             .
             50.
             
             &
             Alij
             .
          
           who
           yet
           are
           in
           no
           sort
           subiect
           (
           neither
           euer
           were
           )
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           :
           but
           all
           their
           Bishops
           (
           being
           18
           )
           professe
           absolute
           obedience
           to
           their
           owne
           Metropolitan
           ,
           without
           any
           other
           higher
           dependance
           or
           relation
           .
           Who
           yet
           keepeth
           residence
           farre
           off
           ,
           in
           the
           Monastry
           of
           
           St.
           Katherine
           in
           the
           Hill
           of
           
             Sinai
             .
             Prateo
             .
             de
             Haeret.
             
             sect
             .
             verbo
             Georgiani
             .
             Bernard
             .
             Lucemburg
             .
             in
             Catalog
             .
             Haeret.
             in
             Georgiani
             .
          
        
         
           Next
           these
           ,
           I
           must
           speake
           a
           little
           of
           their
           next
           neigbours
           ,
           the
           Mengrelians
           and
           Circassians
           ,
           (
           Colchi
           and
           Zychi
           they
           were
           anciently
           called
           )
           seated
           betweene
           the
           Georgians
           and
           the
           Riuer
           Tanais
           ,
           along
           the
           Coast
           of
           Maeotis
           and
           the
           Euxine
           sea
           ,
           as
           being
           also
           Christians
           of
           the
           Greeke
           communion
           ,
           and
           beside
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Bellon
             .
             Obseru
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             35.
             
             Michou
             .
             de
             Sarmatia
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             7.
             
          
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           his
           obedience
           ,
           and
           *
           
             *
             Bellon
             .
             Obseru
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             35.
             
             Michou
             .
             de
             Sarmatia
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             7.
             
          
           conuerted
           by
           his
           Ministers
           Cyrillus
           and
           Methodius
           ,
           to
           Christian
           religion
           .
           Which
           religion
           notwithstanding
           at
           this
           present
           is
           exercised
           among
           them
           ,
           not
           without
           some
           deprauation
           ,
           and
           mixture
           of
           strange
           phantasies
           ,
           
           
             
               Interiano
               della
               vita
               de
               Zychi
               cap.
               1.
               
            
             
               Anan
               .
               Fabrica
               del
               Mondo
               Tratt
               .
               2.
               
            
             
               Boter
               .
               par
               3
               ▪
               l.
               2.
               c.
               
            
          
           for
           the
           Circassians
           baptise
           not
           their
           Children
           till
           the
           eight
           yeare
           ,
           and
           enter
           not
           into
           the
           Church
           ,
           (
           the
           Gentlemen
           especially
           )
           till
           the
           sixtieth
           (
           or
           as
           others
           say
           ,
           till
           the
           fortieth
           )
           yeare
           ,
           but
           heare
           diuine
           seruice
           standing
           without
           the
           Temple
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           till
           through
           age
           ,
           they
           grow
           vnable
           to
           continue
           their
           rapines
           and
           robberies
           ,
           to
           which
           sinne
           ,
           that
           Nation
           is
           exceedingly
           addicted
           .
           So
           deuiding
           their
           life
           betwixt
           sinne
           and
           deuotion
           ,
           dedicating
           their
           youth
           to
           rapine
           ,
           and
           their
           old
           age
           to
           repentance
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           
           
             〈◊〉
             Metropolitan
             .
             Russ.
             in
             epist.
             ad
             Episcop
             .
             Rom.
             apud
             Sigismund
             .
             de
             Rebus
             Muscou
             .
             pag.
             31.
             
          
           Of
           the
           Muscouites
           and
           Russians
           .
           CHAP.
           XVIII
           .
        
         
           THe
           Muscouites
           and
           Russians
           as
           they
           were
           conuerted
           to
           Christianitie
           by
           the
           
             Grecians
             .
             Zonar
             .
             Annal.
             Tom.
          
           3.
           
           
             Cromer
             .
             de
             reb
             .
             Polon
             .
             l.
          
           3.
           so
           haue
           they
           euer
           since
           continued
           of
           the
           Greeke
           communion
           and
           religion
           .
           
           
             Guagin
             .
             descript
             .
             Muscou
             .
             c.
             2.
             
             Sacran
             .
             de
             error
             .
             b.
             Ruthenor
             c.
             2.
             
          
        
         
           1.
           
           Denying
           the
           Holy
           Ghost
           to
           proceede
           from
           the
           Sonne
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           2
           
             2
             Sigism
             .
             lib.
             citato
             .
             pag.
             41
             Sacran
             .
             de
             Relig
             .
             Ruthenor
             .
             cap.
             2.
             
             Scarga
             .
             Polon
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             2.
             
          
           Reiecting
           Purgatorie
           ,
           but
           yet
           praying
           for
           the
           dead
           .
        
         
           3.
           
           3
           
             3
             Scargas
             .
             Polon
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             2.
             
             Guaguin
             .
             descrip
             .
             Moscou
             .
             c.
             2.
             
          
           Beleeuing
           that
           holy
           men
           enioy
           not
           the
           presence
           of
           God
           afore
           the
           Resurrection
           .
        
         
           4.
           
           4
           
             4
             Ioan
             Metropol
             .
             Russ
             vbi
             supra
             pag.
             32.
             
             Guagin
             descr
             .
             Muscou
             .
             ca.
             2.
             
          
           Celebrating
           the
           sacrament
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           ,
           with
           leauened
           bread
           ,
           and
           requiring
           warme
           water
           to
           mingle
           with
           the
           wine
           .
        
         
           5.
           
           5
           
             5
             Sigism
             .
             loc
             .
             citato
             .
             pag.
             40.
             
          
           And
           communicating
           in
           both
           kindes
           ,
        
         
           6.
           
           6
           
             6
             Sigism
             .
             loc
             .
             citato
             pag.
             40.
             
             Guaguin
             .
             loc
             .
             citato
             .
          
           But
           mingling
           both
           together
           in
           the
           Chalice
           ,
           and
           distributing
           it
           together
           with
           a
           spoone
           .
        
         
           7.
           
           7
           
             7
             Guaguin
             .
             Ibid
             .
          
           And
           receiuing
           children
           after
           7.
           years
           old
           to
           the
           cōmunion
           ,
           saying
           that
           at
           that
           age
           they
           begin
           to
           sinne
           against
           God.
           
        
         
           8.
           
           8
           
             8
             Ioan.
             Metropol
             .
             Russ.
             vbi
             supra
             .
             apud
             .
             Sigism
             .
             pag.
             31.
             
             Guagin
             .
             loc
             .
             citato
             .
             Sacran
             .
             de
             errorib
             .
             Ruthenor
             .
             c.
             2.
             
          
           Omitting
           Confirmation
           by
           the
           Bishop
           .
        
         
           9.
           
           9
           
             9
             Sacran
             .
             loc
             .
             citato
             .
          
           Denying
           the
           spirituall
           efficacie
           of
           extreame
           vnction
           .
        
         
           10.
           
           10
           
             10
             Sigism
             .
             lib.
             alleg
             .
             pag.
             47.
             
             Posseuin
             .
             de
             Rebus
             Moscou
             .
             pag.
             2.
             
          
           Excluding
           the
           fourth
           mariage
           as
           vtterlie
           
           vnlawfull
           :
           whereas
           they
           approoue
           not
           the
           second
           ,
           as
           perfectly
           lawfull
           ,
           
           
             Guaguin
             .
             Descript
             .
             Moscou
             .
             cap.
             2.
             
          
           but
           onely
           permit
           it
           ,
           but
           tolerate
           not
           the
           third
           ,
           except
           on
           very
           important
           considerations
           .
        
         
           11.
           
           11
           
             11
             Sacran
             de
             errorib
             .
             Ruthenor
             .
             c.
             2.
             
          
           Dissoluing
           mariage
           by
           diuorcement
           vpon
           euery
           light
           occasion
           or
           displeasure
           .
        
         
           12.
           
           12
           
             12
             Sigism
             .
             lib.
             citat
             .
             pag.
             28.
             
             Scarga
             .
             de
             vno
             pastor
             l.
             3.
             c.
             2.
             
          
           Admitting
           neither
           Deacons
           nor
           Priests
           to
           Orders
           ,
           except
           they
           be
           maried
           :
           but
           yet
           *
           
             *
             Possein
             .
             de
             Reb.
             Moscou
             .
             pag.
             1.
             
             Guaguin
             .
             loc
             .
             citat
             .
          
           prohibiting
           mariage
           to
           them
           being
           actually
           in
           Orders
           .
        
         
           13
           ,
           13
           
             13
             Posseu
             .
             lib.
             allegato
             .
             p.
             44.
             
          
           Reiecting
           carued
           or
           massie
           Images
           ,
           but
           admitting
           the
           painted
           .
        
         
           14.
           
           14
           
             14
             Ioan.
             Metropol
             Russ.
             vbi
             supr
             .
             p.
             3●
             Guaguin
             .
             loc
             .
             allegato
             .
          
           Reputing
           it
           vnlawfull
           to
           fast
           on
           Saturdayes
           .
        
         
           15.
           
           15
           
             15
             Posseu
             .
             ●●
             Moscouia
             .
             pag.
             42.
             
             Sacran
             .
             de
             error
             .
             Ruthen
             .
             cap
             2.
             
          
           Or
           ,
           to
           eate
           of
           that
           which
           is
           strangled
           ,
           or
           of
           bloud
           .
        
         
           16.
           
           16
           
             16
             Guaguin
             .
             loc
             .
             citat
             .
          
           Obseruing
           4
           lents
           in
           the
           yeare
           .
        
         
           17.
           
           17
           
             17
             Sigism
             .
             lib.
             citato
             pag.
             3●
             .
             Boter
             Relat.
             par
             .
             3.
             l.
             1.
             c.
             de
             Moscouia
             .
          
           Refusing
           to
           communicate
           with
           the
           Roman
           Church
           .
        
         
           And
           (
           to
           conclude
           )
           excepting
           the
           difference
           in
           distributing
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           ,
           and
           exacting
           of
           marriage
           in
           their
           Priests
           and
           Deacons
           ,
           there
           is
           not
           any
           materiall
           difference
           in
           points
           of
           religion
           ,
           that
           I
           find
           betwixt
           them
           and
           the
           Grecians
           .
           With
           whom
           ,
           they
           not
           onely
           maintaine
           Communion
           ,
           but
           were
           also
           ,
           and
           that
           not
           long
           since
           ,
           (
           and
           of
           right
           still
           ought
           to
           be
           )
           of
           the
           same
           Iurisdiction
           and
           gouernement
           ,
           for
           *
           
             *
             Posteuin
             .
             Rer.
             Moscou
             .
             Com
             1.
             pag.
             1.
             
             Guaguin
             .
             Descrip
             .
             Moscou
             .
             cap.
             2.
             
          
           their
           chiefe
           Metropolitan
           or
           Primate
           (
           who
           is
           the
           Archbishop
           of
           Mosco
           )
           was
           wont
           to
           bee
           confirmed
           by
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           but
           is
           now
           ,
           and
           hath
           beene
           about
           some
           60
           yeares
           ,
           nominated
           and
           appointed
           by
           the
           Prince
           (
           the
           Emperour
           of
           Russia
           )
           and
           vpon
           that
           nomination
           ,
           consecrated
           by
           two
           or
           three
           of
           his
           owne
           Suffragans
           :
           Of
           whom
           euen
           all
           
           sorts
           together
           .
           Bishops
           and
           Archbishops
           ,
           there
           are
           but
           *
           
             *
             Posse●●
             loco
             proxime
             citato
             Sigism
             .
             in
             Moscou
             .
             pag.
             28.
             
          
           eleuen
           ,
           in
           all
           that
           large
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Emperour
           of
           Russia
           .
        
         
           Thus
           is
           it
           with
           these
           sorts
           of
           Christians
           hitherto
           related
           ,
           touching
           their
           religion
           ,
           and
           gouernours
           .
           All
           which
           (
           as
           you
           may
           easily
           perceaue
           )
           are
           of
           the
           same
           communion
           ,
           and
           in
           effect
           of
           the
           same
           religion
           with
           the
           Grecians
           :
           And
           beside
           these
           ,
           some
           large
           parts
           of
           the
           King
           of
           Polonia
           his
           dominion
           ,
           for
           Podolia
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           most
           part
           *
           
             *
             Boter
             .
             Rel.
             pa.
             1.
             l.
             1.
             c.
             Russia
             .
             Guagu●n
             .
             Description
             M●scou
             .
             c.
             2.
             
          
           
             Russia
             Nigra
          
           ,
           or
           Rubra
           as
           some
           call
           it
           (
           the
           larger
           Russia
           subiect
           for
           the
           greatest
           part
           to
           the
           Duke
           of
           Muscouia
           they
           tearme
           
             Russia
             alba
          
           )
           are
           of
           the
           Greeke
           religion
           .
           And
           although
           the
           Bishops
           of
           South
           Russia
           ,
           subiect
           namely
           to
           the
           King
           of
           Polonia
           ,
           submitted
           themselues
           almost
           20.
           yeares
           agoe
           (
           An.
           1594
           )
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           
             Baron
             .
             Tom.
          
           7.
           
           
             Annal.
             in
             fine
             .
             &
             Posseuin
             .
             in
             Apparsacr
             .
             in
             Rutheni
             .
          
           haue
           recorded
           ,
           yet
           was
           it
           not
           without
           special
           reseruation
           of
           the
           Greeke
           religion
           and
           rites
           ,
           as
           is
           manifest
           by
           the
           articles
           of
           condition
           extant
           .
           
             ap
             .
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             de
             Conu
             .
             gent.
             l.
          
           6.
           pa.
           3.
           ca.
           1.
           pag.
           328
           
             &
             seq
          
           .
           tendered
           by
           them
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           and
           accepted
           ,
           before
           they
           would
           accept
           of
           the
           vnion
           .
           So
           that
           it
           was
           not
           any
           reuolting
           from
           the
           Greeke
           religion
           ,
           but
           onely
           (
           in
           effect
           )
           from
           the
           iurisdiction
           of
           the
           Greeke
           Patriarch
           ,
           to
           the
           Pope
           ,
           and
           that
           also
           with
           sundrie
           limitations
           .
           And
           in
           *
           
             *
             Sigism
             .
             de
             Reb.
             Moscou
             .
             pag.
             27
             Guagu●in
             in
             loco
             iam
             citato
             .
          
           Wilna
           (
           the
           Metropolis
           of
           Lituania
           .
           )
           Although
           the
           Archbishop
           professe
           obedience
           to
           the
           Pope
           ,
           yet
           are
           there
           also
           in
           that
           Citie
           ,
           as
           Sigismund
           hath
           obserued
           ,
           more
           Temples
           of
           the
           Greeke
           religion
           (
           *
           
             *
             Sigism
             .
             de
             Reb.
             Moscou
             .
             pag.
             27
             Guagu●in
             in
             loco
             iam
             citato
             .
          
           there
           be
           30
           of
           them
           )
           then
           of
           the
           Roman
           .
           *
           
             *
             Sigism
             .
             de
             Reb.
             Moscou
             .
             pag.
             27
             Guagu●in
             in
             loco
             iam
             citato
             .
          
           
             Epist.
             ad
             Chitrae
             .
             de
             Relig.
             Russor
             .
          
           
           So
           that
           if
           we
           should
           collect
           and
           put
           together
           all
           the
           Christian
           regions
           hetherto
           intreated
           of
           :
           which
           are
           all
           of
           the
           Greeke
           communion
           :
           And
           compare
           them
           with
           the
           parts
           pofessing
           the
           Roman
           Religion
           ,
           wee
           should
           finde
           the
           Greeke
           farre
           to
           exceede
           ,
           if
           wee
           except
           the
           Romane
           new
           and
           foraine
           purchases
           ,
           made
           in
           the
           West
           ,
           and
           East
           Indias
           .
        
      
       
         
           Of
           the
           Nestorians
           .
           CHAP.
           XIX
           .
        
         
           THe
           Nestorians
           ,
           who
           haue
           purchased
           that
           name
           ,
           by
           their
           ancient
           imitation
           ,
           and
           maintaining
           of
           Nestorius
           his
           heresie
           ,
           inhabite
           (
           though
           euery
           where
           mingled
           with
           Mahumetans
           ,
           or
           with
           Pagans
           )
           a
           great
           part
           of
           the
           Orient
           ,
           for
           besides
           the
           cuntries
           of
           Babilon
           ,
           and
           Assyria
           ,
           and
           Mesopotamia
           ,
           and
           Parthia
           ,
           and
           Media
           ,
           wherein
           verie
           manie
           of
           them
           are
           found
           ,
           that
           sect
           is
           spred
           and
           scattered
           farre
           and
           wide
           in
           the
           East
           ,
           both
           Northerly
           to
           Cataya
           ,
           and
           Southerly
           to
           India
           .
           So
           that
           in
           
             Marcus
             Paulus
          
           his
           historie
           of
           the
           East
           regions
           ,
           and
           in
           *
           
             *
             Guil.
             de
             Rubr.
             It●
             .
             Tart.
             c.
             Paul.
             Venet.
             1
             l.
             1.
             c.
             38.2
             .
             l.
             eod
             .
             c.
             39.3
             c.
             40.4
             c.
             47.5
             .
             c.
             45.
             
             &
             49.6
             .
             c.
             48.7
             .
             c.
             62.8
             c
             64.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             39.
             l.
             eod
             .
             c.
             61
             &
             64.
             &c.
             
          
           others
           ,
           we
           finde
           mention
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           of
           no
           sect
           of
           Christians
           but
           them
           ,
           in
           very
           many
           parts
           and
           prouinces
           of
           Tartarie
           :
           As
           namely
           in
           1
           Cassar
           ,
           2
           Samarchan
           ,
           3
           Carcham
           ,
           4
           Chinchintalas
           ,
           5
           Tanguth
           ,
           6
           Suchuir
           ,
           7
           Ergimul
           ,
           8
           Tenduch
           ,
           9
           Caraiam
           ,
           
           10
           Mangi
           ,
           &c.
           
           Insomuch
           ,
           that
           beyond
           the
           riuer
           Tigris
           Eastward
           ,
           there
           is
           not
           anie
           other
           sect
           of
           Christians
           to
           be
           found
           ,
           for
           ought
           I
           can
           reade
           ,
           except
           onely
           the
           Portugales
           ,
           and
           the
           conuerts
           made
           by
           them
           in
           India
           ,
           and
           the
           late
           migration
           of
           the
           Armenians
           into
           Persia.
           
        
         
           The
           reason
           of
           which
           large
           spreading
           and
           preuailing
           of
           that
           sect
           so
           farre
           in
           the
           orient
           ,
           if
           you
           enquire
           I
           finde
           to
           that
           purpose
           ,
           recorded
           by
           
             Paulus
             Diaconus
          
           of
           Cosrhoes
           the
           King
           of
           Persia
           ,
           
           
             Paul.
             Diacon
             .
             Histor.
             Miscel.
             l.
             18
             ,
          
           that
           he
           for
           the
           mortall
           hatred
           hee
           bare
           the
           Emperour
           Heracl●us
           ,
           by
           whom
           he
           had
           beene
           sore
           afflicted
           with
           a
           grieuous
           warre
           ,
           inforced
           all
           the
           Christians
           of
           the
           Persian
           Empire
           to
           Nestorianisme
           permitting
           no
           catholiques
           to
           remaine
           in
           all
           his
           dominions
           .
           By
           whose
           preaching
           ,
           the
           Christian
           religion
           being
           farre
           there
           inlarged
           and
           propagated
           into
           the
           East
           (
           as
           it
           seemes
           both
           because
           those
           of
           the
           Persian
           dominion
           ,
           were
           more
           Eastwardly
           then
           other
           Christians
           ,
           and
           because
           it
           is
           certaine
           ,
           that
           all
           of
           them
           till
           this
           day
           acknowledge
           obedience
           to
           the
           Nestorian
           Patriarch
           in
           Mesopotamia
           ,
           which
           Country
           was
           then
           part
           of
           the
           Persian
           dominion
           :
           )
           It
           is
           no
           wonder
           if
           sowing
           their
           owne
           tares
           and
           Christes
           wheate
           together
           ,
           they
           propagated
           with
           the
           gospell
           also
           there
           owne
           heresie
           .
           Shortly
           after
           which
           time
           ,
           the
           Sarracens
           of
           
             Arabia
             (
             Mahumetans
          
           )
           conquering
           Persia
           ,
           and
           bringing
           their
           religion
           ,
           together
           with
           their
           victories
           into
           all
           that
           large
           dominion
           ,
           there
           remained
           but
           little
           outward
           meanes
           and
           slender
           hope
           of
           their
           repaire
           and
           reformation
           from
           any
           sound
           part
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           (
           from
           which
           they
           were
           more
           now
           then
           afore
           diuided
           )
           
           except
           what
           affliction
           and
           time
           ,
           and
           the
           grace
           of
           God
           might
           worke
           and
           repaire
           in
           them
           .
        
         
           Now
           touching
           their
           ecclesiasticall
           gouernment
           :
           The
           patriarch
           of
           the
           Nestorians
           ,
           to
           whom
           all
           those
           of
           the
           East
           parts
           ,
           acknowledge
           obedience
           (
           a
           number
           of
           whose
           suffragan
           Bishops
           and
           Metropolitans
           ,
           
           
             Sand
             de
             Visibil
             .
             Monarch
             .
             l.
             7.
             
             An.
             1556.
             
             Paul
             Venet.
             l.
             1.
             ca.
             15.
             
          
           you
           haue
           reckoned
           vp
           in
           Sanders
           booke
           
             de
             Visibili
             Monarchia
          
           ,
           and
           whom
           they
           call
           Iacelich
           ,
           saith
           
             Paulus
             Venetus
             Brochardus
          
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           but
           mistake
           it
           (
           or
           else
           they
           of
           the
           East
           pronounce
           it
           amisse
           )
           for
           Catholich
           ,
           
           
             Brocard
             .
             Descript
             .
             Tert.
             sanct
             .
             Leunclau
             .
             Pand.
             Histor
             Turc
             .
             §.
             3.
             
          
           as
           is
           obserued
           by
           Leunclauius
           )
           hath
           his
           seat
           in
           the
           Cittie
           of
           Muzal
           ,
           on
           the
           riuer
           Tygris
           in
           Mesopotamia
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           Patriarchall
           Monasterie
           of
           S.
           Ermes
           fast
           by
           
             Muzal
             .
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pag.
           3.
           c.
           4.
           
           In
           which
           Citie
           ,
           though
           subiect
           to
           Mahumetans
           ,
           it
           is
           *
           
             *
             Aubret
             .
             M●rae
             .
             Notitiae
             .
             Episcopor
             .
             Orb.
             pag.
             35.
             
             Mas.
             in
             Ortel
             .
             in
             Thesaur
             .
             in
             Seleucia
             .
             Plin.
             l.
             5.
             c.
             25.
             
             Strab.
             l.
             26.
             longa●ite
             Med.
             
          
           recorded
           ,
           that
           the
           Nestorians
           retaine
           yet
           ,
           15.
           temples
           ,
           being
           esteemed
           about
           40000
           soules
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           par
           .
           1.
           c.
           4.
           &
           the
           Iacobits
           .
           3.
           which
           Citie
           of
           Musal
           ,
           I
           either
           take
           with
           Masius
           and
           Ortelius
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           same
           ,
           that
           anciently
           was
           called
           Selutia
           (
           and
           in
           
             Plinie
             Seleutia
             Parthorum
          
           )
           both
           because
           Seleutia
           was
           ,
           as
           Strabo
           saith
           ,
           the
           Metropolis
           of
           Assyria
           ,
           euen
           as
           *
           
             *
             Guili●l
             .
             Tyrius
             de
             Bel.
             sac●o
             .
             l
             21
             c.
             8.
             
          
           Musal
           is
           recorded
           to
           be
           :
           And
           also
           ,
           because
           I
           finde
           the
           ecclesiasticall
           iurisdiction
           of
           those
           parts
           ,
           committed
           by
           the
           fathers
           of
           *
           
             *
             Concil
             .
             Nicen
             .
             Arab.
             l.
             3.
             c
             33
             &
             34.
             
          
           the
           Nicene
           councell
           ,
           to
           the
           bishop
           of
           Seleucia
           ,
           assigning
           him
           with
           all
           ,
           the
           name
           of
           Catholique
           ,
           and
           the
           next
           place
           of
           Session
           in
           councels
           after
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           which
           name
           and
           authoritie
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Mozal
           now
           hath
           .
           Or
           if
           Seleucia
           ,
           were
           
           some
           other
           citie
           ,
           
           
             Muzal
             ,
             the
             patriarchall
             seate
             of
             the
             Nestorians
             ,
             is
             either
             a
             remainder
             of
             the
             ancient
             Niniue
             ,
             as
             Vitriacus
             ,
             and
             Tyrius
             (
             who
             therefore
             in
             his
             historie
             calleth
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             that
             Citie
             ,
             Niniuites
             )
             haue
             recorded
             :
             Or
             at
             least
             ,
             built
             neere
             the
             Ruines
             of
             it
             :
             Namely
             ,
             ouer
             against
             it
             ,
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             riuer
             Tigris
             ,
             as
             by
             Beniamin
             ,
             who
             diligently
             viewed
             the
             place
             ,
             is
             obserued
             ,
             for
             Niniue
             (
             which
             hee
             noteth
             to
             bee
             dissolued
             into
             scattered
             villages
             ,
             and
             castles
             )
             stoode
             on
             the
             East
             bancke
             of
             Tigris
             ,
             on
             Assyria
             side
             :
             whereas
             Muzal
             is
             seated
             on
             the
             West
             banke
             on
             Mesopotamia
             side
             ,
             being
             yet
             both
             ioyned
             together
             ,
             by
             a
             Bridge
             made
             ouer
             Tigris
             .
          
           now
           distroyed
           ,
           
           
             Vitriac
             .
             histor
             Oriental
             .
             c.
             3●
             Tir.
             de
             Bel.
             sacro
             .
             l.
             21.
             c.
             8.
             
          
           as
           for
           certaine
           reasons
           I
           am
           induced
           rather
           to
           thinke
           ,
           yet
           at
           least
           ,
           the
           Patriarcall
           seate
           was
           frō
           Seleucia
           translated
           to
           Muzal
           ,
           for
           the
           opinion
           of
           Scaliger
           ,
           
           
             Scalig.
             ad
             Ch●on
             Eusebij
             An.
             M.D.
             CCXIII.
             
          
           namly
           ,
           that
           Seleucia
           was
           the
           same
           ,
           that
           is
           now
           called
           Bagded
           ,
           
           
             Beniamin
             .
             in
             Itinerar
             .
             in
             Medio
             .
          
           or
           new
           Babilon
           ,
           my
           obseruations
           in
           Geographie
           and
           historie
           ,
           will
           not
           suffer
           mee
           to
           approoue
           .
           First
           because
           Seleucia
           is
           remembred
           by
           Strabo
           to
           be
           300
           furlongs
           (
           37
           miles
           and
           one
           or
           two
           )
           Plinie
           saith
           ,
           
           
             Strabo
             .
             l.
             16.
             
             Plin.
             l.
             6.
             c.
             26.
             
          
           a
           great
           deale
           more
           ,
           distant
           from
           Babilon
           ,
           whereas
           Bagdet
           is
           built
           close
           by
           the
           ruines
           of
           it
           .
           Secōdly
           ,
           because
           I
           finde
           the
           positiō
           of
           Seleucia
           in
           Ptolomie
           to
           bee
           two
           third
           parts
           of
           a
           degree
           ,
           
           
             Ptolom
             .
             Geog.
             l
             ▪
             6.
             c.
             18
             &
             20.
             
             Dion
             .
             Histor.
             l.
             10.
             
             Plin.
             l.
             6.
             c.
             26.
             
          
           more
           North
           then
           that
           of
           Babilon
           whereas
           Bagdet
           is
           more
           South
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           because
           in
           Dion
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           Seleucia
           is
           named
           for
           a
           Citie
           of
           Mesopotamia
           ,
           which
           Bagded
           is
           not
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           prouince
           of
           
           Babilon
           ,
           as
           being
           beneath
           the
           confluence
           of
           Tigris
           and
           Euphrates
           .
        
         
           The
           Bishop
           of
           Muzal
           then
           ,
           is
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           Nestorians
           .
           But
           yet
           at
           this
           present
           ,
           if
           the
           *
           
             *
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             par
             3.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             de
             Nestoriani
             .
             Thom.
             a
             Ies.
             de
             con●ers
             .
             gen●
             l.
             7
             〈…〉
             c
             ●
             &
          
           relations
           of
           these
           times
           be
           true
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           distraction
           of
           that
           sect
           :
           which
           began
           about
           60
           yeares
           agoe
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Pope
           Iulius
           the
           third
           :
           the
           Nestorians
           in
           the
           North
           part
           of
           Mesopotamia
           (
           about
           the
           Citie
           of
           Caramit
           )
           submitting
           themselues
           to
           another
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           Popes
           erecting
           (
           that
           reuolting
           from
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Muzal
           ,
           taking
           also
           on
           him
           ,
           the
           title
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Muzal
           ,
           which
           the
           Pope
           bestowed
           on
           him
           )
           hauing
           first
           rendred
           and
           professed
           obedience
           to
           the
           Sea
           of
           Rome
           ,
           in
           which
           obedience
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           that
           those
           Nestorians
           about
           Caramit
           doe
           still
           continue
           .
        
         
           Now
           touching
           the
           specialties
           of
           these
           Nestorians
           religion
           ,
           in
           relation
           to
           the
           Roman
           :
           they
           beleeue
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           1
           
             1
             Vtriac
             .
             Hist
             Orient
             .
             c.
             78.
             
          
           that
           there
           are
           two
           persons
           in
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           two
           natures
           ,
           but
           yet
           confesse
           ,
           that
           Christ
           from
           the
           first
           instant
           of
           his
           conception
           ,
           was
           perfect
           God
           and
           perfect
           man.
           
             Th.
             a.
             Ies.
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           2
           
             2
             Id.
             loco
             citat●
             
          
           that
           the
           blessed
           Virgin
           ought
           not
           to
           be
           termed
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           which
           yet
           now
           in
           some
           sort
           they
           *
           
             *
             Bo●er
             .
             Relat
             pa.
             3.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             de
             Nestoriani
             ▪
             Thom.
             a
             Ies
             de
             conu
             gent.
             l.
             7.
             c.
             2.
             
          
           qualifie
           ,
           confessing
           hir
           to
           be
           the
           Mother
           of
           God
           the
           Sonne
           ,
           but
           yet
           refusing
           to
           terme
           her
           the
           Mother
           of
           God.
           
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           3
           
             3
             Boter
             .
             loco
             proxim
             .
             citat
             .
          
           that
           Nestorians
           condemned
           in
           the
           third
           and
           fourth
           generall
           councels
           ,
           and
           
             Diodorus
             Tar
             sensis
          
           ,
           and
           
             Theodorus
             Mopsuestensis
          
           ,
           condemned
           for
           Nestorianisme
           in
           the
           fifth
           ,
           were
           holy
           men
           :
           Reiecting
           
           for
           their
           sake
           ,
           the
           third
           generall
           councell
           held
           at
           Ephesus
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           councels
           after
           it
           ,
           and
           specially
           detesting
           (
           the
           mall
           of
           Nestorianisme
           )
           Cyrill
           of
           
             Alexandria
             .
             Th.
             a.
             Ies.
             Ibid.
             
          
        
         
           4
           
             4
             
               Vitriac
               .
               Histor
               .
               Orient
               .
               78.
               
            
             
               Villamont
               .
               en
               voyages
               .
               l.
               2.
               c.
               23.
               
            
          
           4.
           
           They
           celebrate
           the
           Sacrament
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           ,
           with
           leauened
           bread
           .
        
         
           5.
           
           They
           communicate
           in
           both
           kinds
           .
        
         
           6.
           
           They
           vse
           not
           auricular
           confession
           .
        
         
           
           
             Villam
             .
             loc
             citat
             .
          
           7.
           
           Nor
           confirmation
           .
        
         
           6
           
             6
             Et.
             7.
             
             Sulak
             .
             Nestoriā
             .
             profess
             .
             Tom.
             4.
             
             Biblioth
             .
             Vet
             Patrum
             .
             pag.
             1054.
             
          
           8.
           
           They
           contract
           marriage
           in
           the
           second
           degree
           of
           consanguinity
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           9.
           
           Their
           Priests
           after
           the
           death
           of
           their
           first
           wiues
           ,
           haue
           the
           liberty
           of
           the
           second
           or
           third
           or
           oftner
           marriage
           .
           
             Th.
             a.
             Ies.
             Ibib.
          
           
        
         
           8
           
             8
             Gulielm
             .
             de
             Rubric
             .
             Itiner
             .
             Tartar.
             C.
             17.
             
          
           10.
           
           They
           haue
           not
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Crucifix
           on
           their
           crosses
           .
        
      
       
         
           Of
           the
           Indians
           or
           Christians
           of
           S
           
             
             t.
          
           Thomas
           .
           CHAP.
           XX.
           
        
         
           THe
           Christians
           of
           India
           ,
           vulgarly
           named
           the
           Christians
           of
           
             S.
             Thomas
          
           ,
           because
           by
           his
           preaching
           they
           are
           supposed
           to
           haue
           beene
           conuerted
           to
           Christian
           Religion
           :
           (
           and
           his
           bodie
           as
           is
           thought
           ,
           remaineth
           among
           thē
           ,
           buried
           in
           the
           citie
           of
           Maliapar
           on
           the
           coast
           of
           Choromandel
           )
           inhabite
           in
           the
           neerer
           part
           of
           India
           :
           namely
           in
           that
           great
           Promontory
           ,
           whose
           base
           lying
           betweene
           the
           
           outlets
           of
           the
           riuers
           Indus
           &
           Ganges
           ,
           stretcheth
           out
           the
           sides
           far
           toward
           the
           South
           ,
           (
           well
           nigh
           1000.
           miles
           )
           till
           meeting
           in
           the
           point
           of
           Comori
           ,
           they
           make
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           base
           line
           forementioned
           ,
           (
           betwixt
           Cambaia
           ,
           and
           Bengala
           )
           the
           figure
           almost
           of
           an
           equilateral
           Triangle
           .
           In
           the
           more
           southerly
           part
           of
           this
           great
           promontory
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           neerer
           to
           Cape
           Comori
           ,
           about
           the
           cities
           of
           Coulan
           and
           Cranganor
           on
           the
           west
           side
           ,
           and
           about
           Maliapur
           and
           Negapatan
           on
           the
           East
           side
           ,
           doe
           these
           Christians
           of
           Saint
           Thomas
           dwell
           ,
           being
           esteemed
           afore
           the
           Portugals
           frequēted
           those
           parts
           ,
           about
           *
           
             *
             Sommar
             .
             ●
             .
             popoli
             Oriē●ap
             Ramus
             .
             Vol
             l.
             de
             V●agg●
             .
             p.
             332.
             
          
           15000.
           or
           *
           
             *
             Barbosa
             eod
             .
             vol.
             pag.
             312.
             
          
           16000.
           families
           ,
           or
           after
           anothers
           account
           *
           
             *
             Boter
             Rei
             .
             p.
             3.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             della
             .
             noua
             Christianita
             d'India
             .
          
           70000.
           persons
           .
           but
           on
           the
           west
           coast
           ,
           the
           farre
           greater
           number
           of
           them
           is
           found
           ,
           and
           especially
           their
           habitation
           is
           thickest
           ,
           about
           Angamale
           ,
           15.
           miles
           from
           the
           citie
           Cochin
           northward
           ,
           where
           their
           Archbishop
           keepeth
           residence
           .
        
         
           Now
           as
           touching
           their
           gouernement
           :
           Their
           Archbishop
           till
           20.
           yeares
           since
           or
           little
           more
           ,
           acknowledged
           obediēce
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Mozal
           ,
           *
           
             *
             
               Boter
               .
               Relat.
               p.
               3.
               l.
               2.
               c.
               dell●
               vecchia
               Christi●n
               〈◊〉
               d'India
               .
            
             
               Th.
               a
               Ies
               de
               conu
               .
               G●nt
               .
               l.
               7
               pa.
               l.
               c.
               4.
               
            
          
           by
           the
           name
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Babilon
           ,
           as
           by
           those
           Christians
           of
           India
           he
           is
           still
           tearmed
           :
           and
           certainly
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Pausan.
             in
             Attici●ante
             med
             .
          
           that
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Mozal
           *
           
             *
             For
             Mozal
             as
             I
             said
             afore
             ,
             is
             either
             Seleucia
             ,
             or
             succeeded
             into
             the
             dignity
             of
             it
             .
             And
             Seleucia
             is
             recorded
             to
             haue
             beene
             inhabited
             by
             the
             cittizens
             of
             Babilon
             ,
             whereof
             it
             was
             a
             Colony
             :
             And
             such
             a
             Colony
             ,
             as
             in
             short
             time
             it
             *
             
               *
               Th.
               a
               Ies.
               de
               conu
               .
               gent.
               l.
               7.
               part
               .
               1.
               c.
               4.
               
            
             exhausted
             Babilon
             it selfe
             ,
             of
             all
             the
             Inhabitans
             ,
             passing
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             more
             cōmodious
             situation
             ,
             to
             dwell
             at
             Seleucia
             .
             So
             that
             Seleucia
             beeing
             inhabited
             by
             the
             Babilonians
             ,
             and
             so
             becomming
             in
             stead
             of
             Babilon
             ,
             the
             principall
             citty
             of
             the
             Prouinces
             of
             Babilonia
             ,
             and
             Assyria
             ,
             the
             citty
             *
             
               *
               Plin.
               loco
               proxim
               .
               citato
               
            
             obtained
             the
             name
             of
             Babilon
             of
             her
             inhabitants
             ,
             (
             as
             well
             as
             Seleucia
             of
             her
             founder
             )
             as
             Plinie
             hath
             recorded
             :
             And
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             it
             ,
             the
             title
             of
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             Babilon
             .
             And
             although
             *
             
               *
               Apud
               Ramus
               vol.
               1.
               de
               viaggi
               .
               p.
               313.
               
            
             Barbosa
             note
             ,
             that
             subordination
             of
             the
             christians
             of
             India
             ,
             to
             be
             to
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             Armenia
             ,
             (
             which
             no
             doubt
             he
             receiued
             from
             the
             Indians
             relation
             ,
             among
             whom
             he
             was
             )
             yet
             certaine
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             hee
             meaneth
             no
             other
             ,
             then
             this
             patriarch
             of
             Mozal
             :
             because
             those
             Armenians
             which
             he
             meaneth
             ,
             are
             by
             himselfe
             obserued
             to
             haue
             for
             their
             vulgar
             language
             ,
             the
             Arabique
             tongue
             ,
             &
             to
             celebrate
             their
             diuine
             seruice
             ,
             in
             the
             Chaldee
             ,
             both
             which
             agree
             with
             the
             Christians
             of
             Mozal
             ,
             but
             neither
             of
             both
             with
             those
             of
             Armenia
             ,
             whose
             language
             both
             in
             the
             vulgar
             and
             sacred
             vse
             ,
             is
             knowne
             to
             bee
             no
             other
             then
             the
             Armenian
             tongue
             .
             As
             also
             ,
             because
             the
             Indians
             are
             known
             to
             haue
             bin
             Nestorians
             ,
             to
             which
             heresie
             the
             Armenians
             were
             most
             opposite
             ,
             as
             beeing
             in
             a
             manner
             Iacobites
             .
             But
             as
             it
             seemeth
             ,
             that
             Patriarch
             is
             saide
             to
             haue
             beene
             of
             Armenia
             ,
             for
             the
             nearenesse
             of
             Mozal
             to
             the
             confines
             of
             Armenia
             .
          
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Plin.
             l
             6.
             c.
             26
             
          
           challengeth
           their
           obedience
           ,
           as
           being
           of
           his
           Iurisdiction
           
           appeareth
           by
           the
           profession
           of
           Abil-Isu
           ,
           a
           Patriarch
           of
           Mozal
           ,
           of
           Pope
           Pius
           the
           fourth
           his
           Inuesting
           (
           An.
           1562
           )
           as
           is
           to
           be
           seene
           in
           Sanders
           booke
           
             de
             visicili
             Monarchia
          
           .
           
           
             Sander
             visib
             .
             Monarch
             .
             l.
             7.
             pag.
             642.
             
          
           But
           then
           ,
           the
           Archbishop
           of
           these
           Indians
           ,
           reuolting
           from
           his
           former
           Patriarch
           ,
           submitted
           himselfe
           by
           the
           Portugalls
           perswasion
           ,
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           ●etayning
           notwithstāding
           ,
           the
           ancient
           religiō
           of
           his
           cuntry
           ,
           which
           was
           also
           permitted
           by
           the
           Pope
           .
           In
           so
           much
           ,
           that
           in
           a
           Synode
           held
           in
           Goa
           ,
           for
           that
           purpose
           ,
           hee
           would
           not
           suffer
           any
           alteration
           to
           bee
           
           made
           of
           their
           ancient
           rites
           or
           religion
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Linsel●ot
             .
             l.
             1
             cap.
             ●5
             .
          
           as
           one
           that
           liued
           in
           those
           parts
           at
           that
           time
           hath
           recorded
           .
           But
           that
           Bishop
           beeing
           dead
           ,
           his
           successour
           in
           another
           Synode
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Posseuin
             .
             in
             Apparat.
             sacro
             in
             D●amperi●●se
             conciliū
             .
          
           held
           by
           the
           Archbishop
           of
           Goa
           ,
           at
           Diamper
           ,
           not
           farre
           from
           Maliapur
           ,
           An.
           1599.
           made
           profession
           ,
           together
           with
           his
           suffragans
           ,
           and
           Priests
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           Roman
           obedience
           ,
           and
           religion
           ,
           renouncing
           in
           such
           direct
           sort
           ,
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Mozal
           ,
           and
           Nestorianisme
           ,
           that
           they
           deliuered
           vp
           all
           their
           books
           ,
           to
           the
           censure
           of
           the
           Archbishop
           of
           Goa
           ,
           and
           suffered
           their
           Liturgie
           ,
           in
           the
           points
           that
           relished
           of
           Nestorianisme
           to
           be
           altered
           ,
           euen
           in
           such
           sort
           as
           now
           it
           is
           to
           be
           seene
           in
           the
           last
           Edition
           of
           
             Bibliotheca
             veteriem
             Patrum
          
           .
           
           
             Biblioth
             .
             vet
             .
             Pat
             Auctorij
             Tom.
             2.
             in
             fine
             .
          
        
         
           But
           before
           this
           alteration
           of
           their
           religion
           was
           procured
           by
           the
           Portugals
           ,
           those
           Christians
           of
           India
           were
           Nestorians
           ,
           1
           
             1
             Osorius
             de
             Rel.
             Emmanuel
             .
             l.
             3.
             
             Boter
             .
             Rel.
             p.
             3.
             l.
             2.
             ca.
             della
             vecchia
             Christianitad
             India
             .
          
           as
           hauing
           the
           dependance
           that
           I
           related
           ,
           on
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           Nestorians
           ,
           they
           could
           not
           well
           bee
           any
           other
           .
           Some
           specialties
           of
           whose
           religion
           I
           finde
           thus
           recorded
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           That
           they
           distributed
           the
           Sacrament
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           in
           both
           kinds
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           That
           they
           celebrated
           it
           with
           bread
           seasoned
           with
           salt
           ,
           2
           
             2
             Odoard
             .
             Barbos
             .
             ap
             .
             Ramus
             .
             Vol.
             1.
             pag.
             313.
             
          
           (
           
             pane
             salato
          
           ,
           saith
           my
           Historian
           )
           and
           in
           stead
           of
           wine
           ,
           (
           because
           India
           affordeth
           none
           )
           in
           the
           iuice
           of
           Raisons
           ,
           softened
           one
           night
           in
           water
           &
           
           so
           pressed
           forth
           .
        
         
           3
           
             3
             Nauigat
             .
             Ioseph
             :
             Indi
             ,
             inter
             Relationes
             Noui
             orbis
             .
             c.
             134.
             
          
           3
           That
           they
           baptized
           not
           their
           infants
           till
           they
           were
           40.
           daies
           old
           ,
           except
           in
           danger
           of
           death
           .
        
         
           4.
           
           That
           they
           vsed
           not
           extreame
           vnction
           .
        
         
           4
           
             4
             Ioseph
             .
             Ind.
             lib.
             citato
             .
             ca.
             134.
             
          
           5.
           
           That
           their
           Priests
           were
           married
           ,
           but
           excluded
           from
           the
           second
           matrimony
           .
           
             Osor.
             de
             Reb.
             Emanuel
             .
             l.
          
           3.
           
        
         
           5
           
             5
             Osor.
             loco
             ante
             citato
             .
             Posseu
             .
             in
             Appara
             .
             sacro
             .
             in
             Diamperiense
             consilium
             .
             Thet.
             cos
             .
             l.
             10.
             ca.
             15.
             
          
           6.
           
           That
           they
           had
           no
           images
           of
           Saints
           in
           their
           Churches
           ,
           but
           onely
           the
           crosse
           .
        
         
           7.
           
           That
           detesting
           (
           the
           Mall
           of
           Nestorianisme
           )
           Cyrill
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           they
           honoured
           Nestorius
           and
           Dioscorus
           as
           Saints
           ,
           which
           yet
           mee
           thinks
           were
           strange
           ,
           being
           of
           so
           contrary
           opiniōs
           ,
           6
           
             6
             Ioseph
             .
             Ind.
             vbi
             supra
             .
             c.
             133.
             
          
           as
           they
           were
           ,
           the
           first
           ,
           for
           two
           persons
           in
           Christ
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           two
           natures
           :
           the
           second
           ,
           for
           one
           nature
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           one
           Person
           ;
           7
           
             7
             Posseu
             .
             loco
             lam
             citato
             .
          
           but
           it
           may
           be
           that
           Dioscorus
           is
           by
           the
           relater
           mistaken
           for
           Diodorus
           ,
           who
           was
           indeed
           a
           great
           Nestorian
           ,
           and
           for
           it
           condemned
           in
           the
           fifth
           general
           Councell
           .
        
         
           8
           
             8
             Posseu
             .
             loco
             citato
             .
          
           8.
           
           That
           they
           denied
           the
           Primacy
           of
           the
           Pope
           .
        
         
           9
           
             9
             Posseu
             .
             in
             Apparat.
             sacro
             in
             Nesto●iani
             .
          
           9.
           
           That
           their
           new
           Testament
           which
           in
           their
           Churches
           they
           formerly
           read
           ,
           (
           and
           still
           doe
           )
           in
           the
           Syriaque
           toung
           ,
           was
           by
           the
           Nestorians
           in
           sundry
           places
           ,
           which
           are
           now
           altered
           by
           the
           Romans
           ,
           corrupted
           to
           the
           aduantage
           of
           that
           heresie
           ,
           wherin
           yet
           ,
           I
           thinke
           the
           reporter
           is
           deceaued
           :
           because
           the
           same
           corruptions
           obiected
           to
           them
           ,
           (
           wherof
           some
           are
           no
           corruptions
           at
           all
           ,
           but
           agree
           rightly
           with
           the
           originall
           text
           ,
           and
           much
           better
           then
           doth
           the
           vulgar
           Latine
           ,
           by
           comparing
           whereof
           he
           examines
           them
           ,
           and
           censures
           them
           for
           corruptions
           )
           the
           same
           I
           say
           ,
           are
           found
           in
           the
           Syriaque
           edition
           that
           wee
           
           haue
           ,
           being
           so
           farre
           from
           being
           corrupted
           by
           the
           Nestorians
           ,
           
           
             Widmanstad
             .
             in
             praef
             .
             Testā
             ▪
             Syriaci
             .
          
           that
           it
           was
           brought
           out
           of
           Mesopotamia
           into
           Europe
           (
           to
           be
           printed
           by
           
             Moses
             Mardenus
          
           ,
           from
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           contrary
           sect
           ,
           namely
           ,
           of
           the
           Iacobites
           .
           But
           yet
           notwithstanding
           ,
           I
           am
           indeede
           certainly
           perswaded
           ,
           that
           the
           Syriaque
           translation
           of
           the
           new
           Testament
           (
           whosoeuer
           was
           the
           Authour
           of
           it
           )
           is
           nothing
           neere
           of
           that
           Antiquity
           ,
           
           
             The
             Imperfections
             of
             the
             Syriaque
             edition
             ,
             consist
             partly
             in
             sundry
             defects
             :
             namely
             1.
             of
             all
             the
             Reuelation
             :
             2.
             of
             the
             Epistle
             of
             S.
             Iude
             :
             3.
             of
             the
             second
             epistle
             of
             S.
             Peter
             :
             4.
             of
             the
             secōd
             and
             third
             Epistles
             of
             S.
             Iohn
             :
             5.
             of
             the
             history
             of
             the
             Woman
             taken
             in
             adultery
             ,
             in
             the
             eight
             chapter
             of
             S.
             Iohns
             Gospel
             ,
             containing
             the
             first
             eleuen
             verses
             :
             and
             6.
             of
             the
             7.
             verse
             of
             the
             fifth
             Chapter
             of
             the
             first
             Epistle
             of
             S.
             Iohn
             .
             Of
             which
             ,
             the
             two
             last
             wants
             are
             no
             lesse
             foūd
             in
             sundry
             auncient
             Greeke
             copies
             ,
             as
             
               Erasmus
               ,
               Beza
               ,
               Iunius
            
             &
             others
             haue
             obserued
             :
             And
             partly
             ;
             beside
             these
             defects
             ,
             in
             some
             (
             very
             few
             )
             faulty
             translations
             .
          
           which
           the
           Syrians
           (
           as
           Bellarmine
           and
           others
           report
           of
           them
           )
           pretend
           it
           to
           bee
           ,
           
           
             Bellar.
             de
             Verbo
             Dei.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             4.
             
          
           namely
           to
           haue
           bene
           the
           work
           of
           S.
           Marke
           .
           First
           ,
           because
           S.
           Mark
           died
           in
           the
           8.
           yeare
           of
           Nero
           ,
           
           
             Hieron
             .
             de
             Scriptorib
             Ecclesi●sticis
             ,
             in
             Ma
             c
             Erasmus
             .
             Beza
             .
             Iunius
             .
             in
             .
             Annot
             .
             ad
             loc
             .
             praedict
             .
          
           as
           Hierome
           with
           others
           hath
           certainely
           recorded
           ,
           after
           which
           time
           ,
           many
           parts
           of
           the
           new
           Testament
           ,
           were
           written
           :
           as
           namely
           S.
           Iohns
           Gospell
           ,
           the
           Acts
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           (
           for
           all
           the
           History
           from
           the
           24.
           chapter
           to
           the
           ende
           ,
           relateth
           occurents
           after
           S.
           Markes
           death
           )
           the
           Epistles
           of
           
           S.
           Paul
           to
           the
           Galathians
           ,
           Ephesians
           ,
           Philippians
           ,
           Collossians
           ,
           to
           Philemon
           ,
           and
           the
           second
           to
           Timothy
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           because
           that
           Syriaque
           translation
           is
           not
           to
           bee
           found
           once
           mentioned
           ,
           in
           any
           of
           all
           those
           ancient
           and
           learned
           writers
           ,
           that
           liued
           in
           those
           east
           parts
           ,
           and
           diligently
           sought
           out
           and
           obserued
           the
           seuerall
           editions
           and
           translations
           of
           the
           holy
           scripture
           .
           And
           thirdly
           ,
           because
           the
           dialect
           discouereth
           it
           to
           be
           of
           a
           farre
           later
           age
           ,
           then
           that
           of
           the
           Apostles
           :
           which
           they
           will
           soone
           finde
           to
           be
           so
           ,
           (
           to
           omit
           some
           other
           euidences
           )
           that
           shall
           compare
           the
           Syriaque
           words
           recorded
           in
           the
           new
           Testament
           by
           the
           Euangelists
           ,
           (
           which
           all
           are
           noted
           by
           Hierome
           and
           by
           others
           )
           with
           the
           Syriaque
           booke
           :
           as
           for
           example
           ,
           
           
             Hieron
             .
             l.
             de
             Nominib
             .
             Hebr.
             
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Mat.
           6.24
           .
           Mamouno
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Ioan.
           19.13
           .
           Gephiphto
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Mat.
           27.33
           .
           Gogoultho
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Act.
           1.19
           .
           
             Chakal
             demo
          
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           1.
           
           Cor.
           16.22
           .
           Moraneto
           .
           And
           to
           be
           short
           ,
           there
           is
           not
           almost
           any
           Syriaque
           worde
           recorded
           in
           the
           new
           Testament
           ,
           which
           varieth
           not
           from
           that
           ancient
           pronouncing
           that
           was
           vsuall
           in
           the
           Apostles
           time
           ,
           either
           in
           consonants
           ,
           or
           vowels
           ,
           or
           both
           :
           which
           could
           not
           bee
           the
           alteration
           of
           any
           short
           course
           of
           time
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           Iacobites
           .
           CHAP.
           XXI
           .
        
         
           THe
           Iacobites
           obtained
           that
           appellation
           ,
           as
           Damascene
           and
           Nicephorus
           haue
           recorded
           ,
           
           
             Damas.
             l.
             de
             h●eresib
             .
             post
             med
             .
             Niceph.
             Hist.
             Eccles
             ▪
             〈◊〉
             l.
             18.
             c.
             52.
             
          
           of
           one
           Iacobus
           surnamed
           Zanzalus
           ,
           of
           Syria
           ,
           who
           liuing
           about
           Anno.
           530.
           was
           in
           his
           time
           a
           mighty
           inlarger
           of
           Eutiches
           sect
           ,
           and
           maintainer
           of
           his
           opinion
           ,
           touching
           the
           vnity
           of
           nature
           in
           our
           Sauiour
           :
           And
           his
           followers
           are
           at
           this
           day
           in
           great
           numbers
           ,
           knowne
           by
           the
           name
           of
           Iacobites
           ,
           in
           Syria
           ,
           in
           Cyprus
           ,
           in
           Mesopotamia
           ,
           in
           Babilon
           and
           in
           Palestine
           .
           For
           ,
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           who
           keepeth
           his
           residence
           still
           in
           Ierusalem
           ,
           (
           in
           which
           city
           ,
           there
           yet
           remaine
           *
           
             *
             Chitrae
             .
             de
             stat
             .
             Ecclesia●
             .
             pag.
             25.
             
          
           tenne
           ,
           or
           more
           Churches
           of
           Christians
           )
           is
           also
           a
           Iacobite
           .
           But
           ,
           although
           in
           al
           these
           forementioned
           regions
           ,
           these
           Iacobites
           are
           found
           ,
           (
           where
           they
           bee
           esteemed
           to
           make
           about
           *
           
             *
             Namely
             15.
             
             Crus
             in
             Turco●rae●
             .
             l.
             4.
             p.
             297.
             
          
           160000.
           families
           )
           or
           rather
           50000.
           as
           Leonard
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Sidon
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Bote●
             .
             Relat.
             pa
             3
             l.
             2.
             c.
             de
             G●●kobiti
             .
          
           the
           Popes
           visiter
           in
           those
           parts
           hath
           recorded
           .
           
             ap
             .
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           p.
           1.
           ca.
           14.
           yet
           chiefly
           they
           inhabit
           in
           Aleppo
           of
           Syria
           ,
           and
           in
           Caramit
           ,
           and
           the
           mountaine
           Tur
           of
           Mesopotamia
           :
           But
           yet
           their
           religion
           vnder
           other
           titles
           ,
           is
           extended
           much
           farther
           ,
           in
           so
           much
           that
           it
           is
           recorded
           to
           be
           spread
           abroad
           in
           some
           *
           
             *
             Breitenbach
             Peregrin
             .
             c.
             de
             Iacobit●●
             .
             Vitria
             .
             hist.
             Orient
             ▪
             c.
             76.
             
          
           40.
           kingdomes
           .
        
         
           All
           which
           Iacobites
           of
           the
           places
           before
           specified
           ,
           haue
           ,
           and
           long
           haue
           had
           ,
           a
           Patriarch
           of
           their
           owne
           religion
           ,
           (
           for
           I
           finde
           the
           *
           
             *
             Paul.
             Diacō
             .
             Hist.
             Miscell
             .
             l.
             18.
             
          
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           
           Iacobites
           spoken
           of
           ,
           
           
             Zonar
             .
             Annal.
             Tom.
             3.
             in
             Heraclio
             .
          
           in
           the
           Emperour
           Heraclius
           his
           time
           )
           to
           whom
           they
           render
           obedience
           .
           The
           Patriarchall
           Church
           of
           which
           sect
           ,
           is
           in
           the
           *
           
             *
             Mirae
             .
             in
             Notitia
             .
             episcopor
             Orb.
             pag.
             35.
             
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             pa.
             3.
             l.
             2.
             c
             de
             Giacobiti
             .
          
           Monasterie
           of
           Saphran
           ,
           neere
           to
           the
           citie
           of
           Merdin
           in
           the
           North
           part
           of
           Mesopotamia
           :
           But
           the
           Patriarch
           himselfe
           ,
           keepeth
           ordinarie
           residence
           ,
           in
           the
           citie
           of
           Caramit
           ,
           the
           ancient
           Metropolis
           of
           Mesopotamia
           ,
           and
           which
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           consisteth
           for
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           Christians
           ,
           for
           that
           Caramit
           is
           the
           same
           citie
           ,
           which
           the
           auncient
           writers
           called
           Amida
           ,
           
           
             Caramit
             ,
             is
             
               Kara
               Amida
            
             ,
             that
             is
             (
             in
             the
             Turkish
             toung
             )
             black
             Amida
             ,
             because
             it
             was
             walled
             with
             blacke
             stone
             .
          
           Sabellicus
           ,
           
           
             Sabell●c
             .
             Supplem
             .
             Histor.
             l.
             18.
             
          
           and
           others
           ,
           haue
           left
           obserued
           ,
           and
           Amida
           to
           haue
           beene
           anciently
           the
           Metropolis
           of
           Mesopotamia
           ,
           I
           finde
           in
           the
           subscriptions
           of
           the
           auncient
           councels
           plainely
           recorded
           .
           *
           
             *
             Concil
             .
             Chalced.
             Action
             ,
             1
             ,
             &c.
             
          
        
         
           But
           till
           Eutichianisme
           so
           mightely
           preuailed
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           as
           to
           worke
           in
           them
           a
           detestation
           of
           the
           councell
           of
           Chalcedon
           ,
           and
           a
           departure
           withall
           ,
           from
           their
           auncient
           obedience
           :
           They
           belonged
           till
           then
           I
           say
           to
           the
           Iurisdiction
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Antiochia
           ,
           as
           being
           *
           
             *
             Notitia
             prouinciar
             .
          
           prouinces
           of
           the
           dioces
           of
           the
           Orient
           ,
           which
           wee
           finde
           in
           the
           *
           
             *
             Concil
             .
             Constantinop
             .
             1.
             prim
             .
             Con.
             2.
             
          
           second
           Generall
           councell
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           circuit
           and
           limitation
           of
           that
           Patriarchs
           authoritie
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           reason
           that
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           Iacobites
           ,
           keeping
           euer
           the
           name
           of
           Ignatius
           ,
           intitleth
           himselfe
           Patriarch
           of
           Antiochia
           :
           And
           that
           the
           *
           
             *
             Mirae
             .
             Notit
             .
             ep●scop
             .
             Orbis
             p●●
             .
             36.
             
          
           Patriarch
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           who
           is
           also
           as
           I
           said
           a
           Iacobite
           ,
           acknowledgeth
           him
           (
           as
           some
           record
           )
           for
           superior
           :
           Hauing
           therein
           (
           if
           it
           be
           so
           )
           but
           in
           some
           sort
           returned
           to
           the
           auncient
           obedience
           ,
           
           wherein
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Ierusalem
           stood
           to
           the
           Patriarchs
           of
           Antioch●a
           ,
           euen
           till
           the
           time
           of
           the
           councell
           of
           Chalcedon
           :
           for
           then
           began
           Ierusalem
           ,
           to
           be
           erected
           into
           a
           Patriachship
           :
           And
           (
           as
           we
           reade
           in
           the
           *
           
             *
             Co
             〈…〉
             A●●●●on
             .
             7.
             
          
           actions
           of
           that
           Councell
           )
           with
           the
           consent
           and
           allowance
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Antiochia
           ,
           the
           three
           prouinces
           of
           Palestina
           ,
           which
           till
           then
           (
           An.
           451.
           )
           belonged
           to
           Antiochia
           ,
           were
           withdrawne
           from
           it
           ,
           and
           assigned
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Ierusalem
           for
           his
           Patriarchall
           Iurisdiction
           .
        
         
           Now
           as
           touching
           the
           Characters
           of
           their
           Religion
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           They
           acknowledge
           but
           one
           nature
           ,
           
           
             1.2.3
             ▪
             4.
             
             Iacob
             a
             Vitriaco
             ,
             Histor.
             Oriental
             .
             c.
             76.
             
             Villamont
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             22.
             
          
           and
           but
           one
           will
           and
           one
           operation
           ,
           
             ex
             catechism
             .
             Iacobitar
             .
             ap
             .
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           ca.
           15.
           in
           Christ
           (
           as
           there
           is
           but
           one
           person
           )
           and
           in
           token
           of
           that
           ,
           they
           make
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           Crosse
           ,
           with
           one
           finger
           onely
           ,
           which
           the
           other
           Christiās
           of
           the
           East
           do
           with
           two
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           They
           signe
           their
           Children
           before
           baptisme
           ,
           many
           in
           the
           face
           ,
           
           
             2.
             
             Bucebing
             .
             Hist.
             Eccles.
             part
             .
             2.
             pa.
             33●
             .
             Sali
             〈◊〉
             I●ner
             .
             To●
             8.
             c.
             1.
             
          
           some
           in
           the
           arme
           ,
           with
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           Crosse
           ,
           imprinted
           with
           a
           burning
           Iron
           .
        
         
           3.
           
           They
           vse
           Circumcision
           
             Saligniac
             .
             Itin.
             Tom.
          
           8.
           c.
           1.
           euen
           of
           both
           sexes
           .
           
             Vitriac
             .
             vt
             ibi
          
           .
        
         
           4.
           
           They
           confesse
           their
           sinnes
           to
           God
           onely
           ,
           nor
           to
           the
           priest
           ,
           
           
             Th●a
             Ie●●
             pa.
             1.
             c
             14.4
             .
             Bucebing
             .
             loco
             citato
             .
             Al●
             hons●
             .
             Castro
             .
             l.
             4.
             conu●
             He●es
             .
             T
             it
             Confeslie
             Baungar
             .
             Itiner
             .
             2.
             c.
             9.
             
          
           &
           as
           others
           record
           ,
           but
           verie
           seldom
           ,
           so
           that
           many
           communicate
           without
           auricular
           confession
           .
           
             Leonam
             Sidon
             .
             ap
             .
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           c.
           14.
           
        
         
           5.
           
           They
           admit
           not
           of
           purgatorie
           ,
           nor
           of
           praiers
           for
           the
           dead
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           c.
           23.
           
        
         
           6.
           
           They
           consecrate
           the
           Eucharist
           in
           vnleauened
           bread
           
             Salign
             .
             Itin.
             Hieros
             .
             Tom.
          
           8.
           c.
           1.
           
           They
           minister
           the
           Sacrament
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           in
           both
           kindes
           .
        
         
         
           7.
           
           The
           priests
           are
           married
           .
        
         
           8.
           
           They
           beleeue
           all
           the
           soules
           of
           iust
           men
           to
           remaine
           in
           the
           earth
           till
           the
           day
           of
           Iudgement
           ,
           expecting
           Christs
           second
           comming
           ,
           
             ex
             Catechism
             .
             Ia●obit
          
           .
        
         
           9.
           
           They
           affirme
           the
           Angels
           to
           consist
           of
           two
           substances
           ,
           fire
           and
           light
           .
           
             ex
             Catechism
             .
             Iacobit
          
           .
        
         
           10.
           
           They
           honour
           Dioscorus
           and
           
             Iacobus
             Syrus
          
           as
           Saintes
           ,
           but
           yet
           condemne
           Eutyches
           ,
           as
           an
           
             Heretique
             .
             Patriarch
             .
             Iacobit
             .
             ap
             .
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7
           pa.
           1.
           c.
           14.
           
        
         
           These
           are
           the
           Properties
           (
           that
           I
           finde
           registred
           )
           of
           the
           Iacobites
           religion
           ,
           namely
           of
           them
           ,
           that
           are
           properly
           so
           called
           ,
           and
           still
           retaine
           the
           auncient
           opinions
           of
           
             Iacobus
             Syrus
          
           .
           But
           it
           seemeth
           ,
           that
           their
           principall
           errour
           ,
           and
           which
           occasioned
           their
           first
           schisme
           and
           separation
           from
           the
           Church
           ,
           Namely
           the
           heresie
           of
           Eutiches
           ,
           touching
           one
           nature
           in
           Christ
           ,
           is
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           long
           since
           abolished
           ,
           for
           as
           Vitriacus
           hath
           long
           agoe
           recorded
           ,
           
           
             Vitriac
             .
             Histor
             Orient
             .
             c.
             76.
             
          
           they
           denied
           to
           him
           (
           then
           the
           Popes
           legate
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           and
           demaunding
           the
           question
           )
           that
           they
           beleeued
           one
           onely
           nature
           in
           Christ
           :
           And
           being
           further
           asked
           ,
           why
           then
           making
           the
           crosse
           ,
           they
           signed
           themselues
           onely
           with
           one
           finger
           ,
           their
           answer
           was
           ,
           that
           they
           did
           it
           in
           acknowledgement
           of
           one
           diuine
           Nature
           ,
           as
           also
           they
           did
           it
           in
           three
           seuerall
           places
           ,
           in
           acknowledgement
           of
           three
           persons
           in
           that
           one
           nature
           .
           And
           beside
           of
           late
           time
           ,
           Leonard
           another
           legate
           of
           Pope
           Gregories
           the
           13
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           hath
           recorded
           of
           the
           Patriarchs
           profession
           made
           to
           himselfe
           ,
           that
           although
           they
           held
           indeede
           but
           one
           personated
           nature
           to
           bee
           in
           Christ
           ,
           resulting
           of
           the
           
           vnion
           of
           two
           natures
           not
           personated
           ,
           yet
           they
           acknowledged
           those
           two
           natures
           to
           bee
           vnited
           in
           his
           person
           ,
           without
           any
           mixtion
           or
           confusion
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           themselues
           differed
           not
           in
           vnderstanding
           ,
           but
           onely
           in
           termes
           from
           the
           Latine
           Church
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           c.
           14.
           
           And
           although
           (
           as
           it
           is
           storied
           by
           some
           writers
           of
           these
           times
           )
           some
           there
           bee
           among
           them
           that
           still
           retaine
           that
           errour
           ,
           yet
           certainely
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           no
           generall
           and
           receaued
           opinion
           among
           them
           ,
           is
           most
           manifest
           ,
           for
           wee
           haue
           extant
           the
           confessions
           of
           the
           *
           
             *
             Tom.
             4.
             
             Biblioth
             .
             Vete●
             .
             Patrum
             .
             pag.
             1050.
             
          
           Iacobites
           of
           Mesopotamia
           ,
           and
           of
           those
           of
           *
           
             *
             Apud
             .
             Baron
             .
             in
             fine
             Tomi
             .
             6.
             
             Annal.
             
          
           Aegypt
           ,
           and
           *
           
             *
             Zag
             .
             Zaho
             .
             de
             Religion
             .
             &
             Morib
             .
             Aethiop
             .
             apud
             Damian
             a
             Goer
             .
          
           of
           Aethiopia
           ,
           and
           of
           *
           
             *
             Confess
             .
             Armenior
             .
             Num.
             26.27.28.29
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           Armenia
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           all
           sorts
           of
           Iacobites
           ,
           out
           of
           which
           it
           is
           euident
           ,
           that
           that
           errour
           of
           Eutiches
           ,
           is
           clearly
           renounced
           ,
           as
           articularly
           acknowledging
           ,
           that
           the
           humane
           nature
           of
           Christ
           was
           taken
           of
           the
           Virgin
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           same
           substance
           with
           ours
           ,
           and
           remained
           ,
           after
           the
           adunation
           with
           the
           deitie
           (
           without
           any
           mutation
           of
           properties
           )
           distinct
           from
           the
           diuine
           nature
           :
           *
           
             *
             Vid.
             Concil
             .
             Chalcedon
             Action
             .
             1
             &
             Theodoret.
             de
             haeres
             .
             l.
             4
             in
             Eutiche
             .
          
           All
           which
           the
           heresie
           of
           Eutyches
           denied
           .
        
      
       
         
           Of
           the
           Copthi
           or
           Christians
           of
           Aegypt
           .
           CHAP.
           XXII
           .
        
         
           THe
           Sect
           of
           Christians
           named
           Cophti
           ,
           are
           no
           other
           ,
           then
           the
           Christians
           of
           Aegypt
           :
           And
           ,
           it
           is
           the
           name
           of
           their
           Nation
           ,
           rather
           ,
           then
           of
           their
           Religion
           ,
           (
           in
           respect
           
           whereof
           ,
           they
           are
           meerely
           Iacobites
           )
           for
           as
           Masius
           hath
           obserued
           ,
           
           
             Mas.
             in
             Syror.
             Peculio
             .
          
           the
           Aegyptians
           in
           some
           ancient
           Monuments
           are
           termed
           Aegoph●i
           ,
           whom
           vulgarly
           wee
           name
           Cophti
           ,
           or
           Copti
           ,
           and
           so
           they
           also
           name
           themselues
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           seene
           ,
           in
           the
           Confessions
           of
           these
           Aegyptians
           recorded
           in
           Baronius
           .
           
           
             Baron
             .
             in
             Le●at
             .
             Eccles.
             Alexand
             .
             ad
             sed
             Apostolic
             .
             ●●om
             6
             Annal
             .
             in
             sine
             .
             O●ted
             in
             The●a●●o
             in
             Aegyp●●s
             Sealig
             .
             ad
             Eu.
             seb●●
             Chronic.
             ad
             An.
             M
             DC
             CXXXIV
             .
             D●us
             de
             Trib.
             secc
             .
             Iudaeor
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             14.
             tit
             .
             de
             Philacterijs
             .
             Damascend
             .
             de
             haeresib
             .
             post
             med
             .
          
           And
           certainly
           ,
           that
           the
           Aegyptians
           themselues
           ,
           name
           their
           Country
           
             Chibth
             ,
             Ortelius
          
           after
           Theuet
           hath
           recorded
           :
           As
           also
           it
           is
           obserued
           by
           Scaliger
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           Talmud
           it
           is
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           And
           ,
           by
           Drusius
           ,
           out
           of
           
             R.
             Dauid
          
           ,
           and
           
             R.
             Shelomo
          
           ,
           that
           Aegypt
           is
           by
           them
           named
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           but
           not
           without
           some
           traiection
           of
           letters
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           for
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             R.
             Dauid
             in
             praef
             .
             l.
             Radic
             .
             R.
             Shelom
             .
             in
             Exod.
          
           13.
           
        
         
           But
           touching
           their
           Religion
           (
           to
           omit
           curiosities
           about
           the
           name
           )
           they
           differ
           not
           ,
           as
           I
           said
           from
           the
           Iacobites
           .
           Insomuch
           that
           ,
           (
           as
           Damascen
           hath
           obserued
           )
           the
           same
           sectaries
           ,
           that
           first
           were
           termed
           Aegyptij
           ,
           because
           among
           the
           Aegyptians
           ,
           that
           heresie
           of
           one
           onely
           nature
           in
           Christ
           ,
           found
           the
           mightiest
           patronage
           ,
           were
           after
           of
           
             Iacobus
             Syrus
          
           aboue
           mentioned
           ,
           named
           in
           
             Syria
             Iacobites
          
           .
           And
           till
           this
           day
           
             Seuerus
             ,
             Dioscorus
          
           and
           Iacobus
           ,
           the
           principall
           parents
           and
           patrons
           of
           the
           sect
           ,
           are
           by
           the
           Aegyptians
           honoured
           in
           the
           memorials
           of
           their
           Liturgies
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies-l
          
           .
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           cap.
           5.
           
        
         
           
           
             ●●oter
             .
             Rel.
             p.
             3.
             l.
             3.
             c
             de
             ●hristiani
             del
             ●●gitio
             .
          
           1.
           
           Vsing
           Circumcision
           :
           Yet
           I
           am
           not
           very
           certain
           whether
           for
           religion
           ,
           or
           ,
           (
           which
           I
           obserued
           it
           before
           to
           haue
           beene
           )
           as
           an
           ancient
           custome
           of
           that
           nation
           ,
           which
           custome
           yet
           is
           reported
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           c.
           6
           ,
           
             Boter
             .
             p.
          
           3.
           l.
           3.
           
             c.
             de
             Christ.
             de
             Egitto
          
           ,
           to
           bee
           now
           abrogated
           among
           them
           ,
           by
           the
           perswasion
           of
           
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Romes
           Legates
           in
           a
           Synode
           held
           at
           Caire
           about
           30
           yeares
           agoe
           ,
           An.
           1583.
           
        
         
           2.
           
           The
           confer
           the
           inferior
           sacred
           orders
           (
           vnder
           priesthood
           )
           euē
           to
           infants
           presētly
           after
           baptisme
           ,
           altogether
           ,
           their
           parents
           promising
           for
           them
           and
           performing
           in
           their
           steads
           (
           till
           they
           be
           16
           years
           old
           or
           thereabout
           )
           what
           they
           promise
           in
           their
           behalfes
           namely
           chastitie
           ,
           and
           fasting
           euery
           Wednesday
           and
           Friday
           and
           in
           the
           4.
           lents
           of
           the
           yeare
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           p.
           1.
           c.
           5.
           
           They
           repute
           not
           baptisme
           of
           any
           efficacy
           ,
           except
           ministred
           by
           the
           Priest
           and
           in
           the
           Church
           in
           what
           necessitie
           soeuer
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           c.
           5.
           
        
         
           3.
           
           Neither
           baptise
           their
           children
           afore
           the
           40
           day
           ,
           though
           they
           should
           die
           without
           baptisme
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           4.
           
           Min●string
           the
           Sacrament
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           in
           both
           kindes
           .
           
           
             2
             Theue●
             in
             Cosm.
             de
             Leuant
             .
             c.
             48.
             
          
        
         
           5.
           
           They
           minister
           the
           sacrament
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           in
           leauened
           bread
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           7.
           
           Giue
           the
           sacrament
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           to
           Infants
           presently
           after
           their
           baptisme
           .
           
             Id.
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           8.
           
           To
           sicke
           persons
           they
           neither
           minister
           extreame
           vnction
           nor
           the
           Eucharist
           .
           
             Id
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           9.
           
           Athough
           they
           acknowledge
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           to
           proceed
           from
           the
           Father
           and
           the
           Son
           ,
           yet
           in
           relating
           of
           the
           Nicene
           Creed
           ,
           they
           leaue
           out
           those
           words
           (
           and
           from
           the
           Sonne
           )
           as
           the
           Grecians
           do
           .
           
             Id.
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           10.
           
           They
           admit
           not
           to
           Purgatorie
           nor
           of
           prayer
           for
           the
           dead
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.23
           .
        
         
           11.
           
           They
           contract
           marriages
           euen
           in
           the
           second
           
           degree
           of
           consanguinity
           without
           any
           dispensation
           
             Tecla
             .
             Abissin
             .
             ap
             .
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           c.
           13.
           
        
         
           12.
           
           They
           obserue
           not
           the
           Lords
           dayes
           nor
           other
           feasts
           ,
           except
           in
           the
           Citties
           .
           
             Tecla
             .
             Abissin
             .
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           13.
           
           In
           celebrating
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           ,
           they
           eleuate
           not
           the
           Sacrament
           .
           
             Tecla
             .
             Abissin
             .
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           14.
           
           Reiect
           all
           the
           generall
           counsels
           after
           that
           of
           Ephesus
           ,
           expressely
           condemning
           the
           counsell
           of
           
             Chalcedon
             .
             Id.
             Ibid.
          
           
        
         
           14.
           
           Read
           the
           Gospell
           of
           Nicodemus
           in
           their
           Liturgies
           .
           
             Prateol
             .
             de
             Heresib
             .
             in
             Cophti
             .
          
        
         
           15.
           
           Repute
           the
           Roman
           Church
           hereticall
           ,
           and
           auoide
           the
           communion
           and
           conuersation
           of
           the
           Latins
           no
           lesse
           of
           Iewes
           .
           And
           although
           
             Baron
             .
             in
             fin
             .
             Tom.
          
           6.
           
           Annal.
           haue
           registred
           an
           Ambassage
           from
           Marcus
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           to
           Pope
           Clement
           the
           8.
           wherein
           hee
           is
           said
           to
           haue
           submitted
           &
           reconciled
           himselfe
           &
           the
           Prouinces
           of
           Aegypt
           to
           the
           Pope
           ,
           yet
           the
           matter
           being
           after
           examined
           was
           found
           to
           be
           but
           a
           trick
           of
           imposture
           ,
           as
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           c.
           6.
           hath
           recorded
           .
        
         
           16.
           
           Maintaining
           the
           opinion
           of
           one
           nature
           in
           Christ
           :
           
           
             Thom.
             a
             Iesu
             de
             Conu
             .
             gent.
             l.
             7.
             par
             .
             1.
             c.
             5.
             
          
           yet
           in
           such
           sort
           ,
           that
           although
           in
           the
           generall
           position
           touching
           one
           nature
           in
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           they
           follow
           Eutyches
           ,
           yet
           in
           the
           speciall
           declaration
           ,
           at
           this
           day
           they
           differ
           very
           much
           from
           him
           .
           For
           they
           acknowledge
           him
           to
           be
           truely
           ,
           and
           perfectly
           both
           God
           and
           man
           :
           
           
             3.
             
             Thom.
             a.
             Ies.
             loc
             .
             citato
             .
             Botor
             .
             loc
             .
             cit
             .
          
           And
           ,
           that
           the
           Diuine
           and
           humane
           natures
           ,
           are
           become
           in
           him
           one
           Nature
           ,
           not
           by
           any
           confusion
           or
           commixtion
           of
           them
           ,
           as
           Eutyches
           taught
           :
           but
           onely
           by
           coadunation
           .
           Wherin
           ,
           
           although
           they
           catholiquely
           confesse
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           no
           mutation
           of
           properties
           in
           either
           nature
           ,
           being
           united
           in
           Christ
           ,
           from
           what
           the
           diuine
           and
           human
           natures
           seuerally
           obtaine
           in
           seuerall
           Persons
           :
           Yet
           ,
           being
           not
           well
           able
           (
           as
           it
           seemes
           )
           to
           distinguish
           betweene
           the
           nature
           and
           the
           Person
           ,
           they
           dare
           not
           say
           there
           be
           in
           Christ
           two
           Natures
           ,
           for
           feare
           they
           should
           slip
           into
           Nestorius
           heresie
           of
           two
           Persons
           .
           Which
           heresie
           of
           one
           onely
           Nature
           in
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           beginning
           with
           Eutyches
           ,
           although
           after
           dispersing
           it selfe
           into
           many
           branches
           ,
           hath
           euer
           since
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Counsell
           of
           Chalcedon
           ,
           by
           which
           Eutychianisme
           was
           condemned
           and
           for
           it
           ,
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           *
           
             *
             Concil
             .
             Chalced.
             Action
             .
             3.
             
          
           Dioscorus
           deposed
           ,
           beene
           nourished
           and
           maintayned
           ,
           as
           by
           other
           Christians
           of
           the
           East
           ,
           so
           specially
           by
           the
           Aegyptians
           .
           Insomuch
           ,
           that
           not
           onely
           sundry
           Patriarchs
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           and
           Antiochia
           ,
           (
           but
           specially
           of
           Alexandria
           )
           together
           with
           many
           other
           Bishops
           of
           the
           East
           parts
           ,
           their
           Suffragans
           ,
           and
           adherents
           ,
           are
           recorded
           to
           haue
           maintained
           and
           aduanced
           ,
           
           
             Euagr.
             l
             3.
             c.
             5.6.22.30.33
             .
             &c.
             Leont
             .
             de
             Sect.
             Action
             .
             5.
             
             Niceph.
             l.
             16.
             c.
             2.4
             .
             &
             5.
             &
             l.
             18.
             c.
             45.
             &
             sequent
             .
          
           that
           heresie
           of
           Eutyches
           but
           we
           finde
           moreouer
           ,
           manie
           Synodes
           of
           those
           parts
           ,
           registred
           or
           remembred
           in
           
             Euagrius
             ,
             Leontius
             ,
             Nicephorus
          
           ,
           and
           the
           booke
           called
           *
           
             *
             Synod
             97.101.103
             ,
             108
             ,
             109
             &c.
             
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           brought
           to
           light
           by
           Pappus
           &c.
           wherin
           (
           in
           the
           behalfe
           of
           that
           heresie
           )
           the
           decrees
           of
           the
           Councell
           of
           Chalcedon
           were
           condemned
           .
           In
           which
           counsell
           ,
           although
           we
           reade
           of
           the
           greatest
           Confluence
           of
           Bishops
           ,
           that
           euer
           mette
           about
           the
           Establishment
           of
           any
           point
           in
           Christian
           religion
           (
           and
           yet
           beside
           the
           630
           Bishops
           present
           in
           that
           Councell
           ,
           there
           are
           extant
           in
           the
           *
           
             *
             Ad
             sin
             Concil
             .
             Chalcedon
             .
             Tom.
             2.
             
             Concil
             .
             Binij
             ,
          
           Booke
           of
           Councels
           ,
           
           the
           suffrages
           of
           about
           30
           prouinciall
           Synodes
           ,
           that
           by
           their
           Epistles
           to
           the
           Emperour
           Leo
           ,
           confirmed
           it
           ,
           together
           with
           all
           the
           Bishops
           of
           the
           West
           ,
           by
           whom
           it
           was
           likewise
           receiued
           )
           yet
           notwithstanding
           all
           this
           ,
           that
           heresie
           so
           preuailed
           in
           the
           East
           parts
           ,
           and
           specially
           in
           Aegypt
           ,
           wherof
           we
           now
           entreat
           ,
           that
           from
           that
           time
           to
           this
           it
           was
           neuer
           cleared
           of
           it
           .
           But
           as
           there
           was
           neuer
           heresie
           that
           so
           grieuously
           wounded
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           as
           that
           of
           Eutyches
           ,
           (
           except
           perhaps
           Arrianisme
           )
           so
           was
           no
           part
           of
           the
           Church
           so
           deepely
           and
           deadly
           wounded
           by
           it
           ,
           as
           that
           of
           Aegypt
           .
           So
           that
           ,
           euen
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           although
           the
           wound
           be
           in
           some
           sort
           healed
           ,
           yet
           the
           wemme
           or
           scarre
           still
           remaineth
           .
           For
           it
           is
           not
           many
           yeares
           ,
           since
           by
           certaine
           lesuits
           ,
           Agents
           for
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           some
           conferences
           were
           had
           with
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           and
           his
           Synode
           ,
           
           
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             pa.
             3.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             de
             Christiani
             de
             Egitto
             .
          
           wherein
           ,
           although
           they
           confessed
           (
           if
           true
           relation
           be
           made
           of
           that
           conference
           )
           that
           Christ
           is
           true
           God
           and
           true
           Man
           :
           yet
           did
           they
           purposely
           refraine
           from
           mentioning
           two
           natures
           in
           Christ
           ,
           lest
           they
           should
           by
           little
           and
           little
           slippe
           into
           the
           heresie
           of
           two
           persons
           .
        
         
           Now
           as
           touching
           their
           Ecclesiastical
           gouernment
           they
           are
           subiect
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           *
           
             *
             Chitrae
             .
             de
             ●at
             .
             Ecclesiar
             .
             pag.
             21.
             
          
           ,
           whose
           Patriarchall
           seat
           is
           at
           this
           present
           translated
           ,
           (
           and
           so
           long
           hath
           beene
           )
           to
           the
           Citie
           of
           Caire
           ,
           in
           *
           
             *
             Legatio
             Alex●ndrin
             ap
             .
             Ba●on
             .
             Tom.
             ●
             .
             in
             fine
             .
          
           either
           of
           which
           Cities
           ,
           (
           Caire
           and
           Alexandria
           )
           there
           remaine
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           but
           three
           Christian
           temples
           a
           peece
           .
           Whereas
           Burchardus
           recordeth
           of
           his
           time
           (
           about
           320
           years
           agoe
           )
           that
           in
           one
           of
           them
           (
           Caire
           )
           there
           were
           aboue
           40.
           
           
             Burch
             ,
             descr
             .
             ter
             .
             sanct
             .
             
             par
             .
          
           2.
           c.
           3.
           
           But
           yet
           ,
           to
           the
           Iurisdiction
           of
           this
           Patriarch
           belong
           ,
           not
           onely
           the
           natiue
           Christians
           of
           Aegypt
           ,
           who
           are
           but
           very
           few
           ,
           considering
           the
           exceeding
           populousnesse
           of
           that
           Nation
           ,
           (
           for
           they
           are
           esteemed
           as
           I
           sayd
           before
           ,
           not
           to
           passe
           50000
           )
           which
           in
           Burchardus
           his
           time
           ,
           are
           by
           him
           recorded
           to
           haue
           beene
           aboue
           300000.
           
           
             Id.
             pa.
          
           2.
           c.
           3.
           together
           with
           the
           small
           Remainder
           of
           Christians
           ,
           that
           are
           found
           about
           the
           Bay
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           and
           in
           Mount
           Sinai
           Eastward
           ,
           or
           in
           Afrique
           as
           farre
           as
           the
           greater
           Syrtis
           Westward
           ▪
           but
           the
           Christians
           likewise
           of
           Aethiopia
           ,
           acknowledge
           obedience
           to
           him
           .
           
           
             〈…〉
             .
             cap.
             1●5
             
          
           For
           although
           Aluarez
           in
           his
           storie
           of
           Aethiopia
           haue
           related
           (
           as
           he
           doth
           also
           some
           other
           matters
           touching
           the
           ancienter
           condition
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           too
           grossely
           and
           boldly
           )
           that
           the
           Christians
           of
           Nubia
           ,
           till
           their
           defection
           from
           Christianity
           ,
           were
           of
           the
           Popes
           dependance
           and
           Iurisdiction
           ,
           and
           receiued
           their
           Bishops
           by
           his
           consecration
           ,
           (
           and
           say
           nothing
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           )
           yet
           certainely
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           not
           so
           ,
           is
           manifest
           ,
           for
           besides
           that
           Saligniacus
           (
           himselfe
           the
           Popes
           protonotary
           ,
           and
           whose
           trauaile
           had
           taught
           him
           some
           knowledge
           of
           the
           East
           parts
           ,
           directly
           denieth
           the
           Nubians
           professing
           of
           obedience
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           obseruing
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           gouerned
           by
           a
           Prelate
           of
           their
           owne
           ,
           whom
           they
           termed
           the
           Priest
           of
           the
           law
           .
           
             Itiner
             .
             Tom.
          
           8.
           c.
           2.
           
           Beside
           that
           direct
           testimonie
           of
           his
           I
           say
           ,
           there
           be
           other
           Euidences
           .
           First
           ,
           because
           there
           cannot
           be
           produced
           any
           Instance
           ,
           out
           of
           any
           Ecclesiasticall
           history
           ,
           either
           ancient
           or
           moderne
           (
           as
           I
           am
           certainely
           perswaded
           )
           to
           that
           effect
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           because
           the
           fathers
           of
           the
           Nicene
           
           counsell
           ,
           as
           we
           finde
           in
           *
           
             *
             Nicen.
             Concil
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             36.
             
          
           
             Gelasius
             Cizicenus
          
           ,
           are
           knowen
           to
           haue
           assigned
           Aethiopia
           ,
           whereof
           Nubia
           is
           a
           part
           ,
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           his
           Iurisdiction
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           because
           the
           Patriarchship
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           lyeth
           directly
           betweene
           Nubia
           and
           Rome
           ,
           as
           being
           immediately
           at
           the
           backe
           of
           Aegypt
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           because
           the
           Nubians
           were
           in
           religion
           Iacobites
           ,
           as
           a
           Roman
           Cardinal
           
             Vitriacus
             Brocardus
          
           ,
           and
           others
           haue
           recorded
           ,
           
           
             Vitriac
             .
             histor
             .
             ●rient
             .
             c.
             76.
             
             Brocard
             .
             de●●ript
             .
             Terre
             .
             sanct
             .
          
           and
           as
           their
           baptising
           with
           fire
           remembred
           by
           Burchardus
           and
           Saligniacus
           did
           manifestly
           import
           
             Burch
             .
             descr
             .
             terr
             .
             sanct
             .
             pa.
          
           2.
           c.
           3.
           
           §
           7.
           
           
             Saligniac
             .
             Itin.
             Tom
          
           ,
           8.
           c.
           2.
           of
           which
           sect
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           is
           knowen
           to
           be
           :
           which
           ,
           had
           the
           Pope
           the
           assignement
           or
           confirmation
           of
           their
           prelates
           ,
           it
           is
           vtterly
           vnlike
           they
           should
           haue
           been
           .
           Fiftly
           ,
           because
           in
           time
           of
           their
           necessitie
           ,
           being
           left
           destitute
           of
           Bishops
           and
           Ministers
           ,
           if
           they
           had
           pertained
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           his
           Iurisdiction
           ,
           they
           would
           rather
           haue
           had
           recourse
           to
           him
           ,
           for
           repaire
           of
           the
           decayed
           and
           ruinous
           state
           of
           their
           Church
           who
           both
           plentifully
           could
           ,
           and
           no
           doubt
           readily
           would
           haue
           relieued
           them
           ,
           rather
           ,
           then
           suffered
           them
           to
           depart
           as
           they
           haue
           done
           ,
           from
           the
           Christian
           faith
           :
           To
           him
           I
           say
           ,
           they
           would
           rather
           haue
           resorted
           for
           supply
           ,
           then
           to
           the
           K.
           of
           Habassia
           *
           
             *
             Aluarez
             .
             lo●o
             prox
             .
             citato
             .
          
           (
           as
           they
           did
           )
           being
           of
           another
           patriarchall
           Iurisdiction
           .
           Certaine
           therefore
           it
           seemeth
           ,
           that
           Nubia
           while
           it
           was
           Christian
           ,
           belonged
           not
           to
           Rome
           but
           to
           Alexandria
           :
           By
           whom
           ,
           if
           the
           Nubians
           in
           their
           distresses
           were
           not
           relieued
           ,
           no
           man
           can
           wonder
           ,
           that
           knoweth
           the
           great
           want
           and
           misery
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Aegypt
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           Habassines
           .
           CHAP.
           XXIII
           .
        
         
           NOW
           touching
           the
           Habassines
           .
           or
           midland
           Aethiopians
           ,
           whether
           they
           haue
           obtained
           that
           name
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           habitations
           (
           in
           houses
           )
           which
           the
           Aegyptians
           called
           Auases
           ,
           
           
             Strab.
             l.
             2.
             et
             l.
             
          
           as
           Strabo
           hath
           obserued
           ,
           (
           for
           the
           ancient
           books
           ha●e
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           not
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           in
           difference
           from
           them
           ,
           which
           dwelling
           neerer
           the
           Bay
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           were
           called
           Trogloditae
           (
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           because
           they
           dwelled
           in
           caues
           ,
           
           
             Plin.
             l.
             5.
             c.
             8.
             
             Solin
             .
             Polyhistor
             .
             c.
             34.
             
          
           not
           in
           houses
           ,
           as
           Plinie
           and
           others
           haue
           recorded
           :
           whether
           I
           say
           ,
           for
           that
           reason
           they
           haue
           obtained
           the
           name
           of
           Abassins
           ,
           or
           no
           ,
           let
           more
           curious
           men
           inquire
           .
           But
           ,
           as
           touching
           their
           Religion
           ,
           they
           are
           in
           manner
           meere
           Iacobites
           :
           And
           their
           King
           (
           whome
           by
           errour
           wee
           call
           
             Prester
             Iohn
          
           )
           is
           sundry
           times
           in
           histories
           termed
           the
           Prince
           of
           Iacobites
           .
           And
           their
           leauing
           out
           of
           their
           memorials
           (
           in
           *
           
             *
             Liturg.
             Aethiop
             .
             tom
             .
             6.
             
             Biblioth
             .
             ve●
             .
             Patrum
             .
             pag.
             59.
             et
             65.
             
          
           their
           Liturgy
           )
           the
           Councell
           of
           Chalcedon
           ,
           by
           which
           the
           heresie
           maintained
           after
           by
           
             Iacobus
             Syrus
          
           was
           condemned
           whereas
           the
           Councels
           of
           Nice
           ,
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           and
           of
           Ephesus
           are
           remembred
           ,
           doth
           import
           so
           much
           .
           
           
             Zag
             .
             Zabo
             .
             de
             .
             Relig.
             et
             Morib
             .
             Aethiop
             .
             ●
             ap
             .
             Damian
             .
             a
             Goes
             .
          
           And
           in
           very
           deede
           considering
           the
           dependance
           ,
           that
           the
           Church
           of
           Habassia
           ,
           hath
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           it
           is
           almost
           vnpossible
           but
           they
           should
           be
           so
           ;
           for
           as
           
             Zaga
             Zabo
          
           an
           Habassine
           Bishop
           
           hath
           left
           recorded
           ,
           although
           they
           haue
           a
           Patriarch
           of
           their
           owne
           ,
           whom
           they
           call
           in
           their
           own
           language
           Abuna
           ,
           (
           our
           Father
           )
           and
           he
           chosen
           by
           the
           Habassine
           monks
           of
           S.
           Antonies
           order
           ,
           remaining
           in
           Ierusalem
           ,
           yet
           are
           they
           limited
           to
           choose
           one
           of
           the
           Iurisdiction
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           and
           a
           *
           
             *
             You
             may
             obserue
             ,
             which
             I
             in
             my
             reading
             haue
             done
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             Patriarchs
             and
             other
             Bishops
             of
             the
             East
             ,
             are
             monkes
             of
             the
             Orders
             either
             of
             S.
             Basil
             ,
             or
             S.
             Anthony
             ,
             for
             the
             Patriarchs
             of
             Constantinople
             ,
             of
             Antiochia
             &
             of
             Armenia
             ,
             are
             monks
             of
             S.
             Basils
             order
             :
             the
             Patriarchs
             of
             Alexandria
             ,
             of
             Aethiopia
             ,
             of
             the
             Iacobites
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Maronites
             ,
             are
             of
             S.
             Anthonies
             ,
             And
             the
             Patriarch
             of
             the
             Nestorians
             either
             of
             both
             .
          
           monke
           of
           S.
           Antonie
           he
           must
           be
           .
           And
           beside
           that
           ,
           the
           confirmation
           ,
           and
           consecration
           of
           him
           ,
           belongeth
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           and
           by
           him
           hee
           is
           sent
           with
           Ecclesiastical
           charge
           into
           Habassia
           .
           And
           (
           to
           be
           short
           )
           their
           praier
           ,
           in
           their
           
           
             〈◊〉
             ▪
             Aethiop
             .
             Tom.
             6.
             
             Biblioth
             .
             Vet.
             〈◊〉
             ▪
             p.
             62.
             
          
           present
           Liturgie
           ,
           for
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           tearming
           him
           the
           Prince
           of
           their
           Archbishops
           ,
           and
           remembring
           him
           before
           their
           owne
           Patriarch
           ,
           euidently
           declareth
           their
           dependance
           and
           subiection
           to
           that
           Sea.
           Which
           supreme
           Ecclesiasticall
           power
           touching
           Aethiopia
           ,
           to
           haue
           belonged
           very
           antiently
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           may
           appeare
           by
           the
           Arabique
           booke
           of
           the
           Nicene
           Councell
           ,
           translated
           by
           Pisanus
           ,
           
           
             〈…〉
             l
             3.
             can
             .
             3●
             
          
           where
           that
           authority
           is
           found
           assigned
           ,
           to
           the
           Patriach
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           touching
           that
           Abuna
           of
           Aethiopia
           ,
           (
           by
           
           the
           name
           of
           Catholique
           )
           and
           withall
           ,
           to
           that
           Catholique
           or
           chiefe
           Bishop
           of
           Aethiopia
           ,
           the
           seuenth
           place
           in
           the
           Sessions
           of
           generall
           Councels
           ,
           namely
           ,
           next
           after
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Seleucia
           ,
           (
           whose
           seat
           was
           next
           the
           Patriarchs
           of
           Ierusalem
           )
           by
           the
           decree
           of
           the
           same
           Nicene
           Fathers
           was
           allotted
           .
        
         
           But
           if
           you
           desire
           a
           register
           of
           some
           special
           points
           of
           their
           Religion
           ,
           
             
               1.
               
               They
               circumcise
               their
               children
               the
               8.
               day
               ,
               1.2.3 4.5.6.9.10.11.
               
                 1.2.3 4.5.6.9.10.11.
                 Z●g
                 Zab.
                 de
                 R●lig
                 .
                 et
                 morib
                 .
                 Aethiop
                 .
                 ap
                 .
                 D●●●●●num
                 .
              
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               Iewes
               :
               Euen
               females
               also
               as
               well
               as
               Males
               ,
               wherein
               they
               differ
               from
               the
               Iewes
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               They
               reuerence
               the
               Sabbath
               (
               Saturday
               )
               keeping
               it
               solemne
               equally
               with
               the
               Lords
               day
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               They
               eat
               not
               of
               those
               beasts
               ,
               which
               in
               the
               old
               Law
               are
               censured
               for
               vncleane
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               They
               consecrate
               the
               Sacrament
               of
               the
               Eucharist
               in
               vnleauened
               bread
               :
               4
               
                 4
                 Aluarez
                 Histor
                 .
                 Aethiop
                 .
                 cap
                 11.
                 
              
               Contrary
               to
               the
               custome
               of
               all
               the
               East
               ,
               5
               
                 5
                 Aluarez
                 .
                 ibi
                 .
              
               the
               Armenians
               excepted
               .
               Neuerthelesse
               Tecla
               an
               Habassine
               monke
               and
               Priest
               ,
               saith
               that
               they
               celebrate
               ordinarily
               in
               leauened
               bread
               ,
               but
               on
               the
               day
               of
               the
               Institutiō
               of
               the
               Lords
               supper
               (
               the
               thursday
               before
               Easter
               )
               they
               doe
               it
               in
               bread
               vnleauened
               ouer
               all
               
                 Habassia
                 .
                 an
                 .
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               p.
               1.
               c.
               13.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               And
               communicate
               in
               both
               kinds
               ,
               which
               they
               receiue
               standing
               .
               And
               all
               of
               them
               as
               well
               of
               the
               Laity
               as
               Cleargy
               at
               leastwise
               euery
               weeke
               ,
               the
               Priest
               ministring
               the
               bread
               ,
               
               
                 Tecla
                 Abissin
                 .
                 ap
                 .
                 Th.
                 ●
                 Ies.
                 loc
                 .
                 alleg
                 .
              
               and
               the
               Deacon
               the
               wine
               with
               a
               spoone
               .
               
                 Tecla
                 .
                 Abissin
                 .
                 Ioel.
                 Zag
                 .
                 Zab.
                 de
                 rel
                 .
              
               But
               yet
               onely
               in
               the
               Temple
               ,
               It
               beeing
               not
               lawfull
               for
               any
               (
               not
               the
               K.
               or
               Patriarch
               )
               elsewhere
               to
               communicate
               .
               After
               the
               receauing
               whereof
               it
               is
               
               not
               lawfull
               for
               them
               to
               spit
               that
               day
               till
               the
               setting
               of
               the
               Sunne
               .
               
                 Zag
                 .
                 Zab.
                 ibid.
              
               
            
             
               7.
               
               And
               that
               euen
               to
               their
               yong
               infants
               ,
               presently
               after
               they
               are
               baptized
               :
               *
               
                 *
                 Tec●a
                 Abissin
                 .
                 ap
                 .
                 Tho.
                 ●
                 Iesu.
                 de
                 con●
                 .
                 vers
                 .
                 gen●l
                 .
                 pa.
                 1.
                 
                 ●
                 .
                 13.
                 
              
               which
               in
               their
               males
               is
               40.
               daies
               after
               their
               birth
               ,
               and
               in
               females
               80.
               (
               except
               in
               perill
               of
               death
               ,
               for
               then
               they
               are
               presentlie
               baptized
               .
               
                 Tecla
                 .
                 Abissin
                 .
                 ibid.
              
               )
               til
               which
               time
               be
               complete
               ,
               their
               women
               also
               enter
               not
               into
               the
               Temple
               .
               
                 Zag
                 .
                 Zab.
                 ibid.
              
               
            
             
               8.
               
               They
               professe
               but
               one
               nature
               and
               one
               will
               in
               Christ
               ,
               yet
               without
               any
               mixtion
               or
               confusion
               of
               the
               Diuine
               and
               humane
               substances
               .
               
                 Tecla
                 .
                 ap
                 .
                 Th.
                 a
                 Iesuit
                 .
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               1.
               c.
               13.
               
            
             
               9.
               
               Beleeue
               the
               reasonable
               soules
               of
               men
               to
               bee
               traduced
               from
               parents
               by
               seminall
               propagation
               .
               
                 Zag
                 .
                 Zab.
                 de
                 Relig.
                 Aethiop
                 .
                 in
                 fine
                 .
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               p.
               1.
               c.
               8.
               
            
             
               10.
               
               Beleeue
               the
               soules
               of
               their
               infants
               departing
               afore
               Baptism
               to
               be
               saued
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               sprung
               from
               faithfull
               parents
               ,
               and
               namely
               the
               vertue
               of
               the
               Eucharist
               ,
               receaued
               by
               the
               mother
               after
               conception
               to
               sanctifie
               the
               childe
               in
               her
               wombe
               .
               
                 Zag
                 .
                 Zab.
                 Ibid.
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               p.
               1
               ,
               c
               ,
               8.
               
               
                 Aluar.
                 hist.
                 Aethiop
                 .
                 ca.
              
               22.
               
            
             
               11.
               
               They
               presently
               vpon
               commission
               of
               sinne
               resort
               to
               the
               confessour
               ,
               and
               at
               euery
               confession
               ,
               (
               though
               it
               were
               euery
               day
               )
               receaue
               the
               Sacrament
               of
               the
               Eucharist
               .
               
                 Zaga
                 Zabo
                 .
                 Ibidem
              
               .
            
             
               12.
               
               They
               haue
               only
               painted
               ,
               not
               massie
               images
               in
               their
               Churches
               .
               
                 Tecla
                 .
                 vbi
                 supra
              
               .
            
             
               13.
               
               They
               accept
               onely
               the
               three
               first
               generall
               Councels
               ,
               reiecting
               that
               of
               Chalcedon
               ,
               for
               determining
               
               two
               natures
               to
               bee
               in
               Christ
               ,
               and
               for
               condemning
               Dioscorus
               the
               Patriarch
               of
               
                 Alexandria
                 Tecla
                 .
                 Abis.
                 ib.
              
               
            
             
               14.
               
               Eleuate
               not
               the
               Sacrament
               in
               celebrating
               of
               the
               Eucharist
               ,
               but
               keepe
               it
               couered
               :
               
               
                 Aluarez
                 .
                 〈◊〉
                 loco
                 .
              
               neither
               reserue
               it
               after
               the
               communion
               .
            
             
               15.
               
               To
               excommunicate
               obstinate
               sinners
               is
               peculiar
               to
               their
               Patriarch
               ,
               which
               yet
               is
               not
               vsuall
               among
               them
               except
               in
               case
               of
               Murther
               
                 Zab.
                 Zab.
                 ibid.
              
               
            
             
               16
               ▪
               Their
               Priests
               and
               other
               inferiour
               Ecclesiasticall
               ministers
               (
               as
               also
               monks
               )
               liue
               by
               their
               labor
               ,
               hauing
               no
               tithes
               for
               their
               maintenance
               ,
               nor
               beeing
               suffered
               to
               craue
               almes
               .
               
                 Zag
                 .
                 Zab.
                 loc
                 .
                 citato
                 .
              
            
             
               17.
               
               But
               the
               conferring
               of
               Bishopricks
               ,
               and
               other
               Ecclesiasticall
               benefices
               (
               except
               the
               Patriarchship
               )
               belongeth
               onely
               to
               the
               King
               
                 Zag
                 .
                 Zab.
                 ibid
                 ▪
              
            
             
               18.
               
               Vse
               neither
               confirmation
               ,
               *
               
                 *
                 Zaga
                 .
                 Zabo
                 .
                 loco
                 .
                 citato
                 .
                 Aluarez
                 .
                 lib.
                 citato
                 .
                 c.
                 5.
                 
              
               nor
               extreame
               vnction
               .
            
             
               19
               Admit
               the
               first
               marriage
               in
               their
               Bishops
               and
               Priests
               ,
               but
               not
               the
               second
               ,
               except
               their
               Patriarch
               dispense
               .
            
             
               20.
               
               Eat
               flesh
               euery
               Friday
               (
               as
               on
               other
               daies
               )
               betwixt
               Easter
               and
               Whitsunday
               :
               
               
                 Aluar.
                 c.
                 13
                 
              
               as
               on
               euery
               Saturday
               also
               through
               the
               whole
               yeare
               ,
               *
               
                 *
                 Zaga
                 Zabo
                 ,
                 vbi
                 supra
                 .
              
               except
               in
               Lent.
               
            
             
               21.
               
               Baptise
               themselues
               euery
               yeare
               on
               the
               day
               of
               the
               Epiphany
               ,
               in
               Lakes
               or
               Ponds
               .
            
          
        
         
           Concerning
           which
           first
           and
           last
           points
           ,
           namely
           ,
           of
           their
           circumcision
           ,
           and
           annuall
           baptismes
           ,
           I
           haue
           somwhat
           to
           obserue
           :
           Namely
           ,
           first
           ,
           touching
           their
           circūcision
           ,
           that
           they
           obserue
           it
           ,
           not
           so
           much
           perhaps
           ,
           of
           religion
           ,
           as
           of
           an
           auncient
           custome
           of
           
           their
           nation
           .
           For
           although
           their
           circumcising
           on
           the
           eight
           day
           ,
           seemeth
           to
           imply
           that
           they
           receiued
           it
           from
           the
           Iewes
           ,
           yet
           ,
           their
           circumcising
           of
           both
           sexes
           ,
           as
           certainely
           argueth
           ,
           that
           they
           did
           not
           so
           .
           And
           ,
           if
           the
           Habassines
           bee
           of
           the
           race
           of
           the
           ancient
           Aethiopians
           ,
           the
           doubt
           may
           bee
           the
           lesse
           :
           because
           Herodotus
           and
           others
           haue
           recorded
           it
           ,
           
           
             Herodot
             .
             l
             2.
             par
             .
             a
             M●d●o
             .
          
           for
           an
           ancient
           ceremony
           of
           that
           nation
           .
           Or
           ,
           if
           they
           be
           not
           of
           the
           Aethiopian
           race
           ,
           
           
             Stephanus
             Py●ant
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             in
             dictione
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           but
           of
           the
           progenie
           of
           the
           Arabians
           ,
           as
           by
           Vranius
           in
           
             Stephanus
             Byzantius
          
           ,
           it
           should
           appeare
           ,
           recording
           them
           for
           a
           nation
           of
           the
           Arabians
           ,
           neere
           to
           the
           *
           
             *
             Which
             seemeth
             to
             bee
             true
             ,
             both
             because
             in
             the
             *
             
               *
               Liturg.
               Aethiop
               .
               in
               ●om
               .
               6
               8
               bl●●thecae
               Ve●
               .
               pat
               .
               p.
               59.
               
            
             Aethiopian
             Liturgie
             ,
             they
             terme
             their
             owne
             kingdome
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Sheba
             ,
             and
             also
             ,
             because
             the
             KK
             .
             of
             Habassia
             ,
             *
             
               *
               Zag
               .
               Zabo
               de
               Morib
               .
               Aeth●op
               .
               apud
               Dami●●
               .
            
             deduce
             lineally
             their
             discent
             ,
             from
             the
             Q.
             of
             Sheba
             that
             came
             to
             see
             Salomon
             :
             which
             Sheba
             ,
             is
             to
             the
             skilfull
             ,
             certainly
             known
             to
             be
             in
             Arabia
             :
             and
             either
             the
             same
             ,
             that
             wee
             call
             
               Arabia
               foelix
            
             ,
             or
             some
             part
             of
             it
             And
             certainely
             it
             is
             obserued
             by
             learned
             men
             ,
             that
             
               Arabia
               foelix
            
             ;
             in
             the
             easterne
             tongue
             ,
             is
             named
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             as
             
               Arabia
               deserta
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             
               Arabia
               Petraea
            
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             or
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           Sabaeans
           :
           euen
           in
           this
           case
           also
           ,
           the
           occasion
           and
           originall
           of
           circumcising
           among
           the
           Abassines
           will
           bee
           discerned
           well
           enough
           :
           namelie
           ,
           because
           it
           is
           specially
           storied
           ,
           to
           haue
           bene
           a
           very
           anciēt
           ceremony
           among
           the
           Arabians
           :
           among
           whom
           it
           might
           haue
           beginning
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           descent
           of
           manie
           of
           the
           Arabians
           ,
           from
           Ismael
           ,
           and
           from
           the
           other
           
           sonnes
           of
           Abraham
           ,
           by
           Keturah
           ,
           planted
           in
           Arabia
           ,
           of
           which
           Sheba
           is
           by
           name
           recorded
           for
           one
           .
           
           
             Genes
             .
             25.3
             .
          
           But
           yet
           ,
           if
           the
           Abassines
           obserue
           circumcision
           ,
           not
           ,
           as
           an
           ancient
           nationall
           custome
           ,
           
           
             Shindler
             .
             i●
             D●ctionar
             .
             Pen●
             .
             ●●lot
             .
             in
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           but
           in
           any
           sort
           for
           religion
           sake
           ,
           then
           it
           may
           bee
           excused
           in
           such
           manner
           ,
           as
           *
           
             *
             
             .
          
           one
           of
           their
           owne
           Bishops
           hath
           professed
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           done
           onely
           in
           remembrance
           ,
           and
           loue
           ,
           and
           imitation
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           because
           he
           was
           circumcised
           ,
           and
           not
           for
           any
           other
           opinion
           of
           holinesse
           at
           all
           .
        
         
           And
           secondly
           ,
           touching
           their
           annual
           baptisings
           ,
           in
           the
           feast
           of
           the
           Epiphanie
           ,
           which
           they
           (
           with
           many
           auncients
           of
           the
           Church
           )
           suppose
           to
           be
           the
           day
           of
           our
           Sauiours
           baptisme
           ,
           it
           is
           declared
           by
           the
           *
           
             *
             De
             Religion
             Aethiop
             .
             ●ong
             .
             an
             t
             .
             med
             .
          
           Aethiopian
           bishop
           aboue
           mentioned
           ,
           to
           bee
           practised
           among
           them
           ,
           not
           as
           any
           sacrament
           ,
           or
           any
           conceate
           of
           sanctification
           to
           be
           obtained
           by
           it
           ,
           but
           onely
           as
           a
           memoriall
           of
           Christs
           baptisme
           ,
           because
           as
           on
           that
           day
           hee
           was
           baptised
           in
           Iordan
           .
           Euen
           as
           the
           *
           
             *
             Posseuin
             .
             de
             Reb.
             Moscou
             .
             pag.
             6.
             
          
           Moscouites
           also
           doe
           the
           like
           on
           the
           same
           day
           ,
           in
           riuers
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           same
           reason
           ,
           which
           appeareth
           the
           more
           euidently
           to
           bee
           so
           ,
           because
           this
           yearely
           baptising
           is
           no
           auncient
           ceremonie
           of
           the
           Habassins
           ,
           but
           a
           fashion
           of
           late
           taken
           vp
           among
           them
           ,
           as
           Aluarez
           ,
           that
           liued
           long
           in
           those
           parts
           ,
           hath
           related
           ,
           as
           being
           ,
           namely
           the
           institution
           of
           *
           
             *
             Aluarez
             histor
             .
             Aethiop
             .
             cap.
             95.
             
          
           his
           grandfather
           ,
           that
           then
           reigned
           in
           Habassia
           ,
           being
           about
           100
           yeares
           agoe
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           Armenians
           .
           CHAP.
           XXIIII
           .
        
         
           THe
           Armenians
           ,
           for
           traffique
           to
           which
           they
           are
           exceedingly
           addicted
           ,
           are
           to
           bee
           found
           in
           multitudes
           ,
           in
           most
           cities
           of
           great
           trade
           specially
           in
           those
           of
           the
           Turkish
           Empire
           ,
           obtaining
           more
           fauour
           and
           priuiledge
           among
           the
           Turkes
           and
           other
           Mahumetans
           ,
           *
           
             *
             Vid.
             Postel
             .
             lib.
             de
             re
             .
             Linguis
             Tit.
             de
             Lingua
             Armenica
             .
          
           by
           a
           patent
           graunted
           that
           nation
           vnder
           Mahumets
           owne
           hand
           ,
           then
           any
           other
           sect
           of
           Christians
           .
           Insomuch
           that
           no
           nation
           seemeth
           more
           giuen
           to
           Marchandize
           ,
           nor
           is
           for
           that
           cause
           more
           dispersed
           abroade
           ,
           then
           the
           Armenians
           ,
           except
           the
           Iewes
           .
           But
           yet
           the
           natiue
           regions
           of
           the
           Armenians
           ,
           and
           where
           they
           are
           stil
           foūd
           in
           the
           greatest
           multitude
           ,
           &
           their
           religion
           is
           most
           supported
           ,
           are
           Armenia
           the
           greater
           (
           named
           since
           the
           Turkes
           first
           possession
           of
           it
           Turcomania
           )
           beyond
           Euphrates
           ,
           and
           Armenia
           the
           lesse
           on
           this
           side
           Euphrates
           ,
           and
           Cilicia
           ,
           now
           termed
           Carmania
           .
        
         
           Now
           the
           Armenians
           touching
           their
           Ecclesiasticall
           gouernement
           ,
           were
           aunciently
           of
           the
           Iurisdiction
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           as
           being
           *
           
             *
             Notitia
             pro●●nciar
             .
             Orient
             .
          
           prouinces
           of
           the
           dioces
           called
           Pontica
           ,
           which
           together
           with
           the
           prouinces
           of
           the
           dioces
           Asiana
           ,
           and
           of
           Thrace
           (
           three
           of
           the
           thirteene
           dioceses
           ,
           into
           which
           the
           whole
           Empire
           was
           diuided
           )
           were
           by
           the
           councell
           of
           Chalcedon
           ,
           
           
             Concil
             .
             Chalcedō
             .
             Can.
             28.
             
          
           assigned
           ,
           or
           else
           confirmed
           ,
           
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           for
           his
           iurisdiction
           .
           But
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           and
           verie
           long
           since
           ,
           euen
           before
           Photius
           his
           time
           (
           as
           is
           euident
           by
           his
           circular
           Epistle
           )
           the
           Armenians
           are
           departed
           ,
           
           
             Photij
             episte
             ency●lica
             .
             ap●d
             Baron
             .
             Tom.
             10.
             
             Annal.
             Anno
             .
             863.
             
          
           both
           from
           the
           gouernement
           of
           that
           Patriarch
           ,
           and
           from
           the
           commuon
           of
           the
           Grecians
           (
           whom
           at
           this
           present
           ,
           they
           haue
           in
           more
           detestation
           then
           any
           other
           sect
           of
           Christians
           )
           and
           that
           principally
           ,
           for
           the
           very
           same
           occasion
           ,
           for
           which
           the
           Iacobites
           of
           Syria
           withdrew
           their
           obedience
           from
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Antiochia
           ,
           namely
           the
           heresie
           of
           one
           onely
           nature
           in
           Christ.
           And
           euer
           since
           that
           departure
           ,
           they
           acknowledge
           obedience
           ,
           without
           any
           further
           or
           higher
           dependence
           ,
           to
           two
           Patriarchs
           of
           their
           owne
           :
           whom
           they
           terme
           Catholiques
           .
           Namely
           one
           of
           the
           greater
           Armenia
           ,
           the
           families
           vnder
           whose
           iurisdiction
           exceede
           the
           number
           of
           150000
           beside
           verie
           manie
           Monasteries
           .
           
             Leonard
             .
             Sidon
             episc
             .
             ap
             .
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1
           c.
           19
           ,
           who
           at
           this
           present
           *
           
             *
             
               Mirae
               Noti●
               .
               Episcop
               .
               Orb.
               pag.
               36.
               
            
             
               Boter
               .
               Relation
               .
               pa.
               3.
               l.
               2
               c.
               de
               Dioscoriani
               .
            
          
           keepeth
           residence
           ,
           in
           the
           monasterie
           of
           Ecmeazin
           ,
           by
           the
           citie
           ,
           &c.
           
             Leonard
             .
             Si
             don
             .
             episc
             .
             ap
             .
             Tho.
             a
             Ies.
             loc
             .
             citato
             .
          
           by
           the
           citie
           of
           Eruan
           in
           Persia
           ,
           being
           translated
           thether
           by
           occasion
           of
           the
           late
           warres
           betwixt
           the
           Persians
           and
           the
           Turkes
           :
           but
           his
           auncient
           seate
           was
           Sebastia
           ,
           the
           Metropolis
           of
           Armenia
           the
           greater
           :
           And
           the
           other
           Patriarch
           of
           Armenia
           the
           lesse
           ,
           the
           families
           of
           whose
           iurisdiction
           are
           esteemed
           about
           20000.
           
           
             Leonard
             .
             Sidon
             .
             vbi
             .
             supra
             .
          
           who
           aunciently
           kept
           at
           **
           
             **
             Concil
             .
             Chalced
             Action
             .
             1
             in
             subscr●ption
             b.
             
          
           Melitene
           ,
           the
           Metropolis
           of
           that
           prouince
           ,
           but
           now
           is
           resident
           in
           the
           citie
           of
           Sis
           ,
           not
           farre
           from
           Tarsus
           in
           Cilicia
           ,
           the
           middle
           limit
           on
           Interstitium
           ,
           of
           those
           two
           Patriarchs
           Iurisdictions
           ,
           being
           the
           riuer
           Euphrates
           .
        
         
         
           Such
           at
           this
           present
           is
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Armenian
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           iurisdiction
           of
           their
           Patriarchs
           .
           But
           it
           should
           seeme
           ,
           by
           that
           I
           finde
           recorded
           ,
           by
           
             Otho
             Phrisingensis
          
           ,
           
           
             Otho
             Phrising
             l.
             ●
             .
             c.
             32.
             
          
           vpō
           the
           report
           of
           the
           Legates
           of
           Armenia
           ,
           sent
           frō
           the
           Catholique
           ,
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           in
           his
           time
           ,
           that
           the
           iurisdiction
           of
           the
           Catholique
           of
           Armenia
           ,
           was
           then
           farre
           larger
           ,
           as
           namely
           ,
           that
           he
           had
           aboue
           a
           thousand
           Bishops
           vnder
           his
           obedience
           :
           Except
           Otho
           perhaps
           mistooke
           ,
           as
           I
           verily
           beleeue
           he
           did
           ,
           obedience
           for
           communion
           :
           for
           as
           touching
           the
           communion
           ,
           which
           the
           Armenians
           mainteined
           with
           other
           Iacobites
           ,
           it
           extended
           indeede
           verie
           farre
           :
           But
           the
           iurisdiction
           of
           Armenia
           ,
           for
           ought
           I
           can
           finde
           in
           any
           record
           of
           antiquitie
           ,
           contained
           onely
           foure
           prouinces
           ,
           namely
           ,
           the
           two
           Armeniaes
           before
           mentioned
           ,
           the
           greater
           and
           lesse
           ,
           and
           the
           two
           prouinces
           of
           Cilicia
           .
           In
           which
           small
           circuit
           ,
           that
           such
           a
           multitude
           of
           Bishop●
           should
           bee
           found
           ,
           is
           vtterly
           vncredible
           ,
           especially
           because
           we
           finde
           registers
           extant
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           Bishops
           of
           the
           two
           Armeniaes
           ,
           in
           the
           *
           
             *
             Tom.
             1.
             
             Iuris
             Oriental
             l.
             2.
             
          
           Nouell
           of
           Leo-Sophus
           the
           Emperour
           ,
           touching
           the
           precedence
           of
           Metropolitans
           :
           and
           likewise
           of
           the
           bishops
           of
           Cilicia
           ,
           in
           *
           
             *
             De
             Bel.
             sacro
             l.
             14
             c.
             12.
             
          
           
             Guilielmus
             Tyrius
          
           :
           and
           all
           of
           them
           put
           together
           ,
           exceede
           not
           the
           number
           of
           thirtie
           .
           And
           although
           I
           finde
           that
           *
           
             *
             Nouel
             .
             31.
             cap.
             1.
             
          
           Iustinian
           diuided
           the
           two
           Armeniaes
           into
           foure
           prouinces
           (
           which
           yet
           to
           haue
           beene
           after
           reduced
           '
           againe
           into
           two
           ,
           the
           Nouell
           of
           Leo
           euen
           now
           mentioned
           assureth
           vs
           )
           yet
           were
           not
           for
           that
           cause
           ,
           the
           number
           of
           Bishops
           encreased
           anie
           whit
           the
           more
           .
        
         
           Now
           ,
           touching
           the
           properties
           of
           their
           religion
           .
        
         
         
           1.
           
           They
           are
           charged
           with
           the
           opinion
           of
           one
           nature
           in
           Christ
           :
           1
           
             1
             Niceph.
             hist.
             Ecclesiastic
             l.
             18.
             c.
             53.
             
          
           yet
           not
           as
           Eutyches
           imagined
           it
           one
           ,
           namely
           ,
           by
           a
           permixtion
           and
           confusion
           of
           the
           diuine
           and
           humane
           natures
           ,
           but
           yet
           by
           such
           a
           coniunction
           and
           coalition
           of
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           both
           together
           ,
           make
           but
           one
           compounded
           nature
           in
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           as
           the
           body
           and
           soule
           ,
           but
           one
           compound
           nature
           in
           man.
           But
           neuerthelesse
           ,
           it
           seemeth
           by
           the
           confession
           of
           the
           Armenians
           ,
           which
           wee
           haue
           extant
           touching
           the
           Trinitie
           ,
           sent
           by
           the
           mandate
           of
           the
           Catholique
           of
           Armenia
           ,
           
           
             Confess
             .
             Armenior
             .
             Art.
             26
             27.28.29.30
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           not
           50
           yeares
           agoe
           ,
           that
           at
           this
           present
           ,
           they
           haue
           vtterly
           renounced
           that
           phantasie
           .
           2
           
             2
             Alfons
             .
             a
             Castro
             .
             l.
             5.
             cont
             .
             Haeres
             .
             Titul
             .
             de
             D●o
             .
             Haeresi
             .
             13.
             
             Boem
             .
             de
             Morib
             .
             gent.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             10.
             
          
        
         
           2.
           
           They
           beleeue
           the
           Holy
           Ghost
           proceedeth
           onely
           from
           the
           father
           .
        
         
           3.
           
           They
           celebrate
           the
           sacrament
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           with
           vnleauened
           bread
           (
           as
           the
           Romans
           doe
           .
           )
        
         
           4.
           
           They
           denie
           the
           true
           body
           of
           Christ
           to
           be
           really
           in
           the
           sacrament
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           vnder
           the
           Species
           of
           bread
           &
           wine
           .
           3
           
             3
             Nicepho●
             .
             loc
             .
             sup
             .
             citato
             .
             Luturgia
             .
             Armen
             apud
             Cassandrum
             de
             Liturgijs
             
          
           
             Guido
             sum
             .
             de
             heresib
          
           .
           They
           mingle
           not
           water
           with
           wine
           in
           the
           Eucharist
           :
           An
           auncient
           opinion
           &
           property
           of
           theirs
           ,
           for
           I
           finde
           it
           *
           
             *
             Concil
             .
             Constantinop
             .
             3.
             
             Can.
             32.
             
          
           recorded
           of
           them
           (
           and
           condemned
           )
           in
           the
           sixt
           generall
           councell
           .
           4
           
             4
             Niceph.
             loc
             .
             citat
             .
             Liturg.
             Armenior
             .
             vbi
             supra
             .
          
           But
           they
           retaine
           it
           notwithstanding
           still
           .
        
         
           5.
           
           They
           receaue
           infants
           presently
           after
           baptisme
           to
           the
           communion
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           ,
           affirming
           that
           baptisme
           cannot
           bee
           conferred
           without
           the
           Eucharist
           .
           5
           
             5
             Boem
             .
             de
             Morib
             gent.
             l
             2.
             c.
             10.
             
          
           
             Guid
             ▪
             sum
             .
             de
             heresib
             .
          
        
         
           6.
           
           They
           denie
           the
           virtue
           of
           conferring
           grace
           ,
           to
           belong
           to
           the
           sacraments
           .
           
             Guido
             loc
             .
             alleg
          
           .
           They
           reiect
           
           purgatorie
           ,
           and
           pray
           not
           for
           the
           dead
           .
           6
           
             6
             
               Guido
               .
               in
               Sum.
               de
               haeresib
               .
            
             
               Alfons
               .
               a
               Castr
               .
               l.
               12.
               co●t
               .
               Haeres
               .
               Tit.
               de
               Purg●torio
               .
               haeresi
               1.
               
            
             
               Boē
               .
               loc
               .
               citato
            
          
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l.
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           c
           17.
           
        
         
           7.
           
           They
           beleeue
           that
           the
           soules
           of
           holy
           men
           obtaine
           not
           blessednesse
           till
           the
           vniuersall
           iudgement
           .
           
             Th.
             a
             Ies.
             l
          
           7.
           pa.
           1.
           c.
           17.
           
           They
           admit
           married
           priests
           ,
           and
           as
           Burchardus
           hath
           recorded
           .
           
             deser
             .
             terr
             .
             sanct
             .
             pa.
          
           2.
           c.
           2.
           
           §
           .
           9.
           admit
           none
           to
           be
           secular
           priests
           ,
           7
           
             7
             Bellon
             .
             Obs●ru
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             12.
             
             Postel
             .
             in
             Lingua
             Tzeruiana
             .
          
           except
           they
           be
           married
           .
           They
           rebaptise
           those
           that
           come
           to
           their
           communion
           from
           the
           Latine
           Church
           .
           
             Guid.
             Sum.
             de
             heresib
          
           .
           but
           exclude
           their
           second
           mariage
           .
        
         
           8
           
             8
             Boem
             .
             loc
             .
             citat
             .
          
           8.
           
           They
           abstaine
           from
           eating
           vncleane
           beasts
           .
        
         
           9
           
             9
             
               Nichol.
               Peregr
               .
               Orient
               .
               l.
               4.
               c.
               19.
               
            
             
               Boter
               .
               Rel.
               pa.
               3.
               l.
               2.
               c.
               Dioscoriani
               .
            
          
           9.
           
           They
           eate
           flesh
           on
           fridaies
           betweene
           Easter
           and
           Ascension
           day
           .
        
         
           10.
           
           They
           fast
           lent
           most
           strictly
           ,
           without
           egges
           milkemeats
           ,
           flesh
           ,
           oile
           ,
           wine
           ,
           &c.
           onely
           with
           fruites
           herbes
           ,
           10
           
             10
             Vitriac
             .
             histor
             .
             Orient
             .
             c.
             7.9
             .
          
           rootes
           ,
           and
           pulse
           .
        
         
           11.
           
           They
           celebrate
           not
           Christmasse
           day
           when
           other
           Christians
           doe
           (
           Dec●mb
           .
           25.
           )
           but
           fast
           on
           it
           :
           And
           in
           stead
           of
           it
           ,
           11
           
             11
             Vitriac
             .
             loc
             .
             citato
             .
          
           celebrate
           the
           feast
           of
           our
           Sauiours
           baptisme
           ,
           namely
           ,
           on
           the
           day
           of
           the
           Epiphanie
           .
           12
           
             12
             Boter
             .
             loco
             .
             ●itato
             .
          
        
         
           12.
           
           They
           solemnise
           the
           feast
           of
           the
           Annunciation
           ,
           the
           sixt
           day
           of
           Aprill
           .
           The
           purification
           the
           14
           of
           Februarie
           ,
           &c.
           
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           Maronites
           .
           CHAP.
           XXV
           .
        
         
           THe
           Maronites
           who
           were
           so
           named
           ,
           not
           of
           an
           heretique
           called
           Maron
           ,
           as
           many
           falsely
           write
           ,
           
             Prateol
             .
             de
             sect
             .
             Heretic
             .
             in
             verb.
             Maronitae
             .
          
           But
           of
           a
           holy
           man
           of
           that
           name
           ,
           for
           wee
           finde
           mentioned
           in
           the
           booke
           of
           Councels
           the
           Monastery
           of
           S
           
           t.
           
             Maron
             .
             Concil
             .
             Constantinop
             .
             sub
             .
             Men.
             act
             .
          
           5.
           the
           Monks
           only
           wherof
           at
           first
           were
           termed
           Maronites
           :
           they
           are
           foūd
           in
           small
           numbers
           ,
           in
           
             Aleppo
             ,
             Damascus
             ,
             Tripolie
          
           of
           Syria
           ,
           and
           in
           Cyprus
           :
           But
           their
           maine
           habitation
           ,
           is
           in
           the
           Mountaine
           Libanus
           .
           Which
           although
           it
           containe
           in
           circuit
           about
           *
           
             *
             Posseuin
             .
             Appar
             .
             Sacr.
             in
             Maronitae
             .
          
           700
           miles
           and
           is
           possessed
           onely
           in
           a
           manner
           by
           the
           Maronites
           ,
           who
           for
           that
           priuiledge
           ,
           namely
           to
           keepe
           themselues
           free
           from
           the
           mixture
           of
           Mahumetans
           ,
           pay
           the
           Turke
           *
           
             *
             Namely
             ,
             for
             euery
             one
             aboue
             12
             yeares
             old
             17
             Sultanines
             by
             the
             yeare
             (
             the
             Sultanine
             weigheth
             a
             dramme
             of
             gold
             ,
             about
             7
             s
             6
             d
             of
             our
             money
             )
             and
             for
             euery
             space
             of
             grounde
             16.
             spannes
             square
             ,
             one
             Sultanine
             yearely
             ,
             as
             is
             recorded
             by
             Posseuine
             .
          
           large
           tribute
           :
           yet
           of
           all
           sects
           of
           Christians
           ,
           they
           are
           the
           least
           ,
           as
           being
           esteemed
           not
           to
           passe
           in
           all
           *
           
             *
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             pa.
             3.
             l
             2.
             c.
             de
             Maroniti
             .
             Posseuin
             .
             loco
             citato
             .
          
           12000
           houses
           ,
           
           (
           all
           in
           scattered
           villages
           )
           beside
           a
           few
           Monasteries
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           indisposition
           of
           Libanus
           in
           most
           places
           ,
           for
           frequent
           habitation
           .
           For
           beside
           the
           craggednesse
           or
           steepenesse
           of
           that
           Mountaine
           ,
           which
           maketh
           many
           parts
           of
           it
           in
           a
           maner
           inaccessible
           ,
           the
           higher
           Ridges
           of
           it
           ,
           (
           which
           by
           Brocardus
           his
           relation
           are
           so
           eminent
           ,
           
           
             Brocard
             .
             in
             D●s●r
             .
             Terr
             .
             s●nctae
             Tacit
             historiar
             l.
             vltimo
             
          
           that
           they
           may
           be
           discerned
           40
           leagues
           off
           )
           are
           also
           couered
           in
           a
           manner
           continually
           with
           snow
           ,
           which
           it
           retaineth
           ,
           as
           Tacitus
           with
           *
           
             *
             Vit●iac
             .
             hist.
             O●i●nt
             .
             c.
             84.
             
             Postell
             .
             desc●ipt
             .
             Syr●ae
             .
             pag
             33.
             
          
           others
           ,
           hath
           left
           recorded
           ,
           notwithstanding
           the
           heat
           of
           that
           climate
           ,
           euen
           in
           the
           nearest
           approach
           of
           the
           Sun.
           And
           is
           scarcely
           ,
           as
           hath
           been
           obserued
           by
           Postell
           ,
           in
           one
           Summer
           of
           thirtie
           to
           be
           found
           cleare
           of
           it
           :
           for
           which
           very
           cause
           and
           no
           other
           ,
           that
           Mountaine
           seemeth
           to
           haue
           gotten
           the
           name
           of
           Lebanon
           .
           For
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           the
           ancient
           language
           of
           those
           parts
           (
           the
           Phaenician
           or
           Hebrew
           tongue
           )
           signifieth
           White
           ,
           
           
             〈…〉
             Patal
             pom.
             〈…〉
             in
             Dicti
             〈◊〉
             .
             Album
             .
          
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           Whitenesse
           :
           Euen
           as
           ,
           for
           the
           like
           whitenesse
           of
           snow
           ,
           Gerundensis
           hath
           remembred
           Canus
           (
           the
           highest
           part
           of
           the
           Pyrene
           hilles
           )
           to
           haue
           obtained
           that
           name
           .
           And
           as
           Festus
           supposeth
           the
           Alpes
           ,
           for
           the
           same
           cause
           ,
           to
           haue
           gayned
           theirs
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           Sabine
           dialect
           being
           termed
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           Alpum
           ,
           which
           the
           Romans
           in
           theirs
           named
           Album
           .
           For
           so
           touching
           the
           originall
           of
           the
           name
           Libanus
           ,
           
           
             Isidor
             .
             Origin
             l
             14.
             c
             8.
             
          
           had
           I
           much
           rather
           think
           ,
           then
           be
           led
           by
           the
           phantasie
           of
           Isidorus
           &
           some
           *
           
             *
             Stuk.
             in
             Cō
             .
             ad
             Arrian
             .
             ●e
             ●plum
             M●r.
             ●rythrae
             .
             p.
             47.
             
             Adricom
             .
             Theatr
             terr
             .
             sanct
             .
             in
             .
             Nephtalim
             .
             Num.
             63.
             
          
           others
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           Libanus
           ,
           should
           purchase
           that
           name
           of
           frankincense
           which
           the
           Grecians
           cal
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           the
           Iewes
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           For
           ,
           if
           it
           bee
           not
           true
           ,
           which
           yet
           Theophrastus
           and
           Plinie
           write
           ,
           that
           frankincense
           is
           gotten
           onely
           in
           
             Arabia
             foelix
          
           ,
           (
           according
           with
           that
           of
           
             Virgil
             ,
             Solis
             est
             
             Thurea
             virga
             Sabaeis
          
           )
           by
           reason
           of
           which
           propertie
           of
           place
           ,
           to
           burne
           incense
           is
           termed
           in
           
             Tertullian
             ,
             aliquid
             Arabiae
             incendere
          
           :
           if
           that
           I
           say
           be
           not
           true
           ,
           for
           indeed
           ,
           I
           finde
           in
           Dioscorides
           ,
           record
           of
           frankincense
           gotten
           in
           India
           ,
           &
           in
           
             Pedro
             Cieza
          
           of
           the
           like
           in
           some
           part
           of
           America
           ,
           yet
           is
           there
           no
           mention
           or
           remembrance
           in
           any
           history
           of
           nature
           ,
           or
           other
           ,
           as
           I
           take
           it
           ,
           that
           frankincense
           was
           euer
           gotten
           in
           the
           Hill
           of
           Libanus
           .
        
         
           The
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           Maronites
           (
           to
           come
           nearer
           to
           our
           pupose
           )
           who
           is
           noted
           to
           be
           a
           Monke
           of
           S
           
           t.
           Antonie
           ,
           and
           to
           haue
           vnder
           his
           Iurisdiction
           
           
             Theophrast
             .
             hist
             Plantat
             .
             l.
             9.
             c.
             5.
             
             Plin.
             l.
             12.
             c.
             14
             Virg.
             Georg.
             l.
             2.
             
             Tertull.
             de
             coron
             .
             〈◊〉
             circa
             Med.
             Dioscorid
             de
             Medic.
             mate●
             l.
             1.
             c.
             7.
             
          
           8.
           or
           9.
           
           Bishops
           ,
           keepeth
           residence
           for
           the
           most
           part
           in
           Libanus
           ,
           in
           a
           monasterie
           of
           S
           
           t.
           Anthonie
           ,
           and
           now
           and
           then
           in
           Tripolie
           :
           And
           is
           *
           
             *
             Posseuin
             .
             Appar
             .
             sacr
             .
             〈◊〉
             Maronitae
             .
          
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           that
           challenge
           the
           title
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Antiochia
           ,
           keeping
           euer
           the
           name
           of
           Peter
           as
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           Iacobites
           ,
           the
           other
           challenger
           of
           the
           same
           dignitie
           ,
           doth
           of
           Ignatius
           .
           But
           touching
           Religion
           ,
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           Maronites
           professeth
           obedience
           at
           this
           present
           ,
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           yet
           but
           lately
           ,
           in
           Clement
           the
           8.
           his
           time
           :
           And
           both
           hee
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           *
           
             *
             Boter
             .
             Re●
             ▪
             pa.
             3.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             de
             Maroniti
             .
             Poss●uin
             .
             loc
             .
             citato
             .
          
           Maronites
           ,
           are
           become
           of
           the
           Roman
           religion
           (
           being
           the
           onely
           Nation
           of
           the
           East
           ,
           except
           the
           Indians
           ,
           lately
           brought
           also
           to
           the
           Roman
           Communion
           ,
           that
           acknowledgeth
           that
           obedience
           )
           and
           haue
           *
           
             *
             Posseu
             .
             loc
             .
             citat
             .
             Boter
             .
             loc
             .
             citato
             .
             Mirae
             :
             notitiae
             Episcop
             .
             Orbis
             pag.
             34.
             
             Tho.
             a
             Ies.
             de
             Conu
             Gent.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             3.
             
          
           a
           Seminary
           in
           Rome
           of
           Gregory
           the
           XIII
           his
           foundation
           ,
           for
           the
           trayning
           vp
           of
           the
           youth
           of
           their
           nation
           in
           that
           religion
           .
           But
           before
           that
           alteration
           ,
           these
           were
           the
           characters
           of
           their
           Religion
           ,
           
             
               1.
               
               That
               the
               Holy
               Ghost
               proceedeth
               only
               from
               the
               Father
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               2.
               c.
               6.
               
            
             
               
               2.
               
               That
               the
               soules
               of
               men
               were
               all
               created
               together
               from
               the
               beginning
               .
               
                 Id.
                 loc
                 .
                 citato
              
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Not
               to
               baptise
               male
               children
               together
               .
               
                 Interrog
                 .
                 Patriarch
                 .
                 Maronit
                 .
                 ap
                 .
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               2.
               c.
               5.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               heretiques
               returning
               to
               the
               Church
               are
               to
               be
               rebaptised
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               1.
               c.
               6.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               That
               the
               childe
               is
               made
               vnclean
               by
               the
               touch
               of
               the
               mother
               till
               she
               bee
               purified
               ,
               which
               after
               a
               male
               childe
               is
               40
               dayes
               ,
               and
               80
               after
               a
               female
               ,
               for
               which
               reason
               they
               baptise
               not
               their
               Infants
               afore
               those
               termes
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 loc
                 .
                 citat
                 .
              
            
             
               6.
               
               That
               they
               celebrated
               the
               sacrament
               of
               the
               Eucharist
               in
               both
               kindes
               .
               
                 Posseuin
                 .
                 Appar
                 .
                 sac
                 .
                 in
                 Maronitae
                 .
                 Patriarch
                 .
                 Maronit
                 .
                 Interrog
                 .
              
               3.
               
                 ap
                 .
                 Tho.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               2.
               c.
               5.
               
            
             
               7.
               
               And
               in
               leauened
               bread
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               
                 pa.
                 c.
              
               6.
               
            
             
               8.
               
               Distributing
               to
               all
               the
               Communicants
               each
               one
               a
               peece
               of
               the
               same
               bread
               (
               which
               they
               consecrate
               in
               great
               masses
               )
               together
               with
               these
               words
               of
               the
               Gospell
               ,
               
                 hee
                 blessed
                 and
                 brake
                 and
                 gaue
                 to
                 his
                 disciples
                 ,
                 saying
                 take
                 eate
              
               &c.
               
               Mat.
               26.26
               .
               
                 Id.
                 Patriarch
                 .
                 Interrog
              
               .
               3.
               
                 ap
                 .
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 loc
                 .
                 citat
                 .
              
            
             
               9.
               
               To
               distribute
               the
               Sacrament
               of
               the
               Eucharist
               to
               children
               before
               the
               vse
               of
               reason
               ,
               &
               first
               presently
               after
               baptisme
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               p.
               2.
               c.
               5.
               
               §
               .
               9.
               
                 &
                 cap.
              
               6.
               
            
             
               10.
               
               Not
               to
               reserue
               the
               Sacrament
               of
               the
               Eucharih
               .
               
                 Patriarc
                 .
                 Maron
                 .
                 vbi
                 supra
                 .
              
            
             
               11.
               
               Nor
               to
               carry
               it
               to
               any
               sicke
               person
               in
               danger
               of
               death
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               2.
               c
               ,
               5.
               
            
             
               12.
               
               To
               omit
               confirmation
               by
               the
               Bishop
               .
               
                 Patr.
                 Maron
                 ,
                 Int.
              
               2.
               
                 vbi
                 supr
              
               .
            
             
               
               13.
               
               To
               exclude
               the
               fourth
               matrimonie
               ,
               in
               euery
               person
               as
               vtterly
               vnlawfull
               .
               
                 Id.
                 Ibid.
                 Interrog
              
               .
               5.
               
            
             
               14.
               
               That
               marriage
               is
               not
               inferiour
               to
               single
               life
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               2
               ,
               c.
               6.
               
            
             
               15.
               
               Vtterly
               to
               dissolue
               matrimony
               in
               case
               of
               adultery
               and
               marry
               another
               
                 Patr.
                 Maronit
                 .
                 Inter.
              
               5.
               
                 vbi
                 supra
              
               .
            
             
               16.
               
               That
               the
               father
               may
               dissolue
               the
               matrimonie
               of
               his
               sonne
               of
               daughter
               if
               he
               mislike
               it
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               2.
               c.
               6.
               
            
             
               17.
               
               Not
               to
               ordaine
               young
               men
               Priests
               or
               deacons
               except
               they
               were
               married
               .
               
                 Patriarch
                 .
                 Maronites
                 Inter.
              
               6.
               
                 vbi
                 supra
                 .
                 Posseuin
                 .
                 in
                 Appar
                 .
                 sacr
                 .
                 in
                 Maronitae
                 .
              
               But
               yet
               to
               restraine
               their
               second
               marriage
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 Ibid.
              
               
            
             
               18.
               
               To
               create
               children
               5
               or
               6
               yeares
               old
               subdeacons
               .
               
                 Patriarch
                 .
                 Maronit
                 .
                 Inter.
              
               5
               
                 vbi
                 supra
              
               .
            
             
               19.
               
               That
               no
               man
               entreth
               the
               kingdome
               of
               heauen
               before
               the
               generall
               Iudgement
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               2.
               c.
               6.
               
            
             
               20.
               
               Not
               to
               fast
               on
               the
               Lords
               day
               nor
               on
               the
               Sabbath
               .
               
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 loc
                 .
                 citat
                 .
              
            
             
               21.
               
               In
               the
               daies
               of
               fasting
               not
               to
               celebrate
               masse
               till
               the
               Euening
               .
               
                 Patr.
                 Maron
                 .
                 ap
                 .
                 Th.
                 a
                 Ies.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               2.
               c.
               5.
               
            
             
               22.
               
               Not
               to
               eate
               of
               any
               thing
               strangled
               or
               of
               bloud
               .
               
                 Id.
                 l.
              
               7.
               pa.
               2.
               c.
               6.
               
            
             
               23.
               
               To
               exclude
               women
               during
               their
               monthly
               issues
               both
               from
               the
               Eucharist
               ,
               and
               from
               the
               Church
               .
               
               
                 Vitriac
                 histor
                 .
                 O●ient
                 .
                 c.
                 78.
                 
                 Tyrius
                 de
                 Bello
                 sacro
                 .
                 l.
                 22.
                 ca.
                 8.
                 
              
               
                 Patriar
                 .
                 Maronit
                 .
                 Interr
              
               .
               8.
               
                 vbi
                 supra
              
               .
            
             
               34.
               
               Their
               maine
               Errour
               was
               ,
               the
               heresie
               of
               the
               Monothelites
               ,
               touching
               one
               onely
               will
               and
               action
               in
               Christ.
               Which
               errour
               although
               they
               renounced
               
               about
               400
               yeares
               agoe
               ,
               and
               reconciled
               themselues
               then
               ,
               
               
                 Saligniac
                 .
                 Itinor
                 .
                 Tom.
                 8.
                 c.
                 ●
                 .
              
               to
               the
               Roman
               Church
               ,
               at
               what
               time
               those
               parts
               of
               Palestine
               and
               Syria
               ,
               were
               in
               the
               Christians
               hands
               ,
               as
               *
               
                 *
                 Vitriac
                 .
                 &
                 Tit
                 locis
                 ●am
                 〈◊〉
                 .
              
               Iacobus
               a
               Vitriaco
               ,
               and
               
                 Guilielmus
                 Tyrius
              
               ,
               the
               one
               Bishop
               of
               Acon
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               of
               Tyre
               ,
               haue
               recorded
               :
               yet
               shortly
               after
               ,
               when
               those
               parts
               were
               by
               Saladin
               ,
               the
               King
               of
               Aegypt
               and
               Syria
               ,
               recouered
               from
               the
               Christians
               ,
               those
               Maronites
               relapsed
               ,
               and
               forsooke
               againe
               the
               Roman
               communion
               ,
               till
               the
               late
               times
               of
               Pope
               Gregorie
               the
               XIII
               .
               and
               Clement
               the
               VIII
               .
               with
               whom
               they
               againe
               renewed
               it
               .
            
          
        
         
           And
           ,
           this
           heresie
           of
           the
           Monothelites
           ,
           springing
           out
           of
           that
           bitter
           roote
           of
           the
           Iacobites
           ,
           touching
           one
           onely
           nature
           in
           Christ
           ,
           was
           the
           last
           of
           that
           lōg
           and
           wicked
           traine
           of
           heresies
           ,
           which
           vpon
           the
           contempt
           of
           the
           councell
           of
           Chalcedon
           ,
           exceedingly
           wasted
           and
           ruined
           the
           East
           Church
           ,
           for
           after
           that
           the
           detestation
           of
           Nestorius
           heresie
           ,
           touching
           two
           Persons
           in
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           (
           condemned
           in
           the
           third
           generall
           Councel
           )
           had
           so
           immoderately
           distempered
           the
           phantasies
           of
           Eutiches
           in
           Constantinople
           ,
           &
           of
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           Dioscorus
           with
           other
           their
           adherents
           ,
           that
           they
           thought
           not
           themselues
           safe
           enough
           from
           the
           heresie
           of
           two
           persons
           ,
           till
           they
           were
           fallen
           into
           the
           other
           and
           opposite
           extremity
           of
           one
           nature
           in
           Christ
           ,
           the
           Diuine
           and
           humane
           natures
           in
           Christ
           (
           in
           their
           conceits
           )
           by
           permixtion
           and
           confusion
           of
           substances
           ,
           &
           of
           properties
           growing
           into
           one
           ,
           vpon
           their
           adunation
           :
           and
           withall
           ,
           that
           the
           humane
           nature
           of
           Christ
           ,
           was
           not
           consubstantiall
           to
           ours
           ,
           but
           of
           another
           kind
           ,
           &
           
           condition
           ,
           which
           phantasies
           the
           fourth
           generall
           councell
           condemned
           .
           After
           I
           say
           this
           heresie
           of
           Eutiches
           and
           Dioscorus
           ,
           had
           growne
           to
           that
           head
           in
           Aegypt
           &
           Syria
           ,
           that
           like
           a
           violent
           &
           furious
           streame
           ,
           whose
           course
           would
           not
           bee
           stayed
           ,
           it
           bare
           downe
           before
           it
           all
           oppositions
           ,
           and
           among
           the
           rest
           ,
           that
           great
           &
           reuerend
           councell
           of
           Chalcedon
           ,
           that
           had
           condemned
           it
           ,
           and
           was
           contemned
           by
           it
           ,
           it
           gaue
           occasion
           for
           an
           infinite
           traine
           of
           heresies
           to
           follow
           at
           the
           breach
           ,
           which
           it
           had
           made
           .
        
         
           For
           first
           (
           to
           omit
           infinite
           extrauagant
           branches
           ,
           
           
             
               Vid.
               Nicepl
               or
               Histor.
               Eccles.
               l.
               18
               c
               45.
               &
               ●●quent
               .
            
             
               Leont
               .
               de
               Sectis
               .
               Action
               ,
               5.
               &c.
               
            
          
           that
           sprang
           from
           it
           ,
           and
           infinitely
           deformed
           the
           Church
           ,
           renting
           with
           many
           schismes
           the
           vnity
           ,
           &
           with
           as
           many
           heresies
           wounding
           the
           faith
           of
           it
           )
           It
           drew
           after
           it
           ,
           the
           heresie
           of
           the
           passiblenesse
           of
           the
           deitie
           ,
           because
           the
           deity
           of
           Christ
           ,
           was
           become
           (
           in
           their
           conceits
           )
           the
           same
           nature
           with
           the
           humanity
           ,
           that
           was
           passible
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           (
           the
           absurdity
           of
           that
           being
           discerned
           )
           it
           occasioned
           an
           other
           extremely
           opposite
           ,
           namely
           of
           the
           Impassibility
           of
           the
           humanity
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           (
           but
           on
           the
           same
           ground
           )
           because
           namely
           ,
           it
           was
           become
           one
           nature
           with
           the
           deitie
           ,
           which
           now
           we
           know
           to
           bee
           vnpassible
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           when
           the
           fondnesse
           of
           both
           were
           discouered
           ,
           It
           bred
           a
           new
           deuise
           ,
           touching
           one
           nature
           in
           our
           Sauiour
           (
           as
           the
           wit
           of
           Heretiques
           will
           better
           serue
           them
           ,
           to
           deuise
           a
           thousand
           shifts
           to
           delude
           the
           truth
           ,
           then
           their
           pride
           will
           suffer
           them
           once
           to
           yeelde
           and
           acknowledge
           it
           )
           It
           bred
           I
           say
           a
           new
           deuise
           ,
           namely
           ,
           to
           be
           one
           ,
           not
           by
           permixtion
           or
           confusion
           of
           substances
           ,
           as
           Eutyches
           first
           taught
           ,
           but
           onely
           by
           composition
           ,
           the
           deitie
           and
           humanitie
           ,
           
           by
           coalition
           becomming
           one
           nature
           in
           Christ
           ,
           as
           the
           bodie
           and
           soule
           grow
           into
           one
           nature
           in
           Man.
           And
           fourthly
           ,
           when
           this
           phantasie
           began
           also
           somewhat
           to
           abate
           ,
           and
           relent
           in
           manie
           :
           yet
           still
           a
           fraction
           as
           it
           were
           or
           rather
           a
           consequent
           of
           it
           was
           retained
           (
           for
           indeede
           it
           implieth
           by
           necessarie
           consequence
           the
           vnitie
           of
           nature
           )
           namely
           that
           there
           was
           but
           one
           will
           ,
           and
           one
           action
           of
           both
           natures
           in
           the
           person
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           .
           And
           God
           knowes
           what
           a
           traine
           and
           succession
           of
           heresies
           might
           haue
           followed
           these
           ,
           if
           that
           Lord
           ,
           whom
           they
           had
           infinitely
           wronged
           by
           their
           wanton
           and
           wandring
           conceats
           of
           him
           ,
           had
           not
           ,
           to
           stop
           the
           course
           and
           streame
           of
           their
           wickednesse
           and
           follie
           ,
           brought
           on
           them
           ,
           the
           Sarracens
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           for
           euen
           while
           the
           Church
           ,
           specially
           that
           of
           the
           Easterne
           parts
           ,
           was
           in
           great
           perplexitie
           and
           trauaile
           ,
           with
           the
           heresie
           of
           the
           Monethelites
           (
           which
           I
           last
           mentioned
           )
           the
           Mahumetans
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           like
           a
           mightie
           inundation
           brake
           forth
           ,
           and
           ouerwhelmed
           all
           ,
           and
           them
           first
           ,
           that
           first
           ,
           and
           most
           had
           wronged
           the
           Sonne
           of
           God
           ,
           by
           fostering
           the
           forenamed
           heresies
           ,
           and
           the
           infinite
           brood
           that
           sprung
           of
           them
           ,
           I
           meane
           Aegypt
           and
           Syria
           ,
           and
           to
           this
           day
           ,
           both
           they
           ,
           and
           the
           neighbouring
           nations
           that
           had
           beene
           infected
           by
           them
           ,
           remaine
           in
           thraldome
           .
           But
           yet
           as
           in
           the
           diseases
           and
           distempers
           of
           our
           bodies
           ,
           contraries
           are
           vsually
           healed
           by
           contraries
           ,
           so
           seemeth
           it
           to
           haue
           fallen
           out
           in
           the
           distempers
           of
           these
           mens
           religions
           ,
           for
           as
           worldly
           prosperitie
           and
           wantonnesse
           of
           wit
           (
           ordinarie
           companions
           )
           wherewith
           these
           nations
           in
           those
           times
           abounded
           ,
           bred
           in
           them
           their
           ordinarie
           children
           ,
           namely
           ,
           
           prosperitie
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           pride
           ,
           and
           wantonnesse
           of
           wit
           ,
           errour
           ,
           which
           couple
           in
           matter
           of
           faith
           and
           religion
           ,
           is
           wont
           to
           produce
           no
           better
           issue
           then
           heresie
           .
           So
           on
           the
           other
           side
           hauing
           now
           at
           length
           ,
           their
           harts
           humbled
           ,
           and
           their
           wits
           taimed
           by
           that
           pouertie
           and
           affliction
           ,
           wherein
           the
           tyrannie
           and
           oppression
           of
           the
           Arabians
           and
           Turkes
           hath
           long
           holden
           them
           ,
           it
           seemeth
           the
           Lord
           hath
           taken
           pi●tie
           on
           them
           (
           as
           it
           is
           his
           propertie
           not
           to
           dispise
           humble
           and
           broken
           spirits
           ,
           and
           to
           remember
           mercie
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           iudgement
           )
           and
           reduced
           them
           ,
           or
           the
           most
           of
           them
           ,
           to
           the
           right
           acknowledgement
           of
           his
           sonne
           againe
           .
           For
           certainely
           ,
           that
           they
           and
           other
           Christians
           of
           the
           East
           ,
           haue
           (
           at
           least
           in
           these
           later
           times
           )
           disclaimed
           and
           abandoned
           ,
           those
           hereticall
           phantasies
           touching
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           wherein
           by
           their
           misleaders
           they
           had
           beene
           aunciently
           plunged
           (
           and
           which
           many
           Christians
           of
           these
           West
           parts
           ,
           still
           charge
           them
           with
           all
           )
           doth
           manifestly
           appear
           ,
           First
           of
           **
           
             **
             Biblioth
             .
             Vot
             .
             Patr.
             Tom.
             4
             pag.
             1049
             &
             .
             1●3
             .
          
           the
           Iacobites
           ,
           and
           Secondly
           of
           the
           *
           
             *
             Confess
             .
             Armen
             .
             de
             Trinitate
             Art.
             26.27.28.29.30
             .
          
           Nestorians
           ,
           by
           their
           seuerall
           confessions
           ,
           translated
           out
           of
           the
           Syriaque
           tongue
           by
           Masius
           ,
           and
           extant
           in
           
             Bibliotheca
             Veterum
             patrum
          
           .
           Thirdly
           of
           the
           *
           
             *
             Baron
             Tom
             6.
             
             Annal.
             in
             fine
             .
          
           Armenians
           ,
           by
           their
           owne
           confession
           also
           ,
           translated
           by
           Pretorius
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           of
           the
           *
           
             *
             De
             Relig
             &
             Morib
             .
             Aethiop
             .
             ap
             .
             Domian
             .
             a
             Goes
             .
          
           Cophti
           ,
           by
           the
           profession
           of
           their
           faith
           extant
           in
           Baronius
           .
           Fiftly
           of
           the
           *
           
             *
             Posseuin
             .
             Appar
             .
             sac
             .
             in
             Nestoriani
             .
          
           Habassines
           ,
           by
           the
           relation
           of
           
             Zaga
             Zubo
          
           a
           Bishop
           of
           their
           owne
           .
           Sixtly
           ,
           of
           the
           *
           
             *
             Posseu●n
             .
             lib.
             citat
             .
             in
             Maronitae
             .
          
           Indians
           ,
           by
           their
           reconcilement
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           mentioned
           by
           Posseuine
           .
           And
           Seuenthly
           ,
           of
           the
           
           
             Boter
             Rel.
             pa.
             3.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             Maroniti
             .
          
           Maronites
           ,
           by
           their
           like
           reconcilement
           ,
           recorded
           by
           him
           and
           by
           others
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Of
           the
           seuerall
           Languages
           wherein
           the
           Liturgies
           of
           Christians
           in
           seuerall
           parts
           of
           the
           World
           are
           celebrated
           .
           CHAP.
           XXVI
           .
        
         
           ANd
           thus
           haue
           I
           related
           ,
           the
           seuerall
           sects
           of
           Christians
           ,
           that
           are
           abroad
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           with
           the
           places
           of
           their
           habitations
           ,
           and
           the
           special
           characters
           (
           that
           are
           recorded
           )
           of
           their
           religions
           .
           One
           point
           notwithstanding
           of
           their
           difference
           ,
           haue
           I
           left
           purposely
           as
           yet
           vntouched
           ,
           both
           for
           the
           amplenesse
           of
           the
           matter
           ,
           and
           because
           I
           conceaue
           you
           would
           haue
           it
           declared
           seuerally
           .
           Namely
           ,
           touching
           the
           different
           languages
           ,
           in
           which
           all
           these
           seuerall
           sorts
           of
           Christians
           ,
           celebrate
           their
           Liturgies
           or
           diuine
           seruice
           .
        
         
           But
           first
           ,
           to
           speake
           a
           word
           or
           two
           ,
           of
           the
           publique
           seruice
           of
           the
           Iewes
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Mahumetans
           ,
           in
           their
           Synagogues
           ,
           and
           Meskeds
           (
           seeing
           I
           intreated
           before
           of
           those
           religions
           .
           )
           The
           Iewes
           where
           they
           obtaine
           libertie
           for
           their
           Synagogues
           ,
           celebrate
           theirs
           ,
           in
           the
           auncient
           Hebrew
           tongue
           ,
           
           
             Michou
             .
             l.
             2.
             de
             Sarmatia
             .
             c.
             1.
             
             Crus
             .
             Turcog
             .
             l.
             7.
             pa.
             487.
             &c
             
          
           as
           Michouius
           ,
           with
           manie
           others
           ,
           hath
           related
           ,
           and
           as
           in
           manifest
           ,
           by
           their
           owne
           editions
           of
           their
           publique
           praiers
           ,
           printed
           both
           at
           Venice
           ,
           and
           in
           Polonia
           ,
           in
           that
           language
           .
        
         
           But
           the
           Mahumetans
           haue
           theirs
           in
           the
           Arabique
           tongue
           (
           the
           natiue
           language
           of
           their
           prophet
           )
           as
           
           Georgeuitz
           ,
           
           
             
               George●
               .
               De
               R●u●
               .
               〈◊〉
               l
               2.
               c.
               1.
               
            
             
               Richer
               .
               l.
               2.
               de
               Mo●b
               &
               Instit
               .
               Turca●
               .
               C●●
               .
               Turcog
               l.
               7
               pa●
               .
               487.
               
            
          
           Richerius
           ,
           and
           sundrie
           others
           haue
           recorded
           :
           So
           that
           not
           onely
           in
           Arabia
           ,
           and
           Aegypt
           ,
           and
           Barbarie
           ,
           and
           Palestine
           ,
           and
           Syria
           ,
           and
           Mesopotamia
           (
           in
           which
           parts
           the
           Arabique
           tongue
           is
           become
           the
           vulgar
           language
           )
           the
           Alchoran
           is
           read
           ,
           and
           their
           publique
           deuotions
           exercised
           ,
           in
           Arabique
           :
           but
           also
           in
           Greece
           ,
           and
           Natolia
           ,
           and
           other
           parts
           of
           the
           Turkish
           dominion
           ,
           where
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           and
           Turkish
           ,
           and
           Slau●nique
           tongues
           are
           vulgar
           ,
           as
           also
           in
           Persia
           ,
           in
           Tartar●e
           ,
           in
           India
           ,
           where
           they
           haue
           other
           natiue
           ,
           and
           peculiar
           languages
           ,
           the
           Mahumetans
           reade
           the
           Alchoran
           *
           
             *
             Georgeuit●
             de
             Riti●i
             .
             Turcar
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             de
             Sacerdotibus
             .
          
           (
           which
           they
           suppose
           were
           profaned
           if
           it
           were
           translated
           into
           vulgar
           tongues
           )
           and
           performe
           their
           publique
           deuotions
           ,
           in
           that
           language
           .
        
         
           But
           Christians
           in
           celebrating
           of
           their
           diuine
           Liturgies
           ,
           differ
           touching
           the
           language
           verie
           much
           ,
           
           
             Durand
             Rationat
             .
             ●iti●nor
             .
             l.
             4.
             
             ¶
             .
             10.
             
          
           Indeede
           I
           finde
           it
           recorded
           in
           Durandus
           (
           but
           vpon
           what
           warrant
           and
           authoritie
           I
           cannot
           finde
           )
           that
           til
           the
           time
           of
           Hadrian
           the
           Emperour
           (
           that
           is
           about
           120
           yeares
           after
           Christ
           )
           their
           Liturgies
           were
           all
           celebrated
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           :
           And
           that
           then
           ,
           the
           Orientall
           Church
           began
           ,
           first
           to
           celebrate
           them
           in
           Greeke
           .
           Indeede
           mee
           thinkes
           it
           is
           possible
           ,
           that
           the
           Christians
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           might
           in
           honour
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           retaine
           the
           Apostles
           Liturgies
           ,
           in
           the
           verie
           tongue
           wherein
           by
           the
           Apostles
           themselues
           ,
           they
           had
           beene
           first
           ordained
           ,
           for
           it
           is
           not
           to
           be
           doubted
           ,
           but
           *
           
             *
             Vide
             Baronium
             .
             Tom.
             1.
             
             Annal.
             Ad
             An
             ch
             .
             4●
             .
             §.
             14.
             
          
           many
           yeares
           passing
           (
           about
           tenne
           )
           after
           our
           Sauiours
           assention
           ,
           before
           the
           Apostles
           left
           Syria
           ,
           and
           sundred
           themselues
           to
           preach
           the
           Gospell
           abroad
           in
           the
           world
           among
           the
           
           gentile
           &
           forraine
           nations
           .
           It
           is
           not
           to
           be
           doubted
           I
           say
           ,
           but
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           while
           they
           remained
           in
           Iurie
           ,
           ordained
           liturgies
           in
           the
           Iewish
           tongue
           ,
           for
           the
           vse
           of
           those
           Iewes
           ,
           whom
           they
           had
           conuerted
           to
           Christianitie
           :
           which
           liturgies
           by
           the
           Christian
           disciples
           of
           the
           Iewish
           nation
           ,
           dispersed
           in
           manie
           prouinces
           of
           the
           gentiles
           ,
           might
           together
           with
           Christian
           religion
           ,
           be
           carried
           abroad
           ,
           and
           gladly
           entertained
           among
           the
           gentiles
           .
           This
           is
           possible
           I
           say
           ,
           but
           if
           it
           be
           also
           true
           (
           as
           I
           haue
           not
           obserued
           any
           thing
           in
           antiquitie
           that
           may
           certainly
           impeach
           the
           truth
           of
           it
           )
           yet
           that
           which
           is
           spoken
           by
           Durandus
           of
           those
           Liturgies
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           ,
           must
           be
           vnderstood
           (
           I
           doubt
           not
           )
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           then
           vulgar
           and
           vsuall
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           the
           Syriaque
           tongue
           :
           Not
           onely
           ,
           because
           in
           that
           language
           ,
           we
           finde
           them
           in
           these
           times
           ,
           celebrated
           by
           the
           Christians
           of
           the
           East
           :
           but
           also
           because
           I
           can
           conceaue
           no
           reason
           ,
           either
           ,
           why
           the
           Liturgies
           should
           bee
           ordained
           by
           the
           Apostles
           in
           that
           language
           which
           the
           Iewes
           thēselues
           (
           the
           learned
           excepted
           )
           vnderstood
           not
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           done
           for
           the
           Iewes
           :
           or
           else
           why
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           should
           translate
           them
           (
           or
           vse
           them
           so
           translated
           )
           out
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           into
           the
           Syriaque
           ,
           seeing
           both
           were
           to
           them
           alike
           ,
           vulgarly
           vnknowne
           ,
           and
           not
           vnderstood
           .
           But
           howsoeuer
           it
           was
           in
           that
           most
           auncient
           and
           primitiue
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           in
           and
           immediately
           following
           the
           Apostles
           times
           ,
           the
           difference
           certainely
           among
           Christians
           in
           these
           present
           times
           ,
           in
           that
           behalfe
           is
           verie
           great
           ,
           some
           of
           them
           celebrating
           their
           liturgies
           in
           their
           owne
           natiue
           and
           vulgar
           ,
           and
           some
           other
           in
           learned
           and
           forraine
           tongues
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Christians
           then
           (
           to
           speake
           first
           of
           the
           first
           sort
           )
           that
           celebrate
           them
           in
           their
           owne
           vulgar
           languages
           ,
           are
           the
           
             Armenians
             ,
             Habassines
             ,
             Moscouttes
          
           with
           
             Russians
             ,
             Sclauonians
          
           ,
           and
           Protestants
           .
        
         
           For
           that
           the
           Armenians
           (
           howsoeuer
           otherwise
           in
           their
           ceremonies
           belonging
           to
           diuine
           seruice
           ,
           they
           approch
           neerer
           as
           *
           
             *
             
               Bellon
               .
               Obseru
               .
               l.
               3.
               ca
               12.
               
               Vitriac
               .
               Hilt.
               Or.
               c.
               79.
               
            
             
               Brocard
               .
               descript
               .
               terrae
               sanct
               .
            
             
               Michou
               .
               de
               Sa●mat
               l.
               2.
               c.
               1
               Breitenbach
               .
               Peregrin
               .
               c.
               de
               Armen
               .
            
             
               Postel
               .
               de
               Ling●a
               Armenica
               .
               Bellon
               loco
               .
               ●i
               .
               tato
               .
               Nichol.
               Peregrin
               .
               Orient
               .
               l.
               4.
               c.
               19.
               
               Villamont
               de
               Voyages
               .
               l.
               2.
               c.
               23.
               
            
             
               Boter
               .
               Relat.
               pa.
               3
               l.
               2.
               
               &
               Alij
               plures
               .
            
          
           Bellonius
           and
           others
           report
           ,
           to
           the
           rites
           of
           the
           Latine
           Church
           ,
           then
           any
           other
           sect
           of
           Christians
           )
           that
           they
           I
           say
           exercise
           their
           common
           diuine
           seruice
           in
           the
           Armenian
           tongue
           ,
           Iacobus
           a
           
             Vitriaco
             ,
             Brocardus
             ,
             Michouius
             ,
             Breitenbachtus
             ,
          
           and
           manie
           others
           ,
           some
           of
           their
           owne
           experience
           ,
           and
           others
           of
           certaine
           relation
           ,
           haue
           left
           recorded
           .
           And
           namely
           ,
           as
           touching
           the
           translation
           of
           the
           holy
           scripture
           into
           the
           Armenian
           tongue
           ,
           which
           at
           this
           Present
           ,
           is
           in
           solemne
           vse
           among
           them
           ,
           the
           Armenians
           themselues
           as
           *
           
             *
             Sixt.
             Senens
             .
             l.
             4
             Biblioth
             .
             sanct
             in
             ●oannes
             Constantinopolitanus
             
          
           
             Sixtus
             Senensis
          
           hath
           recorded
           ,
           attribute
           it
           ,
           to
           no
           other
           author
           then
           to
           Chrysostome
           :
           who
           also
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           historie
           of
           George
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           written
           of
           the
           life
           of
           Chrysostome
           ,
           remembreth
           it
           specially
           to
           haue
           beene
           Chrysostomes
           worke
           after
           his
           banishment
           from
           Constantinople
           ,
           while
           he
           liued
           in
           those
           parts
           of
           Armenia
           ,
           to
           which
           as
           wee
           reade
           *
           
             *
             
               Sozomen
               .
               H●st
               .
               l.
               8
               c.
               22.
               
               Theodoret.
               l.
               5.
               de
               Curand
               .
               Graecor
               .
               Affect
               .
               b.
               post
               .
               med
               .
            
             
               Roccha
               .
               in
               Bibliotheca
               Vaticana
               .
               p.
               ●57
               .
            
          
           Sozomen
           ,
           hee
           was
           by
           the
           Emperours
           decree
           confined
           ,
           and
           there
           died
           .
           And
           certainely
           ,
           that
           the
           holy
           scriptures
           ,
           were
           translated
           into
           the
           Armenian
           tongue
           ,
           before
           Theodorets
           time
           ,
           who
           liued
           soone
           after
           Chrysostome
           ,
           for
           he
           flourished
           about
           the
           yeare
           440
           ,
           Theodoret
           himselfe
           (
           although
           he
           name
           not
           the
           Author
           of
           the
           Translation
           )
           hath
           left
           recorded
           :
           as
           I
           finde
           also
           acknowledged
           by
           
             Angelus
             Roccha
          
           ,
           in
           his
           discourse
           of
           the
           Vatican
           Librarie
           ,
           
           not
           onely
           that
           Chrysostome
           is
           sayd
           to
           haue
           translated
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           into
           the
           Armenian
           tongue
           ,
           but
           ,
           that
           he
           is
           also
           celebrated
           among
           the
           Monuments
           of
           the
           same
           Vatican
           ,
           as
           the
           *
           
             *
             Id
             pag.
             155.
             
             &
             M●●
             .
             Pansa
             de
             Biblioth
             .
             Vaticana
             ,
             pa.
             4
             discors
             .
             21.
             
             Aluarez
             .
             histor
             .
             Aethiop
             .
             ca.
             159.
             
          
           Inuentor
           of
           the
           Armenian
           characters
           still
           in
           vse
           .
        
         
           And
           touching
           the
           
             Habassines
             ,
             Aluarez
          
           a
           Portuguez
           that
           liued
           many
           yeares
           among
           them
           hath
           not
           only
           left
           recorded
           ,
           that
           they
           reade
           Scriptures
           in
           the
           Tigian
           tongue
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           dialect
           of
           the
           Habassin
           ,
           (
           for
           Tigia
           he
           noteth
           to
           bee
           that
           part
           of
           Habassia
           ,
           which
           first
           receiued
           Christianity
           )
           into
           which
           language
           
             Sabellicus
             Supplem
             .
             Histor.
             l.
          
           8.
           recordeth
           both
           the
           old
           and
           new
           testament
           to
           haue
           beene
           translated
           out
           of
           the
           Chaldee
           .
           But
           
           
             Idem
             c.
             11.
             
          
           hee
           ,
           with
           many
           *
           
             *
             
               Postell
               .
               de
               Ling.
               Indica
               .
               Theu
               .
               Cos.
               l.
               2.
               ca.
               14.
               
            
             
               Villamont
               .
               l.
               2.
               ca.
               24.
               
            
             
               Biblioth
               .
               Vet.
               Pat.
               Tom.
               6.
               pag
               55.
               
            
             
               Michou
               .
               l.
               de
               Sarmat
               .
               2
               c
               1.
               
               Sigum
               .
               l.
               de
               Reb.
               Moscou
               pag.
               46.
               
            
             
               Posseum
               .
               l.
               de
               Rebus
               Mose
               -
               pag.
               4.
               
            
             
               Theu
               .
               Co●
               .
               l.
               19.
               ca.
               12.
               
            
          
           others
           ,
           that
           they
           celebarte
           their
           Liturgy
           in
           their
           owne
           language
           ,
           though
           the
           Chaldee
           be
           esteemed
           among
           them
           ,
           as
           their
           learnd
           tongue
           ,
           which
           also
           the
           Liturgie
           it selfe
           (
           you
           may
           finde
           it
           in
           the
           new
           Edition
           of
           
             Bibliotheca
             veterum
             Patrum
          
           )
           if
           you
           marke
           the
           long
           answers
           of
           the
           People
           to
           the
           Priest
           ,
           in
           their
           Praiers
           doth
           euidently
           import
           .
        
         
           And
           no
           lesse
           certaine
           is
           it
           also
           ,
           of
           the
           Muscouites
           and
           Russians
           ,
           that
           their
           Liturgies
           are
           likewise
           ministred
           in
           their
           vulgar
           tongue
           (
           being
           a
           kinde
           of
           Slauonian
           )
           though
           sometimes
           intermingling
           Greeke
           hymnes
           as
           Guaguinus
           hath
           obserued
           :
           
             Descript.
             Moscou
             .
             ca.
          
           2.
           as
           is
           testified
           by
           
             Mathias
             Michou
          
           ,
           by
           Sigismund
           ,
           by
           Posseuine
           ,
           by
           Theuet
           ,
           and
           sundry
           others
           .
        
         
           And
           as
           euident
           is
           it
           of
           the
           Illyrians
           ,
           whom
           wee
           commonly
           call
           Slauonians
           *
           
             *
             
               Bapt.
               Palat.
               de
               Ra●
               .
               scribend
               .
            
             
               Roccha
               in
               Biblioth
               Vatican
               pag.
               162
            
          
           that
           they
           also
           exercise
           their
           publique
           diuine
           seruice
           in
           their
           owne
           language
           :
           which
           to
           haue
           beene
           allowed
           them
           by
           the
           
           Pope
           ,
           at
           the
           suit
           of
           Cyrill
           their
           Bishop
           ,
           or
           as
           *
           
             *
             Auentin
             .
             l
             4.
             
             Annal.
             
          
           others
           say
           ,
           of
           Methodius
           (
           but
           the
           difference
           is
           of
           no
           importance
           ,
           for
           they
           both
           liued
           in
           the
           same
           time
           ,
           and
           were
           companions
           in
           preaching
           the
           Gospell
           to
           barbarous
           nations
           )
           
             Aeneas
             Siluius
          
           and
           others
           haue
           recorded
           .
           
           
             
               Aen.
               Silu
               in
               Hist.
               Bohemica
               .
               c.
               13.
               
               Auentin
               .
               loc
               .
               citat
               .
            
             
               Rocch
               .
               loc
               .
               citato
               .
            
          
           And
           ,
           in
           particular
           of
           the
           Liburnians
           ,
           (
           the
           more
           Westerly
           part
           of
           the
           Slauouians
           )
           it
           is
           affirmed
           by
           Auentine
           :
           and
           of
           the
           Dalmatians
           ,
           (
           the
           more
           Easterly
           part
           of
           them
           )
           by
           
             Angelus
             Roccha
          
           ,
           that
           they
           celebrate
           their
           liturgies
           in
           their
           owne
           language
           :
           Which
           ,
           Roccha
           saith
           the
           Dalmatians
           are
           most
           certainely
           perswaded
           to
           haue
           beene
           of
           Hieromes
           deuising
           .
           But
           yet
           in
           determining
           the
           Antiquity
           of
           that
           custome
           ,
           Roccha
           that
           referreth
           it
           to
           Pope
           Paul
           the
           second
           is
           greatly
           mistaken
           :
           Because
           wee
           finde
           it
           to
           haue
           beene
           much
           more
           anciently
           granted
           them
           by
           Pope
           Iohn
           the
           eighth
           that
           they
           might
           both
           reade
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           celebrate
           masse
           ,
           in
           their
           owne
           tongue
           ,
           as
           appeareth
           by
           the
           same
           *
           
             *
             
               Epist.
               247.
               
               Ioan.
               Papae
               .
               8.
               in
               Tom.
               3.
               
               Concil
               .
               par
               .
               2.
               ap
               .
               Bin.
               pag.
               990.
               
            
             
               Roccha
               .
               lib.
               citato
               p.
               168.
               
            
          
           Popes
           Epistle
           extant
           ,
           to
           Sfentopulcher
           .
           And
           euen
           Roccha
           himselfe
           (
           forgetting
           himselfe
           )
           confesseth
           it
           in
           another
           place
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           obtayned
           of
           the
           Pope
           by
           Cyrill
           ,
           who
           was
           about
           600
           yeares
           ancienter
           then
           Paul
           the
           second
           .
           And
           certainely
           (
           now
           I
           am
           speaking
           of
           Popes
           )
           of
           no
           other
           Iudgement
           touching
           diuine
           seruice
           in
           vulgar
           tongues
           ,
           seemeth
           Pope
           Innocent
           the
           third
           to
           haue
           beene
           (
           and
           perhaps
           it
           was
           also
           the
           decree
           of
           the
           Councell
           of
           Lateran
           )
           charging
           that
           in
           citties
           ,
           
           
             Concil
             Lateran
             .
             c
             9.
             &
             in
             Decret
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Tit.
             31.
             ca.
             14
             
          
           where
           there
           as
           concourse
           of
           diuerse
           nations
           ,
           that
           differed
           in
           languages
           ,
           and
           ceremonies
           ,
           diuine
           seruice
           and
           the
           sacraments
           ,
           should
           be
           celebrated
           according
           to
           that
           difference
           .
        
         
         
           But
           to
           speake
           a
           little
           in
           particular
           of
           the
           vulgar
           translation
           of
           the
           holy
           Scripture
           vsed
           among
           the
           Dalmatians
           :
           It
           is
           not
           onely
           affirmed
           by
           sundry
           writers
           to
           be
           the
           worke
           of
           Hierome
           ,
           but
           Hierome
           himselfe
           in
           his
           Epistle
           to
           Sophronius
           ,
           seemeth
           to
           *
           
             *
             Hosius
             de
             Sacro
             Vernacul
             .
             legendo
             .
             Postell
             ▪
             de
             lingua
             Illyrica
             .
             Eraim
             .
             De
             clarat
             37.
             ad
             censur
             .
             theolog
             .
             Paris
             .
          
           some
           learned
           men
           to
           intimate
           so
           much
           ,
           But
           yet
           there
           is
           another
           translation
           also
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           into
           the
           Slanonique
           tongue
           ,
           later
           then
           that
           of
           Hieromes
           as
           
           
             Sixt
             Senens
             .
             l
             4
             Biblioth
             .
             Sanct.
             in
             Hieronymus
             Stridonensis
             Scalig
             Diatrib
             .
             de
             Ling●●s
             Europae
             .
             &
             alij
             plu●es
             .
          
           Scaliger
           hath
           obserued
           ,
           being
           written
           in
           the
           Seruian
           character
           (
           as
           the
           former
           is
           in
           the
           Dalmatian
           )
           vsed
           in
           
             Rascia
             ,
             Bosina
             ,
             Bulgaria
             ,
             Moldauia
             ,
             Russia
             ,
             Moscouia
             ,
          
           and
           other
           nations
           of
           the
           Slauonian
           language
           in
           the
           Easterne
           parts
           ,
           that
           celebrate
           their
           Liturgies
           after
           the
           Greeke
           Ceremonie
           ,
           and
           professe
           obedience
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           :
           Of
           which
           later
           translation
           *
           
             *
             
               Sixt.
               Senens
               .
               loco
               citato
               .
               Hieron
               .
               in
               Epist
               ad
               Sophron
               .
               Tom.
               3
               Scalig.
               loc
               .
               iam
               citato
               .
               Auentin
               .
               l.
               4.
               
               Annal.
               
            
             
               Pansa
               de
               Biblioth
               .
               Vatican
               par
               .
               4.
               
               Discor
               .
               23.
               
            
          
           Methodius
           the
           companion
           of
           Cyrill
           in
           preaching
           of
           the
           Gospell
           to
           Gentile
           Nations
           is
           certainely
           reported
           to
           haue
           been
           the
           Author
           .
           Which
           Cyrill
           (
           if
           you
           question
           what
           hee
           was
           )
           was
           neither
           he
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           nor
           he
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           as
           
             Mutius
             Pansa
          
           hath
           vainely
           imagined
           ,
           but
           another
           ,
           farre
           later
           then
           either
           of
           them
           ,
           whom
           in
           the
           Slauonique
           tong
           they
           call
           Chiurill
           ,
           one
           that
           liued
           about
           the
           yeare
           860.
           namely
           ,
           he
           that
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Emperour
           Michael
           the
           third
           ,
           and
           Pope
           Nicholas
           the
           first
           together
           with
           Methodius
           ,
           first
           brought
           the
           
             Mengrelians
             ,
             Circassians
          
           and
           Gazarans
           ,
           and
           after
           that
           *
           
             *
             Martyrolog
             .
             Rom.
             Martij
             .
             9
             Michou
             .
             de
             Sarmatia
             .
             l.
             1.
             c
             7.
             
          
           many
           of
           the
           Slauonians
           )
           to
           the
           faith
           of
           Christ
           ,
           as
           Michouius
           hath
           recorded
           .
           Neither
           neede
           we
           any
           other
           testimony
           ,
           to
           refell
           the
           phantasie
           of
           Pansa
           touching
           Cyrill
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           then
           Pansa
           himselfe
           ,
           as
           namely
           ac-acknowledging
           ,
           that
           Cyrill
           was
           the
           Inuenter
           of
           another
           
           sort
           of
           Illyrian
           characters
           then
           by
           Hierome
           had
           beene
           formerly
           deuised
           (
           for
           of
           the
           Dalmatian
           characters
           ,
           that
           are
           in
           vse
           in
           
             Dalmatia
             ,
             Liburnia
             ,
             Istria
             ,
             Morauia
             ,
          
           *
           
             *
             
               Postell
               de
               Ling.
               Dalmatica
               .
            
             
               Roccha
               .
               Biblioth
               .
               Vatican
               .
               pag
               ▪
               ●61
               .
               &
               Al●j
               plu●●mi
               .
            
          
           
             Silesia
             ,
             Bohemia
             ,
             Polonia
             &c.
             
             Hierome
          
           is
           acknowledged
           to
           be
           the
           Author
           )
           It
           could
           not
           bee
           therefore
           Cyrill
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           as
           being
           ancienter
           then
           Hierome
           ,
           and
           by
           him
           registred
           in
           his
           catalogue
           of
           Writers
           .
           And
           indeede
           (
           to
           make
           an
           end
           )
           what
           reason
           or
           occasion
           might
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Ierusalem
           haue
           to
           deuise
           characters
           for
           the
           Illyrians
           ?
        
         
           But
           to
           intreate
           a
           little
           more
           (
           on
           this
           occasion
           )
           of
           translations
           of
           the
           holy
           Scripture
           ,
           made
           by
           the
           ancient
           fathers
           into
           vulgar
           languages
           :
           Besides
           those
           already
           mentioned
           ,
           of
           Hierome
           and
           Chrysostome
           ,
           by
           the
           one
           ,
           into
           the
           Dalmatian
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           other
           into
           the
           Armenian
           tongue
           ;
           It
           is
           also
           recorded
           by
           Socrates
           ,
           and
           Nicephorus
           ,
           and
           sundry
           
           
             
               Socrat.
               Hist.
               Eccles.
               l.
               4.
               c.
               27.
               
            
             
               Niceph
               Hist.
               Eccles.
               l
               11.
               c.
               48.
               
            
             
               Tripart
               .
               Histor
               .
               l.
               8.
               c.
               13.
               
               Paul.
               Diacon
               .
               Hist.
               Miscell
               .
               l.
               12.
               
            
             
               Sozomen
               .
               l.
               2.
               c.
               37.
               
            
             
               Socrat
               l.
               2.
               c.
               32.
               
            
             
               Vulcan
               .
               in
               praef
               .
               de
               Littur
               .
               &
               Lingua
               Getarum
               .
               Inscrip
               .
               Vet.
               pag.
               146.
               
            
          
           others
           of
           Vulphilas
           ,
           bishop
           of
           the
           Gothes
           one
           more
           ancient
           then
           either
           of
           the
           former
           ,
           for
           hee
           flourished
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Constantius
           the
           Emperour
           ,
           and
           was
           successor
           to
           Theophilus
           ,
           whose
           subscription
           wee
           finde
           in
           the
           first
           Nicene
           Councell
           (
           being
           the
           same
           man
           ,
           to
           whom
           the
           Inuention
           of
           the
           Gothique
           Alphabet
           is
           likewise
           attributed
           by
           the
           same
           Authors
           )
           that
           hee
           translated
           the
           holy
           Scripture
           into
           the
           Gothique
           tongue
           .
           A
           copie
           of
           which
           translation
           is
           remembred
           by
           
             Bonauentura
             Vulcanius
          
           ,
           to
           be
           yet
           remaining
           in
           some
           Librarie
           of
           Germany
           :
           And
           it
           may
           be
           ,
           that
           the
           Gothique
           translation
           of
           the
           foure
           Euangelists
           ,
           mentioned
           by
           Gruter
           in
           the
           booke
           of
           ancient
           Inscriptions
           ,
           to
           be
           of
           a
           thousand
           yeares
           antiquity
           and
           remaining
           in
           the
           Abbey
           of
           Werdin
           ,
           might
           be
           part
           
           of
           that
           translation
           of
           Vulphilas
           :
           But
           yet
           that
           besides
           these
           translations
           into
           vulgar
           languages
           ,
           hitherto
           mentioned
           of
           
             Vulphilas
             ,
             Chrysostome
          
           ,
           and
           Hierome
           ,
           the
           holie
           scriptures
           were
           likewise
           aunciently
           translated
           into
           the
           languages
           of
           many
           nations
           ,
           is
           affirmed
           by
           Hierome
           :
           And
           in
           particular
           (
           although
           the
           translators
           names
           be
           not
           recorded
           )
           into
           the
           Aegyptian
           ,
           
           
             Hieron
             .
             in
             praesat
             .
             in
             4.
             
             Euangel
             .
          
           
             Persian
             ,
             Indian
             ,
             Scythian
          
           ,
           &
           Sarmatian
           tongues
           ,
           nay
           into
           all
           the
           languages
           of
           other
           nations
           ,
           as
           Theodoret
           ,
           
           
             Theodoret.
             l.
             5.
             de
             Carand
             .
             Graecor
             Affe
             ●●ibus
             post
             med
             .
          
           that
           flourished
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Ephesine
           and
           Chalcedon
           councels
           (
           almost
           1200
           yeares
           agoe
           )
           hath
           left
           testified
           :
           As
           also
           in
           the
           following
           times
           (
           yet
           aunciēt
           )
           we
           reade
           of
           the
           like
           translations
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           to
           haue
           beene
           made
           by
           *
           
             *
             V●sco
             .
             in
             Chron.
             Hisp●n
             ad
             An.
             717.
             
          
           Iohn
           Archbishop
           of
           Siuill
           into
           the
           Arabique
           ,
           about
           An.
           717
           ,
           which
           then
           was
           the
           vulgar
           speech
           of
           that
           part
           of
           Spaine
           and
           some
           part
           of
           it
           ,
           into
           the
           Saxon
           or
           English
           by
           Beda
           ,
           about
           the
           same
           time
           :
           Into
           the
           Slauonique
           by
           *
           
             *
             Io●n
             .
             Treuis
             .
             l.
             5.
             c.
             24.
             
          
           Methodius
           about
           An.
           860.
           &c.
           
           Into
           the
           Italian
           by
           *
           
             *
             Auentin
             .
             l.
             4.
             
             Annal.
             
          
           
             Iacobus
             de
             Voragine
          
           about
           An.
           1290.
           &c.
           
        
         
           *
           
             *
             Sixt.
             Senens
             .
             B●bl
             Sa●ct
             l.
             4.
             in
             Iacobus
             Archiepiscopus
             Genuensis
             .
          
           And
           now
           to
           intreate
           of
           those
           sects
           of
           Christians
           that
           celebrate
           their
           liturgies
           in
           learned
           and
           forraine
           tongues
           :
           which
           the
           vulgar
           people
           doe
           not
           vnderstand
           :
           I
           finde
           onely
           three
           languages
           ,
           wherein
           they
           are
           all
           performed
           .
           
           
             
               Vitriac
               .
               Histor
               .
               Orient
               .
               ●a
               .
               77.
               
            
             
               Barbos
               .
               in
               Vol.
               ●
               .
               de
               Viaggi
               .
               apud
               Ra●u●●
               .
               pag.
               3●3
               .
               V●liam
               l
               2.
               c.
               1●
               Boter
               Rel.
               par
               3.
               l.
               2.
               c
               d.
               Nestoriani
               .
            
          
           Namely
           ,
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           the
           Latine
           ,
           and
           the
           Chaldee
           ,
           or
           Syriaque
           tongues
           .
        
         
           And
           First
           ,
           touching
           the
           Chaldee
           or
           Syriaque
           ,
           in
           it
           are
           celebrated
           the
           liturgies
           of
           the
           Nestorians
           ,
           as
           
             Vitriacus
             ,
             Ba●bosa
             ,
             V●llamont
             ,
             Boter●
             ,
          
           and
           others
           haue
           recorded
           :
           for
           Genebrard
           that
           pronounceth
           peremptorily
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           ,
           and
           not
           the
           Syriaque
           to
           be
           the
           vsuall
           language
           wherein
           all
           the
           orientall
           nations
           
           minister
           their
           diuine
           seruice
           ,
           bewraies
           but
           too
           much
           ,
           
           
             Genebrard
             .
             Chronog
             .
             l.
             3.
             ad
             .
             An.
             Chr.
             3●
             .
          
           both
           his
           bouldnesse
           and
           his
           ignorance
           ,
           as
           being
           not
           able
           ,
           I
           am
           certainely
           perswaded
           ,
           to
           produce
           any
           historie
           ,
           or
           other
           lawfull
           testimonie
           ,
           that
           recordeth
           the
           Liturgies
           of
           any
           Christians
           in
           all
           the
           East
           ,
           to
           be
           performed
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           .
           But
           yet
           it
           may
           bee
           obserued
           ,
           that
           where
           in
           sundrie
           writers
           we
           finde
           it
           mentioned
           ,
           that
           the
           N●storians
           exercise
           their
           diuine
           offices
           in
           the
           Chaldee
           ,
           we
           are
           not
           to
           vnderstand
           them
           of
           the
           pure
           and
           auncient
           ,
           but
           of
           the
           degenerate
           or
           
             Iewish
             Chaldee
          
           ,
           which
           beside
           the
           Chaldee
           and
           Hebrew
           whereof
           it
           is
           principally
           tempered
           and
           compounded
           ,
           hath
           much
           mixture
           also
           both
           of
           Greeke
           and
           Arabique
           ,
           such
           as
           the
           Iewes
           language
           was
           after
           our
           Sauiour
           and
           his
           Apostles
           time
           ,
           that
           is
           (
           in
           a
           word
           )
           the
           Syriaque
           ,
           for
           the
           
             Iewish
             Chaldee
          
           (
           to
           declare
           this
           point
           a
           little
           better
           )
           is
           of
           two
           sorts
           :
           One
           of
           those
           that
           returned
           not
           againe
           after
           the
           captiuitie
           to
           Ierusalem
           ,
           but
           setled
           themselues
           to
           inhabite
           about
           Babilon
           ,
           whose
           language
           (
           although
           somewhat
           degenerating
           also
           from
           the
           right
           Chaldee
           )
           is
           termed
           the
           Babilonian
           tongue
           ,
           of
           which
           sort
           ,
           the
           Iewes
           dialect
           of
           Neardea
           in
           Mesopotamia
           (
           the
           compilers
           of
           the
           
             Babilonian
             Talmud
          
           )
           was
           :
           The
           other
           of
           those
           that
           returned
           from
           the
           captiuitie
           ,
           whose
           language
           is
           properly
           termed
           the
           Syrian
           or
           
             Ierusalem
             Chaldee
          
           ,
           varying
           somewhat
           farther
           from
           the
           natiue
           Chaldee
           then
           the
           former
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           mixture
           of
           forraine
           words
           ,
           
             Arabique
             ,
             Greeke
             ,
             Roman
          
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           which
           in
           course
           of
           time
           it
           contracted
           :
           In
           which
           dialect
           ,
           the
           Talmud
           and
           Targum
           ,
           both
           named
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           and
           the
           
           bookes
           of
           the
           later
           Rabbines
           ,
           are
           written
           .
           And
           in
           this
           second
           sort
           of
           Chaldee
           ,
           is
           the
           holy
           scripture
           by
           the
           East
           Christians
           translated
           ,
           and
           their
           Liturgies
           at
           this
           day
           celebrated
           .
        
         
           
           
             Oser
             .
             de
             R●b
             .
             Emmanuel
             .
             l.
             3
             Posseuin
             .
             in
             Appar
             .
             sacr
             .
             in
             Diam●eriense
             Concilium
             .
             Linschot
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             15.
             
          
           Secondly
           of
           the
           Indians
           ,
           that
           they
           in
           like
           sort
           performe
           their
           Liturgie
           (
           not
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           as
           is
           confidently
           affirmed
           by
           Genebrard
           ,
           but
           )
           in
           the
           Chaldee
           or
           Syriaque
           ,
           is
           testified
           by
           
             Osorius
             ,
             Posseuine
             ,
             Linschot
          
           ,
           &c.
           and
           confirmed
           by
           their
           Liturgie
           ,
           extant
           in
           
             Bibliotheca
             Veterum
             Patrum
          
           ,
           which
           is
           there
           remembred
           to
           be
           translated
           out
           of
           the
           Syriaque
           .
           
           
             Bibl.
             Vet.
             Patr.
             in
             Auctario
             .
             Tom.
             2.
             in
             fine
             .
          
        
         
           And
           so
           doe
           Thirdly
           the
           Iacobites
           :
           Namely
           ,
           they
           of
           Mesopotamia
           ,
           of
           Babilon
           ,
           of
           Palestine
           ,
           of
           Syria
           ,
           and
           of
           Cyprus
           ,
           which
           are
           peculiarly
           knowne
           by
           that
           appellation
           .
           
           
             Vitriac
             .
             Histor
             Orient
             .
             c.
             76.
             
          
           Of
           whom
           Vitriacus
           long
           since
           obserued
           ,
           that
           they
           read
           the
           diuine
           scriptures
           ,
           in
           a
           language
           vnknowne
           to
           the
           Lay
           people
           :
           And
           that
           language
           by
           the
           new
           Testament
           *
           
             *
             Vide
             Widmanstad
             .
             in
             paraefat
             .
             Testamenti
             .
             Syriaci
             .
          
           brought
           from
           them
           by
           
             Moses
             Mardenus
          
           into
           Europe
           ,
           to
           bee
           printed
           (
           for
           the
           more
           commodious
           dispersing
           of
           it
           abroade
           in
           their
           Churches
           )
           we
           now
           certainely
           know
           to
           be
           the
           Syriaque
           tongue
           ,
           euen
           as
           it
           is
           also
           knowne
           and
           *
           
             *
             Post.
             de
             lingua
             .
             Chaldaic
             .
             Boter
             .
             Rel.
             pa.
             3.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             de
             Gia
             cobiti
             .
          
           recorded
           touching
           the
           rest
           of
           their
           diuine
           seruice
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           performed
           in
           the
           same
           Syriaque
           language
           ,
           which
           they
           terme
           the
           Chaldee
           .
           And
           it
           is
           thought
           ,
           that
           the
           Liturgie
           commonly
           termed
           
             Anaphora
             Basi●ij
          
           ,
           which
           ,
           we
           haue
           by
           Masius
           translated
           out
           of
           the
           Syriaque
           into
           Latine
           (
           and
           is
           found
           in
           
             Bibliotheca
             Veterum
             Patrum
          
           )
           is
           the
           Iacobites
           Liturgie
           :
           
           
             Biblioth
             .
             Vet.
             Pa●
             .
             Tom.
             6.
             pag.
             27.
             
          
           which
           language
           although
           it
           be
           now
           vnknowne
           among
           them
           ,
           (
           their
           clarkes
           or
           learned
           men
           excepted
           )
           yet
           that
           it
           was
           vulgarly
           vnderstood
           ,
           when
           that
           liturgie
           was
           
           first
           ordained
           ,
           the
           long
           answers
           of
           the
           people
           to
           the
           priest
           ,
           in
           their
           praiers
           which
           wee
           finde
           in
           it
           ,
           may
           be
           demonstrations
           .
           But
           touching
           the
           old
           testament
           ,
           which
           they
           haue
           also
           (
           as
           Arias
           writes
           he
           hath
           heard
           from
           their
           owne
           relations
           ,
           
           
             Arias
             .
             Montan.
             in
             Admonit
             .
             praefix
             .
             Biblijs
             Reg.
             de
             Versione
             Syriaca
             .
             Postel
             .
             i●
             Lingua
             Chaldaica
             
          
           and
           Postell
           ,
           that
           he
           hath
           seene
           )
           vsuall
           in
           all
           those
           East
           parts
           in
           the
           Syriaque
           tongue
           ,
           it
           is
           specially
           obserued
           by
           
             Arias
             Monatanus
          
           ,
           to
           be
           translated
           ,
           not
           out
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           but
           out
           of
           the
           Greeke
           of
           Origens
           emendation
           .
        
         
           And
           Fourthly
           ,
           of
           the
           Cophti
           or
           Christians
           of
           Aegypt
           ,
           it
           is
           likewise
           *
           
             *
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             pa.
             3.
             l.
             3.
             c
             de
             Christiani
             dell
             Egitto
             .
          
           obserued
           ,
           that
           they
           celebrate
           their
           liturgies
           in
           the
           same
           language
           :
           (
           reading
           yet
           the
           Gospell
           after
           it
           is
           done
           in
           the
           Chaldee
           ,
           in
           the
           Arabique
           tongue
           ,
           which
           is
           now
           ,
           and
           long
           hath
           beene
           the
           vulgar
           language
           of
           Aegypt
           .
           )
           And
           it
           may
           further
           appeare
           ,
           beside
           the
           testimonie
           of
           histories
           ,
           by
           the
           Liturgie
           of
           Seuerus
           ,
           Patriarch
           of
           Alexandria
           ,
           in
           vse
           among
           them
           ,
           translated
           out
           of
           Syriaque
           into
           latine
           by
           
             Guido
             Fabritius
          
           .
        
         
           And
           Fifthly
           ,
           
           
             Posscu●n
             .
             in
             Appar
             .
             sacro
             in
             Maronitae
             .
             Postel
             .
             de
             ling.
             Chaldaica
             .
             Villam
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             24.
             
          
           the
           Maronites
           in
           their
           Liturgies
           ,
           (
           which
           Posseuine
           obserueth
           to
           bee
           the
           Liturgies
           of
           Peter
           ,
           of
           Iames
           ,
           and
           of
           Sixtus
           )
           vse
           the
           same
           Syriaque
           language
           (
           the
           Arabique
           being
           also
           their
           vulgar
           )
           as
           beside
           
             Posseuine
             ,
             Postell
          
           ,
           also
           ,
           and
           Villamont
           ,
           and
           others
           haue
           recorded
           .
        
         
           And
           so
           doe
           Sixtly
           ,
           and
           lastly
           (
           to
           make
           an
           end
           of
           this
           reckoning
           )
           the
           poore
           Christians
           of
           the
           Isle
           of
           Zocotora
           (
           an
           Island
           after
           Barros
           his
           dimension
           of
           60
           miles
           in
           length
           and
           27
           in
           bredth
           )
           without
           the
           bay
           of
           Arabia
           ,
           
           
             Barros
             .
             de
             Asia
             .
             Decad.
             2.
             l.
             1.
             cap.
             3.
             
          
           for
           although
           I
           finde
           it
           questioned
           touching
           the
           religion
           ,
           whether
           they
           bee
           Iacobites
           or
           
             Nestorians
             ;
             Iuan
             Barros
          
           affirming
           the
           first
           (
           and
           it
           
           may
           seem
           so
           for
           their
           nerenesse
           to
           the
           dominions
           of
           Habassia
           )
           and
           Ananias
           proouing
           the
           latter
           because
           they
           are
           vncircumcised
           ,
           
           
             Anan
             .
             Fab.
             ic
             .
             del
             .
             Mondo
             .
             Trat
             .
             3.
             p.
             292.
             
          
           which
           Iacobites
           are
           not
           ,
           and
           professe
           obedience
           to
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Mozal
           ,
           who
           is
           knowne
           to
           be
           Patriarch
           of
           the
           Nestorians
           :
           yet
           in
           this
           they
           both
           agree
           ,
           that
           their
           diuine
           seruice
           (
           such
           as
           it
           is
           )
           is
           performed
           in
           the
           Chaldee
           tongue
           .
           
           
             Boter
             .
             Relat.
             par
             .
             3.
             l.
             3.
             de
             Christiani
             di
             Socotena
             .
          
           And
           although
           Botero
           relate
           it
           to
           be
           done
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           yet
           hee
           meaneth
           (
           out
           of
           doubt
           )
           not
           the
           auncient
           and
           pure
           Hebrew
           ,
           but
           the
           latter
           or
           degenerate
           language
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           the
           Syriaque
           .
           As
           the
           other
           also
           that
           affirme
           the
           publique
           and
           solemne
           deuotions
           either
           of
           these
           Zocotorini
           ,
           or
           anie
           other
           Christians
           in
           all
           the
           East
           ,
           or
           South
           parts
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           to
           be
           red
           in
           the
           Chaldee
           ,
           require
           also
           the
           like
           interpretation
           :
           Namely
           to
           be
           vnderstoode
           ,
           not
           of
           the
           right
           ,
           and
           Babilonian
           ,
           but
           of
           the
           Iewish
           and
           corrupted
           Chaldee
           .
        
         
           But
           now
           to
           speake
           of
           those
           Christians
           ,
           that
           celebrate
           their
           Liturgies
           in
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           :
           I
           obserue
           them
           to
           be
           these
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           The
           Graecians
           themselues
           :
           Namely
           all
           they
           whose
           vulgar
           speech
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           is
           ,
           inhabiting
           in
           Greece
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           part
           of
           N●tolia
           ,
           of
           Macedon
           ,
           and
           of
           Thrace
           ,
           together
           with
           all
           the
           Islands
           of
           the
           Aegaean
           Sea
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           manie
           scattered
           Islands
           ,
           about
           the
           coasts
           of
           Greece
           .
           But
           yet
           they
           doe
           it
           ,
           not
           in
           the
           present
           vulgar
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           pure
           and
           auncient
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           whereof
           as
           I
           before
           obserued
           ,
           the
           common
           people
           vnderstande
           but
           little
           :
           vsing
           namely
           ,
           on
           festiuall
           daies
           ,
           the
           auncient
           Liturgie
           of
           Basil
           ,
           and
           on
           common
           daies
           that
           of
           Chrysostome
           ,
           
           as
           Ieremie
           a
           late
           Patriarch
           of
           Constantinople
           hath
           recorded
           .
           
           
             Ierem.
             Resp.
             1.
             ad
             Germano●
             cap.
             13.
             
          
           And
           namely
           ,
           as
           touching
           the
           holie
           scriptures
           ,
           vsing
           the
           
             Septuagints
             Greeke
          
           translation
           ,
           and
           specially
           that
           of
           Lucians
           Emendation
           .
           At
           least
           it
           was
           so
           with
           them
           in
           Hieromes
           time
           (
           and
           I
           finde
           no
           mention
           at
           all
           recorded
           of
           any
           alteration
           )
           who
           obserueth
           the
           Edition
           of
           the
           70
           Interpreters
           by
           Lucianus
           ,
           
           
             Hieron
             .
             in
             praef
             ad
             Lib.
             Paralipom
             .
          
           to
           haue
           beene
           receiued
           in
           vse
           from
           Constantinople
           as
           farre
           as
           Antiochia
           :
           As
           also
           that
           of
           Origens
           emendatiō
           ,
           from
           Antiochia
           to
           Aegypt
           and
           in
           Aegypt
           ,
           that
           of
           Hesychius
           .
           But
           (
           howsoeuer
           it
           may
           be
           touching
           the
           edition
           vsuall
           among
           them
           )
           yet
           certainely
           ,
           that
           the
           Graecians
           haue
           not
           the
           scriptures
           translated
           into
           the
           vulgar
           Greeke
           ,
           the
           *
           
             *
             Theodos.
             Zygomal
             in
             epist
             .
             ad
             Crus
             .
             l.
             7.
             
             Turcog●●cae
             .
             pag.
             431.
             
          
           Graecians
           themselues
           haue
           directly
           recorded
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           The
           Syrians
           ,
           namely
           those
           ,
           that
           for
           distinction
           of
           religion
           from
           the
           Iacobites
           (
           who
           likewise
           inhabite
           Syria
           )
           are
           termed
           so
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           the
           Melchites
           ,
           for
           they
           (
           hauing
           the
           Arabique
           for
           their
           vulgar
           language
           )
           as
           they
           agree
           in
           other
           points
           of
           their
           religion
           ,
           and
           ceremonie
           ,
           and
           order
           of
           diuine
           seruice
           ,
           with
           the
           Grecians
           ,
           so
           doe
           they
           as
           touching
           their
           Liturgie
           ,
           in
           language
           also
           ,
           as
           is
           obserued
           by
           *
           
             *
             Vitriac
             .
             Histor
             .
             Orient
             .
             c.
             75.
             
             Ha●tho
             .
             l.
             de
             .
             Tartaris
             ▪
             c.
             14.
             
             B●eitenbach
             .
             Peregrin
             .
             c.
             de
             Surianis
             .
             Bau●ngart
             .
             Peregr
             .
             l.
             2.
             c
             9.
             
             Villamont
             .
             l.
             2
             c.
             22.
             
             Boter
             .
             Rel.
             pa.
             3.
             l
             ●
             .
             c.
             d●
             Melchi●i
             .
          
           
             Vitriacus
             ,
             Haiths
             ,
             Breitenbachius
          
           ,
           and
           manie
           others
           .
        
         
           3.
           
           The
           Georgians
           ,
           who
           hauing
           for
           their
           vulgar
           speech
           ,
           a
           peculiar
           language
           of
           a
           middle
           temper
           (
           which
           well
           agreeth
           with
           the
           position
           of
           their
           Countrie
           )
           betwixt
           Tartarian
           and
           Armenian
           ,
           as
           Gesner
           and
           Postell
           and
           R●c●ha
           in
           their
           bookes
           of
           languages
           haue
           obserued
           ,
           exercise
           notwithstanding
           their
           liturgies
           in
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           ,
           as
           *
           
             *
             Vitriac
             .
             lib.
             citat
             .
             c.
             80.
             
          
           
             Iacobus
             a
             
             Vitriaco
          
           ,
           
           
             Gesner
             .
             ●ithrid
             .
             in
             Lingua
             Georgian
             .
             Postel
             .
             de
             12.
             
             Ling.
             Tit.
             de
             Ling.
             Georg.
             Roccha
             .
             de
             Dialect
             i●
             G●●orgiana
             ,
             &
             in
             Grae3●a
             Vet.
             Baumgart
             .
             loc
             〈◊〉
             .
             Villamont
             .
             l.
             ●
             .
             c.
             23.
             
          
           
             Gesner
             ,
             Postel
             ,
             Roccha
          
           ,
           and
           diuerse
           others
           haue
           certainely
           recorded
           .
        
         
           4.
           
           The
           Circassians
           :
           who
           yet
           in
           such
           sort
           celebrate
           their
           diuine
           seruice
           in
           the
           Greeke
           ,
           that
           their
           priests
           themselues
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           grosse
           ignorance
           ,
           vnderstand
           not
           what
           they
           reade
           *
           
             *
             Inter●an
             .
             de●la
             vita
             de
             .
             1.
             
             Zychi●ca
             .
             1●
             Bellon
             .
             Obseruat
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             35.
             
          
           as
           Intireano
           (
           that
           liued
           among
           them
           )
           hath
           remembred
           .
        
         
           5.
           
           And
           lastly
           ,
           in
           the
           Greeke
           tongue
           are
           celebrated
           ,
           the
           Liturgies
           of
           all
           the
           monasteries
           ,
           that
           are
           of
           the
           Greeke
           religion
           ,
           wheresoeuer
           dispersed
           within
           the
           Turkish
           dominions
           ,
           in
           Afrique
           or
           Asia
           :
           As
           in
           mount
           Sinai
           ,
           the
           Cities
           of
           Petra
           and
           Eltor
           in
           Arabia
           :
           In
           
             Ierusalem
             ,
             Alexandria
             ,
             Damascus
          
           ,
           and
           in
           sundrie
           other
           places
           ,
           as
           Bellonius
           with
           others
           hath
           left
           recorded
           .
        
         
           And
           to
           come
           at
           last
           to
           the
           nation
           ,
           that
           celebrate
           their
           Liturgies
           in
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           :
           To
           speake
           of
           them
           ,
           euen
           this
           little
           will
           be
           enough
           :
           Namely
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           Christians
           ,
           that
           are
           found
           of
           the
           Roman
           Communion
           ,
           in
           America
           ,
           and
           in
           Africa
           ,
           celebrate
           their
           liturgies
           in
           the
           Roman
           tongue
           .
           As
           all
           likewise
           in
           Europe
           (
           except
           the
           Slauonians
           aboue
           mentioned
           .
           )
           And
           in
           Asia
           ,
           except
           the
           two
           new
           Roman
           purchases
           ,
           of
           the
           Maroni●es
           in
           Syria
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Christians
           of
           Saint
           Thomas
           in
           India
           ,
           who
           retaine
           still
           ,
           the
           old
           accustomed
           language
           ,
           which
           as
           I
           obserued
           before
           ,
           is
           in
           the
           Liturgies
           of
           both
           those
           Nations
           ,
           the
           Syriaque
           tongue
           .
        
         
           FINIS
           .